Application manual

Line distance protection terminal

REL 511*2.5
 Application manual
Line distance protection terminal
REL 511*2.5

About this manual

Document No: 1MRK 506 168-UEN
Issued: February 2006
Revision: A

© Copyright 2006 ABB. All rights reserved.

COPYRIGHT

WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS
ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER
USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT
PERMITTED.

THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE
DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE
ADDRESS BELOW.

THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARAN-
TEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO
ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STAN-
DARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.

Manufacturer:
ABB Power Technologies AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
 Contents

Chapter Page

Chapter 1 Introduction ..................................................................... 1

Introduction to the application manual ................................................. 2

About the complete set of manuals for a terminal .......................... 2
About the application manual ......................................................... 2
Intended audience .......................................................................... 3
General...................................................................................... 3
Requirements ............................................................................ 3
Related documents......................................................................... 3
Revision notes ................................................................................ 3
Glossary ......................................................................................... 3

Chapter 2 General........................................................................... 11

Features............................................................................................. 12
Functions ........................................................................................... 13
Application ......................................................................................... 17
Design................................................................................................ 18
Requirements .................................................................................... 19
General ......................................................................................... 19
Voltage transformers .................................................................... 19
Current transformers..................................................................... 19
Classification ........................................................................... 19
Conditions................................................................................ 20
Fault current ............................................................................ 21
Cable resistance and additional load....................................... 21
General current transformer requirements .............................. 21
Distance protection ................................................................. 21
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards................................................................................. 22
Serial communication ........................................................................ 24
SPA .............................................................................................. 24
LON .............................................................................................. 24
IEC 870-5-103 .............................................................................. 24
Terminal identification and base values............................................. 25
Application .................................................................................... 25
Calculations .................................................................................. 25
Example 1................................................................................ 26
Example 2................................................................................ 28

Chapter 3 Common functions ....................................................... 31

Real-time clock with external time synchronzation (TIME) ................ 32

Application .................................................................................... 32
Functionality ................................................................................. 32
 Contents

Calculations .................................................................................. 32
Four parameter setting groups (GRP) ............................................... 34
Application .................................................................................... 34
Functionality.................................................................................. 34
Design........................................................................................... 35
Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)......................................................... 36
Application .................................................................................... 36
Functionality.................................................................................. 36
I/O system configurator (IOP) ............................................................ 38
Application .................................................................................... 38
Functionality.................................................................................. 38
I/O position .............................................................................. 38
Configuration ........................................................................... 39
Configurable logic blocks (CL1) ......................................................... 40
Application .................................................................................... 40
Application ............................................................................... 40
Functionality.................................................................................. 40
Inverter (INV) ........................................................................... 40
Controllable gate (GT) ............................................................. 41
OR ........................................................................................... 41
AND ......................................................................................... 42
Timer ....................................................................................... 43
Timer settable through HMI/SMS/PST .................................... 46
Pulse........................................................................................ 47
Exclusive OR (XOR) ................................................................ 48
Set-Reset (SR) ........................................................................ 49
Set-Reset with/without memory (SM) ...................................... 50
MOVE ...................................................................................... 51
Calculations .................................................................................. 53
Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT) ............................ 54
Application .................................................................................... 54
Functionality.................................................................................. 54
Blocking of signals during test (BST) ................................................. 58
Functionality.................................................................................. 58

Chapter 4 Line distance ................................................................. 59

Distance protection (ZM).................................................................... 60

Application .................................................................................... 60
General .................................................................................... 60
Distance protection zones ....................................................... 60
Complement to the line differential protection ......................... 61
Set of simplified setting parameters......................................... 61
Basic characteristics ................................................................ 61
Functionality.................................................................................. 66
Measuring principle ................................................................. 66
Measured impedance .............................................................. 68
Directional lines ....................................................................... 71
Design........................................................................................... 72
Full-scheme measurement ...................................................... 72
Distance protection zone one .................................................. 73
 Contents

Remaining distance protection zones...................................... 77

Calculations .................................................................................. 77
Setting instructions .................................................................. 77
Reach setting recommendations ............................................. 77
Conversion to secondary impedances .................................... 78
Basic zone setting recommendations...................................... 78
Earth return compensation ...................................................... 80
Fault resistance ....................................................................... 82
Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines............... 83
Setting of the reach in resistive direction ................................ 89
Setting of minimum operating current...................................... 91
Setting of timers for the distance protection zones.................. 92
Setting the directional lines...................................................... 92
Simplified operating characteristic........................................... 93
Set of simplified setting parameters ........................................ 93
Configuration ................................................................................ 93
Basic configuration .................................................................. 93
ZMn--BLOCK functional input.................................................. 94
ZMn--VTSZ functional input..................................................... 94
ZMn--BLKTR functional input .................................................. 94
ZMn--STCND functional input ................................................. 94
ZMn--START functional output................................................ 95
ZMn--TRIP functional output ................................................... 95
ZMn--STND functional output.................................................. 95
Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)........................................... 96
Application .................................................................................... 96
Functionality ................................................................................. 96
Calculations .................................................................................. 97
Setting instructions .................................................................. 97
Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)......................................................... 98
Application .................................................................................... 98
Functionality ................................................................................. 98
Zone extension ........................................................................ 98
Loss-of-load acceleration ........................................................ 98
Calculations .................................................................................. 99
Setting instructions .................................................................. 99
General fault criteria (GFC) ............................................................. 100
Application .................................................................................. 100
Phase preference logic.......................................................... 102
Functionality ............................................................................... 102
Impedance measuring elements ........................................... 102
Measuring elements for the ph-E faults................................. 102
Measuring elements for ph-ph and three-phase faults .......... 104
Current-based GFC elements ............................................... 106
Design ........................................................................................ 106
Phase preference logic.......................................................... 112
Calculations ................................................................................ 116
Setting instructions ................................................................ 116
General setting parameters ................................................... 116
Setting parameters for the I> mode of operation ................... 117
Setting parameters for the Z< mode of operation.................. 117
Phase preference logic.......................................................... 119
Power swing detection (PSD) .......................................................... 121
 Contents

Application .................................................................................. 121

General .................................................................................. 121
Basic characteristics .............................................................. 121
Functionality................................................................................ 122
Theory of operation ............................................................... 122
Design......................................................................................... 123
Basic detection logic .............................................................. 123
Operating and inhibit conditions ............................................ 124
Calculations ................................................................................ 126
Setting instructions ................................................................ 126
Setting the reach of the inner characteristic .......................... 126
Setting the reach of the outer characteristic .......................... 127
Limitation of the resistive reach ............................................. 128
Determination of the impedance difference and speed ......... 128
Reactive reach....................................................................... 129
tH hold timer .......................................................................... 129
tR1 inhibit timer...................................................................... 130
tR2 inhibit timer...................................................................... 130
tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults ....... 130
Radial feeder protection (PAP) ........................................................ 131
Application .................................................................................. 131
Functionality................................................................................ 131
Design......................................................................................... 131
Calculations ................................................................................ 136
Setting instructions ................................................................ 136
Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) ........................................... 137
Application .................................................................................. 137
Functionality................................................................................ 137
Theory of operation ............................................................... 137
Blocking communication scheme .......................................... 137
Permissive communication scheme ...................................... 138
Direct inter-trip scheme.......................................................... 139
Calculations ................................................................................ 139
Settings.................................................................................. 139
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)........................ 140
Application .................................................................................. 140
Current reversal logic............................................................. 140
Weak end infeed (WEI) logic ................................................. 140
Functionality................................................................................ 140
Current reversal logic............................................................. 140
Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 141
Design......................................................................................... 142
Current reversal logic............................................................. 142
Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 142
Calculations ................................................................................ 144
Setting ................................................................................... 144
Current reversal logic............................................................. 144
Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 144

Chapter 5 Current ......................................................................... 145

 Contents

Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent protection (IOC)............ 146

Application .................................................................................. 146
Functionality ............................................................................... 147
Design ........................................................................................ 147
Calculations ................................................................................ 150
Setting instructions ................................................................ 150
Meshed network without parallel line..................................... 150
Meshed network with parallel line.......................................... 152
Setting instructions ................................................................ 154
Meshed network without parallel line..................................... 154
.......................................... Meshed network with parallel line156
Definite time non-directional overcurrent protection (TOC) ............. 158
Application .................................................................................. 158
Functionality ............................................................................... 158
Design ........................................................................................ 159
Calculations ................................................................................ 161
Setting instructions ................................................................ 161
Setting of operating current IP>............................................. 162
Setting instructions ................................................................ 162
Setting of operating current IN> ............................................ 163
Two step time delayed non-directional phase
overcurrent protection (TOC2)......................................................... 165
Application .................................................................................. 165
Functionality ............................................................................... 165
Calculations ................................................................................ 166
Setting instructions ................................................................ 166
Line protection in radial network............................................ 166
Line protection in meshed network........................................ 168
Setting characteristics ........................................................... 168
Two step time delayed directional phase
overcurrent protection (TOC3) ........................................................ 170
Application .................................................................................. 170
Functionality ............................................................................... 170
Theory of operation and design............................................. 170
Current measuring element ................................................... 170
Directional overcurrent function............................................. 171
Calculations ................................................................................ 177
Setting instructions ................................................................ 177
Line protection in a radial network......................................... 177
Line protection in meshed network........................................ 179
Setting characteristics ........................................................... 179
Time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TEF) ...................... 181
Application .................................................................................. 181
Earth-fault overcurrent protection .......................................... 181
Directional comparison logic function .................................... 182
Functionality ............................................................................... 182
Theory of operation ............................................................... 182
Calculations ................................................................................ 185
Setting instructions ................................................................ 185
Four step time delayed directional residual
overcurrent protection (EF4) .......................................................... 189
Application .................................................................................. 189
Functionality ............................................................................... 189
 Contents

Theory of operation ............................................................... 189

Function logic ........................................................................ 189
The directional measuring function........................................ 192
Definite time overcurrent step 1............................................. 193
Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3................................... 194
Overcurrent step 4 ................................................................. 194
Calculations ................................................................................ 195
Settings.................................................................................. 195
General .................................................................................. 195
Step 1 .................................................................................... 195
Step 2 and 3 .......................................................................... 199
Step 4, non-directional........................................................... 201
Inverse time delay ................................................................. 201
Directional current function .................................................... 202
Example of protection scheme .............................................. 203
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1) .......... 205
Application .................................................................................. 205
Functionality................................................................................ 205
Calculations ................................................................................ 208
Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2) .................. 212
Application .................................................................................. 212
Functionality................................................................................ 212
Calculations ................................................................................ 216
Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection (EFC) ......................................................... 220
Application .................................................................................. 220
Functionality................................................................................ 220
Theory of operation ............................................................... 220
Directional comparison logic function .................................... 220
Blocking scheme ................................................................... 221
Permissive overreach scheme............................................... 221
Design......................................................................................... 222
Blocking scheme ................................................................... 222
Permissive overreaching scheme.......................................... 223
Calculations ................................................................................ 223
Setting ................................................................................... 223
Blocking scheme ................................................................... 223
Permissive communication scheme ...................................... 223
Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) ........................................... 224
Application .................................................................................. 224
Current reversal logic............................................................. 224
Weak end infeed logic ........................................................... 224
Functionality................................................................................ 224
Theory of operation ............................................................... 224
Directional comparison logic function .................................... 224
Fault current reversal logic .................................................... 225
Weak and infeed logic ........................................................... 226
Design......................................................................................... 227
Calculations ................................................................................ 228
Setting ................................................................................... 228
Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) .................................... 230
Application .................................................................................. 230
 Contents

Functionality ............................................................................... 230

Calculations ................................................................................ 231
Breaker failure protection (BFP) ...................................................... 234
Application .................................................................................. 234
Functionality ............................................................................... 236
Input and output signals ........................................................ 237
Start functions........................................................................ 237
Measuring principles.............................................................. 237
Design ........................................................................................ 239
Calculations ................................................................................ 240
Setting ................................................................................... 240
Human-machine interface (HMI) ........................................... 240

Chapter 6 Voltage ......................................................................... 241

Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) .................................. 242

Application .................................................................................. 242
Functionality ............................................................................... 242
Design ........................................................................................ 243
Calculations ................................................................................ 243
Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) .................................... 244
Application .................................................................................. 244
Functionality ............................................................................... 244
Design ........................................................................................ 244
Calculations ................................................................................ 247
Setting ................................................................................... 247

Chapter 7 Power system supervision......................................... 249

Broken conductor check (BRC) ....................................................... 250

Application .................................................................................. 250
Functionality ............................................................................... 250
Design ........................................................................................ 250
Calculations ................................................................................ 251
Setting instructions ................................................................ 251
Setting of the minimum operating current IP> ....................... 251
Setting of time delay t ............................................................ 253
Loss of voltage check (LOV)............................................................ 254
Application .................................................................................. 254
Functionality ............................................................................... 254
Design ........................................................................................ 254
Calculations ................................................................................ 256
Setting instructions ................................................................ 256
Overload supervision (OVLD).......................................................... 257
Application .................................................................................. 257
Functionality ............................................................................... 257
Design ........................................................................................ 257
Calculations ................................................................................ 258
Setting instructions ................................................................ 258
Setting of operating current IP>............................................. 258
 Contents

Dead line detection (DLD)................................................................ 260

Application .................................................................................. 260
Design......................................................................................... 260
Calculations ................................................................................ 261
Setting instructions ................................................................ 261

Chapter 8 Secondary system supervision.................................. 263

Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU) .......................... 264

Application .................................................................................. 264
Functionality................................................................................ 264
Calculations ................................................................................ 266
Setting instructions ................................................................ 266
Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) ...................................................... 267
Application .................................................................................. 267
Functionality................................................................................ 267
Negative sequence ................................................................ 267
Zero sequence ...................................................................... 268
du/dt, di/dt .............................................................................. 271
Logic ...................................................................................... 271
Calculations ................................................................................ 273
Negative sequence function .................................................. 273
Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2> .......................... 273
Setting of negative sequence current 3I2< ............................ 273
Zero sequence function ......................................................... 274
Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0>................................. 274
Setting of zero sequence current 3I0<................................... 274
Setting of voltage change DU>.............................................. 274
Setting of current change DI<................................................ 275
Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)............................................ 276
Application .................................................................................. 276
Functionality................................................................................ 276
Abbreviations and definitions................................................. 276
Description of operation......................................................... 276
Calculations ................................................................................ 278

Chapter 9 Control.......................................................................... 281

Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)..................................... 282

Application .................................................................................. 282
Synchrocheck, general .......................................................... 282
Synchrocheck, single circuit breaker ..................................... 283
Energizing check, general ..................................................... 284
Voltage selection, single circuit breaker ................................ 285
Voltage connection for a single bus and single bay............... 286
Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay ................ 287
Synchrocheck, double circuit breaker.................................... 288
Voltage connection, double circuitbreaker and single bay..... 289
Phasing, general.................................................................... 290
Phasing, single circuit breaker............................................... 291
 Contents

Voltage selection, single circuit breaker ................................ 291

Voltage selection for a single bus and single bay.................. 292
Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay ................ 293
Phasing, double circuit breaker ............................................. 294
Voltage connection, double circuit breaker and single bay ... 295
Functionality ............................................................................... 296
Single circuit breaker ............................................................. 296
Synchrocheck ........................................................................ 296
Voltage selection ................................................................... 299
Double circuit breaker............................................................ 301
Synchrocheck ........................................................................ 301
Phasing and synchrocheck, single circuit breaker................. 304
Phasing and synchrocheck.................................................... 304
Voltage selection ................................................................... 308
Phasing and synchrocheck, double circuit breaker ............... 309
Phasing and synchrocheck.................................................... 309
Calculations ................................................................................ 313
Settings for single circuit breaker .......................................... 313
Operation............................................................................... 313
Input phase............................................................................ 313
UMeasure .............................................................................. 313
PhaseShift ............................................................................. 313
URatio.................................................................................... 313
USelection ............................................................................. 313
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 313
ManDBDL .............................................................................. 314
UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 314
FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 314
VTConnection........................................................................ 314
tSync...................................................................................... 314
Settings for double circuit breaker ......................................... 314
Operation .............................................................................. 314
Input phase............................................................................ 315
UMeasure .............................................................................. 315
PhaseShift ............................................................................. 315
URatio.................................................................................... 315
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 315
ManDBDL .............................................................................. 315
UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 315
FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 315
tSync...................................................................................... 316
Settings for single circuit breaker with phasing ..................... 316
Operation............................................................................... 316
Input phase............................................................................ 316
PhaseShift ............................................................................. 316
URatio.................................................................................... 316
USelection ............................................................................. 316
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 316
ManDBDL .............................................................................. 317
UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 317
FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 317
OperationSync....................................................................... 317
ShortPulse ............................................................................. 317
 Contents

FreqDiffSynch ........................................................................ 317

tPulse..................................................................................... 317
tBreaker ................................................................................. 317
VTConnection ........................................................................ 317
tSync...................................................................................... 317
FreqDiffBlock ......................................................................... 317
Settings for double circuit breaker with phasing .................... 318
Operation ............................................................................... 318
Input phase ............................................................................ 318
PhaseShift ............................................................................. 318
URatio.................................................................................... 318
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg ..................................................... 318
ManDBDL .............................................................................. 319
UHigh and ULow ................................................................... 319
FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff ................................................ 319
FreqDiffSynch ........................................................................ 319
OperationSynch ..................................................................... 319
ShortPulse ............................................................................. 319
tPulse..................................................................................... 319
tBreaker ................................................................................. 319
tSync...................................................................................... 319
FreqDiffBlock ......................................................................... 319
Autorecloser (AR) ............................................................................ 320
Application .................................................................................. 320
Functionality................................................................................ 322
AR operation.......................................................................... 322
Start and control of the auto-reclosing................................... 322
Extended AR open time, shot 1 ............................................. 322
Long trip signal ...................................................................... 323
Reclosing programs............................................................... 323
Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .......................................... 325
Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer..................................... 325
Pulsing of CB closing command ............................................ 326
Transient fault ........................................................................ 326
Unsuccessful signal ............................................................... 326
Permanent fault ..................................................................... 326
Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts... 326
Calculations ................................................................................ 327
Configuration and setting....................................................... 327
Recommendations for input signals....................................... 327
Recommendations for output signals .................................... 328
Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement ................ 330
Settings.................................................................................. 332
Single command, 16 signals (CD) ................................................... 333
Application .................................................................................. 333
Design......................................................................................... 334
Calculations ................................................................................ 335
Setting ................................................................................... 335
Multiple command (CM)................................................................... 336
Application .................................................................................. 336
Design......................................................................................... 336
General .................................................................................. 336
Binary signal interbay communication ................................... 336
 Contents

Calculations ................................................................................ 337

Settings.................................................................................. 337

Chapter 10 Logic............................................................................. 339

Tripping logic (TR) ........................................................................... 340

Application .................................................................................. 340
Functionality ............................................................................... 341
Design ........................................................................................ 341
Three-phase front logic.......................................................... 342
Phase segregated front logic................................................. 342
Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode ......................... 343
Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode .................. 344
Final tripping circuits.............................................................. 345
Calculations ................................................................................ 346
Pole discordance logic (PDc)........................................................... 347
Application .................................................................................. 347
Functionality ............................................................................... 347
Functionality for contact based pole discordance.................. 347
Design ........................................................................................ 348
Calculations ................................................................................ 350
Setting Instruction.................................................................. 350
High speed binary output logic (HSBO)........................................... 351
Application .................................................................................. 351
Functionality ............................................................................... 351
Design ........................................................................................ 353
Communication channel test logic (CCHT)...................................... 356
Application .................................................................................. 356
Design ........................................................................................ 356
Selection of an operating mode............................................. 357
Operation at sending end ...................................................... 357
Operation at receiving end .................................................... 357
Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) ................................. 358
Application .................................................................................. 358
Design ........................................................................................ 358
Remote end data communication.......................................... 360
Event function (EV).......................................................................... 361
Application .................................................................................. 361
Functionality ............................................................................... 361
Design ........................................................................................ 361
General.................................................................................. 361
Double indication ................................................................... 362
Communication between terminals ....................................... 362
Calculations ................................................................................ 363
Event counter (CN) .......................................................................... 364
Application .................................................................................. 364
Functionality ............................................................................... 364
Reporting ............................................................................... 364
Calculations ................................................................................ 364
 Contents

Chapter 11 Monitoring .................................................................... 365

Disturbance report ........................................................................... 366

Application .................................................................................. 366
Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report .......... 366
Functionality................................................................................ 366
Disturbance information......................................................... 367
Indications ............................................................................. 368
Event recorder ....................................................................... 368
Fault locator ........................................................................... 368
Trip values ............................................................................. 368
Disturbance recorder ............................................................. 368
Recording times..................................................................... 368
Analog signals ....................................................................... 369
Binary signals ........................................................................ 370
Trigger signals ....................................................................... 370
Calculations ................................................................................ 371
Settings during normal conditions.......................................... 371
Operation ............................................................................... 372
Sequence number ................................................................. 372
Recording times..................................................................... 373
Binary signals ........................................................................ 373
Analog signals ....................................................................... 373
Behavior during test mode..................................................... 373
Indications........................................................................................ 375
Application .................................................................................. 375
Functionality................................................................................ 375
Calculations ................................................................................ 376
Disturbance recorder (DR)............................................................... 377
Application .................................................................................. 377
Functionality................................................................................ 377
Recording Capacity ............................................................... 378
Memory capacity ................................................................... 378
Time tagging .......................................................................... 378
Signal processing .................................................................. 378
Design......................................................................................... 379
Calculations ................................................................................ 380
Event recorder (ER) ......................................................................... 382
Application .................................................................................. 382
Functionality................................................................................ 382
Calculations ................................................................................ 382
Fault locator (FLOC) ........................................................................ 383
Application .................................................................................. 383
Functionality................................................................................ 383
Distance-to-fault locator......................................................... 383
Measuring principle..................................................................... 384
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault ........... 384
The non-compensated impedance model .................................. 388
Design......................................................................................... 389
Calculations ................................................................................ 389
Trip value recorder (TVR) ................................................................ 391
Application .................................................................................. 391
 Contents

Design ........................................................................................ 391

Calculations ................................................................................ 391
Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) .......................................... 392
Application .................................................................................. 392
Functionality ............................................................................... 392
User-defined measuring ranges ............................................ 393
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity .................. 393
Continuous supervision of the measured quantity................. 394
Design ........................................................................................ 399
Calculations ................................................................................ 400
Increased accuray of AC input quantities (IMA) .............................. 404
Application .................................................................................. 404
Functionality ............................................................................... 404
Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) ........................................... 405
Application .................................................................................. 405
Functionality ............................................................................... 405
User-defined measuring ranges ............................................ 405
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity .................. 406
Continuous supervision of the measured quantity................. 407
Design ........................................................................................ 412
Calculations ................................................................................ 414

Chapter 12 Metering ....................................................................... 417

Pulse counter logic for metering (PC).............................................. 418

Application .................................................................................. 418
Functionality ............................................................................... 418
Design ........................................................................................ 419
Calculations ................................................................................ 420
Setting ................................................................................... 420

Chapter 13 System protection and control functions ................. 421

Pole Slip Protection (PSP)............................................................... 422

Application .................................................................................. 422
Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system............. 422
Requirements on protection systems during pole
slip conditions in network ................................................... 428
Functionality ............................................................................... 429
Theory of operation ............................................................... 429
Detection of the oscillations and transitions .......................... 432
Tripping on way in and on way out ........................................ 435
Close-in and remote end tripping areas ................................ 438
Design ........................................................................................ 438
Detection of oscillations......................................................... 440
Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection.......... 441
Tripping criteria...................................................................... 443
Calculations ................................................................................ 450
Setting instructions ................................................................ 450
Low active power protection (LAPP)................................................ 461
 Contents

Application .................................................................................. 461

General .................................................................................. 461
Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 461
Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 462
Breaker failure protection with transfer trip ............................ 462
Functionality................................................................................ 463
General .................................................................................. 463
Active power calculation ........................................................ 463
Direction of active power ....................................................... 464
Conditioning elements ........................................................... 465
Design......................................................................................... 465
Calculation .................................................................................. 468
Setting instructions ................................................................ 468
Setting example ..................................................................... 469
Low active and reactive power protection (LARP) ........................... 471
Application .................................................................................. 471
General .................................................................................. 471
Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 471
Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 472
Breaker failure protection with transfer trip ............................ 473
Functionality................................................................................ 473
General .................................................................................. 473
Active and reactive power calculation.................................... 474
Direction of reactive power .................................................... 475
Conditioning elements ........................................................... 475
Design......................................................................................... 476
Calculation .................................................................................. 479
Setting instructions ................................................................ 479
Setting example ..................................................................... 480
High active power protection (HAPP) .............................................. 482
Application .................................................................................. 482
Functionality................................................................................ 482
General .................................................................................. 482
Active power calculation ........................................................ 484
Direction of active power ....................................................... 485
Design......................................................................................... 486
Calculation .................................................................................. 489
Setting instructions ................................................................ 489
Setting example ..................................................................... 490
High active and reactive power protection (HARP).......................... 492
Application .................................................................................. 492
Functionality................................................................................ 493
General .................................................................................. 493
Active and reactive power calculation.................................... 493
Direction of reactive power .................................................... 494
Design......................................................................................... 495
Calculation .................................................................................. 497
Setting instructions ................................................................ 497
Setting example ..................................................................... 498
Sudden change in phase current protection function (SCC1).......... 500
Application .................................................................................. 500
General .................................................................................. 500
Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 500
 Contents

Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 501

Breaker failure protection with transfer trip............................ 502
Functionality ............................................................................... 502
General.................................................................................. 502
Sudden change in current calculation ................................... 503
Design ........................................................................................ 503
Calculation .................................................................................. 504
Setting instructions ................................................................ 504
Setting example..................................................................... 505
Sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC) ...... 507
Application .................................................................................. 507
Functionality ............................................................................... 507
Design ........................................................................................ 507
Calculation .................................................................................. 509
Setting instructions ................................................................ 509
Sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV) ...................... 510
Application .................................................................................. 510
Functionality ............................................................................... 510
General.................................................................................. 510
Sudden change in voltage calculation ................................... 510
Design ........................................................................................ 511
Calculation .................................................................................. 512
Setting instructions ................................................................ 512
Overvoltage protection (OVP).......................................................... 514
Application .................................................................................. 514
Functionality ............................................................................... 514
General.................................................................................. 514
Votage calculation ................................................................. 515
Design ........................................................................................ 515
Calculation .................................................................................. 517
Setting instructions ................................................................ 517
Setting example..................................................................... 517
Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)............................ 520
Application .................................................................................. 520
Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line...... 520
Line connected shunt reactor ................................................ 521
Breaker failure protection with transfer trip............................ 521
Functionality ............................................................................... 522
Design ........................................................................................ 523
Calculation .................................................................................. 524
Setting instructions ................................................................ 524
Setting example..................................................................... 525
Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) ............................................... 527
Application .................................................................................. 527
Functionality ............................................................................... 527
Design ........................................................................................ 528
Calculation .................................................................................. 530
Setting instructions ................................................................ 530
Setting example..................................................................... 530
Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) ......................................... 533
Application .................................................................................. 533
Functionality ............................................................................... 533
General.................................................................................. 533
 Contents

Current calculation................................................................. 533

Conditioning elements ........................................................... 533
Design......................................................................................... 533
Calculation .................................................................................. 535
Setting instructions ................................................................ 535

Chapter 14 Data communication ................................................... 537

Remote end data communication .................................................... 538

Application .................................................................................. 538
General .................................................................................. 538
Design......................................................................................... 538
Fibre optical module DCM-FOM ................................................. 540
Application ............................................................................. 540
Design ................................................................................... 541
Calculation ............................................................................. 543
Galvanic interface ....................................................................... 543
Application ............................................................................. 543
Design ................................................................................... 546
Short range galvanic module DCM-SGM ................................... 547
Application ............................................................................. 547
Short range fibre optical module DCM-SFOM ............................ 548
Application ............................................................................. 548
Co-directional G.703 galvanic interface DCM-G.703.................. 551
Application ............................................................................. 551
Carrier module ............................................................................ 551
Application ............................................................................. 551
Design ................................................................................... 552
Serial communication....................................................................... 553
Serial communication, SPA ....................................................... 553
Application ............................................................................. 553
Functionality .......................................................................... 554
Design ................................................................................... 554
Calculations ........................................................................... 555
Serial communication, IEC (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)............. 555
Application ............................................................................. 555
Functionality .......................................................................... 557
Design ................................................................................... 557
Calculation ............................................................................. 559
Serial communication, LON ........................................................ 561
Application ............................................................................. 561
Functionality .......................................................................... 561
Design ................................................................................... 561
Calculations ........................................................................... 562
Serial communication modules................................................... 562
SPA/IEC ................................................................................ 562
LON ....................................................................................... 563

Chapter 15 Hardware modules ...................................................... 565

 Contents

Platform ........................................................................................... 566

General ....................................................................................... 566
Platform configuration................................................................. 566
3/4x19" platform.......................................................................... 567
1/2x19" platform.......................................................................... 568
Transformer module (TRM) ............................................................. 569
A/D module (ADM)........................................................................... 572
Main processing module (MPM) ...................................................... 574
Input/Output modules ...................................................................... 577
General ....................................................................................... 577
Binary input module (BIM) .......................................................... 579
Binary output module (BOM) ...................................................... 580
Binary I/O module (IOM)............................................................. 582
Power supply module (PSM) ........................................................... 584
mA input module (MIM) ................................................................... 585
Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI) ............................ 586
Application .................................................................................. 586
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI).............................................. 588
Application .................................................................................. 588
Design ........................................................................................ 588
LED indication function (HL, HLED) ........................................... 589
Application ............................................................................. 589
Functionality .......................................................................... 589
Calculation............................................................................. 600
Serial communication modules (SCM) ............................................ 601
Design, SPA/IEC ........................................................................ 601
Design, LON ............................................................................... 601
Data communication modules (DCM).............................................. 602
Contents
About this chapter Chapter 1
Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

About this chapter

This chapter introduces you to the manual as such.

1
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

1 Introduction to the application manual

1.1 About the complete set of manuals for a terminal

The users manual (UM) is a complete set of four different manuals:

Application Technical Installation and Operator´s

manual reference commissioning manual
manual manual

en01000044.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains descriptions, such as application and functionality de-
scriptions as well as setting calculation examples sorted per function. The application manual
should be used when designing and engineering the protection terminal to find out when and for
what a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calcu-
lating settings and creating configurations.

The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains technical descriptions, such as function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameter tables and technical data sort-
ed per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during
the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during the normal service
phase.

The Operator's Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection terminal
during normal service (after commissioning and before periodic maintenance tests). The opera-
tor's manual can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and
measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.

The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install
and commission the protection terminal. The manual can also be used as a reference if a periodic
test is performed. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, en-
ergizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying set-
tings and performing a directional test. The chapters and sections are organized in the
chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection terminal
should be installed and commissioned.

1.2 About the application manual

The application manual contains the following chapters:

• The chapter “General” describes the terminal in general.

• The chapter “Common functions” describes the common functions in the termi-
nal.
• The chapter “Line distance” describes the line distance functions in the terminal.

2
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

• The chapter “Current” describes the current protection functions.

• The chapter “Voltage” describes the voltage protection functions.
• The chapter “Power system supervision” describes the power system supervision
functions.
• The chapter “Monitoring” describes the monitoring functions.
• The chapter “Metering” describes the metering functions.
• The chapter “System protection and control functions”describes the system pro-
tection and control functions.
• The chapter “Data communication” describes the data communication and the
associated hardware.
• The chapter “Hardware modules” describes the different hardware modules.

1.3 Intended audience

1.3.1 General
The application manual is addressing the system engineer/technical responsible who is respon-
sible for specifying the application of the terminal.

1.3.2 Requirements
The system engineer/technical responsible must have a good knowledge about protection sys-
tems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the pro-
tection.

1.4 Related documents

Documents related to REL 511*2.5 Identity number

Operator's manual 1MRK 506 165-UEN
Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 506 167-UEN
Technical reference manual 1MRK 506 166-UEN
Application manual 1MRK 506 168-UEN
Buyer's guide 1MRK 506 164-BEN

1.5 Revision notes

Revision Description
A First revision

1.6 Glossary

3
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

AC Alternating Current

ACrv2 Setting A for programmable overvoltage IDMT curve, step 2

A/D converter Analog to Digital converter

ADBS Amplitude dead-band supervision

AIM Analog input module

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer

ASD Adaptive Signal Detection

AWG American Wire Gauge standard

BIM Binary input module

BLKDEL Block of delayed fault clearing

BOM Binary output module

BR Binary transfer receive over LDCM

BS British Standard

BSR Binary Signal Receive (SMT) over LDCM

BST Binary Signal Transmit (SMT) over LDCM

BT Binary Transfer Transmit over LDCM

C34.97

CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communi-
cation

CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool

CB Circuit breaker

CBM Combined backplane module

CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A

United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Tele-
communications Union.

CCS Current circuit supervision

CEM Controller area network emulation module

CIM Communication interface module

CMPPS Combined Mega Pulses Per Second

CO cycle Close-Open cycle

Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted
pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions

Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted
pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and
two pairs for transmitting clock signals

CPU Central Processor Unit

CR Carrier Receive

4
Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRL POR carrier for WEI logic

CS Carrier send

CT Current transformer

CT1L1 Input to be used for transmit CT group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool

CT1L1NAM Signal name for CT-group 1line L1 in signal matrix tool

CT2L3 Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 line L3 to remote end

CT2N Input to be used for transmission of CT-group 2 neutral N to remote end.

CVT Capacitive voltage transformer

DAR Delayed auto-reclosing

db dead band

DBDL Dead bus dead line

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct Current

DIN-rail Rail conforming to DIN standard

DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board

DLLB Dead line live bus

DSP Digital signal processor

DTT Direct transfer trip scheme

EHV network Extra high voltage network

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electro magnetic compatibility

ENGV1 Enable execution of step one

ENMULT Current multiplier used when THOL is used for two or more lines
EMI Electro magnetic interference

ESD Electrostatic discharge

FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and

protection signals

FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer

FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven

duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

FRRATED Rated system frequency

FSMPL Physical channel number for frequency calculation

5
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local tele-
phone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced
lines

G.711 Standard for pulse code modulation of analog signals on digital lines

GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module

GI General interrogation command

GIS Gas insulated switchgear.

GOOSE Generic Object Orientated Substation Event

GPS Global positioning system

GR GOOSE Receive (interlock)

HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard

HFBR connector type Fibre connector receiver

HMI Human-Machine Interface

HSAR High-Speed Auto-Reclosing

HV High voltage

HVDC High voltage direct current

HysAbsFreq Absolute hysteresis for over and under frequency operation

HysAbsMagn Absolute hysteresis for signal magnitude in percentage of Ubase

HysRelMagn Relative hysteresis for signal magnitude

HystAbs Overexcitation level of absolute hysteresis as a percentage

HystRel Overexcitation level of relative hysteresis as a percentage

IBIAS Magnitude of the bias current common to L1, L2 and L3

IDBS Integrating dead-band supervision

IDMT Minimum inverse delay time

IDMTtmin Inverse delay minimum time in seconds

IdMin Operational restrictive characteristic, section 1 sensitivity, multiple Ibase

IDNSMAG Magnitude of negative sequence differential current

Idunre Unrestrained prot. limit multiple of winding1 rated current

ICHARGE Amount of compensated charging current

IEC International Electrical Committee

IEC 186A

IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for pro-
tective current transformers for transient performance

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair
or optical fiber cable

6
Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References
the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) stan-
dard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG
(Special Interest Group) for the electrical

EMF Electro magnetic force

IED Intelligent electronic device

I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear

IL1RE Real current component, phase L1

IL1IM Imaginary current component, phase L1

IminNegSeq Negative sequence current must be higher than this to be used

INAMPL Present magnitude of residual current

INSTMAGN Magnitude of instantaneous value

INSTNAME Instance name in signal matrix tool

IOM Binary Input/Output module

IPOSIM Imaginary part of positive sequence current

IPOSRE Real component of positve sequence current

IP 20 Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 12.5mm in diameter and

larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to
IEC60529. Equivalent to NEMA type 1.

IP 40 Enclosure protects against solid foreign objects 1.0mm in diameter or

larger but no protection against ingression of liquid according to
IEC60529.

IP 54 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) according to

IEC 60529. Dust protected. Protected against splashing water. Equiva-
lent to NEMA type 12.

Ip>block Block of the function at high phase current in percentage of base

IRVBLK Block of current reversal function

IRV Activation of current reversal logic

ITU International Telecommunications Union

k2 Time multiplier in IDMT mode

kForIEEE Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve

LAN Local area network

LIB 520

LCD Liquid chrystal display

LDCM Line differential communication module

LDD Local detection device

LED Light emitting diode

LNT LON network tool

LON Local operating network

7
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

MAGN Magnitude of deadband value

MCB Miniature circuit breaker

MCM Mezzanine carrier module

MIM Milliampere Input Module

MIP

MPPS

MPM Main processing module

MV Medium voltage

MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed

for use in trains

MVsubEna Enable substitution

NegSeqROA Operate angle for internal/external negative sequence fault discrimina-

tor.

NSANGLE Angle between local and remote negative sequence currents

NUMSTEP Number of steps that shall be activated

NX

OCO cycle Open-Close-Open cycle

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect

PCM Pulse code modulation

PISA Process interface for sensors & actuators

PLD Programmable Logic Device

PMC

POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip

PPS Precise Positioning System

Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components

PSM Power supply module

PST Parameter setting tool

PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip

R1A Source resistance A (near end)

R1B Source resistance B (far end)

RADSS Resource Allocation Decision Support System

RASC Synchrocheck relay, from COMBIFLEX range.

RCA Functionality characteristic angle

REVAL Evaluation software

RFPP Resistance of phase-to-phase faults

8
Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

RFPE Resistance of phase-to-earth faults

RISC Reduced instruction set computer

RMS value Root mean square value

RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in

point-to-point connections

RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RS530 A generic connector specification that can be used to support RS422,

V.35 and X.21 and others

RTU Remote Terminal Unit

RTC Real Time Clock

SA Substation Automation

SC Switch or push-button to close

SCS Station control system

SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication

SMA connector Sub Miniature version A connector

SMS Station monitoring system

SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for

point-to-point communication

SPGGIO Single Point Gxxxxx Generic Input/Output

SRY Switch for CB ready condition

ST3UO RMS voltage at neutral point

STL1 Start signal from phase L1

ST Switch or push-button to trip

SVC Static VAr compensation

t1 1Ph Open time for shot 1, single phase

t1 3PhHS Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing three phase

tAutoContWait Wait period after close command before next shot

tCBCLosedMin Minimum time that the circuit breaker must be closed before new
sequence is permitted

tExtended t1 Open time extended by this value if Extended t1 is true

THL Thermal Overload Line cable

THOL Thermal overload

tInhibit Reset reclosing time for inhibit

tPulse Pulse length for single command outputs

TP Logic Pulse Timer

tReporting Cycle time for reporting of counter value

tRestore Restore time delay

9
 Introduction to the application manual Chapter 1
Introduction

TCS Trip circuit supervision

TNC connector Type of bayonet connector, like BNC connector

TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

tReclaim Duration of the reclaim time

TRIPENHA Trip by enhanced restrained differential protection

TRIPRES Trip by restrained differential protection

TRL1 Trip signal from phase 1

truck Isolator with wheeled mechanism

tSync Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK

TTRIP Estimated time to trip (in minutes)

UBase Base setting for phase-phase voltage in kilovolts

U/I-PISA Process interface components that delivers measured voltage and cur-
rent values

UNom Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer

UPS Measured signal magnitude (voltage protection)

UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by

the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the
basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time
signals

V.36 Same as RS449. A generic connector specification that can be used to

support RS422 and others

VDC Volts Direct Current

WEI Week-end infeed logic

VT Voltage transformer

VTSZ Block of trip from weak-end infeed logic by an open breaker

X1A Source reactance A (near end)

X1B Source reactance B (far end)

X1L Positive sequence line reactance

X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment

XLeak Winding reactance in primary ohms

XOL Zero sequence line reactance

ZCOM-CACC Forward overreaching zone used in the communication scheme

ZCOM-CR Carrier Receive Signal

ZCOM-TRIP Trip from the communication scheme

ZCOM-LCG Alarm Signal LIne-check Guard

10
About this chapter Chapter 2
General

Chapter 2 General

About this chapter

This chapter describes the terminal in general.

11
 Features Chapter 2
General

1 Features
• Versatile local human-machine interface (HMI)

• Simultaneous dual protocol serial communication facilities

• Extensive self-supervision with internal event recorder

• Time synchronization with 1 ms resolution

• Four independent groups of complete setting parameters

• Powerful software ‘tool-box’ for monitoring, evaluation and user configuration

• Full scheme phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth distance protection with:

- general fault criteria, with or without the optional phase preference logic for high imped-
ance earthed networks
- three to five zones

12
 Functions Chapter 2
General

2 Functions
• Line distanceImpedance
- General fault criteria, impedance and current based (GFCzi)
- General fault criteria, impedance and current based, with phase preference logic (GFCp-
pl-zi)
- Distance protection (ZM)
- Simplified impedance settings (SIS)
- Power swing detection (PSD)
- Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)
- Current reversal and weak end infeed logic (ZCAL)
- Radial feeder protection (PAP)
- Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)
- Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

• Current
- Instantaneous non-directional phase overcurrent protection (IOCph)
- Instantaneous non-directional residual overcurrent protection (IOCr)
- Definite time non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOCph)
- Definite time non-directional residual overcurrent protection (TOCr)
- Two step time delayed non-directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC2)
- Two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection (TOC3)
- Time delayed non-directional residual overcurrent protection (TEF)
- Time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (TEFdir)
- Four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4)
- Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection (WEF1)
- Sensitive directional residual power protection (WEF2)
- Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC)
- Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)
- Thermal overload protection (THOL)
- Breaker failure protection (BFP)

• Voltage
- Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

13
 Functions Chapter 2
General

- Time delayed overvoltge protection (TOV)

- Time delayed residual overvoltage protection (TOVr)

• Power system supervision

- Broken conductor check (BRC)
- Loss of voltage check (LOV)
- Overload supervision (OVLD)
- Dead line detection (DLD)

• System protection and control

- Pole slip protection (PSP)
- Low active power protection (LAPP)
- Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)
- High active power protection (HAPP)
- High active and reactive power protection (HARP)
- Sudden change in phase current protection (SCC1)
- Sudden change in residual current protection (SCRC)
- Sudden change in voltage protection (SCV)
- Overvoltage protection (OVP)
- Undercurrent protection (UCP)
- Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)
- Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

• Secondary system supervision

- Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)
- Fuse failure supervision, negative sequence (FUSEns)
- Fuse failure supervision, zero sequence (FUSEzs)
- Fuse failure supervision, du/dt and di/dt based (FUSEdb)
- Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

• Control
- Single command, 16 signals (CD)
- Synchro-check and energizing-check, single circuit breaker (SYN1)
- Synchro-check and energizing-check, double circuit breakers (SYN12)

14
Functions Chapter 2
General

- Synchro-check with synchronizing and energizing-check, double circuit breaker

(SYNsy1)
- Synchro-check with synchronizing and energizing-check, double circuit breaker
(SYNsy12)
- Autorecloser - 1- and/or 3-phase, single circuit breaker (AR1-1/3)
- Autorecloser - 1- and/or 3-phase, double circuit breakers (AR12-1/3)
- Autorecloser - 3-phase, single circuit breaker (AR1-3)
- Autorecloser- 3-phase, double circuit breaker (AR12-3)

• Logic
- Three pole tripping logic (TR01-3)
- Additional three pole tripping logic (TR02-3)
- Single, two or three pole tripping logic (TR01-1/2/3)
- Additional single, two or three pole tripping logic (TR02-1/2/3)
- Pole discordance logic (PDc)
- Additional configurable logic blocks (CL2)
- Communication channel test logic (CCHT)
- Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)
- Multiple command, one fast block with 16 signals (CM1)
- Multiple command, 79 medium speed blocks each with 16 signals (CM79)
- Six event counters (CN)

• Monitoring
- Disturbance recorder (DR)
- Event recorder (ER)
- Fault locator (FLOC)
- Trip value recorder (TVR)
- Increased accuracy of AC input quatities (IMA)
- Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)
- Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

• Metering capabilities

15
 Functions Chapter 2
General

- Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

• Hardware
- 18 LEDs for extended indication capabilities

• Several input/output module options including measuring mA input module (for transduc-
ers)

16
 Application Chapter 2
General

3 Application
The main purpose of the REL 511 terminal is the protection, control and monitoring of overhead
lines and cables in high impedance or solidly earthed distribution and sub-transmission net-
works. Full scheme phase to phase and phase to earth distance protecion is included. The termi-
nal can also be used in transmission networks up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for
the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-circuit lines, and where the requirement for trip-
ping is one-, two-, and/or three-pole. The terminal may also be used to provide backup protection
for power transformers, busbars, etc.

17
 Design Chapter 2
General

4 Design
Type tested software and hardware that comply with international standards and ABBôs in-
ternal design rules together with extensive self monitoring functionality, ensure high reliability
of the complete terminal.

The terminal’s closed and partly welded steel case makes it possible to fulfill the stringent EMC
requirements.

Serial data communication is via optical connections or galvanic RS485.

An extensive library of protection, control and monitoring functions is available. This library of
functions, together with the flexible hardware design, allows this terminal to be configured to
each userôs own specific requirements. This wide application flexibility makes this product
an excellent choice for both new installations and the refurbishment of existing installations.

18
 Requirements Chapter 2
General

5 Requirements

5.1 General
The operation of a protection measuring function is influenced by distortion, and measures need
to be taken in the protection to handle this phenomenon. One source of distortion is current trans-
former saturation. In this protection terminal, measures are taken to allow for a certain amount
of CT saturation with maintained correct operation. This protection terminal can allow relatively
heavy current transformer saturation.

Protection functions are also affected by transients caused by capacitive voltage transformers
(CVTs) but as this protection terminal has a very effective filter for these transients, the opera-
tion is hardly affected at all.

5.2 Voltage transformers

Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

Capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) should fulfil the requirements according to IEC 186A,
Section 20, regarding transients. According to the standard, at a primary voltage drop down to
zero, the secondary voltage should drop to less than 10% of the peak pre-fault value before the
short circuit within one cycle.

The protection terminal has an effective filter for this transient, which gives secure and correct
operation with CVTs.

5.3 Current transformers

5.3.1 Classification
The performance of the REx 5xx terminal depends on the conditions and the quality of the cur-
rent signals fed to it. The protection terminal REx 5xx has been designed to permit relatively
heavy current transformer saturation with maintained correct operation. To guarantee correct
operation, the CTs must be able to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before
the CT will begin to saturate. To fulfil the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs
must fulfil the requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.

There are several different ways to specify CTs. Conventional magnetic core CTs are usually
specified and manufactured according to some international or national standards, which specify
different protection classes as well. However, generally there are three different types of current
transformers:

• high remanence type CT

• low remanence type CT
• non remanence type CT

19
 Requirements Chapter 2
General

The high remanence type has no limit for the remanent flux. This CT has a magnetic core with-
out any airgap and a remanent flux might remain for almost infinite time. In this type of trans-
formers the remanence can be up to 70-80% of the saturation flux. Typical examples of high
remanence type CT are class P, PX,TPS, TPX according to IEC, class P, X according to BS (old
British Standard) and nongapped class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE.

The low remanence type has a specified limit for the remanent flux. This CT is made with a
small airgap to reduce the remanence to a level that does not exceed 10% of the saturation flux.
The small airgap has only very limited influence on the other properties of the CT. Class PR,
TPY according to IEC is low remanence type CTs.

The non remanence type CT has practically negligible level of remanent flux. This type of CT
has relatively big airgaps in order to reduce the remanence to practically zero level. At the same
time, these airgaps minimize the influence of the DC-component from the primary fault current.
The airgaps will also reduce the measuring accuracy in the non-saturated region of operation.
Class TPZ according to IEC is a non remanence type CT.

The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard is used
to specify the CT requirements for REx 5xx. The requirements are also specified according to
other standards.

5.3.2 Conditions
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator. The tests
have been carried out with an analogue current transformer model with a settable core area, core
length, air gap and number of primary and secondary turns. The setting of the current transform-
er model was representative for current transformers of high remanence and low remanence
type. The results are not valid for non remanence type CTs (TPZ).

The performances of the protection functions were checked at both symmetrical and fully asym-
metrical fault currents. A source with a time constant of about 120 ms was used in the tests. The
current requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault cur-
rents.

Phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase faults were tested in fault locations backward,
close up forward and at the zone 1 reach. The protection was checked with regard to direction-
ality, dependability and security.

The remanence in the current transformer core has been considered for critical fault cases, for
example fault in reverse direction. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for all nor-
mal applications. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for re-
manence. They depend on the performance and economy requirements.

When current transformers of low remanence type (e.g. TPY, PR) are used, practically no addi-
tional margin is needed.

For current transformers of high remanence type (e.g. TPX), the small probability of a fully
asymmetrical fault, together with maximum remanence in the same direction as the flux gener-
ated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmet-
rical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0°). Investigations have
proved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40° and 90°.

20
 Requirements Chapter 2
General

5.3.3 Fault current

The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in dif-
ferent positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or sin-
gle-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for
a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the pos-
itive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current should be used
and therefore both fault types have to be considered.

5.3.4 Cable resistance and additional load

The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer
secondary terminals. This voltage, for an earth fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase
and neutral conductor, and relay load. For three-phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only
the phase conductor and relay phase load have to be considered.

In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the phase re-
sistance for three-phase faults.

5.3.5 General current transformer requirements

The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is higher
than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected. The minimum operating
current is 20% of the nominal current.

The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very sensitive set-
ting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive setting of this function will
be used it is recommended that the current transformer should have an accuracy class which
have an current error at rated primary current that is less than ±1% (e.g. class 1.0 or 5P). If cur-
rent transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the actual unwanted resid-
ual current during the commissioning.

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high remanence
and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal
below can be used. The characteristic of the non remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined
as far as the phase angle error is concerned, and we therefore recommend contacting ABB to
confirm that the type in question can be used.

The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated equivalent limit-
ing secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 60044-6 standard. Requirements for CTs specified
in different ways are given at the end of this section.

5.3.6 Distance protection

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than the
maximum of the required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

I k max ⋅Isn ⎛ S
E al ≥ E alreq = ⋅ a ⋅ ⎜ R CT + R L + R2
I pn ⎝ Ir
(Equation 1)

21
 Requirements Chapter 2
General

I kzone1⋅ Isn ⎛ S
E al ≥ E alreq = ⋅ k ⋅ ⎜ R CT + R L + R2
I pn ⎝ Ir
(Equation 2)

where

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and reverse
faults (A)
Ikzone1 Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for faults at the end of the zone
(A)
Ipn The rated primary CT current (A)
Isn The rated secondary CT current (A)
Ir The protection terminal rated current (A)
RCT The secondary resistance of the CT (Ω)
RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (Ω). The loop resis-
tance should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resitance for
three-phase faults.
a This factor is a function of the network frequency and the primary time constant for
the dc component in the fault current.
a = 2 for the primary time constant Tp ≤ 50 ms, 50 and 60 Hz
a = 3 for the primary time constant Tp > 50 ms, 50 Hz
a = 4 for the primary time constant Tp > 50 ms, 60 Hz
k A factor of the network frequency and the primary time constant for the dc compo-
nent in the fault current for a three-phase fault at the set reach of the zone. The
time constant is normally less than 50 ms.
k = 4 for the primary time constant Tp ≤ 30 ms, 50 and 60 Hz
k = 6 for the primary time constant Tp > 30 ms, 50 Hz
k = 7 for the primary time constant Tp > 30 ms, 60 Hz

5.3.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards

All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to be used with REx 5xx terminals if
they fulfil the requirements that correspond to the above specified according to the IEC60044-6
standard. From the different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible
to approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT. It is then possible to compare this to the
required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq and judge if the CT fulfils the requirements. The requirements
according to some other standards are specified below.

Current transformer according to IEC 60044-1, class P, PR

A CT according to IEC60044-1 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max. The value
of the E2max is approximately equal to Eal according to IEC60044-6.

Eal ≈ E2max

22
Requirements Chapter 2
General

The current transformers must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. E2max that fulfills the following:

E2max > maximum of Ealreq

Current transformer according to IEC 60044-1, class PX, IEC 60044-6, class TPS
(and old British standard, class X)
CTs according to these classes are specified by the rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee (or limiting sec-
ondary voltage Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than Eal according to IEC60044-6.
It is not possible to give a general relation between the Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee
is 80 to 85% of the Eal value. Therefore, the rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq for
a CT specified according to these classes can be estimated to:

Ealreq ≈ 1.2 x Eknee

The current transformer must have a rated knee-point e.m.f. Eknee that fulfills the following:

1.2 x Eknee > maximum of Ealreq

Current transformer according to ANSI/IEEE

A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is specified in a little different way. For example a CT of class
C has a specified secondary terminal voltage UANSI. There is a few standardized value of UANSI
(e.g. for a C400 the UANSI is 400V). The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI for
a CT specified according to ANSI/IEEE can be estimated as follows:

EalANSI = | 20 x Isn x RCT + UANSI | = | 20 x Isn x RCT + 20 x Isn x ZbANSI |

where

ZbANSI The impedance (i.e. complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the spe-
cific C class (Ω)
UANSI The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CT requirements are fulfilled if:

EalANSI > maximum of Ealreq

Often an ANSI/IEEE CT also has a specified knee-point voltage UkneeANSI. This is graphically
defined from the excitation curve. The knee-point according to ANSI/IEEE has normally a low-
er value than the knee-point according to BS. The rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
EalANSI for a CT specified according to ANSI/IEEE can be estimated to:

EalANSI ≈ 1.3 x UkneeANSI

The current transformers must have a knee-point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following:

1.3 x UkneeANSI > maximum of Ealreq

23
 Serial communication Chapter 2
General

6 Serial communication

6.1 SPA
Both plastic fibres and glass fibres can be used for the communication in the station. For distanc-
es up to 30 m, plastic fibres and for distances up to 500 m, glass fibres are suitable. Glass and
plastic fibres can be mixed in the same loop. The transmitter and reciever connectors at the bus
connection unit has to be of corresponding types, i.e. glass or plastic connector. See also “Hard-
ware modules” in the Technical reference manual for technical data on the fibres.

For communication on longer distances, telephone modems are used. The modems must be
Hayes-compatible ones using “AT” commands with automatic answering (AA) capability. The
telephone network must comply with the ITU (CCITT) standards.

For connection of the optical fibre loop to a PC or a telephone modem, an opto/electrical con-
verter is required. The converter is supplied by ABB.

6.2 LON
The protection terminal can be used in a substation control system (SCS). For that purpose, con-
nect the LON communication link to a LON Star Coupler via optical fibres. The optical fibres
are either glass or plastic with specification according to “Hardware modules” in the Technical
reference manual.

A PC can be used as a station HMI. The PC must be equipped with a communication card for
LON (e.g. Echelon PCLTA card).

To configure the nodes in a SCS, the LON Network Tool is needed.

6.3 IEC 870-5-103

As an alternative to SPA communication, the terminals can use the IEC 870–5–103 standard
protocol for protection functions. The terminals communicate with a primary station level sys-
tem. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The
communication is based on a point to point principle, where the terminal is a slave. The master
must have a program that can interpret the IEC 870–5–103 communication messages. The IEC
communication link is connected via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plastic
with specification according to “Hardware modules” in the Technical reference manual.

For more detailed requirements refer to the IEC 870–5–103 standard.

24
 Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

7 Terminal identification and base values

7.1 Application
Serial number and software version are stored in the terminal. The identification names and
numbers for the station, the object and the terminal (unit) itself can be entered into the terminal
by the customer. Also the ordering numbers of included modules are stored in the terminal. This
information can be read on the local HMI or when communicating with the terminal through a
PC or with SMS/SCS.

The base currents, voltages and rated frequency must be set since the values affect many func-
tions. The input transformers ratio must be set as well. The ratio for the current and the voltage
transformer automatically affects the measuring functions in the terminal.

The internal clock is used for time tagging of:

• Internal events
• Disturbance reports
• Events in a disturbance report
• Events transmitted to the SCS substation control system

This implies that the internal clock is very important. The clock can be synchronized (see Time
synchronization) to achieve higher accuracy of the time tagging. Without synchronization, the
internal clock is useful for comparisons among events within the REx 5xx terminal.

7.2 Calculations
Most commonly the setting values of the high voltage power objects are calculated in primary
values. This is based on the fact that all power system data like voltages, currents and impedanc-
es are given in primary values.

In the terminal, the settings are made with reference to secondary values i.e. the values as seen
by the terminal on the secondary side of the main voltage- and current transformers.

Uxr and Ixr (x = 1-5) are the rated voltage and current values for the five voltage and five current
input transformers within the REx 5xx terminal. The values of Uxr and Ixr are factory preset and
should normally not be changed by the user since they are related to the delivered hardware.
They are used only if the transformer input module (TRM) is replaced with a module that have
different rated values than the one originally delivered in the terminal.

Example: The terminal is delivered with 1A current transformers, but later changed to 5A cur-
rent transformers. In this case it is necessary to change all the relevant input rated quantities for
currents from 1A to 5A. This can only be done from the local HMI.

The UxScale and IxScale are the actual ratio for the main measuring transformers for the pro-
tected object. The terminal only uses these settings to calculate the primary quantities and to
show these quantities as service values, e.g. primary phasors in the local HMI or thru CAP 540
or SMS 510. They are also used by CAP 540 to visualize voltage and current waveforms in pri-
mary values.They do not affect the operation (trip or start) of any protection function.

25
 Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

Uxb and Ixb define the secondary base voltage and current values, used to define the per-unit
base of the terminal. The settings are made in percent of the Uxb and Ixb values.

The only recommended way to use the base value settings Uxb and Ixb is to harmonize the
per-unit base values of the terminal with the actual secondary rated values of the primary mea-
suring transformers.

The base values only affect the settings of current functions and voltage functions, not imped-
ance based functions e.g. ZM, PHS and GFC. The impedance-based functions are set in second-
ary ohms. For more details on the setting calculations, see each function.

7.2.1 Example 1

Usprim
Isprim

~ ~
Issec Ussec

Ur
REx 5xx Ir
en03000164.vsd

where:
Usprim is primary setting value of the voltage
Isprim is primary setting value of the current
Ussec is secondary setting value of the voltage
Issec is secondary setting value of the current
Ur is rated voltage of the terminal
Ir is rated current of the terminal

Figure 1: Example system

Assume the following values:

Ur = 110V, Ir = 1A, Usprim = 60kV phase to earth, Isprim = 1500A

CT-ratio = 1000A and VT-ratio = 110kV

----------------- -----------------
1A 110V

26
Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

Current settings
Ixscale = CT-ratio = 1000/1 = 1000

In this case the rated current of the terminal and the rated secondary current of the main CT
match. The base value is set equal to the rated value.

Ixb = 1A

Isprim
Issec = ------------------
Ixscale
(Equation 3)

1500A
Issec = ----------------- = 1.5A
1000
(Equation 4)

A current setting value, e.g. IP>>, is given in percentage of the secondary base current value,Ixb,
associated with the current transformer input Ix:

I ssec
IP>> = 100 ⋅ ----------- %
Ixb
(Equation 5)

1.5
IP>> = 100 ⋅ -------- % = 150%
1
(Equation 6)

Voltage settings
Uxscale = VT-ratio = 110 kV/110 V = 1000

The voltage levels are normally given as system (phase to phase) voltage, while the input trans-
formers of the terminal are connected phase to earth. A Ur of 110V corresponds to a Uxr of
110/√3 ≈ 63.5V. In this case the rated voltage of the terminal and the rated secondary voltage of
the main VT match. The base value is set equal to the rated values.

Uxb= 63.5V

U sprim
Ussec = ------------------
Uxscale
(Equation 7)

27
 Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

60kV
Ussec = ----------------- = 60V
1000
(Equation 8)

A voltage setting value, e.g. UPE<, is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage val-
ue,Uxb, associated with the voltage transformer input Ux:

Ussec
UP< = 100 ⋅ ----------
-%
Uxb
(Equation 9)

60
UP< = 100 ⋅ --------
- %
63.5
(Equation 10)

7.2.2 Example 2

Assume the following values:

Ur = 110V, Ir = 1A Usprim = 60kV phase to earth, Isprim = 1500A

CT-ratio = and VT-ratio =

1000A 110kV
-----------------
-----------------
2A 100V

Current settings
Ixscale = CT-ratio = 1000/2 = 500

In this case the rated current of the terminal and the secondary rated current of the main CT do
not match. This will have some implications on the setting procedure.

Not using base values

The base value is set equal to the rated value of the terminal.

Ixb = 1A

1500A according to equation 3.

Issec = ----------------- = 3A
500

28
Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

This corresponds to 150% of the rated CT secondary current and 300% of the terminal rated cur-
rent.

A current setting value, e.g. IP>>, is given in percentage of Ixb.

according to equation 5.
3
IP>> = 100 ⋅ -------- % = 300 %
1

Using base values

The base value is set equal to the rated secondary value of the main CT.

Ixb = 2A

1500A according to equation 3

Issec = ----------------- = 3A
500

This corresponds to 150% of the rated CT secondary current. As Ixb is selected equal to the rated
CT secondary current, the value (150%) can be directly entered as setting, see below.

according to equation 5
3
IP>> = 100 ⋅ -------- % = 150 %
2

Voltage settings
Uxscale = VT-ratio = 110 kV/100 V = 1100

An Ur of 110 V corresponds to an Uxr of 110/√3 ≈ 63.5V. The rated secondary voltage of the
VT corresponds to 100/√3 ≈ 57.7V. In this case the rated voltage of the terminal and the second-
ary rated voltage of the main VT do not match. This will have some implications on the setting
procedure.

Not using base values

The base value is set equal to the rated value of the terminal.

Uxb = 63.5V

60kV according to equation 7.

Ussec = ----------------- = 54.5V
1100

29
 Terminal identification and base values Chapter 2
General

This corresponds to 94% of the rated VT secondary voltage and 86% of the terminal rated volt-
age.

A voltage setting value, e.g. UPE<, is given in percentage of Uxb:

according to equation 9.
54.5
UP< = 100 ⋅ --------
- % = 86 %
63.5

Using base values

The base value is set equal to the rated secondary value of the main VT.

Uxb = 57.7V

60kV according to equation 7.

Ussec = ----------------- = 54.5V
1100

This corresponds to 94% of the rated VT secondary voltage. As Uxb is selected equal to the rated
VT secondary voltage, the value (94%) can be directly entered as setting, see below.

according to equation 9.
54.5
UP< = 100 ⋅ --------
- % = 94 %
57.7

30
About this chapter Chapter 3
Common functions

Chapter 3 Common functions

About this chapter

This chapter presents the common functions in the terminal.

31
 Real-time clock with external time Chapter 3
synchronzation (TIME) Common functions

1 Real-time clock with external time synchronzation

(TIME)

1.1 Application
Use time synchronisation to achieve a common time base for the terminals in a protection and
control system. This makes comparision of events and disturbance data between all terminals in
the system possible.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances is an excellent help when evaluating faults.
Without time synchronisation, only the events within the terminal can be compared to one an-
other. With time synchronisation, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even be-
tween line ends, can be compared during an evaluation.

1.2 Functionality
Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization
message is applied via any of the communication ports of the terminal as a telegram message
including date and time, or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input. The minute pulse is
used to fine tune already existing time in the terminals.

The REx 5xx terminal has its own internal clock with date, hour, minute, second and millisec-
ond. It has a resolution of 1 ms.

The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098. Any change between
summer and winter time must be handled manually or through external time synchronization.
The clock is powered by a capacitor, to bridge interruptions in power supply without malfunc-
tion.

The internal clock is used for time-tagging disturbances, events in Substation monitoring system
(SMS) and Substation control system (SCS), and internal events.

1.3 Calculations
The time is set with year, month, day and time. Refer to the Installation and commissioning man-
ual for information on the setting procedure.

When the source of time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter is called
TimeSyncSource. The time synchronisation source can also be set from the CAP tool. The set-
ting parameter is then called SYNCSCR. The setting alternatives are:

• None (no synchronisation)

• LON
• SPA
• IEC
• Minute pulse positive flank
• Minute pulse negative flank

32
Real-time clock with external time Chapter 3
synchronzation (TIME) Common functions

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronisation is called TIME-MINSYNC.

The internal time can be set manually down to the minute level, either via the local HMI or via
any of the communication ports. The time synchronisation fine tunes the clock (seconds and mil-
liseconds). If no clock synchronisation is active, the time can be set down to milliseconds.

33
 Four parameter setting groups (GRP) Chapter 3
Common functions

2 Four parameter setting groups (GRP)

2.1 Application
Different conditions in networks of different voltage levels require high adaptability of the used
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity require-
ments. Protection units operate with higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values
of their parameters are continuously optimised regarding the conditions in power system.

The operational departments can plan different operating conditions for the primary equipment.
The protection engineer can prepare in advance for the necessary optimised and pre-tested set-
tings for different protection functions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available
in the REx 5xx terminals. Any of them can be activated automatically through up to four differ-
ent programmable binary inputs by means of external control signals.

2.2 Functionality
Select a setting group by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, re-
motely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding
input to the GRP function block.

Each input of the function block is configurable to any of the binary inputs in the terminal. Con-
figuration must be performed by using the CAP configuration tool.

Use external control signals to activate a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is
necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse
longer than 200 ms.

More than one input may be activated simultaneously. In such cases the lower order setting
group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to ac-
tivate, group two will be the one activated.

ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 GRP--ACTGRP1
∅
IOx-Bly2 GRP--ACTGRP2
∅
IOx-Bly3 GRP--ACTGRP3
∅
IOx-Bly4 GRP--ACTGRP4
∅

34
 Four parameter setting groups (GRP) Chapter 3
Common functions

2.3 Design
The GRP function block has four functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting
groups stored within the terminal. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting
group. Four functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that continu-
ous information on active setting group is available.

35
 Setting restriction of HMI (SRH) Chapter 3
Common functions

3 Setting restriction of HMI (SRH)

Note!
The HMI--BLOCKSET functional input must be configured to the selected binary input before
setting the setting restriction function in operation. Carefully read the instructions.

3.1 Application
Use the setting restriction function to prevent unauthorized setting changes and to control when
setting changes are allowed. Unpermitted or uncoordinated changes by unauthorized personnel
may influence the security of people and cause severe damage to primary and secondary power
circuits.

By adding a key switch connected to a binary input a simple setting change control circuit can
be built simply allowing only authorized keyholders to make setting changes from the local
HMI.

3.2 Functionality
The restriction of setting via the local HMI can be activated from the local HMI only. Activating
the local HMI setting restriction prevent unauthorized changes of the terminal settings or con-
figuration.

The HMI-BLOCKSET functional input can be configured only to one of the available binary
inputs of the terminal. The terminal is delivered with the default configuration HMI--BLOCK-
SET connected to NONE-NOSIGNAL. The configuration can be made from the local HMI
only, see the Installation and comissioning manual.

The function permits remote changes of settings and reconfiguration through the serial commu-
nication ports. The restriction of setting from remote can be activated from the local HMI only.
Refer to the Technical reference manual for SPA serial communication parameters.

All other functions of the local human-machine communication remain intact. This means that
an operator can read disturbance reports, setting values, the configuration of different logic cir-
cuits and other available information.

36
 Setting restriction of HMI (SRH) Chapter 3
Common functions

R E x 5 xx

+
H M I--B L O C K S E T
S W IT C H
W IT H K E Y &
S e ttin g R e s tric t= B lo c k R E S T R IC T
S E TT IN G S

e n 0 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 .vs d
Figure 2: Connection and logic diagram for the BLOCKSET function

37
 I/O system configurator (IOP) Chapter 3
Common functions

4 I/O system configurator (IOP)

4.1 Application
The I/O system configurator must be used in order to recognize included modules and to create
internal adress mappings between modules and protections and other functions.

4.2 Functionality
The I/O system configurator is used to add, remove or move I/O modules in the REx 5xx termi-
nals. To configure means to connect the function blocks that represent each I/O module (BIM,
BOM, IOM, DCM and MIM) to a function block for the I/O positions (IOP1) that represent the
physical slot in the rack.

Available I/O modules are:

• BIM, Binary Input Module with 16 binary input channels.

• BOM, Binary Output Module with 24 binary output channels.
• IOM, Input/Output Module with 8 binary input and 12 binary output channels.
• MIM, mA Input Module with six analog input channels.
• DCM, Data Communication Module. The only software configuration for this
module is the I/O Position input.

An REx 5xx terminal houses different numbers of modules depending which kind of modules
chosen.

• The 1/1 of 19-inch size casing houses a maximum of modules. But when In-
put/Output- or Output modules are included, the maximum of these modules are.
The maximum number of mA Input modules are also limited to .

It is possible to fit modules of different types in any combination in a terminal, but the total max-
imum numbers of modules must be considered.

Each I/O-module can be placed in any CAN-I/O slot in the casing with one exception. The
DCM-module has a fixed slot position that depends on the size of the casing.

To add, remove or move modules in the terminal, the reconfiguration of the terminal must be
done from the graphical configuration CAP tool.

Users refer to the CAN-I/O slots by the physical slot numbers, which also appear in the terminal
drawings.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual configuration in the terminal, an error
output is activated on the function block, which can be treated as an event or alarm.

4.2.1 I/O position

All necessary configuration is done in the configuration CAP tool.

The Snn outputs are connected to the POSITION inputs of the I/O Modules and MIMs.

38
 I/O system configurator (IOP) Chapter 3
Common functions

4.2.2 Configuration
The I/O-configuration can only be performed from CAP tool, the graphical configuration tool.

To configure from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the logical I/O module to the type of I/O module
that is used, BIM, BOM, IOM, MIM, IOPSM or DCM.
• Secondly, connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output
of the IOP function block.

39
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

5 Configurable logic blocks (CL1)

5.1 Application
5.1.1 Application
Different protection, control, and monitoring functions within the REx 5xx terminals are quite
independent as far as their configuration in the terminal is concerned. The user cannot enter and
change the basic algorithms for different functions, because they are located in the digital signal
processors and extensively type tested. The user can configure different functions in the termi-
nals to suit special requirements for different applications.

For this purpose, additional logic circuits are needed to configure the terminals to meet user
needs and also to build in some special logic circuits, which use different logic gates and timers.

Logical function blocks are executed according to their execution serial numbers. To get an op-
timal solution select their execution serial numbers in consequtive sequence.

5.2 Functionality
5.2.1 Inverter (INV)
The INV function block is used to invert the input boolean variable. The function block (figure
3) has one input designated IVnn-INPUT where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each
INV circuit has one output IVnn-OUT.

IVnn

INPUT 1 OUT

99000021.vsd

Figure 3: Function block diagram of the inverter (INV) function

Table 1: Truth table for the INV function block

INPUT OUT
1 0
0 1

40
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

5.2.2 Controllable gate (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass or not depending
on a setting. The function block (figure 4) has one input, designated GTnn-INPUT, where nn
presents the serial number of the block. Each GT circuit has one output, GTnn-OUT. Each gate
further has a Operation On/Off which controls if the INPUT is passed to the OUT or not.

GTnn

INPUT
OUT
&
Operation = On

xx00000530.vsd

Figure 4: Function block diagram of the controllable gate (GT) function

The output signal from the GT function block is set to 1 if the input signal is 1 and Operation =
On elsewhere it is set to 0. See truth table below.

Table 2: Truth table for the GT function block

INPUT Operation OUT
0 Off 0
1 Off 0
0 On 0
1 On 1

5.2.3 OR
OR function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The function block (figure 5) has six inputs, designated Onnn-INPUTm, where nnn presents the
serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each OR
circuit has two outputs, Onnn-OUT and Onnn-NOUT (inverted).

41
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

Onnn

INPUT1
INPUT2 OUT
≥1
INPUT3
INPUT4 NOUT
1
INPUT5
INPUT6

xx00000514.vsd

Figure 5: Function block diagram of the OR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if any of the inputs (INPUT1-6) is 1. See truth table below.

Table 3: Truth table for the OR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
... ... ... ... ... ... 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

5.2.4 AND
AND function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The function block (figure 6) has four inputs (one of them inverted), designated Annn-INPUTm
(Annn-INPUT4N is inverted), where nnn presents the serial number of the block, and m presents
the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each AND circuit has two outputs, Annn-OUT and
Annn-NOUT (inverted).

42
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

Annn

INPUT1
INPUT2 &
OUT
INPUT3
INPUT4 NOUT
1

xx00000515.vsd

Figure 6: Function block diagram of the AND function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the inputs INPUT1-3 are 1 and INPUT4N is 0. See truth
table below.

Table 4: Truth table for the AND function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 0 1 0

5.2.5 Timer
The function block TM timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up.
The timer (figure 7) has a settable time delay TMnn-T between 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of
0.01 s. The input signal for each time delay block has the designation TMnn-INPUT, where nn

43
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

presents the serial number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay block are
TMnn-ON and TMnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timer delayed on pick-up and the second
one to the timer delayed on drop-out. Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

TMnn

INPUT OFF
t

t
ON

T
Time delay 0.00-60.00s

xx00000523.vsd

Figure 7: Function block diagram of the Timer function

The function block TL timer (figure 8) with extended maximum time delay at pick-up and at
drop-out, is identical with the TM timer. The difference is the longer time delay TLnn-T, settable
between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

TLnn

INPUT OFF
t

t
ON

T
Time delay 0.0-90000.0s

xx00000526.vsd

Figure 8: Function block diagram of the TimerLong function

44
Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at output OFF when the input
variable changes from 1 to 0 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 9. The output
OFF signal is set to 1 immediately when the input variable changes from 0 to 1.

T=3s
IN
PU 1
T
0

OF 1
F
0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

xx00000528.vsd

Figure 9: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on drop-out with preset time T = 3 s

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at output ON when the input
variable changes from 0 to 1 in accordance with the time pulse diagram, figure 10. The output
ON signal returns immediately when the input variable changes from 1 to 0.

T=3s
IN
PU 1
T
0

1
ON
0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

xx00000529.vsd

Figure 10: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on pick-up with preset time T = 3 s

If more timers than available in the terminal are needed, it is possible to use pulse timers with
AND or OR logics. Figure 11 shows an application example of how to realize a timer delayed
on pick-up. Figure 12 shows the realization of a timer delayed on drop-out. Note that the reso-
lution of the set time must be 0.2 s, if the connected logic has a cycle time of 200 ms.

45
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

AND
INPUT1 OUT
FIXED-ON INPUT2 NOUT
Pulse INPUT3
INPUT OUT INPUT4N
0.00-60.00s T NOUT

xx00000533.vsd

Figure 11: Realization example of a timer delayed on pick-up

OR
INPUT1 OUT
FIXED-OFF INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INV Pulse INPUT5
INPUT OUT INPUT OUT INPUT6

0.00-60.00s T

xx00000534.vsd

Figure 12: Realization example of a timer delayed on drop-out

5.2.6 Timer settable through HMI/SMS/PST

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The
timer (figure 13) has a settable time delay TSnn-T between 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s.
It also has an Operation setting On, Off which controls the operation of the timer.The input sig-
nal for each time delay block has the designation TSnn-INPUT, where nn presents the serial
number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay block are TSnn-ON and
TSnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timer delayed on pick-up and the second one to the timer
delayed on drop-out. Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

46
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

TSnn

INPUT
t
OFF
&
Operation = On

t
ON
Time delay T=0.00-60.00s

xx00000531.vsd

Figure 13: Function block diagram of the Settable timer function

For details about the function see the description of TM Timer.

5.2.7 Pulse
The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of out-
puts. The pulse timer TP (figure 14) has a settable length of a pulse between 0.00 s and 60.00 s
in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal for each pulse timer has the designation TPnn-INPUT, where
nn presents the serial number of the logic block. Each pulse timer has one output, designated by
TPnn-OUT. The pulse timer is not retriggable, that is, it can be restarted first after that the time
T has elapsed.

TPnn

INPUT OUT

T
Time delay 0.00-60.00s

xx00000524.vsd

Figure 14: Function block diagram of the Pulse function

The function block TQ pulse timer (figure 15) with extended maximum pulse length, is identical
with the TP pulse timer. The difference is the longer pulse length TQnn-T, settable between 0.0
and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

47
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

TQnn

INPUT OUT

T
Time delay 0.0-90000.0s

xx00000525.vsd

Figure 15: Function block diagram of the PulseLong function, TQ

A memory is set when the input INPUT is set to 1. The output OUT then goes to 1. When the
time set T has elapsed, the memory is cleared and the output OUT goes to 0. If a new pulse is
obtained at the input INPUT before the time set T has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only
when the time set has elapsed and the output OUT is set to 0, the pulse function can be restarted
by the input INPUT going from 0 to 1. See time pulse diagram, figure 16.

1
INPUT
0
1
OUT
T=3 s 0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

xx00000571.vsd

Figure 16: Example of time diagram for the pulse function with preset pulse length T = 3 s

5.2.8 Exclusive OR (XOR)

The function block exclusive OR (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with bool-
ean variables. XOR (figure 17) has two inputs, designated XOnn-INPUTm, where nn presents
the serial number of the block, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each
XOR circuit has two outputs, XOnn-OUT and XOnn-NOUT (inverted). The output signal
(OUT) is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

48
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

XOnn

INPUT1
OUT
INPUT2 =1

NOUT
1

xx00000517.vsd

Figure 17: Function block diagram of the XOR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the input signals are different and to 0 if they are equal.
See truth table below.

Table 5: Truth table for the XOR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

5.2.9 Set-Reset (SR)

The function block Set-Reset (SR) (figure 18) has two inputs, designated SRnn-SET and
SRnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each SR circuit has two out-
puts, SRnn-OUT and SRnn-NOUT (inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if the input (SET) is
set to 1 and if the input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output is unconditionally
reset to 0.

49
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

SRnn

SET ≥1 OUT
&

NOUT
1
RESET

xx00000519.vsd

Figure 18: Function block diagram of the Set-Reset function

5.2.10 Set-Reset with/without memory (SM)

The function block Set-Reset (SM) (figure 19) with/without memory has two inputs, designated
SMnn-SET and SMnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of the block. Each SM cir-
cuit has two outputs, SMnn-OUT and SMnn-NOUT (inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if
the input (SET) is set to 1 and if the input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output
is unconditionally reset to 0. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interrup-
tion will return to the state it had before or if it will be reset.

50
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

SMnn

SET ≥1 OUT
&

NOUT
1
RESET

Memory=On,Off

xx00000520.vsd

Figure 19: Function block diagram of the Set-Reset with/without memory function

5.2.11 MOVE
The MOVE function blocks, so called copy-blocks, are used for synchronization of boolean sig-
nals sent between logics with slow execution time and logics with fast execution time.

There are two types of MOVE function blocks - MOF located First in the slow logic and MOL
located Last in the slow logic. The MOF function blocks are used for signals coming into the
slow logic and the MOL function blocks are used for signals going out from the slow logic.

The REx 5xx terminal contains 3 MOF function blocks of 16 signals each, and 3 MOL function
blocks of 16 signals each. This means that a maximum of 48 signals into and 48 signals out from
the slow logic can be synchronized. The MOF and MOL function blocks are only a temporary
storage for the signals and do not change any value between input and output.

Each block of 16 signals is protected from being interrupted by other logic application tasks.
This guarantees the consistency of the signals to each other within each MOVE function block.

Synchronization of signals with MOF should be used when a signal which is produced outside
the slow logic is used in several places in the logic and there might be a malfunction if the signal
changes its value between these places.

Synchronization with MOL should be used if a signal produced in the slow logic is used in sev-
eral places outside this logic, or if several signals produced in the slow logic are used together
outside this logic, and there is a similar need for synchronization.

Figure 20 shows an example of logic, which can result in malfunctions on the output signal from
the AND gate to the right in the figure.

51
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logic

Function 1 Function 2

&

Function 3
&

xx00000537.vsd

Figure 20: Example of logic, which can result in malfunctions

Figure 21 shows the same logic as in figure 20, but with the signals synchronized by the MOVE
function blocks MOFn and MOLn. With this solution the consistency of the signals can be guar-
anteed.

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logic

MOFn Function 2
Function 1
MOVE
MOLn
Function 3
&
MOVE
&

xx00000541.vsd

Figure 21: Example of logic with synchronized signals

MOFn and MOLn, n=1-3, have 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Each INPUTm is copied to the corre-
sponding OUTPUTm, where m presents the serial number of the input and the output in the
block. The MOFn are the first blocks and the MOLn are the last blocks in the execution order in
the slow logic.

52
 Configurable logic blocks (CL1) Chapter 3
Common functions

5.3 Calculations
For the AND gates, OR gates, inverters, normal SR (Set-Reset) flip-flops, XOR gates and
MOVE elements no settings exist.

For the normal On/Off delay timers and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the CAP configuration tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed on
drop-out) always have a common setting value. Setting values of the pulse length are indepen-
dent of one another for all pulse circuits.

For the controllable gates, settable timers, SR flip-flops with/without memory the setting param-
eters are accessible through the HMI and SMS.

Configuration
The configuration of the logics is performed from the CAP configuration tool.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs in a fixed sequence in
two different cycle times, typical 6 ms and 200 ms.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an execution serial number. This is shown when
using the CAP configuration tool with the designation of the function block and the cycle time,
for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044 is the execu-
tion serial number and 6 is the cycle time.

Execution of different function blocks within the same cycle follows the same order as their ex-
ecution serial numbers. Always remember this when connecting in series two or more logical
function blocks. When connecting function blocks with different cycle times, the MOVE func-
tion blocks can be used. These function blocks synchronize boolean signals sent between logics
with slow execution time and logics with fast execution time. The MOVE functions are available
as additional configurable logic circuits.

Note!
Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle time to function blocks with
a slow cycle time.

So design the logic circuits carefully and check always the execution sequence for different func-
tions. In other cases, additional time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent
errors, for example, race between functions.

53
 Self supervision with internal event recorder Chapter 3
(INT) Common functions

6 Self supervision with internal event recorder (INT)

6.1 Application
The REx 5xx protection and control terminals have a complex design with many included func-
tions. The included self-supervision function and the INTernal signals function block provide
good supervision of the terminal. The different safety measures and fault signals makes it easier
to analyze and locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate possible
faults through a hardware contact on the PSM and/or through the software communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions su-
pervise the status of the various modules in the terminal and, in case of failure, a corresponding
event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the
status changes for the:

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the terminal is changed.

• when the content of the Disturbance report is erased.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can
store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest
event is overwritten. The list cannot be cleared and its content cannot be modified.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during commission-
ing and fault tracing.

The information can only be retrieved with the aid of the SMS. The PC can be connected either
to the port at the front or at the rear of the terminal.

6.2 Functionality
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or via the PST Parameter Set-
ting Tool or a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Terminal Report menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-super-
vision function can be viewed. A detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and
displayed in the local HMI is found in the Installation and Commissioning Manual.

In the PST under Terminal Report these summary signals are available:

• InternalStatus
• CPU-Status

54
Self supervision with internal event recorder Chapter 3
(INT) Common functions

When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information about the fault from the list of inter-
nal events can be retrieved from the PST under the menu Terminal Report - Internal Events.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact located
on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the
INT--FAIL signal (figure 24) and a couple of more severe faults that can happen in the terminal
(figure 23).

Some signals are available from the function block InternSignals (INT), see figure 22. The sig-
nals from this function block can be connected to an Event function block, which generates and
sends these signals as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the
INT-function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays
or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

INT--
INTERNSIGNALS
FAIL
WARNING
CPUFAIL
CPUWARN
ADC
SETCHGD
xx00000169.vsd

Figure 22: Function block INTernal signals.

Individual error signals from I/O modules and time synchronization can be obtained from re-
spective function block of IOM-, BIM-, BOM-, MIM-, IOPSM-modules and from the time syn-
chronization block TIME.

55
 Self supervision with internal event recorder Chapter 3
(INT) Common functions

Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module

Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault &
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL
Checksum fault A/D conv. Fault
module

Main CPU
Supply fault Fault
Parameter check

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOM

PSM, MIM or DCM
DSP = Digital Signal Processor
xxxx = Inverted signal

99000034.vsd

Figure 23: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

56
Self supervision with internal event recorder Chapter 3
(INT) Common functions

Checksum OK
A/D Converter
Module & INT--ADC
Node reports OK

Synch error Send Rem Error

>1

Remote NO RX Data
RTC-WARNING
terminal >1
communication NO TX Clock

Check RemError

TIME-RTCERR >1 INT--CPUWARN

TIME-SYNCERR
RTC-WARNING >1 INT--WARNING
INT--CPUWARN

Watchdog OK

Check CRC OK DSP Modules, 1-12 OK

& INT--CPUFAIL
Main RAM check OK
CPU OK
Parameter check

Watchdog OK &
&
Flow control OK

INT--CPUFAIL
INT--ADC >1
>1 INT--FAIL
I/O node FAIL

Start-up self-test Fault

RTC-WARNING = DIFL-COMFAIL or
RTC1-COMFAIL +
RTC2-COMFAIL

I/O node = BIM, BOM, IOM, PSM, MIM, DCM

(described in the hardware design)

99000035.vsd

Figure 24: Software self-supervision, function block INTernal signals.

57
 Blocking of signals during test (BST) Chapter 3
Common functions

7 Blocking of signals during test (BST)

7.1 Functionality
This blocking function is only active during operation in the test mode, see example in figure
25. When exiting the test mode, entering normal mode, this blocking is disabled and everything
is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within
the terminal. No settings etc. will be changed. Thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings
were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs
will be activated.

Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the documentation for the actual
unit. The description of each function follows the same structure (where applicable).

TUV--BLKTR
TEST

TUV--TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes >1

Function enable
TUV--BLOCK

TUV--VTSU

&
TUV--STUL1N

& >1 & t TUV--TRIP

TUV--STUL2N

& TUV--START
TUV--STUL3N

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

en00000121.vsd
Figure 25: Example of blocking the Time delayed Under-Voltage function.

58
About this chapter Chapter 4
Line distance

Chapter 4 Line distance

About this chapter

This chapter describes the line impedance functions in the terminal.

59
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1 Distance protection (ZM)

1.1 Application
1.1.1 General
The distance protection function is the most widely spread protection function in transmission
and subtransmission networks. It is also becoming increasingly important in distribution net-
works. The main reasons for this are:

• Its independence on communication links between the line ends, because for its
operation, it uses information about the locally available currents and voltages.
• The distance protection forms a relatively selective protection system (non-unit
protection system) in the power network. This means that it can also operate as a
remote back-up protection for other primary elements in the network.

The basic requirements for modern line protection, such as speed, sensitivity and selectivity,
with their strict requirements for dependability and security (availability), are getting more strin-
gent. In addition, modern distance protections must be able to operate in networks with existing
distance relays, which are mostly designed in a different technology (static or even electrome-
chanical relays).

Older distance relays protect in many cases power lines only at phase-to-phase and three-phase
faults. Some other protection is used for phase-to-earth faults.

The flexibility of modern distance protection is for this reason very important. This especially
applies when it is used in a complex network configuration, for example, on parallel operating
multicircuit lines and on multiterminal lines.

The selective operation of the distance protection does not depend on communication facilities
between two line ends. At the same time, the distance protection can detect faults beyond the
current transformers at the remote terminal. This functionality makes it an ideal complement to
the line differential protection function that cannot detect faults beyond the current transformer
at the opposite terminal.

1.1.2 Distance protection zones

The distance protection function in REx 5xx line protection, control, and monitoring terminals
consists of three to five independent distance protection zones, each of them comprising three
measuring elements for phase-to-earth (Ph-E) faults and/or three measuring elements for
phase-to-phase (Ph-PH) faults. Different terminals suit different requirements in different net-
works on various voltage levels. For this reason, some characteristic parameters of the distance
protection function differ from terminal to terminal. For detailed information, please refer to or-
dering particulars for each line protection terminal REx 5xx separately.

Distance protection zone five differs from other zones with respect to its speed of operation. It
starts faster than other distance protection zones and might have for this reason higher over-
reaching for different system transients. It is for this reason suggested to use it only for the ap-
plications, which permit higher overreaching, (i.e. switch-onto-fault function) or as a time
delayed distance protection zone with time delay longer than 100 ms.

60
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.1.3 Complement to the line differential protection

The distance protection function can become optional protection in some line differential pro-
tection terminals (REL 561, for example). At the same time it represents the primary protection
for faults beyond the current transformers at the opposite terminal. This functionality is achieved
by the time delayed overreaching zone (generally zone 2), which covers at least the adjacent bus-
bar and thus forms a primary or back-up protection for the busbar. So the overreaching zone
should be continuously in operation.

An underreaching zone (generally zone 1) can form a back-up to the line differential protection.
There is no need for this function as long as the differential protection is in operation. To mini-
mize the risk of unwanted operation from zone 1, this function can be activated only when the
differential function is out of operation. The most likely cause to lose the differential protection
is a failure within the communication system.

The communication scheme used with the distance protection should for this reason use another
communication channel than the one used by the line differential protection.

1.1.4 Set of simplified setting parameters

Each distance protection zone comprises basically completely independent setting parameters
for phase-to-earth, and for phase-to-phase measurement. This is an application advantage in
complex network configurations and in networks, where it is required to adjust the newly ap-
plied distance protection functions to the existing other types of relays (overcurrent earth fault,
for example).

A set of simplified optional parameters is available optionally for applications, where equal zone
reaches for all kinds of faults are a standard practice. See the table of setting parameters and the
setting instructions.

1.1.5 Basic characteristics

The distance protection function, as built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals, is a
full-scheme distance protection. This means that it has individual measuring elements for differ-
ent types of faults within different zones.

Depending on the type of terminal, it consists of up to five (for details see the corresponding or-
dering details) independent, impedance-measuring zones, each has a quadrilateral characteristic,
as symbolically illustrated in figure 26, RL and XL represent line resistance and reactance and
RF represents the resistive reach of a protective zone.

61
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

jX

Z L =R L + jX L

ArgNegRes

ϕL

R
F
ArgDir R
en00000376.vsd

Figure 26: Typical characteristic of a distance protection zone.

The static characteristic in reactive direction is a straight line, parallel with the R-axis. The mea-
suring algorithm used for the reactance part of the characteristic for phase-to-earth faults com-
pensates for the influence of the load current on the impedance measurement for distance zone
1. So the static characteristic has no declination against the R-axis. Setting of the reach in a re-
active direction is independent for each separate zone. It can also differ for ph-ph and for ph-E
measuring elements.

A straight line limits the reach of the distance protection zone in resistive direction. It is gener-
ally parallel with ZL, the line-impedance characteristic. This means that it forms, with the R-ax-
is, a ϕL line-characteristic angle. Setting of the reach in resistive direction is independent for
each separate zone. Different setting values are also possible for phase-to-earth faults (RFPE)
and for phase-to-phase faults (RFPP).

With the X-axis, the directional characteristic in the second quadrant forms an ArgNegRes set-
table angle (default value 25°). With the R-axis, the corresponding part forms a settable ArgDir
angle in the fourth quadrant (default value -15°), as in figure 26 and figure 27. All distance pro-
tection zones have the same directional characteristics.

The characteristics of the distance zones are independent of one another as far as their direction-
ality and reach in different directions are concerned. One can program the directionality of each
distance zone. Figure 27 shows a typical example of the characteristics of an impedance-mea-
suring zone when directed into forward or reverse directions. A polygon, completed with dashed
lines, represents the characteristic of a non-directional zone.

62
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

jX

RF RF

XL Forward

ArgNegRes

RF
R

ArgDir

Reverse
XL

en00000377.vsd

Figure 27: Nondirectional and directional (forward and reverse) operating characteristic

The set value of a reach in resistive direction determines whether the directional line in the sec-
ond quadrant meets, as first, the reactive or the resistive characteristic. Compare the character-
istics in figure 26 and 27

The values of the reaches in reactive and resistive direction for a particular zone are the same for
forward and reverse impedance-measuring elements and for the non-directional mode of opera-
tion.

The terminal automatically adapts the line characteristic angle according to the line parameters.
Thus, the measurement of different faults follows the real conditions in a power system. Figure
28 shows an example of an operating characteristic for the ph-E fault, which faces the forward
direction. Here, a Zloop, phase-to-earth loop measuring impedance, consists of a Z1 line opera-
tional impedance, ZN earth return impedance, and the RFPE fault resistance. The characteristic
angle of the complete measuring loop automatically follows the real system conditions and the
complete line characteristic.

63
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

jX

N Z
X
+j
line
N
=R
Z N

Z 1 =R1PE+jX1PE

Z loop

RFPE
R

visf039.vsd

Figure 28: Characteristic of the phase-to-earth measuring loop.

The earth return impedance follows for each particular zone the expression:

1
Z N = --- ⋅ ( Z0 – Z 1 )
3
(Equation 11)

with:

Z 1 = R1PE + j ⋅ X1PE
(Equation 12)

and

64
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Z 0 = R0PE + j ⋅ X0PE
(Equation 13)

Where R1PE, X1PE, R0PE and X0PE are the reach setting parameters.

It is possible to make the characteristic independent of line angle by setting the corresponding
line resistances R1PE and R0PE to their minimum possible values. For more details see setting
instructions.

The possibility to cover a sufficient fault resistance is a major consideration in short-line appli-
cations. Load encroachment problems are not so common. The independent setting option of the
reach in reactive and resistive direction is a function that greatly improves the flexibility of dis-
tance protection. For these short line applications, an optional overreaching scheme communi-
cation logic, also improves, the resistive coverage. The optimum solution in some applications
is to add the optional, directional-comparison, earth-fault, overcurrent protection to the distance
protection scheme.

In long line applications, the margin to the load impedance (to avoid load encroachment) is usu-
ally a major consideration. Quadrilateral characteristics with independent settings of the reach
in reactive (to cover sufficient length of a line) and resistive (to avoid load encroachment) direc-
tion greatly diminish the conflict that is very characteristic for circular characteristics.

A wide setting range of the reach in a reactive direction, which one set independently for each
zone with good current sensitivity — down to 10% of the rated current — is an important factor
that improves the performances of the distance protection when used on long transmission lines.

High-voltage power cables have two main characteristics that make them, from the distance pro-
tection perspective, different from overhead lines:

• They are relatively short, compared to overhead lines.

• The value of their zero-sequence reactance is very low, in many cases even lower
than the positive-sequence reactance. This results in a negative value of the char-
acteristic angle for the earth-return impedance.

Without approximation, the value of the earth-return compensation automatically follows the
parameters of a power cable for positive and zero sequence reactance and resistance. This makes
the impedance measuring function, as built into the REx 5xx line-protection terminals, suitable
for the protection of short, EHV power cables. The independent setting of the reach (in reactive
and resistive direction, separately and independently for each distance zone) improves these ba-
sic performances.

Zero-sequence, mutual impedance between different circuits of the multicircuit parallel operat-
ing lines is a factor that particularly influences the performance of distance protection during
single-phase-to-earth fault conditions. Distance protection must also operate selectively for in-
tersystem faults and simultaneous faults to the greatest possible extent.

The separate and independent setting of the parameters that determine the value of earth-return
compensation for different distance-protection zones, enables the compensation of the influence
of the zero-sequence, mutual impedance on the measurement of the impedance-measuring ele-
ments for single-phase-to-earth faults.

65
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Separate, optional, phase selectors usage, with their reach setting independent of the reach of the
zone measuring elements, greatly improves the performance of distance protection on the mul-
ticircuit parallel operating lines. At the same time and to the lowest possible level, these selectors
reduce the influence of the heavy load current, that is present during a fault, on the phase selec-
tion function within the terminals.

Additional phase-segregated, scheme communication logic (refer to the ordering information

for its availability within the different types of terminals) enables absolute phase selectivity of
the distance protection of multi-circuit, parallel operating lines.

For the selective operation of distance protection on tied and multiterminal lines, flexibility in
scheme communication logic associated with the distance protection function is a great advan-
tage. Scheme communication logic built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals enables the
adaptation of any communication scheme to the existing system conditions. The free selection
of overreaching and underreaching zones, with the free selection of a conditional zone, and in-
dependent settings of the reach for different zones, makes the REx 5xx line protection terminals
extremely flexible for such applications.

1.2 Functionality
1.2.1 Measuring principle
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the current. Ap-
parent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The calculation of the appar-
ent impedances at ph-ph faults follows the equation (example for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault):

UL1 – UL2
Zap = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
(Equation 14)

Here represent U and I the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective phase Ln
(n = 1, 2, 3)

The earth return compensation applies in a conventional manner for ph-E faults (example for a
phase L1 to earth fault):

U L1
Z ap = -----------------------------
-
I L1 + K N ⋅ I N
(Equation 15)

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same reach along the
line for all types of faults.

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and reactance X,
as presented in figure 29.

66
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

The measuring elements receive information about currents and voltages from the A/D convert-
er. The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory
locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (U), current (I),
and changes in current between samples (ΔI) are brought from the input memory and fed to a
recursive Fourier filter.

R X

en00000379

Figure 29: Apparent impedance with resistance and reactance connected in series

The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the loop im-
pedance according to the formula:

X ΔI
U = R ⋅ I + ------ ⋅ -----
ω 0 Δt
(Equation 16)

in complex notation, or:

X Δ Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R ⋅ Re ( I ) + ------ ⋅ ------------------
ω0 Δt
(Equation 17)

X ΔIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R ⋅ Im ( I ) + ------ ⋅ -----------------
ω0 Δt
(Equation 18)

with

67
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

ω0 = 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f 0
(Equation 19)

Where:
Re designates the real component,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of the volt-
age and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the Xm measured
reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:

Im ( U ) ⋅ ΔRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) ⋅ Δ Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ΔRe ( I ) ⋅ Im ( I ) – Δ Im ( I ) ⋅ Re ( I )
(Equation 20)

Re ( U ) ⋅ Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) ⋅ Re ( I )
Xm = ω 0 ⋅ Δt ⋅ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ΔRe ( I ) ⋅ Im ( I ) – ΔIm ( I ) ⋅ Re ( I )
(Equation 21)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each millisecond and compared with the set zone
reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results. This ef-
fectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage transformers or
by other causes. The algorithm is insensitive to changes in frequency, transient dc components,
and harmonics because a true replica of the protected line is implemented in the algorithm.

The directional evaluations are simultaneously performed in forward and reverse directions, and
in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive sequence memory
voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional sensitivity for faults close to
the relay point.

1.2.2 Measured impedance

Phase-to-earth measurement
The impedance measurement for the phase-to-earth faults is performed on the loop basis by
comparing the calculated Rm resistance and Xm reactance with the set values of the reach in the
resistive and reactive direction:

1
Rm ≥ R1PE + --- ⋅ ( R0PE – R1PE ) ⋅ p – RFPE
3
(Equation 22)

68
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1
R m ≤ R1PE + --- ⋅ ( R0PE – R1PE ) ⋅ p + RFPE
3
(Equation 23)

1
X m ≥ – X1PE – --- ⋅ ( X0PE – X1PE )
3
(Equation 24)

1
Xm ≤ X1PE + --- ⋅ ( X0PE – X1PE )
3
(Equation 25)

The p factor represents the relative fault position (-1≤p≤1) within the reactive operating limits
in forward and reverse direction.

Equations for resistive measurement represent in the impedance plane non-directional operating
limits in resistive direction (see figure 30). For the faults on radial lines equation 22 represents
a straight line (left side operating characteristic in loop domain), which passes the R axis at point
D = - RFPE + j0 and forms with it an angle of:

1
X1PE + --- ⋅ ( X0PE – X1PE )
3
α = atan -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1
R1PE + --- ⋅ ( R0PE – R1PE )
3
(Equation 26)

Equation 23 represents for the same conditions a straight line (right side operating limit) passing
the R axis in set point B = RFPE + j0 and is parallel to the left side operating characteristic.
Equations 24 and 25 represent in the impedance plane the operating limits in reactive direction
(see figure 30). For faults on radial lines equation 24 represents in impedance plane (loop do-
main) a straight line, which is parallel with the R axis and passes the point

1
C = 0 – j X1PE + --- ⋅ ( X0PE – X1PE )
3
(Equation 27)

Similarly represents equation 25 a straight line, which is also parallel with the R axis and passes
the point

1
A = 0 + j X1PE + --- ⋅ ( X0PE – X1PE )
3
(Equation 28)

69
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

jX
A

ArgNeg
Forward

Res
α
D
R
ArgDir B

Reverse

C en00000383.vsd

Figure 30: General operating characteristic of impedance measuring elements

Phase-to-phase measurement
The impedance measurement for the phase-to-phase faults is performed on a phase basis by
comparing the calculated Rm resistance and Xm reactance with the set values of the reach in the
resistive and reactive direction:

1
R m ≥ R1PP ⋅ p – --- ⋅ RFPP
2
(Equation 29)

1
Rm ≤ R1PP ⋅ p + --- ⋅ RFPP
2
(Equation 30)

X m ≥ – X1PP
(Equation 31)

70
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

X m ≤ X1PP
(Equation 32)

Here represents p factor the relative fault position (- 1 < p < 1) within the reactive zone reach.
Parameters R1PP, X1PP and RFPP are the reach setting parameters for the ph-ph and
three-phase faults. The first two equations represent the left and right side operating boundaries,
see figure 30. For the faults on radial feeders represent these two equations straight lines in im-
pedance plain, which cross the R axis in points:

1
D = – --- ⋅ RFPP + j0
2
(Equation 33)

and

1
B = --- ⋅ RFPP + j0
2
(Equation 34)

respectively.

Both operating limits are parallel and form with the R axis an angle of:

α = atan⎛⎝ ---------------⎞⎠
X1PP
R1PP
(Equation 35)

The third and the fourth equations represent the reactive operating boundaries in forward and
reverse direction, see figure 30. They cross in impedance plain the X axis in operating points: A
= X1PP and C = -X1PP respectively. For the faults on radial feeders this two boundaries are
straight lines, parallel with the R axis.

1.2.3 Directional lines

The results of impedance measurement are combined in “and” combination with the directional
measurement, to obtain the desired directionality for each distance protection zone separately,
see figure in “Phase-to-earth measurement”.

The directional overcurrent function, TOC3, uses the results of the directional impedance mea-
suring element to create the directional overcurrent function.

The directional measurement is based on the use of a positive-sequence voltage for the respec-
tive fault loop. For the L1-N element, the equation for forward direction is:

71
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

0.8 ⋅ U1L1 + 0.2 ⋅ U1L1M

-ArgDir < arg ------------------------------------------------------------ < ArgNegRes
IL1

(Equation 36)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is:

0.8 ⋅ U1L1L2 + 0.2 ⋅ U1L1L2M

-ArgDir < arg ----------------------------------------------------------------------- < ArgNegRes
I L1L2

Where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by
default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by
default set to 115 (degrees)

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 de-
grees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the
rated voltage Ur. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including
close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence
voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After
100 ms, the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (be-
tween 10 and 30% of the terminal rated current Ir), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the re-
verse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

1.3 Design
1.3.1 Full-scheme measurement
Up to three digital signal processors execute algorithms for up to five, full-scheme distance pro-
tection zones, depending on the type of the REx 5xx line protection terminal. Figure 31 presents
an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five, impedance-measuring zones when
both, ph-E and ph-ph fault measuring loops are included into the terminal.

72
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

The first digital-signal processor (DSP) measures different fault loops for different sin-
gle-phase-to-earth faults and for different zones. This way, it forms the resistive and reactive part
of a characteristic for single-phase-to-earth faults. The second DSP performs the same task for
the phase-to-phase fault loops. The third DSP separately performs the directional measurement
for all types of faults in forward and reverse directions. The presence of the first or the second
DSP within the terminal depends on its type and the fault type, for which the distance protection
is ordered (see ordering particulars for each REx 5xx terminal separately).

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Forward

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Reverse

en00000487.vsd

Figure 31: Location of different measuring loops within the three digital signal processors

The parallel execution of measurements in up to three different DSPs permits the separate eval-
uation of each impedance measuring loop for each zone every millisecond. This gives the dis-
tance protection function the same features as those known for the full-scheme design of
conventional distance relays (REZ 1, RAZFE). So each distance protection zone performs like
one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

1.3.2 Distance protection zone one

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring loops: phase-to-earth as
well as phase-to-phase. Different terminals REx 5xx have built-in different measuring circuits,
dependent on ordering details. In the following description consider only the phase-to-earth re-
lated signals, if only phase-to-earth measurement is included in terminal. Similarly consider
only the phase-to-phase related signals, if only phase-to-phase measurement is included in ter-
minal.

The phase-to-earth related signals are designated by LnE, where represents n the corresponding
phase number (L1E, L2E, and L3E). The phase-to-phase signals are designated by LnLm, where
n and m represent the corresponding phase numbers (L1L2, L2L3, and L3L1).

Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the logical one signal
for each separate measuring loop:

• Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described

above.

73
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

• Group functional input signal (ZM1--STCND), as presented in figure 32.

The ZM1--STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from oth-
er measuring functions within the terminal, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately (see
“ZMn--STCND functional input” in “Basic configuration”).

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STNDPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK

99000557.vsd

Figure 32: Conditioning by a group functional input signal ZM1--STCND

Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-directional
mode, is presented in figure 33.

74
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

STNDL1N
OR
STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL1
STNDL3N
STNDL1L2 OR 15 ms
AND t STL2
STNDL2L3
15 ms
STNDL3L1 AND t STL3
OR
15 ms
AND t START
OR

BLK

en00000488.vsd

Figure 33: Composition of starting signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in direc-
tional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 34.

75
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

STNDL1N-cont.
&
DIRL1N
>1 STZMPE-cont.
STNDL2N-cont. &
&
DIRL2N
STNDL3N-cont. 15 ms
>1 ZM1--STL1
& & t
DIRL3N
STNDL1L2-cont.
& 15 ms
DIRL1L2 >1 ZM1--STL2
& t
STNDL2L3-cont.
&
DIRL2L3 15 ms
>1 ZM1--STL3
STNDL3L1-cont. & t
&
DIRL3L1

>1 STZMPP-cont.
&
BLK-cont.

15 ms
>1 ZM1--START
& t

en00000489.vsd

Figure 34: Composition of starting signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented on figure
35.

76
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Timer tPP=On tPP

AND t
STZMPP
OR
Timer tPE=On tPE
AND t
STZMPE
15ms
AND TRIP
BLKTR t

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

en00000490.vsd

Figure 35: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

Phase related starting and tripping signals are available only in case, when the 1/2/3 phase trip-
ping unit is ordered within the terminal. Please, refer to ordering particulars for each REx 5xx
terminal separately.

1.3.3 Remaining distance protection zones

Distance protection zones two and three have the same composition as distance protection zone
1. All descriptions for the distance protection zone 1 are for this reason valid also for the distance
protection zones two and three. It is only necessary to replace the ZM1- designation with corre-
sponding designations ZM2- for zone two and ZM3- for zone three respectively.

Distance protection zones four (ZM4-) and five (ZM5-) are based on the same principles as the
other distance protection zones. The only difference is in the presentation of phase selective sig-
nals, belonging to these two zones. The phase selective signals are not available with distance
protection zones four and five.

1.4 Calculations
1.4.1 Setting instructions
The setting values of all parameters that belong to distance protection within the REx 5xx
line-protection terminals, must correspond to the parameters of the protected line and to the se-
lectivity plan for the network.

1.4.2 Reach setting recommendations

Before starting the setting activities for the distance protection function, check that the setting
values of the secondary rated current within the terminal correspond to the current transformers
used for the same purposes for a specific REx 5xx terminal.

77
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.4.3 Conversion to secondary impedances

Convert the primary line impedances to the secondary sides of the current and voltage instru-
ment transformers. The following relation applies to these purposes:

U sec I pri m
Z sec = -------------- ⋅ ------------ ⋅ Z prim
U prim I sec
(Equation 37)

Where:
Abbreviation: Is a set value of:
Iprim Rated primary current of the used current instrument transformers
Isec Rated secondary current of the used current instrument transformers
Uprim Rated primary voltage of the used voltage instrument transformers
Usec Rated secondary voltage of the used voltage instrument transformers
Zprim Primary impedance
Zsec Calculated secondary impedance

1.4.4 Basic zone setting recommendations

An impedance seen by the distance protection might differ from the calculated values due to:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly

under transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the cal-
culated value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the relay and the fault location, including the influ-
ence of different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of untransposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as
large as 5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected line. When
the fault resistance is considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

Usually, these errors require a limitation of the underreaching zone (normally zone 1) to 85-90%
of the protected line. For the same reason, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreach-
ing zone (normally zone 2) to at least 120% of the protected line — to ensure that the overreach-
ing zone always covers a complete line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher, but in general it
should never exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of
the shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the
maximum number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote
end of the protected line.

78
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

The back-up overreaching zone (normally zone 3) must never exceed 90% of the shortest zone
2 reach of any of the lines connected to the remote end bus. It must be at least 2 times the zone 1
reach.

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus-
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching zone,
used at the remote line terminal for the telecommunication purposes.

In the case of a long line followed by a short line, or by a large bank of low impedance trans-
formers, the mandatory 120% setting might overreach zone 1 of the adjacent line, or reach
through the transformer bank at the other line end. In such cases, one must increase the zone 2
time delay and thus secure the selectivity. The zone 2 reach must not be reduced below 120% of
the protected line section. It must be covered under all conditions.

In networks with lines tied at an intermediate location, consider an increase in the measured im-
pedance due to the fault current fed into the system at the teed point.

If a fault occurs at point F (see figure 36, also for the explanation of all abbreviations used), the
relay at point A senses the impedance:

IA + I B ⎛ I ⎞
- ⋅ ZC F = Z AC + ⎜ 1 + ----B-⎟ ⋅ Z CF
Zm = Z AC + ---------------
IA ⎝ I A⎠
(Equation 38)

IA and IB are fault currents from sources A and B respectively.

Assume that the reach of zone 1 of the relay in C covers 85% of ZCD, and the reach of zone 2
of the relay in A covers 80% of (ZAC + 85% of ZCD).

The impedance from station A up to the reach limit of the first zone at C corresponds to:

⎛ I ⎞
Z AC + 0.85 ⋅ ⎜ 1 + ----B-⎟ ⋅ Z CD
⎝ I A⎠
(Equation 39)

The reach of zone 2 can not be longer than 80% of the apparent impedance at the limit of the
first zone at C, which means that:

⎛ I B⎞
Z2 = 0.8 ⋅ Z AC + 0.85 ⋅ ⎜ 1 + ----
-⎟ ⋅ Z CD
⎝ I A⎠
(Equation 40)

79
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

ZAC ZCD

ZCF

A C F D
~
IA I +I
A B
IB

~
99000103.vsd

Figure 36: Network with line tied at an intermediate location

Also consider the apparent increase of measured impedance due to the power fed into the system
for the zone 3 setting.

When calculating the setting, consider the lowest value of the current ratio from two sources that
can occur when only one group of setting parameters is used for all operating conditions.

The distance protection function performs best in the power system with its setting values opti-
mized to specific system conditions. So use different pre-set and pre-test groups of setting pa-
rameters for different expected system operating conditions.

REx 5xx terminals have a built-in memory capacity for four groups of setting parameters, all
completely independent of one another. It is possible to set and pre-test all of them during the
commissioning. Their activation is possible:

• Locally — with the local HMI or a PC

• Remotely — with the SMS or/and SCS (depending on whether the optional re-
mote communication is built into the terminal or not).

1.4.5 Earth return compensation

A simplified measuring loop at the single-phase-to-earth faults consists of three impedances, as
shown in figure 37

80
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Where:
Abbreviation: Is a set value of:
Z1 Positive sequence impedance of the line
Rf Fault resistance
ZN Earth-return impedance
Z0 Zero sequence impedance of the line

The earth return impedance is equal to:

1
ZN = --- ⋅ ( Z 0 – Z 1 )
3
(Equation 41)

a) b) Z1
L1 I
L2
I F L3 U Rf
ZN
U

Irsd
99000036.vsd

Figure 37: Equivalent circuits for measurement at single-phase-to-earth faults.

The complete measuring impedance, according to Figure 37 is equal to:

1
Z loop = Z1 + Z N + R f = --- ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ Z1 + Z 0 ) + R f
3
(Equation 42)

The reach of distance protection zone is related to the positive sequence line impedance. So an
earth-return compensation factor has been introduced into the measuring algorithm. Its value is
equal to:

(Equation 43)

81
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

(Equation 44)

The impedance measuring algorithm within the REL 5xx terminals calculates automatically the
complex value of the earth-return compensation factor KN on the basis of the set values for the

• Positive sequence reactance of protected line section X1PE

• Positive sequence resistance of protected line section R1PE
• Zero-sequence reactance of protected line section X0PE
• Zero-sequence resistance of protected line section R0PE

1.4.6 Fault resistance

The performance of distance protection for single-phase-to-earth faults is very important, be-
cause normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single-phase-to-earth
faults.

At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance, resistance of a tow-
er construction, and tower-footing resistance.

The arc resistance can be calculated according to Warrington’s formula:

28707 ⋅ L
R arc = ------------------------------
1.4
-
I
(Equation 45)

Where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection
zone 1. Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 with time delay
of 0.7 seconds and wind speed of approximately 50 km/h.
I is the actual fault current in A.

Calculate or measure the tower-footing resistance for the specific case, because the variation of
this parameter is very large.

The distance protection cannot detect very high-resistive earth faults, because the load imped-
ance and load transfer limit its reach. For faults with resistance higher than those that can be de-
tected by the impedance measurement, an optional earth-fault overcurrent protection can be
included in the REx 5xx terminals.

82
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.4.7 Zero-sequence mutual coupling on multicircuit lines

When calculating the settings for distance-protection ph-E fault measuring elements, one must
consider zero-sequence mutual coupling between the circuits of the multicircuit lines. The pos-
itive and the negative-sequence mutual coupling generally have no significant influence on the
operation of the impedance-measuring protection schemes.

The distance protection within the REx 5xx terminals can compensate for the influence of a ze-
ro-sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single-phase-to-earth faults in the following
ways, by using:

• The possibility of different values that influence the earth-return compensation

for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a pro-
tected multicircuit line.

Most multicircuit lines have two parallel operating circuits, as shown in figure 38 The applica-
tion guide mentioned below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular
type of line. The basic principles also apply to other multicircuit lines. The Application Guide
on Protection of Complex Transmission Network Configurations describes the problems in
more detail. The CIGRE Working Group 04 of Study Committee 34 (Protection), published the
guide in November 1991.

Zm0 in figure 38 represents the zero-sequence mutual-coupling impedance between circuits of

a double-circuit, parallel operating line.

IB
ZS
Zm0
IA F

REL 5xx

99000037.vsd

Figure 38: Double-circuit parallel operating line

The parallel circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends

Figure 39 represents an equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit par-
allel operating line. Input terminals A and B are related to the input terminals of each circuit
close to the busbar A in figure 38 Terminal C is related to the F fault point, moved towards the
B busbar.

83
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Z 0 Z m0
A
Z m0
C
Z 0 Z m0
B
99000038.vsd

Figure 39: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel, oper-
ating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar

The distance protection overreaches for single-phase-to-earth faults on the protected line when
the parallel circuit is disconnected and earthed on both ends. The equivalent zero-sequence im-
pedance circuit gets the configuration as in figure 40

A I0 Z 0 Z m0

Z m0 I0
C

B Z 0 Z m0

99000039.vsd

Figure 40: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that oper-
ates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends

Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to:

2 2
Z 0 – Z m0
Z 0E = -----------------------
Z0
(Equation 46)

This influences the value of the total loop impedance as measured by the distance-protection
function, thus causing it to overreach. It is necessary to compensate for this overreaching by set-
ting the compensated zero-sequence impedance for the particular underreaching zone.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero-sequence,
mutual resistance Rm0 equals to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance
Xm0.

84
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to the equations be-
low for each particular line section and set them for the particular underreaching zone of distance
protection function.

2
⎛ Xm0 ⎞
R 0E = R 0 ⋅ ⎜ 1 + -------------------------
2⎟
-
⎝ R0 + X0 ⎠
2

(Equation 47)

2
⎛ X m0 ⎞
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ ⎜ 1 – -------------------------
2 2
-⎟
⎝ R0 + X0 ⎠
(Equation 48)

The parallel circuit out of service and not earthed

When the parallel circuit is out of service and not earthed, it has the equivalent zero-sequence
impedance circuit for faults at the remote busbar as shown in figure 41 The line zero-sequence
mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance protection in a faulty cir-
cuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance-protection zone is reduced if, due
to operating conditions, the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is set according to the condi-
tions when the parallel system is out of operation and earthed at both ends.

I0 Z 0 Z m0
A
Z m0 I0
C
Z 0 Z m0
B
99000040.vsd

Figure 41: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one cir-
cuit disconnected and not earthed

The reduction of the reach is equal to:

1
--- ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ Z1 + Z 0E ) + R f Zm0
2
3
KU = ------------------------------------------------------- = 1 – ----------------------------------------------------------
1
--- ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ Z 1 + Z0 ) + Rf Z0 ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ Z 1 + Z0 + 3R f )
3
(Equation 49)

85
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and imaginary
components of the constant A are equal to:

Re ( A ) = R 0 ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ R 1 + R 0 + 3 ⋅ Rf ) – X 0 ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ X 1 + X0 )
(Equation 50)

Im ( A ) = X 0 ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ R 1 + R 0 + 3 ⋅ R1 ) + R 0 ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ X 1 + X0 )
(Equation 51)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to:

2
Re ( A ) ⋅ X m0
Re ( K U ) = 1 + -----------------------------------------------------
-
2 2
[ Re ( A ) ] + [ Im ( A ) ]
(Equation 52)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to:

2
Im ( A ) ⋅ X m0
Im ( KU ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2 2
[ Re ( A ) ] + [ Im ( A ) ]
(Equation 53)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

Parallel circuit in service

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the protected
circuit when the parallel circuit is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is most pro-
nounced with no infeed in the line terminal closest to the fault. This reach reduction is normally
less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally increased at the
opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect the operation of a
permissive underreach scheme.

Setting of the overreaching zones

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all cases.
The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in service with
a single-phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent zero-sequence
impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 39

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to at
least:

86
Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 54)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 55)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero-sequence
mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z m0
K0 = 1 – -----------------------------------------------------------
2 ⋅ Z 1 + Z0 + Z m0 + 3R f
(Equation 56)

If the real and imaginary components of the B constant are equal to:

Re ( B ) = 2 ⋅ R1 + R 0 + Rm0 + 3 ⋅ R f
(Equation 57)

Im ( B ) = 2 ⋅ X1 + X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 58)

The real and the imaginary value of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones are
equal to:

Xm0 ⋅ Im ( B )
Re ( K0 ) = 1 – ----------------------------
2
--------------------------
2
[ Re ( B ) ] + [ Im ( B ) ]
(Equation 59)

– Xm0 ⋅ Re ( B )
Im ( K 0 ) = -----------------------------------------------------
2
-
2
[ Re ( B ) ] + [ Im ( B ) ]
(Equation 60)

87
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Use of different setting groups on double circuit lines

Each of the REx 5xx line-protection terminals has a built-in possibility for setting and activating
four different groups of setting parameters according to the system conditions. Different setting
groups can also suit different operating conditions of a multicircuit, parallel operating line.

The advantage of such an approach is a better coverage of the line during normal and abnormal
operating conditions.

The parallel circuit out of operation with both ends earthed

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means that
an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the sin-
gle-phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and
reactance) equal to:

2
⎛ Xm0 ⎞
R 0E = R 0 ⋅ ⎜ 1 + -------------------------
-⎟
⎝ R0 + X0
2 2⎠

(Equation 61)

2
⎛ X m0 ⎞
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ ⎜ 1 – -------------------------
2 2⎟
-
⎝ R0 + X0 ⎠
(Equation 62)

Double-circuit parallel line in normal operation

Normally, the underreaching zone of distance protection underreaches for the sin-
gle-phase-to-earth faults located closer to the opposite end of the circuit. To overcome this un-
derreaching and trip without a sequential tripping for the faults along the greatest possible
percentage of a line, increase the value of the equivalent zero-sequence impedance to the one
also recommended for the overreaching zones. This means that the values of the equivalent ze-
ro-sequence resistance and reactance are equal to:

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 63)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 64)

Overreaching distance protection zones

The same rules apply to the overreaching zones as in cases with a single set of setting parame-
ters. Ensure that they will always overreach. So increase the setting of the zero-sequence resis-
tance and reactance to the values that correspond to at least:

88
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

R0E = R0 + R m0
(Equation 65)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0
(Equation 66)

In many cases, it is sufficient if the influence of the zero-sequence mutual impedance is com-
pensated only in the first overreaching zone (generally, zone 2). The setting of the back-up over-
reaching zones (zone 3 and higher) is usually so high that no such compensation is necessary.

Instructions for overreaching zones are applicable for normal network configurations. Always
reconsider their settings if any special lines or other elements (cables, power transformers, etc.)
follow the double-circuit, parallel operating line.

Pay special attention to the distance protection of double-circuit, parallel operating multitermi-
nal or tapped lines.

1.4.8 Setting of the reach in resistive direction

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately for phase-to-phase, and
phase-to-earth loop measurement.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults (RFPP) and for the
phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters indepen-
dently of each other for each distance zone.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the pro-
tected zone is equal to:

1
R = --- ( 2 ⋅ R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE
3
(Equation 67)

The blinder in the resistive direction forms an angle with the R-axis equal to:

2 ⋅ X 1 + X0
ϕ loop = arctan ---------------------------
-
2 ⋅ R 1 + R0
(Equation 68)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition:

RFPE ≤ 4.5 ⋅ X1PE

(Equation 69)

89
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault resis-
tance for phase-to-earth faults. Limit the setting of the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for
phase-to-phase loop measurement to:

RFPP ≤ 3 ⋅ X1PP
(Equation 70)

Load impedance limitation

Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient
setting margin between the relay boundary and the minimum load impedance.

The minimum load impedance [Ω/phase] is calculated as:

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
(Equation 71)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the maxi-
mum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 ⋅ Imax
(Equation 72)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating conditions.
Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Note!
Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase conditions
and to guarantee correct healthy phase relay operation under combined heavy three-phase load
and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteris-
tics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive reach
of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

90
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

RFPE ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Z load

(Equation 73)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single-phase-to-earth
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More
accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

2 ⋅ R1PE + R0PE
RFPE ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Zloadmin − cosϑ – --------------------------------------------- ⋅ sinϑ
2 ⋅ X1PE + X0PE
(Equation 74)

Where
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load imped-
ance conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive reach
of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPP ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Zloadr

(Equation 75)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase faults
is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More accu-
rate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

R1PP
RFPP ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Z loadmin ⋅ cosϑ – --------------- ⋅ sinϑ
X1PP
(Equation 76)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the
protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin in cases when a power-swing detection ele-
ment is in the protection scheme; see document “Power swing detection”.

1.4.9 Setting of minimum operating current

Minimum operating fault current IMinOp defines the sensitivity of the distance protection as
built in REx 5xx terminals. Default setting value, which is 20% of basic terminal current, proved
in practice as the optimum value for the most of applications.

Sometimes it is necessary to increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current
down to 10% of terminal basic current. This happens especially in cases, when the terminal
serves as a remote back-up protection on series of very long transmission lines.

91
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the dis-
tance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

1.4.10 Setting of timers for the distance protection zones

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each other.
Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity reasons. One
can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The trip-
ping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation
parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E (tnPE, n = 1...5) and for the
ph-ph (tnPP, n = 1...5) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further
increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

1.4.11 Setting the directional lines

ArgDir and ArgNegRes setting parameters define the position of the directional lines in imped-
ance plane (see figure 42). Their default values are 15° and 25° respectively and should not be
changed unless the simulation studies for the application on very long and heavilly loaded trans-
mission lines show the need to change them accordingly.

jX

ArgNegRes

Forward

ArgDir R

Reverse

en01000130.vsd

Figure 42: Directional lines define the forward and reverse operating area for each distance
protection zone

92
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.4.12 Simplified operating characteristic

Distance protection operating characteristic follows with its reach in resisitive direction auto-
matically the line charcateristic angle. The R1PP setting parameters influences the line characa-
teristic angle for the phase-to-phase measurement while R1PE and R0PE influence the
characteristics for the phase-to-earth faults.

The operating charatceristic for phase-to-phase faults becomes independent on line characteris-
tic angle when RFPP is set to its minimum possible value (0.1 ohm for terminals with rated cur-
rent Ir = 1A and 0.02 ohm for terminals with rated current Ir = 5A). Similarly becomes
independent the operating characteristic for phase-to-earth faults, when R1PE and R0PE are set
to their minimum values. In such case it is necessary to consider the reduction of a fault resis-
tance coverage for the faults at the end of the protection zone. The simplified operating charac-
teristic is schematically presented on

jX

Zline

RFPP RFPE
R

xx00000713.vsd

Figure 43: Simplified operating characteristic with R1PP or (R1PE and R0PE) or (R1 and R0
with simplified setting parameters) are set to their minimum values

1.4.13 Set of simplified setting parameters

All statements presented under this subject apply also in case when the set of simplified setting
parameters has been ordered instead of a complete set. It is only necessary to consider the fact,
that in this case the reactive reach setting is equal for the phase-to-phase as well as for the
phase-to-earth measuring elements. This way the setting parameter X1 replaces the parameters
X1PP and X1PE. Similarly replaces X0 the X0PE parameter.

1.5 Configuration
1.5.1 Basic configuration
Each distance protection zone comprises different functional inputs, which influence its opera-
tion in different ways.

93
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.5.2 ZMn--BLOCK functional input

Logical one on ZMn--BLOCK functional input blocks completely the operation of the distance
protection zone. The input should be connected to the functional outputs of those protection and
logic functions, which are supposed to block instantaneously and completely the operation of
the zone. Functional output PSD--START of the power swing detection function is a typical ex-
ample.

1.5.3 ZMn--VTSZ functional input

The operation of the distance protection function must be blocked in cases of different faults
within the secondary voltage measuring circuits. The ZMn-VTSZ functional input should be
configured to the functional output FUSE-VTSZ of the fuse-failure supervision function or to
the binary inputs of a terminal, connected to the output contacts of external fuse-failure relays
and MCBs.

1.5.4 ZMn--BLKTR functional input

The ZMn--BLKTR functional input blocks only the tripping function of each particular distance
protection zone, but it does not block its measurement and starting output signals. It is possible
to use it in different cases together with internal logic circuits for different application purposes.

1.5.5 ZMn--STCND functional input

The ZMn--STCND functional input brings into each distance protection zone information on ex-
ternal measuring conditions, which influence the zone operation. It is necessary to configure it
to one of the following functional outputs within the terminal:

• PHS--STCNDI functional output of the phase selection function. The operation

of the distance protection zone depends in this case only on the fault current con-
ditions, as used for the operation of the phase selection elements (see the docu-
ment “Phase selection for distance protection”).
• PHS--STCNDZ functional output of the phase selection function. The operation
of the distance protection depends in this case on the operation of different phase
selection elements for a particular fault. The fault must be seen by the phase se-
lection impedance measuring elements, to release the operation of the distance
protection zone (see the document “Phase selection for distance protection”).
• GFC--STCND functional output of the general fault criteria (GFC). The opera-
tion of a particular distance protection zone is released only, if the fault has been
detected also within the operating characteristic of a GFC element (see the doc-
ument “General fault criteria”).
• FIXD-INTONE functional integer output signal. The operation of a particular
distance protection function does not depend in this case on any external current
or impedance measuring condition. All measuring loops are permitted to operate
only on the basis of the measured impedance for a particular fault conditions.

Note!
It is not recommended to connect STCND to FIXD-INTONE. Such a connection means that all
six measuring loops are continously enabled, which causes overlapping among all the six loops.
This can lead to unexpected results from the impedance protection.

94
 Distance protection (ZM) Chapter 4
Line distance

1.5.6 ZMn--START functional output

The ZMn--START functional output becomes logical one at any detection of the measured im-
pedance within a particular distance protection zone. It is not time delayed. It is possible to con-
figure it as an input signal to the scheme communication logic (as a carrier send signal) or for a
signalling purposes.

Phase selective starting signals (ZMn--STL1, ZMn--STL2, and ZMn--STL3) are available in
units with built-in single pole tripping function. They have the same functionality as the general
starting signal ZMn--START with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faulty phase.

1.5.7 ZMn--TRIP functional output

The ZMn--TRIP functional output represents a time delayed operation of a particular distance
protection zone. It is generally used for tripping purposes. It is also possible to configure the trip
output signals of time-delayed distance protection zones to the inhibit conditions of the autore-
closing function, when used within the terminal.

Phase selective tripping signals (ZMn--TRL1, ZMn--TRL2, and ZMn--TRL3) are available in
units with built-in single pole tripping function. They have the same functionality as the general
tripping signal ZMn--TRIP with the addition, that they always relate to a specific faulty phase.

1.5.8 ZMn--STND functional output

Informs about the non-directional start of the distance protection zone (see figure in “Basic char-
acteristics”). It is possible, among others, to configure it to the functional input SOTF-NDACC
functional input of the switch-onto-fault function.

95
 Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF) Chapter 4
Line distance

2 Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF)

2.1 Application
The switch-onto-fault function is a complementary function to impedance measuring functions
but may make use of information from such functions.

The switch-onto-fault function is a complementary function to impedance measuring functions.

With the switch-onto-fault (SOTF-) function, a fast trip is achieved for a fault on the whole line,
when the line is being energized. The SOTF tripping is generally non-directional in order to se-
cure a trip at fault situations where directional information can not be established, for example,
due to lack of polarizing voltage when a line potential transformer is used.

Automatic activation can be used only when the potential transformer is situated on the line side
of a circuit breaker.

2.2 Functionality
The switch-onto-fault function can be activated either externally or automatically, internally, by
using the information from a dead-line-detection (DLD) function (see figure 44).

S O T F -B C 1000 m s
S O T F -D L C N D 200 m s >1 t
& t 15 m s
S O T F -N D A C C S O T F -T R IP
& t

S O T F -B L O C K &

e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 9 2 .vs d

Figure 44: SOTF function - simplified logic diagram

After activation, a protection zone (usually a non-directional function) is allowed to give an in-
stantaneous trip. The functional output signal from the protection zone to be used, should be con-
nected to the SOTF-NDACC functional input of the SOTF function, see figure 44. The
protection zone used together with the switch-onto-fault function shall be set to cover the entire
protected line. Always use distance protection zone 5 as a criteria for the SOTF function, if the
high-speed protection function is used in the REx 5xx line protection terminal. It is also suggest-
ed to use the distance protection zone 5, when faster operation of SOTF function is required. The
non-directional instantaneous condition is maintained for 1 s after closing the line circuit break-
er.

The external activation is achieved by an input (SOTF-BC), which should be set high for acti-
vation, and low when the breaker has closed. This is carried out by an NC auxiliary contact of
the circuit breaker or by the closing order to the breaker.

96
 Automatic switch onto fault logic (SOTF) Chapter 4
Line distance

The internal automatic activation is controlled by the DLD function and its functional output
DLD--START. The DLD--START functional output is activated when all phase voltages and
phase currents have been below their set operate values. The DLD--START functional output is
usually configured to the SOTF-DLCND functional input. It activates the operation of the SOTF
function, if present for more than 200 ms without the presence of a starting signal
SOTF-NDACC.

Operation of a SOTF function can be blocked by the activation of a SOTF-BLOCK functional

input.

2.3 Calculations
2.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the switch-onto-fault function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

The low voltage and low current criteria for automatic activation is settable under the DLD--
function. Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

This setting is not critical as long as it is lower then the lowest operation voltage during normal
and emergency conditions.

The protection zone used for a switch-onto-fault criterion (SOTF zone) have to be set to cover
the entire protected line with a safety margin of minimum 20%.

97
 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) Chapter 4
Line distance

3 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC)

3.1 Application
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, also in cases where no communication chan-
nel is available, local acceleration logic is used. This logic enables fast fault clearing during cer-
tain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the auto-recloser (zone extension) or by the loss of load
current (loss-of-load acceleration).

3.2 Functionality
3.2.1 Zone extension
When the auto-recloser controls the function, a signal “auto-recloser ready” (ZCLC-AR-
READY) allows an overreaching zone (ZCLC-EXACC) to trip instantaneously (see figure 45).
For this reason, configure the ZCLC-ARREADY functional input to a AR0n-READY function-
al output of a used auto-reclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autore-
closing device.

Z C L C -B L O C K
≥1 TR IP 1 - co n t.
&
Z C L C -A R R E A D Y
1

Z C L C -N D S T &
Z C L C -E X A C C

990 00452.vsd

Figure 45: Simplified logic diagram for the local acceleration logic

After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will
be no ZCLC-ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time
functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted
auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent
an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed. On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on
line section not covered by instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) or on adjacent line, only the
first trip will be “instantaneous”.

3.2.2 Loss-of-load acceleration

When the “acceleration” is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used for “accel-
eration” (ZCLC-LLACC) is not allowed to trip “instantaneously” during normal non-fault sys-
tem conditions. When all three-phase currents have been >10% of Ir for more than 35 ms, an
overreaching zone will be allowed to trip “instantaneously” during a fault condition when one
or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite terminal,

98
 Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) Chapter 4
Line distance

see figure 46. The current measurement is performed internally in one of the built-in digital sig-
nal processors and the STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The
load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite termi-
nal. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the
phase currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.

ZCLC-BLOCK

ZCLC-BC
>1

15 ms
TRIP2 - cont.
STILL t &

ZCLC-LLACC
99000453.vsd

Figure 46: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

3.3 Calculations
3.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the local acceleration logic functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

To allow the “overreaching” trip controlled by the auto-recloser at earth-faults only, the zone
used for this function can be set with a normal reach of 85% for phase-to-phase faults, but with
an increased X1PE and X0PE setting that gives an overreach for earth-faults. This setting gen-
erally excludes the use of this zone for any purpose other than local acceleration logic.

99
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

4 General fault criteria (GFC)

4.1 Application
General fault criterion is a basic function in line protection terminals REL 501 and REL 511 as
well as in their C-series variants. The following description is relevant for all of them, with the
exception of all functionality for the earth-faults related to REL 501 and its C-series variants. It
is also possible to apply it to different other, customer specific REx 5xx terminals. Please, check
the ordering details for each specific terminal.

The distance protection function remains the most widely used protection function in all net-
works. It is a common practice to have two line protection units installed on the transmission,
and in many cases also on the subtransmission lines, to achieve a sufficient degree of availability
for the selected protection system. The remote back-up protection systems play an important,
but not essential role.

A different type of practice is applied in distribution and in certain subtransmission networks.

Here, the economical reasons dictate the use of a single line protection at each line end. If it is a
line differential protection, which depends very much on the availability of a communication
link, it is necessary to add a relative selective protection scheme (distance protection), either lo-
cally as a local backup, or also on all the adjacent lines, as a remote back-up.

Therefore, the security of the used protection schemes is very important. Many utilities require
that two different measuring elements - which must operate for the same fault - are built into the
existing distance relays.

• The first one is generally an overall impedance measuring element with a very
high reach and a long time delay for its tripping function. Since many older dis-
tance relays used for these purposes are switched scheme relays and these overall
measuring elements are used for the course detection of a fault type and starting
the zone measurement and related timers, they are called starting elements.
• The second measuring element must measure impedance in the fault loop more
precisely, according to the selectivity planning in the network. In the existing
protection schemes, these measuring relays are called measuring elements, and
usually only one of them is built into each of the conventional distance relays.

The distance protection, as built into the REx 5xx line protection terminals, is a full scheme dis-
tance protection (see the document “Distance protection”. This means that it has separate and
independent measurement for each separate fault loop in each respective distance protection
zone. Besides the full scheme design, separate measuring elements can be added to perform the
functions of the overall measuring elements in the existing protection schemes. They determine
only whether there is a fault in the bigger part of a network around the terminal. They are there-
fore called “General fault criteria” elements (GFC).

The underimpedance based GFC function has an advanced operate characteristic as presented
principally in figure 47 . The overcurrent based GFC function has built-in separate phase and
residual current measuring elements. It is also possible to use both the underimpedance and
overcurrent criteria at the same time. Please, refer to the ordering particulars for each terminal
separately for more details about the included options.

100
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

Settings of the reach for impedance based GFC elements are independent of each other to the
greatest possible extent. It is therefore possible to set the reactive reach in reverse direction in-
dependent of the one in forward direction. It is also possible to set different reactive reach for
the phase-to-phase and for the phase-to-earth measurement. The zero-sequence reactance for the
setting of the reach in forward and reverse direction can differ from one another. The algorithm
calculates automatically the earth return compensation according to the set values.

jX
XFW
ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ZONE 1

LA RLoad RF R

XRV
99000189.vsd

ZONE 4

Figure 47: Operating characteristics of the GFC (impedance measuring principle) and zone
measuring elements

Figure 47 presents principally a shaped operate characteristic for an impedance based GFC func-
tion. Different designations have the following meaning:

• XFW: reactive reach in forward direction

• XRV: reactive reach in reverse direction
• RF: resistive reach within the unlimited area
• RLoad: resistive reach restricted by the minimum load impedance
• LA: expected load impedance angle

The setting of the resistive reaches is independent of that of the reactive reaches. It is possible
to have the resistive reach different for phase-to-earth (ph - E) and phase-to-phase (ph-ph) or
three-phase faults. To make the GFC function as sensitive as possible to faults with higher fault

101
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

resistances, a separate setting of the reach in resistive direction in the possible load impedance
area has been introduced. In addition to this, a characteristic is also adaptable to the possible load
impedance with a settable load impedance angle.

4.1.1 Phase preference logic

Phase preference logic is a possible addition to the GFC in isolated and high-impedance earthed
networks, where the single-pole-to-earth faults are not to be cleared by impedance measurement.
To achieve a fast and selective tripping of one of the earth faults in case of cross-country faults
(two single-phase to earth faults on different lines in network), the phase preference logic selects
one of faulty lines to be tripped according to a selected preference scheme.

4.2 Functionality
4.2.1 Impedance measuring elements
The basic algorithm for the operation of the impedance based GFC is the same as that for the
distance protection measuring function (see section “Distance protection”). The difference,
compared to the zone-measuring elements, is in the combination of the measuring quantities
(currents and voltages) for different types of faults.

4.2.2 Measuring elements for the ph-E faults

The GFC elements for the ph-E faults measure the impedance according to the following equa-
tion:

U Ln
ZMLn = ---------------------------------
-
I Ln ⋅ ( 1 + K NF )
(Equation 77)

Where:
ULN is a phasor of measured voltage in phase Ln
ILN is a phasor of measured current in phase Ln
KNF is an earth return compensation factor, calculated automatically according
to the equation:

X0FwPE – X1FwPE
KNF = --------------------------------------------------------
3 ⋅ X1FwPE
(Equation 78)

Where:
X1FwPE and are the reactive reach setting parameters for forward direction.
X0FwPE

102
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

A separate earth return compensation is calculated according to similar formula with the reactive
reach setting parameters for reverse direction, X1RvPE and X0FwRv respectively.

The operation of the corresponding measuring loop occurs, when the following conditions are
satisfied.

Im ( Z MLn ) < X1FwPE

(Equation 79)

and

X1RvPE < Im ( Z ML n )

(Equation 80)

as well as:

RFPE
Re ( Z MLn ) <
1+KNF
(Equation 81)

Where:
RFPE is the resistive reach for the phase-to-earth measurement, outside the load
impedance area

The resistive reach is limited within the load impedance area, which is defined by the load angle
ARGLd. The resistive reach conditional equation changes in this case to:

RLd
Re ( ZM Ln ) < --------------------
1 + KN F
(Equation 82)

Where:
RLd is a set resistive reach within the load impedance area.

Besides this, the relation between the measured currents must correspond to the following con-
ditions:

Iph > 0.5 ⋅ IMinO p

(Equation 83)

103
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

and

3 ⋅ I 0 > 0. 5 ⋅ IMinOp
(Equation 84)

and

INReleasePE
3 ⋅ I0 > ------------------------------------ ⋅ I phmax ⇒ IN1
100
(Equation 85)

Where:
IMinOp is the set value of a minimum operating current for the distance protection
Iphmax is a maximum current among all three phase currents.
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation
in the ph-E fault loops (in %)
IN1 is a corresponding logic signal.

4.2.3 Measuring elements for ph-ph and three-phase faults

The GFC elements for the ph-ph faults measure the impedance according to the equation

ULm – ULn
ZMLmLn = --------------------------
-
ILm – I Ln
(Equation 86)

The operation occurs under the following conditions:

Im ( ZM LmLn ) < X1FwPP

(Equation 87)

and

X1Rv PP < Im ( ZMLmLn )

(Equation 88)

as well as:

104
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

RFPP
Re Z MLmLn < 2
(Equation 89)

Where:
X1FwPP is a forward reactive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement
X1RvPP is a reverse reactive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement
RFPP is an unlimited resistive reach for the phase-to-phase measurement

The resistive reach is limited within the load impedance area, which is defined by the load angle
ARGLd. The resistive reach conditional equation changes in this case to:

RLd
Re ( Z MLmLn ) < -----------
2
(Equation 90)

Besides this, the relation between the measured currents must correspond to the following con-
ditions:

Iph – ph > I MinOp

(Equation 91)

and

3 ⋅ I 0 < ( 0, 2 ⋅ I r )
(Equation 92)

or

INBlockPP
3 ⋅ I 0 < ---------------------------- ⋅ I phmax ⇒ IN2
100
(Equation 93)

Ir is the rated current of the terminal and IN2 is a corresponding logic signal. Iphmaxis the max-
imum current of all three phase currents. INBlockPP is the setting for the residual current level
below which operation of the ph-ph fault loops is allowed. Iph-ph is a difference of phase currents
in observed faulty phases.

105
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

4.2.4 Current-based GFC elements

The current-based GFC measuring elements measure continuously three phase currents and the
residual current, comparing them with the set values. Fourier's recursive filter filters the current
signals, and a separate trip counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements.

If Ilim is a set value of the operating current for the phase measuring elements (designated by I>
in the terminal), and INlim for the measuring element that measures the residual current (desig-
nated by IN> in the terminal), the operating conditions are as follows:

IL1 > I lim ⇒ IL1

(Equation 94)

for the phase L1 current measuring element

IL2 > I lim ⇒ IL2

(Equation 95)

for the phase L2 current measuring element

IL3 > I lim ⇒ IL3

(Equation 96)

for the phase L3 current measuring element

3 ⋅ I 0 > I Nli m ⇒ IN
(Equation 97)

for the residual current measuring element

where ILn and IN are corresponding logical signals.

4.3 Design
A separate digital signal processor, independent of the zone measuring elements, performs the
measurement for the general fault criteria. The built-in logic follows the following Boolean
equations:

GFCL1 = I> ⋅ IL1 + Z< ⋅ IN1 ⋅ ZML1 + Z< ⋅ IN2 ⋅ ( ZML1L2 + ZML1L3 )
(Equation 98)

106
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

GFCL2 = I> ⋅ IL2 + Z< ⋅ IN1 ⋅ ZML2 + Z< ⋅ IN2 ⋅ ( ZML2L3 + ZML1L2 )
(Equation 99)

GFCL3 = I> ⋅ IL3 + Z< ⋅ IN1 ⋅ ZML3 + Z< ⋅ IN2 ⋅ ( ZML3L1 + ZML2L3 )
(Equation 100)

GFCN = I> ⋅ IN + Z< ⋅ IN1 ⋅ ZML1 + ZML2 + ZML3

(Equation 101)

Where:
Z< represents active underimpedance mode of operation (setting)
I> represents active overcurrent mode of operation (setting)

Later on, the signals produced by the GFC measuring elements serve for different parts of the
distance protection. These are:

• indication of the faulty phases

• phase selection for the zone measuring elements
• general criteria for the operation of the trip logic
• time delayed trip as a backup function to the zone measuring elements
• phase preference logic, when included in a terminal

Figure 48 presents basic logic circuits dealing with current conditions for the detection of ph-E
and ph-ph faults (consider only the parts and signals, which correspond to the actual functional-
ity of a used terminal)

107
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

3 ⋅ I0 ≥ 0.5 ⋅ IMinOp IRELPE - cont.

15 ms
& GFC--STPE
& t

3⋅I0 ≥ (INRelease PE/100) ⋅ Iph max

GFC--BLOCK

15 ms
GFC--STPP
3 ⋅ I0 ≤ 0.2 ⋅ Ir 10 ms 20 ms & t
& t t
or IRELPP - cont.

3⋅I0 ≤ (INBlockPP/100) ⋅ Iph max

en01000048.vsd

Figure 48: Detection of ph-E and ph-ph fault conditions

108
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

NO FILTER ACTIVE = 1 15 ms
& ≥1 GFC--STNDPE
ST3U0 ≥1 t

&
STUL1

& ≥1
STUL2

& INDL1N - cont.

STUL3
INDL2N - cont.
IRELPE-cont.
INDL3N - cont.
&
GFCN
≥1 15 ms
GFC--STNDL1
& ≥1 t
GFCL1N

& ≥1 15 ms
GFCL2N GFC--STNDL2
≥1 t
&
GFCL3N
≥1 15 ms
≥1 GFC--STNDL3
t
GFCL1L2
&

GFCL2L3
& INDL1L2 - cont.
INDL2L3 - cont.
GFCL3L1 INDL3L1 - cont.
&
IRELPP-cont.

99000546.vsd

Figure 49: Composition of non-directional GFC signals

Figure 49 presents schematically the composition of non-directional general criteria signals

GFC--STNDLn, where n presents the corresponding phase number. Signals GFCLnN and GF-
CLmLn (m and n change between 1 and 3 according to the phase number) represent the fulfilled
operating criteria for each separate loop measuring element.

109
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

&

INDL1N - cont.
& 15 ms 15 ms
DFWL1N GFC--STFW1PH
& >1 t t

INDL1L2 - cont. 15 ms
GFC--STFWL1
& >1 t
DFWL1L2

INDL3L1 - cont.
&
&
DFWL3L1 15 ms
GFC--STFWPE
INDL2N - cont.
>1 t

&
DFWL2N
& 15 ms
INDL1L2 - cont. GFC--STFWL2
t
& >1
15 ms 15 ms
INDL2L3 - cont. GFC--STFW2PH
& >1 t t
&
DFWL2L3

INDL3N - cont.
& &
DFWL3N 15 ms
GFC--STFWL3
t
INDL2L3 - cont.
& >1
15 ms
INDL3L1 - cont. GFC--STFW3PH
& t
&
en00000483.vsd
Figure 50: Composition of forward directed GFC signals.

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented sche-
matically in figure 50 and figure 51. The directional criteria appears as a condition for the correct
phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous and evolving faults
on lines within the complex network configurations.

Signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring
loops with phases Ln and Lm (m and n are running between 1 and 3). Designation FW (figure
50) represents the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 51) represents the re-
verse direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal pro-
cessor.

110
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

INDL1N - cont.
&
DRVL1N

INDL1L2 - cont. 15 ms
GFC--STRVL1
& >1 t
DRVL1L2

INDL3L1 - cont.
&
DRVL3L1 15 ms
GFC--STRVPE
INDL2N - cont.
>1 t

&
DRVL2N

INDL1L2 - cont. 15 ms
GFC--STRVL2
& >1 t

INDL2L3 - cont. INDL1N -cont.

& INDL2N - cont.
DRVL2L3
INDL3N - cont. GFC--STCND
Bool to
INDL3N - cont. INDL1L2 - cont. integer
& INDL2L3 - cont.
DRVL3N INDL3L1 - cont.

INDL2L3 - cont. 15 ms
GFC--STRVL3
& >1 t

INDL3L1 - cont.
&

en00000484.vsd
Figure 51: Composition of reverse directed GFC signals and measured impedance related
zone starting conditions

Figure 52 presents a composition of a GFC tripping signal, which consists of two different con-
ditions: earth fault and phase-to-phase fault operating conditions. Each path has its own timer
(tPE and tPP), to further increase the flexibility of a complete function

111
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

Timer tPE=On
INDL1N-cont. tPE
INDL2N-cont. & t
≥1
INDL3N-cont.
15ms
GFC--TRIP
≥1 t
Timer tPP=On
INDL1L2-cont. tPP
INDL2L3-cont. & t
≥1
INDL3L1-cont.

en000000485.vsd

Figure 52: Composition of time-delayed tripping signal

Figure 53 presents a composition of a starting condition integer signal, which is supposed to be

configured to the distance protection zones and their starting condition inputs (ZMn--STCND).
The signal controls the operation of different measuring loops in each distance protection sepa-
rately.

PPINDL1N - cont. IN:

& 1
Bool to
PPINDL2N - cont. integer
& 2

PPINDL3N - cont. GFC - STCND

Σ IN
2/3ENABLE - cont. & 4

INDL1L2 - cont.
8
INDL2L3 - cont.
16
INDL3L1 - cont.
32
99000541.vsd

Figure 53: GFC start condition with phase preference

4.3.1 Phase preference logic

The phase preference logic has two different parts:

• The first part inhibits tripping at single-pole earth faults

• The second part initiates tripping at cross-country faults, together with the selec-
tion of the selected fault-loop, to trip the preferred line.

112
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

The initiation of the tripping is achieved by measuring the earth-fault current (3·I0). At sin-
gle-pole earth-faults in isolated or high-impedance earthed systems, a transient residual current
3·I0 with a duration up to 60 ms can occur. To eliminate false release and consequently false trip-
ping at single-phase-to-earth faults, a logic evaluating the earth-fault voltage (3·U0) and the
phase-to-phase voltages is used.

This logic prevent false tripping without delaying the tripping at cross-country faults, see figure
54. In addition to the cross country current controlled logic it is possible to activate a logical 2
out of 3 criteria. The logic blocks the GFC forward and reverse functions until two earth-faults
are detected by the GFC nondirectional function. See figure 55.

STUL1
&
STUL2
& >1
&
STUL3
&
& >1 IU E N A B L E
100 m s 100 m s
ST3U 0 t t
150 m s
S T IN P P L t

e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 8 6 .vs d

Figure 54: Cross-country fault detection logic

The phase preference logic is controlled by the GFC output signals. Both cyclic, acyclic and acy-
clic with one phase blocked can be chosen with the different phase preference combinations. The
principle for each type of logic are shown in figures 56 to 58.

113
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

Block1phTrip =OFF
Block1phTrip =ON

INDL1N - cont.
&
2/3 ENABLE - cont.
INDL2N - cont. >1
&
& >1
INDL3N - cont.
&

STUL1
&
STUL2
& >1
&
STUL3
&
100 ms 100 ms
ST3UO t t IUENABLE - cont.
& >1
STINPPL

99000542.vsd

Figure 55: Cross-country fault detection logic with phase preference logic

NO PREF. ACTIVE = 1
>1
NO FILTER ACTIVE = 1

IUENABLE - cont. >1

PPINDL1N - cont
&
INDL1N - cont.

PPINDL2N - cont
&
INDL2N - cont.

PPINDL3N - cont
&
INDL3N - cont.

99000537.vsd

Figure 56: Phase preference logic with no filter setting and no preference setting

114
General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

132c ACTIVE = 1
IUENABLE - cont.
PPINDL1N - cont
INDL1N - cont. &

PPINDL2N - cont
INDL2N - cont. &

PPINDL3N - cont
INDL3N - cont. &

99000538.vsd

Figure 57: Cyclic phase preference logic with 132c setting active

132a ACTIVE = 1
IUENABLE - cont. PPINDL1N - cont
&
INDL1N - cont.

INDL2N - cont. & PPINDL2N - cont

PPINDL3N - cont
INDL3N - cont. &

99000539.vsd

Figure 58: Acyclic phase preference logic with 132a setting active

115
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

132aBL ACTIVE = 1
IUENABLE - cont. PPINDL1N - cont
&
INDL1N - cont.
INDL2N - cont.
PPINDL2N - cont
&

PPINDL3N - cont
INDL3N - cont. &

99000540.vsd

Figure 59: Acyclic phase preference logic with one phase blocked, 132Bl. setting active

4.4 Calculations
4.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the general fault criteria functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in
local HMI.

For the remote setting facilities and local HMI via a personal computer, please refer to the cor-
responding SMS or SCS documents.

The first parameter under the GFC is the operating mode, which is selectable among two differ-
ent possibilities:

Operation Z< = On the GFC will operate on an underimpedance basis

Operation I> = On the GFC will operate on an over current basis

It is also possible to have active both operating modes at the same time. The available operating
mode depends on the functions available within the terminal. Only one of two or both operating
modes are available depending on ordering. Please, refer to ordering particulars for each termi-
nal separately.

4.4.2 General setting parameters

Operation of the GFC measurement is enabled or disabled by setting the Operation = On or Off
respectively. Setting the parameters Timer tPP and Timer tPE On or Off enables or disables the
time delayed tripping, caused by the GFC measurement for the ph-ph and ph-E faults respective-
ly.

116
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

If not the 2 out of 3 logic is active it is recommend to set Timer tPP and Timer tPE to Off in
isolated or high-impedance earthed networks, if the distance protection is not intended or per-
mitted to operate at single-phase-to-earth faults.

Setting of tPP and tPE timers define the tripping time delay of the GFC function, if activated.

4.4.3 Setting parameters for the I> mode of operation

The setting of the operating value for the overcurrent GFC phase measuring elements IP> must
be higher than the maximum expected load current in the protected feeder. It is necessary to con-
sider an additional margin of at least 10% to the declared inaccuracy of the current instrument
transformers and measuring elements.

There will always be a certain low value of measured residual current 3I0 in the measuring cir-
cuits due to the differences in the current instrument transformers. Higher values can be expect-
ed on longer lines with a higher operating voltage. The presence of the close untransposed lines,
where the zero-sequence mutual coupling effect is significant, will additionally increase the ap-
parent residual current measured by the terminal.

Therefore, it is usually necessary to set the operating value of the earth-fault current measuring
element IN> at a minimum of 10% of the line nominal current. The setting value must be in-
creased on the longer, untransposed lines and in cases where the zero-sequence mutual coupling
effect is significant.

4.4.4 Setting parameters for the Z< mode of operation

The setting instructions refer to the operating characteristic of the GFC elements as shown prin-
cipally in a figure in “Application”. The GFC characteristic should, in general, cover all the im-
pedance measuring zones used for the distance protection, regardless of their directionality.

The following parameters should be set for the GFC, operating in the underimpedance mode:

• X1FwPP is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach

of the GFC elements in forward direction for ph-ph faults.
• X1FwPE is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach
of the GFC elements in forward direction for ph-E fault (not available in REL
501).
• X0FwPE is a zero-sequence reactance that defines the total reactive reach of the
GFC earth-fault loop measuring elements in forward direction (not available in
REL 501) for the ph-E faults.
• X1RvPP is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach
of the GFC elements in reverse direction for the ph-ph faults. We recommend
having X1RvPP > =10% of X1FwPP in order to guaranty a correct measurement
for close up faults.
• X1RvPE is a positive-sequence reactance that corresponds to the reactive reach
of the GFC elements in reverse direction for the ph-E faults. We recommend hav-
ing X1RvPE > = 10% of X1FwPE in order to guaranty a correct measurement for
close up faults.
• X0RvPE is a zero-sequence reactance that defines the complete reactive reach of
the GFC earth-fault loop measuring elements in reverse direction (not available
in REL 501) for ph-E faults. We recommend having X0RvPE > =10% of
X0FwPE in order to guaranty a correct measurement for close up faults.

117
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

• RFPP is the resistive reach of the GFC elements for multi-phase faults. It should
be set as a loop value of the measured resistances, according to the formula:

RFPP > 2 ⋅ R1PP + RF

(Equation 102)

Where:
R1PP is a corresponding line positive sequence resistance
RF is the expected fault resistance between two faulty phases.

• RFPE is the resistive reach of the GFC elements for the phase-to-earth-faults (not
available in REL 501). It should be set as a loop value of the measured resistanc-
es, according to the formula:

1
RFPE > --- ⋅ ( 2 ⋅ R1PE + R0PE ) + RF
3
(Equation 103)

Where:
R1PE is a corresponding line positive-sequence resistance
R0PE is a corresponding line zero-sequence resistance
RF is a fault resistance as expected for the single-phase-to-earth-faults.

• RLd is the resistive reach in the load impedance area. For the corresponding in-
structions, please refer to the “Setting instructions” for the distance protection
function (document Distance protection). Observe the loop character of this set-
ting parameter. It should be set generally to:

RLd < 1.6 ⋅ R Lmin

(Equation 104)

Where:
RLmin represents the minimum expected load resistance

118
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

• ARGLd is the maximum expected load angle that could appear under the maxi-
mum load conditions on a protected line. One of the following expressions can
be used for its calculation:

P- = asin ---
ARGLd = acos --- Q- = atan ---
Q-
S S P
(Equation 105)

Where:
S is the apparent power
P is the active power
Q is the reactive power

• Setting parameters INReleasePE and INBlockPP (both are settable in percentage

of the terminal rated current Ir) control the operation of the phase-to-earth and the
phase-to-phase measuring elements. They should in general be set to the default
values, which are INReleasePE = 20%, and INBlockPP = 40%. Special system
studies and calculations of fault currents are necessary in cases, when the remote
end positive sequence source impedance is much higher than the zero sequence
source impedance. The results of these studies may require in some special cases
to set these parameters different from their default values.

4.4.5 Phase preference logic

The phase preference logic is set in the menu under:

Setting
Functions
Group n
Impedance
GenFltCriteria

At “PhasePref” setting “NoFilter” the IUENABLE criteria is not blocking the tripping at sin-
gle-phase-to-earth faults. The “NoPref” setting is blocking the tripping at single-phase-to-earth
faults but allowing tripping without phase preference at “cross-country” faults.

The phase preference tripping at “cross-country” faults is defined in the setting menu that phase
L1 is tripped before L2 and L2 before L3 by the notation 123. The preference can be cyclic or
acyclic by the added “c” or “a”. With the “Bl” it is indicated that fault in the last noted phase
will not be tripped at any cases.

The setting IN> shall be chosen higher than the maximum

3 ⋅ I0
(Equation 106)

119
 General fault criteria (GFC) Chapter 4
Line distance

current at the relay point during any single-phase-to-earth fault. The

3 ⋅ U0 >
(Equation 107)

is normally set to 30% of base voltage U1b.

The setting UPP< and UPN< are used for the non directional phase selection and is normaly set
to 70 % of base voltage U1b.

120
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

5 Power swing detection (PSD)

5.1 Application
5.1.1 General
Various changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotating units. The most typical rea-
sons for these oscillations are big changes in load or changes in power system configuration
caused by different faults and their clearance. As the rotating masses strive to find a stable op-
erate condition, they oscillate with damped oscillations until they reach the final stability.

The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbances and on the natural sta-
bility of the system. The oscillation rate depends also on the inertia of the system and on the im-
pedance between different generating units.

These oscillations cause changes in phase and amplitude of the voltage difference between the
oscillating parts of the power system. This causes changes in power flow between two oscillat-
ing parts of the system - the power swings from one part to another - and vice-versa.

jX

Impedance locus at power swing

R
99000158.vsd

Figure 60: Impedance plane with the locus of the measured impedance and operate charac-
teristics of the zone measuring elements.

Distance relays see these power swings as the swinging of the measured impedance in relay
points. The measured impedance varies with time along a locus in an impedance plane (see fig-
ure 60). This locus can enter the operate characteristic of a distance protection and causes, if no
preventive measures have been considered, its unwanted operation.

5.1.2 Basic characteristics

The power swing detection function (PSD) is optionally available in most of the REx 5xx termi-
nals, which include also the line distance protection function. Please, refer to the ordering infor-
mation for each terminal separately.

121
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

The PSD function detects reliably power swings with periodic time of swinging as low as 200
ms (i.e. slip frequency as high as 10% of the rated frequency on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the
swings under normal system operate conditions as well as during dead-time of a single-pole re-
closing cycle.

The function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults during power swings, when
used together with optional power swing logic (PSL) and some additional functions, available
within the REx 5xx terminals. The operation of the distance protection function remains stable
for external faults during the power swing condition, even with the swing (electrical) centre on
the protected line.

5.2 Functionality
5.2.1 Theory of operation
The operation of the PSD function is based on the measurement of the transition time needed for
the transient impedance to pass the area between the outer and the inner impedance characteristic
of the PSD function, see figure 61.

jX
KX ⋅ X 1IN

X 1IN

Impedance locus at power swing

− KR ⋅ R1IN R1IN

− R1IN
R
KR ⋅ R1IN

tP1
− X 1IN

− KX ⋅ X 1IN
99000159.vsd

Figure 61: Operating principle and characteristic of the PSD function.

The impedance measuring principle is based on the same impedance measuring algorithm as
used by the distance protection zone measuring elements, see section 1 "Distance protection
(ZM)".

122
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

The impedance measurement within the PSD function is performed by solving the following
equations (n = 1, 2, 3 for each corresponding phase):

⎛ U L1⎞
Re ⎜ ----------⎟ ≤ R set
⎝ I L1 ⎠
(Equation 108)

and

⎛ U L1⎞
Im ⎜ ----------⎟ ≤ X set
⎝ I L1 ⎠

Where:
Xset corresponds to the reactive reach setting values X1IN for the internal and
(KX . X1IN) for the external operate characteristic of the PSD function and
Rset corresponds to the resistive reach setting values R1IN for the internal and
(KR . R1IN) for the external operate characteristic.

5.3 Design
5.3.1 Basic detection logic
The PSD function can operate in two operating modes:

• The “1-of-3” operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of three
phases. Figure 62 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DET-L1 in
this particular phase. The internal signal PSD-CONS.-int. is related to the same
signal in figure
• The “2-of-3” operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 63 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.

Signals ZOUTLn (external boundary) and ZINLn (internal boundary) are related to the opera-
tion of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (Ln represents the corre-
sponding phase L1, L2, and L3) They are internal signals, produced by the corresponding digital
signal processors (DSPs).

All tP1 timers in figure 62 have the same settings. They serve the detection of initial power
swings, which are usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timers become activated
for the detection of the consecutive swings if the measured impedance exits the operate area and
returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. All tP2 timers in figure 62 have the
same setting.

123
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

tP1 &
ZOUTL1
& t
ZINL1
tP2 ≥1
tW &
t t
PSD-DET-L1
&

en01000056.vsd

Figure 62: Detection of power-swing in phase L1.

PSD-DET-L1
PSD-DET-L2 DET1of3 - int.
≥1
PSD-DET-L3

&

DET2of3 - int.
& ≥1

&

en01000057.vsd

Figure 63: Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode.

5.3.2 Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 64 presents a simplified logic diagram for a PSD function. The internal signals DET1of3
and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 62 and figure 63 respectively.

Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input
signals PSD--REL1PH, PSD--BLK1PH, PSD--REL2PH, and PSD--BLK2PH (see the signal list
in the appendix to this document).

124
Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

ZOUTL1 PSD--ZOUT
≥1
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
PSD--ZIN
ZOUTL3 & ZINL2 ≥1

ZINL3
tEF
PSD--TRSP
t &
PSD--I0CHECK
10 ms
PSD--START
& t
PSD--BLKI02 ≥1

tR1
& t INHIBIT
≥1

tR2
PSD--BLKI01 & t
PSD--BLOCK

DET1of3 - int.
PSD--REL1PH
&
PSD--BLK1PH PSD - CONS. - int.
tH
DET2of3 - int. ≥1 t
PSD--REL2PH
&
PSD--BLK2PH ≥1 PSD--START
&
PSD--EXTERNAL

en01000060.vsd

Figure 64: PSD function - simplified block diagram.

There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

• Logical 1 on functional input PSD--BLOCK inhibits the output PSD--START

signal instantaneously.
• The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1, if the power swing has been de-
tected and the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for
the time, which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to
disable this condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the PSD--BLKI01
functional input.

125
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

• The INHIBIT internal signal becomes logical 1 after the time delay, set on tR1
timer, if the power swing appears before the functional PSD--I0CHECK be-
comes logical 1. It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical
1 signal to the BLKI02 functional input.
• The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input
PSD--I0CHECK appears within the time delay, set on tEF timer and the imped-
ance has been seen within the outer characteristic of the PSD operate character-
istic in all three phases. This function prevents the operation of the PSD function
in cases, when the circuit breaker closes on persistent single-phase fault after sin-
gle-pole auto-reclosing dead time, if the initial single-phase fault and single-pole
opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phas-
es.

5.4 Calculations
5.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the power swing detection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

5.4.2 Setting the reach of the inner characteristic

Set the reach of the inner characteristic R1IN in the resistive direction, see figure 65, as well as
X1IN in the reactive direction, so that the inner operate characteristic completely covers all dis-
tance protection zones, which are supposed to be blocked by the PSD function. It is recommend-
ed to consider at least 10% of additional safety margin.

126
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

jX

KX · X1IN

X1IN

-KR · R1IN - R1IN

- R1IN

KR · R1IN

-X1IN

-KX · X1IN

en01000058.vsd

Figure 65: Operating characteristic of the PSD function

5.4.3 Setting the reach of the outer characteristic

Set the reach of the outer characteristic as a multiple of a reach for the inner characteristic. KR
and KX are the setting parameters, expressed in percentages of the set reaches in resistive
(R1IN) and reactive (X1IN) direction for the inner operate characteristic.

R1 OUT
K R = 100 ⋅ ---------------------
R1IN
(Equation 109)

and

127
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

X1OUT
KX = 100 ⋅ ---------------------
X1IN
(Equation 110)

R1OUT and X1OUT are the calculated values of the reach for the outer characteristic. Also ob-
serve the fact, that the minimum values for KR and KX are equal to 120%.

5.4.4 Limitation of the resistive reach

The reach in the resistive direction should not exceed more than 80% of the minimum load re-
sistance RLmin. This stands for both the reach of the inner as well as for the reach of the outer
characteristic.

R1IN ≤ 0.8 ⋅ R Lmin

(Equation 111)

and

R Lmi n
KR ≤ 80 ⋅ ---------------
R1IN
(Equation 112)

5.4.5 Determination of the impedance difference and speed

The resistive transition area, which is equal to:

ΔR = R1OUT – R1IN
(Equation 113)

should be set as wide as possible, considering the limitations for covering the desired distance
protection zones and not entering the load impedance area. At the same time, it depends on the
maximum required initial speed of the impedance, which should still be recognised as a power
swing and not as a fault. The initial speed of impedance must be determined by the system stud-
ies. It is recommended to try the first iteration with the default time delay for the tP1 timer, which
is 45 ms, and calculate, if the set speed of the transition impedance corresponds to the condition:

R1 OUT – R1IN ⎛ Δ Z⎞
------------------------------------------ > -------
tP1 ⎝ Δt ⎠ req
(Equation 114)

The expression:

128
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

( ΔZ ⁄ Δt ) req
(Equation 115)

represents the maximum required speed of impedance, which should still be recognised as an
initial power swing. Reduce the setting of the tP1 time delay only, if the upper condition can not
be satisfied with the resistance settings on their specified minimum and maximum possible val-
ues.

System studies also determine the maximum possible speed of the transition impedance. Set the
tP2 timer so, that the maximum detectable speed of the transition impedance satisfies the condi-
tion:

R1OUT – R1IN ⎛ Δ Z⎞
------------------------------------------ > -------
tP2 ⎝ Δ t ⎠ m ax
(Equation 116)

The expression :

( ΔZ ⁄ Δt ) ma x
(Equation 117)

represents the maximum required speed of impedance, which should still be recognised as a
power swing within the developed stage.

5.4.6 Reactive reach

The reactive transition area should generally be equal to the resistive transition area. If supposed,
that the reactive reach of the inner characteristic is determined by the distance protection zone
reach and equal to X1IN, then the reactive multiplication factor must be equal to:

KX = 100 ⋅ -------------- ⋅ ⎛⎝ ---------- – 1⎞⎠ + 1

R1IN KR
X1IN 100
(Equation 118)

Set the KX to 120%, if the calculation requires a value less than 120%.

5.4.7 tH hold timer

System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH see section 5.2 "Functional-
ity". The purpose of this timer is, to secure continuous output signal from the PSD function dur-
ing the power swing, even after the transient impedance leaves the PSD operate characteristic
and is expected to return within a certain time due to continuous swinging. Consider the mini-
mum possible speed of power swinging in a particular system.

129
 Power swing detection (PSD) Chapter 4
Line distance

5.4.8 tR1 inhibit timer

The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit criteria
for the PSD function. It prevents operation of the function for short transients in the residual cur-
rent measured by the terminal.

5.4.9 tR2 inhibit timer

The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSD--START signal from the PSD function, if the
measured impedance remains within the PSD operate area for a time, longer than the set tR2 val-
ue. This time delay was usually set to approximately two seconds in older power-swing devices.

5.4.10 tEF timer for reclosing on persistent single-phase faults

The setting of the tEF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the opening time of a circuit
breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase auto-reclosing together with the breaker closing
time.

130
 Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

6 Radial feeder protection (PAP)

6.1 Application
The most common application of Radial feeder protection is to provide tripping at the remote
end of lines with passive load or with weak end infeed.

The radial feeeder protection function must be included in the terminal at the weak infeed end
of the feeder.

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection at the re-
mote end of a feeder can detect the fault. The detection requires a minimum of fault current, nor-
mally > 20 % of Ir.

The fault current can be low due to absence of generated power or low short circuit current of
the source.

The fault current can initially be too low due to the fault current distribution.

In this case the fault current increases when the breaker opens at the strong line end, and a se-
quential tripping is achieved.

The detection of the fault by an independent tripping zone 1 is then required.

To avoid sequential tripping as described or when zone1 is not avaible, the protection terminal
must be provided with the radial feeder protection function.

6.2 Functionality
The radial feeder protection function performs phase selection using the measured voltages.

The selection logic is common for both fast and delayed tripping. The fast tripping makes use
of scheme communication whilst the delayed tripping operates independently. The latter is ac-
tivated in case of failure of the communication channel.

On reception of the communication signals, the phase selective tripping outputs are activated on
the relevant faulty phases. At single-phase fault the tripping can be subject to residual current
check. The delay time is independently settable for single-pole and three-pole tripping. Further-
more it is possible to select or not the three-pole tripping as well to select three-pole tripping
also for single-phase fault. Fault on more than one phase will always result in a three-pole trip-
ping. In case of fuse failure, the normal single and three-phase operation is inhibited, but
three-pole tripping will anyhow occur if the residual current exceeds the set level for a longer
time than the three-pole trip delay time tT .

6.3 Design
The function consists of two subfunctions.

131
 Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

• one measuring part evaluating the measurands

• one logical part processing internal and external signals

The logical part consists of four subfunctions.

• fast fault clearing

• delayed fault clearing
• detection of residual current
• generation of commands for breaker tripping and autorecloser starting

Measuring functions
The inputs for the measuring function are the three-phase voltages UL1 , UL2 , UL3 and either
the three-phase currents IL11, IL2 , IL3 or the residual current IN

Phase selection
The phase selection is based on voltage measurement. The logical flow for phase L1 is shown
in figure 66:

UL2
Σ
+
U L3
-
U : √3 *k
τ= 1 - 6 0 (1 )s k= 0 .5 -1 (0 ,0 5 )
+ PHSL1
UL1 -
U

en01000066.vsd

Figure 66: Phase selection function

The phase selection for phase L2 and L3 is performed in the same way.The function operates
by comparing each phase voltage e.g. UL1 with the perpendicular main voltage UL2 – UL3.The
magnitude of phase – phase voltage is monitored by feeding the full-wave rectified signal
through a filter . This updates continuously the output voltage if it is lower than the input voltage
but when the intput signal is lower than the output this twill decrease according to an exponential
function with a time constant settable between 1 and 60 s. See figure 67:

Time constant=Tau Output from

filter
Rectified
input signal

en01000140.vsd

132
Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

Figure 67: Filtering function

The phase selection time becomes <40 ms when the phase voltage drops below 70 % of the set-
ting for phase – phase voltage.

Residual current detection

The magnitude of the neutral current IN is obtained by summing the three-phase currents or it is
directly detected by an appropriate monophase current transformer. See figure 68:

IL1
IL2
IL3 Σ t=600 ms
STIN
Setting t
ILN

Is=0.2 - 1,0(0,1)*Ir

en01000067.vsd

Figure 68: Residual current measurement

The choice between using the sum of phase currents or the residual current is made by set-
ting.The residual current detection time is <40 ms when the current exceeds 150 % of the set
level.

Function for fast fault clearing

The logic diagram for this function is shown in figure 69:

BLOCK
VTSU ≥1

CR &
t
t=650ms
STL1
PHSL1 &

From STL2
phase PHSL2 &
selection
STL3
PHSL3 &

en01000068.vsd

Figure 69: Function for fast fault clearing

133
 Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

Tripping at the remote end of lines with passive load or with weak end infeed is obtained with
the following criteria: The fault clearing is initiated by a received signal from the remote end
terminal. The function is enabled for 650 ms after the signal is received.This is a “one shoot”
circuit, i.e. once the pulse element is triggered it will emit a single pulse regardless of successive
triggering under the set time.If no blocking signal is present, (BLOCK + VTSU where VTSU
is fuse failure detection signal ), the “and” circuits, will generate the start signals STL1 , STL2
or STL3, depending on the status of the phase selection outputs PHSL1, PHSL2, PHSL3. The
presence of either the signal BLOCK or VTSU will ihibit the operation.

Function for delayed fault clearing

This function entails a slower tripping than the remotely initiated tripping time. See figure 70:

BLOCK
BLKDEL
≥1 1
COMOK
tM=0,00-60,00(0,01)s
PHSL1 &
& t STL1
≥1
From
phase PHSL2 &
& t STL2
selection ≥1
PHSL3 &
& t STL3
≥1

P2
≥1
STIN
&

VTSU & ≥1
&
P1 &
≥1 t

≥2 tT=0,00-60,00(0,01)s
&

P3

en01000069.vsd
Figure 70: Function for delayed fault clearing

The inputs BLOCK (block of radial feeder protection) BLKDEL (block of delayed fault clear-
ing) and COMOK (telecommunication link healthy) inhibit the delayed function.In case of fuse
failure , signal VTSU high , the normal single and three-phase operation is inhibited. If during
a fuse failure the residual current signal STIN is high for a longer time than the three-phase trip
time tT , a three-phase tripping will occur.The settings P1 , P2 , P3, control the operating mode
of the delayed fault clearing according to table 1 Selection of operating mode.

134
Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

Table 6: Selection of operating mode

Parameter Selection On OFF
P1 Del1PhFltTrip Single-phase tripping for sin- Three-phase tripping for sin-
gle-phase fault in time tM gle-phase fault in time tT
P2 ResCurrCheck Single-phase operation with Single-phase operation with-
residual current check out residual current check
P3 Del3PhTrip Time delayed trip for No time delayed trip for
three-phase fault three-phase fault

Function for residual current detection

This function indicates the presence of residual current when its value exceedes the set level for
a longer time than the set time tPIR, see figure 72:

STIN TRIN
t

tPIR=0,00 - 60,00(0,01)s

en01000070.vsd

Figure 71: Function for residual current detection

Trip and autorecloser start logic

The start signals STL1, STL2, STL3, are generated in the function for fast fault clearing and de-
layed fault clearing. A trip signal will be issued in the relevant faulty phase(s), TRL1, TRL2,
TRL3. The general trip signal TRIP will also be issued.These output signals will activate the
standard trip functions included in the protection terminal.Both the minimum length of the trip
pulse and the command for a three-phase trip at two phase start are controlled in the logic of the
normal trip circuitry.The single/three-phase operation of the autorecloser depends on the status
of the C.B signal CBCLOSED and on the existence of pole discrepancy signal POLDISC. If the
conditions for a reclosing are fulfilled, a start signal will be issued in the concerned phase(s)
ARSTL1, ARSTL2 and ARSTL3. A general start signal, ARSTART will also be issued. In the
case of multiphase fault the issued signal will be ARST3P. The functional diagram of the rele-
vant logic is shown in figure 72.

135
 Radial feeder protection (PAP) Chapter 4
Line distance

TRIP
≥1

STL1 TRL1
STL2 TRL2
STL3 TRL3

ARSTL1
&

ARSTL2
&

POLDISC ARSTL3
&
t=100 ms
&
t
ARSTART
≥1 ≥1
CBCLOSED

ARST3P
≥2

en01000071.vsd

Figure 72: Trip and autorecloser start logic

6.4 Calculations
6.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the radial feeder protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

136
 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 4
Line distance

7 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM)

7.1 Application
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous
zone, the stepped distance protection or overcurrent protection functions can be supported with
logic, that uses communication channels.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required.
The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel
speed, and security against false or lost signals. For this reason special channels are used for this
purpose. When power line carrier is used for communication, these special channels are strongly
recommended due to the communication disturbance caused by the primary fault.

The logic supports the following communications schemes; blocking scheme, permissive
schemes (overreach and underreach) and direct intertrip.

7.2 Functionality
7.2.1 Theory of operation
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directional zone is used to issue the send signal
(ZCOM-CS), the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes,
respectively.

7.2.2 Blocking communication scheme

In a blocking scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries information about the fault posi-
tion, which specifies that it is outside the protected line, on the bus or on adjacent lines. Do not
prolong the sent signal, so set tSendMin to zero. The sending might be interrupted by operation
of a forward zone if it is connected to ZCOM-CSNBLK.

An overreaching zone is allowed to trip after a co-ordination time (tCoord), when no signal is
received from the remote terminal. The tCoord time must allow for the transmission of the
blocking signal with a certain margin.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (ZCOM-CR) must be received before the tCoord
elapses, to prevent a false trip.

Z C O M -C A C C tC o o rd
Z C O M -T R IP
Z C O M -C R & t

e n 0 00 0 0 2 9 3 .v sd

Figure 73: Basic logic for trip carrier in blocking scheme.

137
 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 4
Line distance

Table 7: Input and output signals for ZCOM

ZCOM-CACC Forward overreaching zone used for the communication scheme.
ZCOM-CR Carrier receive signal.
ZCOM-TRIP Trip from the communication scheme.

7.2.3 Permissive communication scheme

In a permissive scheme, the received signal (ZCOM-CR) carries information from the protection
terminal at the opposite end of the line. It indicates detected faults in the forward direction out
on the line. The received information is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip almost instan-
taneously for faults on the protected line.

Z C O M -C A C C tC o o rd
Z C O M -T R IP
Z C O M -C R & t

e n 00 0 0 0 2 9 4 .v sd

Figure 74: Logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme.

The permissive scheme principle is further subdivided into two types, underreaching and over-
reaching, where the names indicate that the send signal (ZCOM-CS) is issued by an underreach-
ing or an overreaching zone, respectively.

The signal (ZCOM-CR) must be received when the overreaching zone is still activated to
achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the fault current distribution, the overreach-
ing zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared at the terminal nearest to the fault.
There is a certain risk that in case of a trip from an independent tripping zone, the zone issuing
the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) resets before the overreaching zone has operated at the re-
mote terminal. To assure a sufficient duration of the received signal (ZCOM-CR), the send sig-
nal (ZCOM-CS), can be prolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The recommended setting of
tSendMin is 100 ms. A ZCOM-CS signal from an underreaching zone can be prolonged during
all circumstances without drawbacks, but a ZCOM-CS signal from an overreaching zone must
never be prolonged in case of parallel lines, to secure correct operation of current reversal logic,
when applied.

At the permissive overreaching scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) might be issued in
parallel both from an overreaching zone and an underreaching, independent tripping zone. The
ZCOM-CS signal from the overreaching zone must not be prolonged while the ZCOM-CS sig-
nal from zone 1 can be prolonged.

There is no race between the ZCOM-CR signal and the operation of the zone in a permissive
scheme. So set the tCoord to zero. A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better secu-
rity against false tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme de-
pends on a received ZCOM-CR signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.

To overcome this lower dependability in permissive schemes, an Unblocking function can be

used. Use this function at power-line carrier (PLC) communication, where the signal has to be
sent through the primary fault. The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal
(ZCOM-CRG), which must always be present, even when no ZCOM-CR signal is received. The

138
 Scheme communication logic (ZCOM) Chapter 4
Line distance

absence of the ZCOM-CRG signal during the security time is used as a CR signal. See figure 75.
This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmis-
sion. Set the tSecurity at 35 ms.

Z C O M -C R
tS e c u rity Z C O M -C R L
>1
1 t
Z C O M -C R G
200 m s 150 m s
&
t >1 t
&
Z C O M -L C G

e n 0 0 0 0 0 4 9 1 .v s d

Figure 75: Carrier guard logic with unblock logic.

The ZCOM-CR signals are always transferred directly to ZCOM-CRL without any delay.

Table 8: Input and output signals for carrier guard

ZCOM-CR Received signal from the communication equipment
ZCOM-CRG Carrier guard signal from the communication equipment.
ZCOM-CRL Signal to the communication scheme.
ZCOM-LCG Alarm signal line-check guard

7.2.4 Direct inter-trip scheme

In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal (ZCOM-CS) is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal (ZCOM-CR) is directly transferred to a ZCOM-TRIP for tripping without
local criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole tripping
in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

7.3 Calculations
7.3.1 Settings
The parameters for the scheme communication logic function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and
path in local HMI.

Configure the protection function used for the ZCOM-CS carrier send and for scheme commu-
nication tripping by using the CAP configuration tool.

139
 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic Chapter 4
(ZCAL) Line distance

8 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic (ZCAL)

8.1 Application
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous
zone, the stepped distance protection or overcurrent protection functions can be supported with
logic, that uses communication channels. REx 5xx line protection terminals have for this reason
available a scheme communication logic, (ZCOM) see section 7 "Scheme communication
logic (ZCOM)", and a phase segregated scheme communication logic (ZC1P) see section

Different system conditions, in many cases, require additional special logic circuits, like current
reversal logic and WEI, weak end infeed logic. Both functions are available within the additional
communication logic for the distance and overcurrent protection function (ZCAL).

The contents of the additional communication logic is always adjusted to the needs of each com-
munication logic, ZCOM or ZC1P respectively, whichever included in REx 5xx terminal.

8.1.1 Current reversal logic

If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, overreaching permissive com-
munication schemes can trip unselectable due to current reversal. This unwanted tripping affects
the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security results in a total
loss of inter-connection between the two buses.

To avoid this kind of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be
used.

8.1.2 Weak end infeed (WEI) logic

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in the re-
mote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current,
normally >20% of Ir . The fault current can be too low due to an open breaker or low short-circuit
power of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed echo logic is used.

The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here, the fault
current increases when the breaker opens in the strong terminal, and a sequential tripping is
achieved. This requires a detection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid se-
quential tripping as described, and when zone 1 is not available, weak end infeed tripping logic
is used.

Note!
Current reversal and week end infeed logic (ZCAL) and General fault criteriteria (GFC) includ-
ing phase preference logic cannot be ordered together.

8.2 Functionality
8.2.1 Current reversal logic
Figure 76 and figure 77 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current re-
versal. Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker opening.

140
 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic Chapter 4
(ZCAL) Line distance

In terminal A:2, where the forward zone was initially activated, this zone must reset before the
carrier signal ZCOM-CRLn, initiated from B:2, arrives. The carrier send ZCOM-CS or
ZC1P-CSLn from B:2 is therefore held back until the reverse zone ZCAL-IRVLn has reset and
the tDelay time has elapsed; see figure in Design, Current reversal logic .

Strong L1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B

L2

A:2 B:2
99000043.vsd

Figure 76: Initial system condition.

Strong L1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B

L2

A:2 B:2
99000044.vsd

Figure 77: Current distribution after the breaker B:1 is opened.

8.2.2 Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no
fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements (protection func-
tions in forward and reverse direction).

The weak end infeed logic function can be extended to trip also the breaker in the weak terminal.
The trip is achieved when one or more phase voltages are low during an echo function. In case
of single-pole tripping, the phase voltages are used as phase selectors.

Weak end infeed logic is generally used in permissive schemes only. It is also possible to use it
together with the blocking teleprotection scheme. Some limitations apply in this case:

• Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the blocking scheme.
It is not possible to use the echo function to send the echo carrier signal to the
remote line terminal. The echo signal would block the operation of the distance
protection at the remote line end and in this way prevent the correct operation of
a complete protection scheme.

141
 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic Chapter 4
(ZCAL) Line distance

• It is not possible to use the carrier receive signal from the remote end to start the
WEI function. Start the operation of the WEI function by connecting the
TUV--START output signal of the time delayed undervoltage function to the
ZCAL-CRL functional input. In this way, the operation of the undervoltage pro-
tection will start the WEI logic.
• Configure the carrier receive signal from the remote end to the ZCAL-WEIBLK
functional input together with an OR combination of all fault detection signals,
used within the terminal to detect the fault in forward or reverse direction. Do not
use the undervoltage protection signals for this purpose.

8.3 Design
8.3.1 Current reversal logic
The current reversal logic (IREV) uses a reverse zone (connected to the ZCAL-IRVLn input sig-
nal), which in terminal B:2 recognises the fault on the L1 line (see figure in Functionality, Cur-
rent reversal logic. When the reverse zone is activated during the tPickUp time (see figure 78),
the logic is ready to issue a ZCAL-IRVLLn output signal. This signal prevents sending of a
ZCOM-CS (or ZC1P-CSLn) signal and activation of the ZCOM-TRIP (or ZC1P-TRLn) signal
for a time as set on a tDelay timer, when connected to the ZCOM-BLOCK (or ZC1P-BLOCK)
functional input of the ZCOM (or ZC1P) function.

tPickUp 10 ms tPickUp
ZCAL-IRVLn t t t
tDelay
ZCAL-IRVLLn
ZCAL-IRVBLKLn & t
99000193.vsd

Figure 78: Current reversal logic.

The tDelay timer makes it possible for the carrier receive signal, connected to the ZCOM-CR
(or ZC1P-CRLn) functional input, to reset before the ZCOM-TRIP (or the ZC1P-TRLn) signal
is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, connected to the
ZCOM-CACC (or the ZC1P-CACCLn) functional input.

8.3.2 Weak end infeed logic

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal (see figure 79), when:

• The functional input ZCAL-CRLLn is active. This input is usually connected to

the ZCOM-CRL or to the ZC1P-CRLLn functional output.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
ZCAL-BLOCK functional input or to the ZCAL-VTSZ functional input. The lat-
est is usually configured to the FUSE-VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure
function.

142
 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic Chapter 4
(ZCAL) Line distance

• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the ZCAL-WEIBLKLn
functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not under-
voltage) as present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.

ZCAL-VTSZ
ZCAL-BLOCK >1

tWEI 50 ms 200 ms ECHOLn - cont.

ZCAL-CRLLn
t & t t ZCAL-ECHOLn
&
200 ms
ZCAL-WEIBLKLn
t

99000194.vsd

Figure 79: Echo of a received carrier signal by the WEI function.

WEI = Trip
ECHOLn - cont.
ZCAL-CBOPEN

STUL1N
100 ms ZCAL-TRWEI
>1 >1
STUL2N & t

STUL3N 15 ms
ZCAL-TRWEIL1
& t

15 ms
ZCAL-TRWEIL2
& t

15 ms
ZCAL-TRWEIL3
& t

en00000551.vsd

Figure 80: Tripping part of the WEI logic - simplified logic diagram.

When an echo function is used in both terminals, a spurious signal can be looped round by the
echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is
limited to 200 ms.

143
 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic Chapter 4
(ZCAL) Line distance

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local
breaker is selected together with the WEI function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo
logic, see figure 80.

8.4 Calculations
8.4.1 Setting
The parameters for the current reversal logic and the WEI functionare are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

8.4.2 Current reversal logic

Set the tDelay time in relation to the reset time in the communication equipment for the
ZCOM-CR (ZC1P-CRLn) signal. Set the tDelay at the maximum carrier reset time plus 30 ms.
A minimum tDelay setting of 40 ms is recommended. A long tDelay setting increases security
against unwanted tripping, but delay the fault clearing in case of a fault developing from one line
to involve the other one. The probability of this type of fault is small. So set the tDelay with a
good margin.

Set the pick-up delay tPickUp to <80% of the breaker operate time, but with a minimum of 20
ms.

8.4.3 Weak end infeed logic

Set WEI = Echo to activate the weak end infeed function. Set WEI = Trip to obtain echo with
trip.

Set the voltage criterion for the weak end trip to 90% of the minimum operation voltage and con-
sider also the emergency conditions.

144
About this chapter Chapter 5
Current

Chapter 5 Current

About this chapter

This chapter describes the current protection functions.

145
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

1 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent

protection (IOC)

1.1 Application
Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electrical power from production to
consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electrical power at each end
of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger the
stability of a complete system.

The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at constant
amount of transmitted electrical power):

• The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no pow-
er can be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions.
• The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the de-
crease of transmitted power is high.
• The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the genera-
tors on both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability
limits if the total fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating
time and the breaker opening time, is too long.

The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases
with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very
quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for which very high fault cur-
rents are characteristic.

For this reason instantaneous, non-directional, phase-segregated, overcurrent protection (IOC),

which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very
high currents, is included in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information
for more details.

The conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance of earth-faults in most of
the cases. In some applications, especially applications with long lines, the clearance can be im-
proved by use of an instantaneous earth-fault protection. Those are for instance:

• In the case of high infeed of fault current from the opposite end of the line, this
might increase the fault resistance seen by the distance relay to such a value that
the instantaneous step of the distance protection will not operate.
• In applications with series compensated lines, where the capacitor is located at
the end of the line and very strong infeed of fault current from that end, will result
in a difficult problem for the distance protection to perform a selective fault clear-
ance. This due to the voltage reversal that might occur.

The use of instantaneous overcurrent earth-fault protection is most suitable for long lines in
meshed transmission systems. It can also be used for radial lines with low fault current infeed
from the opposite end of the line.

146
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

The instantaneous residual overcurrent function is very suitable as back-up protection for phase
to earth faults close to the terminal. This enables a short back-up faults clearance time for the
phase to earth faults with high fault current.

The instantaneous, non-directional, earth-fault overcurrent protection (IOC), which can operate
in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is in-
cluded in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to the ordering information for more details.

1.2 Functionality
The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously
measure the current in all three phases, and compare them with the IP>> set value. The logical
value of each phase current signal on the output of the digital signal processor (STIL1, STIL2
and STIL3 respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase current exceeds the preset value.

The measuring technic is based on measuring of the incoming residual current to the terminal.

The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously
measure the zero sequence current, and compare it with the IN>> set value. A recursive Fourier
filter filters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the
measuring elements. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digital signal processor
(IOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured zero sequence current exceeds the pre-set value.

1.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is shown in figure
81.

The overcurrent function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes)
• The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function.
It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from
external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in
order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected
to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The IOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the in-
stantaneous residual overcurrent function, if this is installed in the terminal.

When the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is enabled, the output tripping signals
IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, IOC--TRL3, IOC--TRP and IOC--TRIP can operate. The duration of
each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for currents, which
go just a little above the set operating value.

The single phase trip signals IOC--TRL1, IOC--TRL2, and IOC--TRL3 are related to L1, L2,
and L3 phases and therefore also suitable for the single phase tripping with single-phase auto-re-
closing.

147
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockIOC = Yes

Function Enable
IOC--BLOCK >1

IOC--TRIP
&
>1
IOC--TRP
&

IOC--TRL1
&
STIL1
IOC--TRL2
&
STIL2
IOC--TRL3
&
STIL3

en01000077.vsd

Figure 81: Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous overcurrent protection

The signal IOC--TRP is the logic OR of the three single phase trips. It can be used to trip the
circuit breaker if only three phase operation is desired.

The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcurrent trip when in the REx
5xx terminal also the instantaneous residual overcurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal
will be activated in case of any single phase overcurrent or residual overcurrent detection. If only
the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is installed in the terminal, then this signal behaves
exactly as the signal IOC--TRP and can be used for signalization.

The simplified logic diagram of the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is shown in figure
82.

The overcurrent function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockIOC=Yes)
• The input signal IOC--BLOCK is high.

148
Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

The IOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overcurrent function. It can be connected to
a binary input in order to receive a block command from external devices or it can be configured
(software connection) to other internal functions within the terminal itself, in order to receive a
block command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be connected to both binary
inputs and internal function outputs.

When the overcurrent function is enabled, the output tripping signals IOC--TRN and IOC--TRIP
can operate. The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output
signals for currents, which go just beyond the set operating value.

The IOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip.

The IOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general instantaneous overcurrent trip when in the REx
5xx terminal also the instantaneous phase overcurrent function is implemented. I.e. this signal
will be activated in case of residual overcurrent detection or in case of any single-phase overcur-
rent detection (IOC--STIL_: IOC--STIL1 or IOC--STIL2 or IOC--STIL3). If only the residual
overcurrent function is implemented in the terminal, then this signal behaves exactly as the sig-
nal IOC--TRN and can be used for signalising.

IOC - INSTANTANEOUS RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockIOC = Yes

IOC--BLOCK >1

IOC--TRIP
&
IOC--STIN

IOC--TRN
&

en01000078.vsd

Figure 82: Simplified logic diagram of instantaneous residual overcurrent protection.

149
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

1.4 Calculations
1.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the instantaneous overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and transient
conditions that could cause its unwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest
possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during
three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth
conditions.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical
example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high
inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the
built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

1.4.2 Meshed network without parallel line

The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-earth and
two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 83, apply a fault in B and then calculate the
relay through fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum source
impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to get the
maximum through fault current from A to B.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000474.vsd

Figure 83: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be calculated, figure
84. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the max-
imum value for ZA have to be considered.

150
Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000475.vsd

Figure 84: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical
current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ≥ MAX(I fA, IfB )

(Equation 119)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is sug-
gested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inac-
curacy in the system data.

The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:

Is ≥ 1, 3 ⋅ I min
(Equation 120)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
to or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear, IF in figure 85.

151
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000476.vsd

Figure 85: Fault current: IF

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

IS EC
Is SEC = -------------- ⋅ Is
I PRIM
(Equation 121)

Where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary rated current
of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:

IsS EC
------- ⋅ 100
IP>> = --------
I1b
(Equation 122)

1.4.3 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protect-
ed line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 86 where the two lines are connected
to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty line
(line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault currents IfA
and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in fig-
ure 86 will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM ) on the
healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated.

152
Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

99000477.vsd
IM

Relay Line 2

Figure 86: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:

Imin ≥ MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )

(Equation 123)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety mar-
gins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection is then:

Is ≥ 1, 3 ⋅ Im in
(Equation 124)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
or less than the maximum phase fault current that the relay has to clear.

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

I SE C
- ⋅ Is
IsS EC = -------------
IP RIM
(Equation 125)

Where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary secondary
rated current of the main CT.

153
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

The relay setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP>> is given from this formula:

Is SE C
- ⋅ 100
IP>> = --------------
I 1b
(Equation 126)

1.4.4 Setting instructions

The parameters for the instantaneous overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

The residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zero source impedance.
Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is necessary to check all system and transient
conditions that can cause unwanted operation.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the highest
possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during sin-
gle-phase fault conditions. But also examine two-phase-to-earth conditions, since this type of
fault can be higher than single-phase to earth fault in some cases.

Also study transients that can cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A typical
example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can cause high
inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the operation of the
built-in, instantaneous, earth-fault protection.

1.4.5 Meshed network without parallel line

The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earth and
two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 87, apply a fault in B and then calculate the
relay through fault residual current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum
source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to
get the maximum through fault current from A to B. The zero sequence source impedances are
of great importance.

154
Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000474.vsd

Figure 87: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault residual current IfA has to be calculated,
figure 88. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the
maximum value for ZA have to be considered.

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000475.vsd

Figure 88: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The relay must not trip for any of the two trough fault currents. Hence the minimum theoretical
current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ≥ MAX(I fA, IfA )

(Equation 127)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is sug-
gested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions and inac-
curacy in the system data.

155
 Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

The minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous residual overcurrent protection is then:

Is ≥ 1, 3 ⋅ Imin
(Equation 128)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear IF in figure 89.

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000476.vsd

Figure 89: Fault current: IF

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

I SE C
IsS EC = -------------- ⋅ Is
IP RIM
(Equation 129)

Note: n=1,2,3 or 4, depending on which group to set.

1.4.6 Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protect-
ed line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 90, where the two lines are connect-
ed to the same busbar. In this case the influence of the induced residual fault current from the
faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through fault
currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the
relay in figure 90, will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM) on the
healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated.

156
Instantaneous non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (IOC) Current

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

99000477.vsd
IM

Relay Line 2

Figure 90: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM.

The minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection function (Imin)
will be:

I m in ≥ M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
(Equation 130)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety mar-
gins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection is then:

Is ≥ 1, 3 ⋅ Imin
(Equation 131)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
or less than the maximum residual fault current that the relay has to clear.

The current transformer secondary setting current (IsSEC) is:

I SE C
IsS EC = -------------- ⋅ Is
IP RIM
(Equation 132)

157
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

2 Definite time non-directional overcurrent

protection (TOC)

2.1 Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent protection can be used as independent overcurrent protec-
tion, particularly for radially fed systems, or as back-up protection to the main distance or line
differential protection functions. In the first case the protected zone of the time delayed overcur-
rent protection reaches upto the next overcurrent protection and works in its zone as back-up
protection. The programmable time delay (definite time) of the function allows the time selec-
tivity through an appropriate time grading among the overcurrent relays protecting the system.

Where the function acts as back-up for the main line protection, the trip from the overcurrent
protection can be activated when the main protection function is blocked (e.g. by the fuse failure
protection) or it can be active all the time.

In some cases, where it could be difficult to achieve a selective trip, the function can be used as
a helpful overcurrent signallization for the post-fault analysis.

The time delayed residual overcurrent protection (TOC) which is an earth-fault protection,
serves as a built-in local back-up function to the main protection function. In most cases, it is
used as a back-up for the earth-fault measuring in distance protection.

The function is intended to be used in solidly earthed systems.

The time delay makes it possible to set the relay to detect high resistance faults and still perform
selective trip.

The protection, which is non-directional, is included in some of the REx 5xx terminals. Refer to
the ordering information for more details.

2.2 Functionality
The current-measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously
measure the current in all three phases, and compare them with the IP> set value. A recursive
Fourier filter filters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching
of the measuring elements. The logical value of each phase current signal on the output of the
digital processor (STIL1, STIL2 and STIL3 respectively) is equal to 1 if the measured phase cur-
rent exceeds the set value. These signals will instantaneously set their respective output starting
signals (TOC--STL1, TOC--STL2, TOC--STL3), if the function is not blocked.

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value for a period longer than the set time tP,
then a three phase trip is generated from the output signal TOC--TRP.

The current-measuring element within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously
measures the residual current (3I0), and compares it with the IN> set value. A recursive Fourier
filter filters the current signal, and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the mea-
suring element. The logical value of the signal on the output of the digital signal processor
(TOC--STIN) is equal to 1 if the measured residual current exceeds the pre-set value. This signal
will instantaneously set the output start signal (TOC--STN), unless the function is blocked, see
section 2.3 "Design".

158
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

The function trip signal (TOC--TRN) can be delayed 0-60 s.

If the residual current exceeds the set value for a period longer than the set value, then a three
phase trip is generated from the output signal TOC--TRN.

2.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overcurrent function is shown in figure
91.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes).
• The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high.

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the time delayed phase overcurrent function.
It prevents the activation of any trip or starting output signal. It can be connected to a binary in-
put of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software
connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command
from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs. The TOC--BLOCK signal blocks also the time delayed residual overcurrent
protection, if this is installed in the same REx 5xx terminal.

When the function is enabled, there is still the possibility to block the output trips only, without
affecting the start signals, that will always be active. This can be obtained with the function input
TOC--BLKTR. Similarly to the TOC--BLOCK signal, also the time delayed residual overcur-
rent protection, if present in the terminal, is blocked from TOC-BLKTR.

The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for
currents, which go just a little above the set operating value.

The output trip signal TOC--TRP is a three phase trip. Single phase information is available from
the starting signals, that are phase segregated.

The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed overcurrent trip when in the REx
5xx terminal also the time delayed residual overcurrent function is implemented; i.e. this signal
will be activated in case of any time delayed overcurrent or time delayed residual overcurrent
trip. If only the time delayed phase overcurrent function is installed in the terminal, then this sig-
nal behaves exactly as the signal TOC--TRP and can be used for signallization.

159
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

TOC - TIME DELAYED PHASE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TOC--
BLKTR

tP
TEST TOC--TRIP
& t
TEST-ACTIVE
& TOC--TRP
BlockTOC= Yes

TOC--
BLOCK >1 STP
>1

STL1
&
STIL1

STL2
&
STIL2

STL3
&
STIL3

en01000075.vsd

Figure 91: Simplified logic diagram of time delayed phase overcurrent protection

The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed earth-fault protection is shown in figure 92.

The time delayed residual function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockTOC=Yes).
• The input signal TOC--BLOCK is high.

The TOC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the earth-fault function. It blocks the whole
function and prevents the activation of any trip or starting output signals.

It can be connected to a binary input in order to receive a block command from external devices
or it can be configured (software connection) to other internal functions within the terminal it-
self, in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gates it can be
connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

When the residual overcurrent protection is enabled, there is still a possibility to block the trip
output only, without affecting the start signals, which always will be active. The input which
provides this function is TOC--BLKTR.

The duration of each output signal is at least 15 ms. This enables continuous output signals for
currents, which go just a little beyond the set operating value.

The TOC--TRN signal is related to the residual overcurrent trip.

160
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

The TOC--TRIP output signal behaves as general time delayed overcurrent trip when in the REx
5xx terminal also the time delayed phase overcurrent function is implemented. I.e. this signal
will be activated in case of delayed residual overcurrent trip or in case of time delayed phase
overcurrent trip. If only the residual overcurrent function is implemented in the terminal, then
this signal behaves exactly as the signal TOC--TRN and can be used for signalization.

TOC - TIME DELAYED RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

TOC--BLKTR

Trip Blocking tN
TEST TOC--TRIP
& t
TEST-ACTIVE
& TOC--TRN
BlockTOC= Yes

TOC--BLOCK >1
Function Enable
TOC--STN
&
TOC--STIN en01000076.vsd

Figure 92: Simplified logic diagram of the TOC-- protection function.

2.4 Calculations
2.4.1 Setting instructions
The current setting value must be selected to permit the detection of the lowest short circuit cur-
rent without having any unwanted tripping or starting of the function under normal load condi-
tions. The following relation has to be considered for the setting of the primary operating current
(Is) of the function:

ILmax
1.2 ⋅ ----------------- < Is < 0.7 ⋅ If min
k
(Equation 133)

Where:
ILmax is the maximum permissible load current of the pro-
tected unit,
IFmin is the minimum fault current that the relay has to clear.
The values 1.2 and 0.7 are safety factors and
K is the reset ratio of the overcurrent function: 0.95.

161
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

The settable time delay tP allows the time selectivity of the overcurrent function, according to
the time grading plan of all the other overcurrent protections in the system. The time setting val-
ue should also consider transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short
times. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end,
which can cause high inrush current when energized.

Where the time delayed overcurrent function is used as back-up of impedance protection, nor-
mally the time delay is set higher than the time delay of distance zone 2 (or 3) in order to avoid
interferences with the impedance measuring system.

2.4.2 Setting of operating current IP>

If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, than the secondary setting current (Is-
SEC) is:

I SE C
I sS EC = -------------- ⋅ Is
IP RIM
(Equation 134)

Where:
ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and
IPRIM is the primary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, asso-
ciated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP> is given from this formula:

Is SEC
IP> = --------------- ⋅ 100
I 1b
(Equation 135)

The parameters for the time delayed overcurretn protection functions are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

2.4.3 Setting instructions

The residual overcurrent protection is very sensitive to the change of zero source impedance.
Since it must operate only in a selective way, it is necessary to check all system and transient
conditions that can cause unwanted operation.

The settings should be chosen in such a way that it can detect high resistance faults on the pro-
tected line and still be selective to other residual time delayed protections in both forward and
reverse directions. The time setting value should also consider transients that can cause a high
increase of the residual line current for short times.

162
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can
cause high inrush current when being energised.

In well transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line cur-
rent. For non transposed lines a considerably higher false residual current may be found.

In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the false residual current must
be measured or calculated when maximum sensitivity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommend-
ed as a minimum primary operation value for the residual overcurrent protection.

General criteria for the primary current setting value of the time delayed residual overcurrent
protection is given in the formula below:

1.3 ⋅ IRmax < Is < 0.7 ⋅ If min

(Equation 136)

Where:
IRmax is the maximum permissive residual current flowing in the protection unit during normal service
conditions and
IFmin is the minimum residual fault current that the relay has to clear.
1.3 and
0.7 are safety factor values.

2.4.4 Setting of operating current IN>

If Is is the primary setting operating value of the function, then the secondary setting current (Is-
SEC) is:

IS EC
Is SEC = -------------- ⋅ Is
I PRIM
(Equation 137)

where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is the primary rated current
of the main CT.

The relay setting value IN> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I4b, as-
sociated to the current transformer on input I4. The value for IN> is given from the formula:

Is SE C
- ⋅ 100
IN> = --------------
I4b
(Equation 138)

163
 Definite time non-directional overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (TOC) Current

The parameters for the time delayed overcurrent protection functions are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

164
 Two step time delayed non-directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC2) Current

3 Two step time delayed non-directional phase

overcurrent protection (TOC2)

3.1 Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent function is to be used as short-circuit protection in three
phase networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. It is intended to be used either as primary protection
or back-up protection for differential functions or impedance measuring functions.

In radial networks it is often sufficient to use phase overcurrent relays as short circuit protection
for lines, transformers and other equipment. The current time characteristic should be chosen ac-
cording to common practice in the network. It is strongly recommended to use the same current
time characteristic for all overcurrent relays in the network. This includes overcurrent protection
for transformers and other equipment.

There is a possibility to use phase overcurrent protection in meshed systems as short circuit pro-
tection. It must however be realized that the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
meshed networks, can be very complicated and a large number of fault current calculations are
needed. There are situations where there is no possibility to have selectivity with a protection
system based on overcurrent relays in a meshed system.

The measuring function contains one current measuring element for each phase, each of them
with a low set and a high set measuring step. The low set step can have either definite time or
inverse time characteristic. The characteristics available are extremely inverse, very inverse,
normal inverse or RI inverse. The high set step has definite time delay.

The settings are common for all phases but both the low and high set step can be set On/Off in-
dividually and also have individual inputs for blocking.

3.2 Functionality
The time delayed overcurrent protection is used as short-circuit protection in power systems, ei-
ther as the primary protection or as a back-up function for selective differential protection or im-
pedance measuring protection.The protection function comprises of measuring circuits for the
three phase currents, each with a low and high current setting. The low current setting has defi-
nite or inverse time-delay while the high current setting has only definite time-delay. The mea-
suring circuits share common settings for all phases, however, both the low and high current
settings can be blocked or enabled independent of the other setting.

Figure 93 shows a simplified logic diagram for the two step phase overcurrent protection.

165
 Two step time delayed non-directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC2) Current

Characteristic = Def tLow

&
≥1 t
& TOC2-TRLS
I>Inv
Characteristic = NI/VI/EI/RI
&

I>Low
tMinInv
IL1-3
& t

& TOC2-STLS

I>High tHigh
& t & TOC2-TRHS

50 ms
TOC2-BLOCK t

TOC2-BLKTRLS &

TOC2-BLKTRHS &

en01000090.vsd
Figure 93: Two step time delayed phase overcurrent protection, simplified logic diagram

3.3 Calculations
3.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the two step definite and inverse time delayed overcurrent protection func-
tion are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference
manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

The phase overcurrent protection can be used in different applications. In most applications it is
required that all short circuits within a protected zone shall be detected and cleared and the fault
clearance shall be selective. As the protection can be used in several applications only some ex-
amples are discussed.

3.3.2 Line protection in radial network

The phase overcurrent protection is suitable to use in radial systems without any fault current
infeed from the radial feeders.

166
Two step time delayed non-directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC2) Current

The pick up current setting (inverse time relays) or the lowest current step (constant time relays)
must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause relay op-
eration. Here consideration also has to be taken to the relay reset current, so that a short peak of
overcurrent does not cause operation of the relay even when the overcurrent has ceased.

The lowest setting value can be written:

I max
I s ≥ 1.2 ⋅ -----------
k
(Equation 139)

Where:
1.2 is a safety factor due to load estimation uncertainty etc.,
k the resetting ratio of the relay (about 0.95) and
Imax the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics the load
current up to the present situation can be found. Also emergency situations must be considered.

There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be
detected by the phase overcurrent relay. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by
the relay, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can
be written:

Is ≤ 0.7 ⋅ I s c min
(Equation 140)

Where:
0.7 is a safety factor, due to calculation uncertainty and
Iscmin the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval:

Imax
1.2 ⋅ ----------- ≤ I s ≤ 0.7 ⋅ I s cmin
k
(Equation 141)

167
 Two step time delayed non-directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC2) Current

The high current function of the overcurrent relay, which only has a short or no delay of the op-
eration, must be given a current setting so that the relay is selective to other relays in the power
system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion as possible of the
part of the power system to be protected by the relay (primary protected zone). A fault current
calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary pro-
tected zone. Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible
dc component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid stage, of
the phase overcurrent relay, can be written:

I high ≥ 1.2 ⋅ k t ⋅ I sc max

(Equation 142)

Where:
1.2 is a safety factor, due to calculation uncertainty
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault
current. kt is less than 1.05 if the power system time constant is less than 100 ms.
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate times of the phase-overcurrent protection have to be chosen so that the fault time is
so short that equipment will not be damaged due to thermal overload, at the same time selectivity
is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in
a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protections.

3.3.3 Line protection in meshed network

The current setting can be made in the same way as for radial networks but observe the possibil-
ity to get high fault currents in the reverse direction if the adjacent station have low source im-
pedance.

If inverse time characteristics are used with equal current and time setting for all phase current
protections in the system the selectivity is assured as long as there are more than two bays car-
rying fault current to each substation. Sometimes this is however impossible due to the fault cur-
rent distribution between the different lines.

If definite time characteristic is used the co-ordination between the different phase overcurrent
line protections is done by means of current setting.

As the phase overcurrent protection often is used as a back-up protection of lines, where a dis-
tance protection is the main protection, relatively long operation times are acceptable for the
phase overcurrent protection.

3.3.4 Setting characteristics

The following formulas are valid for the inverse time characteristic:

168
Two step time delayed non-directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC2) Current

Table 9: Formulas for the inverse time characteristic

Characteristic: Time delay(s):
Normal inverse
0, 14
-⋅k
t = -------------------- (Equation 143)
0, 02
I –1

Very inverse
13, 5
t = ------------- ⋅ k (Equation 144)
I–1

Extremely inverse
80
t = ------------- ⋅ k (Equation 145)
2
I –1
RI inverse
1
t = ------------------------------------------------------ ⋅ k (Equation 146)
0, 339 – 〈 ( 0, 236 ) ⁄ I〉

where:
I denotes (measured current)/ I>Inv and
k is a time multiplier factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10.

The decisive factors for the setting of inverse time characteristic are the allowable time for dis-
connection of fault at minimum fault current that the function shall operate for together with se-
lectivity at maximum fault current.

169
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

4 Two step time delayed directional phase

overcurrent protection (TOC3)

4.1 Application
The time delayed phase overcurrent function is to be used as short-circuit protection in three
phase networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. It is intended to be used either as primary protection
or back-up protection for differential functions or impedance measuring functions.

In radial networks it is often sufficient to use phase overcurrent relays as short circuit protection
for lines, transformers and other equipment. The current time characteristic should be chosen ac-
cording to common practice in the network. It is strongly recommended to use the same current
time characteristic for all overcurrent relays in the network. This includes overcurrent protection
for transformers and other equipment.

There is a possibility to use phase overcurrent protection in meshed systems, as short circuit pro-
tection. It must however be realized that the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
meshed networks, can be very complicated and a large number of fault current calculations are
needed. There are situations where there is no possibility to have selectivity with a protection
system based on overcurrent relays in a meshed system.

In some applications the possibility of obtaining selectivity can be improved significantly if a

directional phase overcurrent function is used. This can be the case in meshed networks and in
radial networks with generation connected remote in the system, thus giving fault current infeed
in “reverse” direction.

The measuring function contains one current measuring element for each phase, each of them
with a low set and a high set measuring step. The low set step can have either definite time or
inverse time characteristic. The characteristics available are extremely inverse, very inverse,
normal inverse or RI inverse. The high set step has definite time delay.

The settings are common for all phases but both the low and high set step can be set On/Off in-
dividually and also got individual inputs for blocking.

4.2 Functionality
4.2.1 Theory of operation and design

4.2.2 Current measuring element

The current measuring element continuously measures the current in all phases and compares it
to the set operating values for the two steps. If the current is above set value the corresponding
output signal will be set. If the current is above both the setting I>Low and I>Inv the inverse
time evaluation according to choosen characteristic starts and the INV signal sets after corre-
sponding time. A filter ensures immunity to disturbances and DC-components and minimizes
the transient overreach. A simplified block diagram is found in figure 94. The function is true
phase segregated. This means that there are identical measuring elements in each phase.

170
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

I>Inv
Characteristic= Def/NI/VI/EI/RI NI, VI, EI, RI
k, I>Inv STINVL1-int (L2,L3)

I>Low
IL1 (IL2, IL3) STLSL1-int (L2,L3)

I>High

STHSL1-int (L2,L3)

en01000175.vsd

Figure 94: Simplified block diagram for definite and inverse time delayed phase overcurrent
function

The inverse time delay can be set for different characteristics by the setting Characteristic = x,
the x is choosen from the following:

1. Def (Definite time)

2. NI (Normal inverse)
3. VI (Very inverse)
4. EI (Extremely inverse)
5. RI (Inverse time corresponding to relays of type RI)

With setting Characteristic = Def the signal INV will be set to zero.

The different inverse time characteristics are defined in the “Technical reference manual”.

4.2.3 Directional overcurrent function

The directional overcurrent function uses the information from the current measuring elements
as described in section 4.2.2 "Current measuring element" and the directional impedance mea-
suring element as described for the distance protection function, to create the directional over-
current function.

Directional phase selection

In order to use correct directional information during all types of faults the function is provided
with a simple phase selection. The phase selection is assigned to distinguish between phase to
earth faults and phase to phase faults.

The criteria for the two indications that are regarded in the function are:

Phase to earth fault (PE FAULT):

171
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

3 ⋅ I 0 ≥ 0.5 ⋅ IMinOp
(Equation 147)

and

3 ⋅ I 0 ≥ INR el easeP E ⁄ 100 ⋅ I phmax

(Equation 148)

Phase to phase fault (PP FAULT):

3 ⋅ I 0 < 0.2 ⋅ Ir
(Equation 149)

or

3 ⋅ I 0 < INBlo ckPP ⁄ 100 ⋅ I phmax

(Equation 150)

If the criteria for PE FAULT are fulfilled the phase to earth directional indications are used and
if the criteria for PP FAULT are fulfilled the phase to phase directional indications are used. If
all criteria are met, then only the directional indications for phase to phase are released. The aim
is to preserve the phase to phase measurement also during two-phase to earth faults with high
residual current (at least as long as the criteria allows, see equations above). However, the direc-
tional indications will appear also for healthy phases and in the phase to phase case the indica-
tions would overlap in an unwanted manner because the overcurrent evaluation is performed per
phase only (both forward and reverse can be indicated for one phase, simultaneously). So in or-
der to establish a complete directional phase selection the one and only faulty loop must be sin-
gled out. This is done by means of releasing the directional indication with the corresponding
overcurrent indications (overcurrent in two phases is required, figure 95).

172
Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

PE FAULT
& L1
PP FAULT & L1L2 DFWL1 - int.
>1
DIRFWL1N - int L3L1

DIRFWL1L2 - int
&
L2
L1L2 DFWL2 - int.
STLSL1 - int >1
L2L3
STHSL1 - int >1
STLSL2 - int
STHSL2 - int >1
DFWL3 - int.

en01000154.vsd

Figure 95: Excerpt from directional phase selection

Consider the case where a reverse fault is cleared and the prefault forward load conditions are
retrieved. So, in order not to issue a false trip if the reversal indication is deactivated (or the for-
ward indication becomes active) before the overcurrent indication drops, the reversal of direc-
tion is actually held back during 50 ms according to the logic of figure 96. Each phase and each
set stage is provided with an individual logic circuit (six circuits in all) to allow operation during
simultaneous earth faults (one forward, one reverse).

DFW L1 - int 50 m s FW L1 - int.

&
& t
STLSL1 - int
50 m s
DRVL1 - int & t RVL1 - int.
≥1

en01000155.vsd

Figure 96: Current reversal logic for one phase and one set step

General overcurrent operating principles

The low and high set steps can individually be set directional or non-directional. If set in non-di-
rectional mode the overcurrent function only uses the signals from the current measuring ele-
ments as seen from figure 94. In directional mode there are two modes of operation, forward
release and reverse block denoted ForwRelease and RevBlock respectively. The principles of
these three modes of operation are illustrated in figure 97.

173
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

Operation (Low) = NonDir

STLSL1-int STARTLSL1-int.

Operation (Low) = ForwRelease

STLSL1-int
STARTLSL1-int.
FWL1-int &

Operation (Low) = RevBlock

STLSL1-int
STARTLSL1-int.
RVL1-int &

en01000156.vsd

Figure 97: Directional operation modes of TOC3

In forward release operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault is in forward direction
is needed for tripping. Since the directional function needs voltage for the directional check it
will not be able to operate when switching in a line against a persistent close-up three phase fault
if voltage is measured on the line side of the breaker. A solution to this might be to use the SOTF
function for the distance protection, with output TOC3-STND as acceleration signal.

In reverse block operation mode a criteria that indicates that the fault is in reverse direction is
used for blocking the function. In this case there is no problem switching in a line against a per-
sistent close-up three phase fault even if voltage is measured on the line side of the breaker since
the directional function will not issue any reverse signal.

The general principles of time delay for the two steps of the overcurrent function is displayed in
the following figure 98.

174
Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

Low set step

Characteristic = Def
&
tLow
TRLSL1-int.
tMinInv ≥1 t
STARTLSL1-int
t &

STINVL1-int

High set step

tHigh
STARTHSL1-int TRHSL1-int.
t

en01000157.vsd

Figure 98: Delayed time operation for low set step and general time delay

General trip signals are derived from the phase segregated starts according to figure 99.

TOC3--BLKTRLS
TOC3--BLKTRHS
TOC3--BLOCK 50 ms
t
TRLSL1-int TOC3--TRLS
&
TRLSL2-int
≥1
TRLSL3-int

TRHSL1-int TOC3--TRHS
&
TRHSL2-int
≥1
TRHSL3-int

en01000158.vsd

Figure 99: General trip

With setting Characteristic = Def, figure 98 the signal TOC3-TRLS will be active if, at least, one
of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Low for the low set step, and if the directional cri-
terion is fulfilled for a longer time than the set delay tLow.

With setting Characteristic = NI/VI/EI or RI, figure 98 we have the following: If, at least one of
the phase currents exceeds the set value I>Low, the timer circuit tMinInv is activated together
with the inverse time measuring circuit, figure 94 in order to calculate the operating time. The
operating time is determined by the magnitude of the current, characteristic choosen, set char-
acteristic current I>Inv and time multiplier k. When both the inverse time and tMinInv have

175
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

elapsed the timer tLow will be activated and after its time is elapsed the signal TOC3-TRLS is
activated. It must be observed that the time delay of operation, if inverse time characteristics is
used, will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the tLow setting.

The timer circuit tMinInv, figure 98 can be used to achieve a defined minimum operating time
at high fault currents. The timer circuit tLow can be used for adding an additional time delay to
the inverse time characteristic.

The signal TOC3-TRHS will be active if one of the phase currents exceeds the set value I>High
for a longer time than the set delay tHigh at the same time as TOC--BLKTRSH and
TOC--BLOCK are not present.

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRLS will block tripping from low set step. The
step can also be blocked with the setting Operation Low= Off.

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLKTRHS will block tripping from high set step. The
step can also be blocked with the setting Operation High= Off.

An external signal connected to TOC3_BLOCK will block both low and high set steps.

Figure 100 illustrates how the start signals are formed.

STLSL1-int
STHSL1-int >1 TOC3--STNDL1
&
STLSL2-int
STHSL2-int >1 TOC3--STNDL2
&
STLSL3-int
STHSL3-int >1 TOC3--STNDL3
&

>1 TOC3--STND
&

>1 TOC3--STNDLS
&

L1
FWL1-int & L2
FWL2-int >1 TOC3--STFW
L3 &
FWL3-int

L1
RVL1-int & L2
RVL2-int >1 TOC3--STRV
L3 &
RVL3-int
50 ms
TOC3--BLOCK
t

en01000159.vsd

Figure 100: Start signals

176
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

As the phase segregated start signals are non directional, and used for indication only, there is
no possibility to use a phase segregated transfer trip scheme. A three-phase transfer trip scheme
will be applicable using the output TOC3-STFW or TOC3-STRV, keeping in mind the perfor-
mance expected during simultaneous faults on parallel lines. Carrier signals can be sent to other
line-end through PLC, i.e. through binary outputs connected to PLC's binary inputs or directly
from RTC function block (binary signal transfer to remote end), which allows to send to the oth-
er line-end up to 32 binary signals. The use of RTC function block requires communication cards
installed in both terminals communicating to each others. Please refer to RTC description for
further details

4.3 Calculations
4.3.1 Setting instructions
The directional phase overcurrent protection can be used in different applications. In most ap-
plications it is required that all short circuits within a protected zone shall be detected and cleared
and the fault clearance shall be selective. As the protection can be used in several applications
only some examples are discussed.

4.3.2 Line protection in a radial network

The directional phase overcurrent protection is suitable to use in radial systems with generation
connected out in the system. In such a network the fault current can be fed both in the forward
and reverse direction. Normally the protection will detect and trip faults in the forward direction.

The pick up current setting (inverse time functions) or the lowest current step (constant time
functions) must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load current does not cause
operation of the function. The reset ratio of the function has to be taken into consideration, so
that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation of the protection even when the over-
current has ceased.

The lowest setting value can be written:

I max
I s ≥ 1.2 ⋅ -----------
k
(Equation 151)

Where:
1.2 is a safety factor due to load estimation uncertainty etc.,
k the resetting ratio of the relay (about 0.95) and
Imax the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics the load
current up to the present situation can be found. Also emergency situations must be considered.
The current setting must be valid also for some years ahead.

177
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover, must be
detected by the phase overcurrent relay. The minimum fault current Iscmin, to be detected by
the relay, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pick up current setting can
be written:

Is ≤ 0.7 ⋅ I s c min
(Equation 152)

Where:
0.7 is a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty and
Iscmin the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval:

Imax
1.2 ⋅ ----------- ≤ I s ≤ 0.7 ⋅ I s cmin
k
(Equation 153)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short or no delay of
the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other protec-
tions in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults within as large portion
as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by the relay (primary protected zone).
A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of
the primary protected zone. The risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC component of
the short circuit current has to be taken into consideration. The lowest current setting of the most
rapid stage, of the phase overcurrent relay, can be written:

I high ≥ 1.2 ⋅ k t ⋅ I sc max

(Equation 154)

Where:
1.2 is a safety factor, due to calculation unsertainty
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault
current. kt is less than 1.05 if the power system time constant is less than 100 ms.
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

178
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

The operate times of the phase overcurrent relay have to be chosen so that the fault time is so
short that equipment will not be damaged due to thermal overload, at the same time selectivity
is assured. For overcurrent protection in a radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in
a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection.

4.3.3 Line protection in meshed network

The current setting can be made in the same way as for radial networks.

If inverse time characteristics are used with equal current and time setting for all phase current
protections in the system the selectivity is assured as long as there are more than two bays car-
rying fault current to each substation. Sometimes this is however impossible due to the fault cur-
rent distribution between the different lines.

If definite time characteristic is used the coordination between the different phase overcurrent
line protections are done by means of current setting.

As the phase overcurrent protection often is used as a back-up protection of lines, where a dis-
tance protection is the main protection, relatively long operation times are acceptable for the
phase overcurrent protection.

4.3.4 Setting characteristics

The parameters for the two step time delayed directional phase overcurrent protection functions
are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference man-
ual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

Following formulas are valid for the inverse time characteristic:

Table 10: Formulas for the inverse time characteristic

Characteristic: Time delay(s):
Normal inverse
0, 14
-⋅k
t = -------------------- (Equation 155)
0, 02
I –1

Very inverse
13, 5
t = ------------- ⋅ k (Equation 156)
I–1

Extremely inverse
80
t = ------------- ⋅ k (Equation 157)
2
I –1
RI inverse
1
t = ------------------------------------------------------ ⋅ k (Equation 158)
0, 339 – 〈 ( 0, 236 ) ⁄ I〉

Where:
I denotes (measured current)/ I>Inv and
k is a time multiplier with setting range 0,05 - 1,10.

179
 Two step time delayed directional phase Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (TOC3) Current

The decisive factors for the setting of inverse time characteristic are the allowable time for dis-
connection of fault at minimum fault current that the function shall operate for together with se-
lectivity at maximum fault current.

180
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

5 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection

(TEF)

5.1 Application
This earth-fault overcurrent protection is intended for solidly earthed networks.

5.1.1 Earth-fault overcurrent protection

In case of single-phase earth-faults, the primary fault resistance varies with the network condi-
tions, the type of fault and location of the fault. In many cases, the fault resistance is much higher
than the resistance that can be covered by an impedance-measuring distance protections. This
can be the case with a phase to earth fault to a tower with large tower footing resistance.

Earth-faults with high fault resistances can be detected by measuring the residual current (3I0).

The inrush current can cause unwanted tripping of the earth-fault overcurrent relay when ener-
gizing a directly earthed power transformer. The earth-fault overcurrent protection is therefore
provided with second harmonic restraint, which blocks the operation if the residual current (3I0)
contains 20% or more of the second harmonic component.

In some cases, it is possible to improve the selectivity by adding a settable minimum operate cur-
rent (IMin) and a minimum operate time (tMin) to the inverse characteristic. These functions are
included in the earth-fault protection modules.

To minimize the operate time, in case of closing the circuit breaker to a fault, the residual over-
current protection module is provided with a switch-onto-fault logic, which can be activated at
breaker closure. The tripping time will temporarily be reduced to 300 ms.

In order to achieve the most sensitive earth fault protection the non-directional function can be
used. As the residual current is normally very small during normal operation the setting value
can be set very low. In case of small residual currents, due to high resistance phase to earth faults
or serial faults, the residual voltage in the system can be very low. A serial fault can be caused
by broken phase conductor(s) with no contact to earth, or pole discrepancy in a circuit breaker
or a disconnector. The most common type of serial fault is pole discrepancy at breaker maneu-
vers.

As the residual voltage is often very small at high resistance earth faults and serial faults, any
directional element can not be used.

The function can have different types of time-current characteristics; definite time delay or dif-
ferent types of inverse time delay. By using the inverse time delay characteristics some degree
of selectivity between non-directional residual protection can be achieved.

Directional earth-fault protection is obtained by measuring the residual current and the angle be-
tween this current and the zero-sequence voltage (3U0).

It is possible to obtain the polarizing voltage (-3U0) from an open delta winding in the voltage
transformer or via summation of the three phase voltages supplied to the terminal.

181
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

The 3I0 current lags the polarizing voltage (-3U0) by a phase angle equal to the angle of the ze-
ro-sequence source impedance. In solidly earthed networks, this angle is in the range of 40° to
nearly 90°. The high value refers to stations with directly earthed transformers with delta wind-
ing. To obtain maximum sensitivity at all conditions, the forward measuring element should
have a characteristic angle of 65°.

As a general rule, it is easier to obtain selectivity by using directional instead of non-directional

earth-fault overcurrent protection, but sufficient polarizing voltage must be available.

It is not possible to measure the distance to the fault by using the zero-sequence components of
the current and voltage, because the zero-sequence voltage is a product of the zero-sequence
components of current and source impedance. It is possible to obtain selectivity by the use of a
directional comparison scheme, which uses communication between the line ends.

If a communication scheme can not be used, the best selectivity is generally obtained by using
inverse time delay. All relays, in the network, must have the same type of inverse characteristic.
An earth-fault on a line is selectively tripped if the difference between the residual current (3I0)
out on the faulted line and the residual current (3I0) out on the other lines gives a time difference
of 0.3-0.4 seconds. A logarithmic characteristic is generally the most suitable for this purpose,
because the time difference is constant for a given ratio between the currents.

5.1.2 Directional comparison logic function

In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault current direction must be trans-
mitted to the other line end. A short operate time enables auto-reclosing after the fault. During
a single-phase reclosing cycle, the auto-reclosing device must block the directional comparison
earth-fault scheme.

A communication logic block for residual overcurrent protection can be included in the REx 5xx
terminal to provide this feature. The function contains circuits for blocking overreach and per-
missive overreach schemes. See section 9 "Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection (EFC)"..

Also an additional communication logic block for the communication can be included. It con-
tains logic for the weak-end-infeed and current-reversal functions, which are used only in the
permissive overreach scheme. See section 10 "Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)".

5.2 Functionality
5.2.1 Theory of operation
This protection measures the residual current (3I0) and the residual voltage (3U0). Figure 101
shows the current measuring, time delay and logic circuits (both with and without directional
check) of this protection function.

182
Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

TEF--BLKTR

1000ms
TEF--BC
t
TEF--TRSOTF
300ms &
t

Operation = ON
&

3Io>
t1
Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG >1 TEF--TRIP
>1 t &
EFCh
k &

IMin
3Io

IN> & tMin

t
20% ±Σ
2fn TEF--START
&

50ms
TEF--BLOCK
t

Option: Directional check

Direction
= Directional
EF3IoSTD &
3Iox TEF--STFW
2fn 100% FORW ARD & &
cos (φ-65)
3Uo
60% REVERSE
&
TEF--STRV
0.01Un &

99000204.vsd

Figure 101: Simplified logic diagram for the residual overcurrent protection

Activate the independent time-delay function by setting Characteristic= Def (or inverse time de-
lay according to the setting table). The t1 timer starts when both the definite/inverse time char-
acteristic and the tMin timer operate. The tMin timer starts when the 3I0 current to the relay is
equal to or higher than the set operate value for IMin and the content of the second harmonic in
3I0 is less than 20%.

The inverse time calculation starts when 3I0 is equal to or higher than the set operate value for
IMin and the content of the second harmonic in 3I0 is less than 20%. The inverse time delay is
determined by the selection of the characteristic (NI, VI etc.) in the Characteristic setting and the
setting of the characteristic IN> current.

The t1 timer is normally set to zero. Use it to add a constant time to the inverse time delay. Figure
102 shows the effect of the IMin and tMin settings on the inverse characteristic.

183
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

t (s)
IMIN
Logaritmic
Inverse
5 Normal
Inverse
4 (k=0,4)
3
2
tMIN
1

1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 x IN>
99000105.vsd

Figure 102: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics.

The switch-onto-fault function is used to minimise the operate time in case of pole discrepancy
at breaker closing and in case of closing on to a fault. The function is released by activating the
TEF--BC binary input. The function is activated for 1 second after the reset of the TEF--BC bi-
nary input.

The function is blocked by activating the TEF--BLOCK binary input.

Activating the TEF--BLKTR blocks the definite/inverse delay trip outputs TEF--TRIP and the
switch-on-to-fault trip TEF-TRSOTF.

The 3I0 current lags the polarising voltage (3U0) by a phase angle equal to the angle of the ze-
ro-sequence source impedance. The forward measuring element operates when:

3I 0 ⋅ cos ( ϕ – 65° ) ≥ IN>Dir

(Equation 159)

Where:
ϕ is the angle between 3I0 and 3U0 (positive if 3I0 lags 3U0)
IN>Dir is the set operate value

184
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

Upol = -3U0
ϕ

65°
IN Operation

IN>Dir

99000052.vsd

Figure 103: Measuring characteristic of the directional element

The change in operate value is small when the phase angle deviates moderately from 65°. A de-
viation of 20° increases the operate value by only 6.5%.

The polarising voltage, normally obtained from the broken delta windings of the VTs, can have
a high content of harmonics relative to the fundamental frequency when the output voltage is
low, particularly when capacitive VTs are used. To secure a correct measurement, the direction-
al function must have an effective bandpass filtering of the voltage. In the module, the filtering
secures a correct function for fundamental frequency polarising voltages down to 1% of the rated
voltage.

In case of an external fault, the capacitive current generated on the line decreases the current to
the earth-fault relay situated at the line end towards the fault. So the reverse direction comparator
must have an increased sensitivity to secure reliable blocking in case of external faults when a
directional comparison or a blocking communication scheme is used. The operate current of the
reverse direction measuring element in the module is, as a fixed ratio, set at 0.6 IN> Dir.

5.3 Calculations
5.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the time deleyed residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local
HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting pa-
rameters and path in local HMI.

185
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

To detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. On the other hand, a low
setting increases the risk for unwanted operation due to imbalance in the network and the current
transformer circuits. Set the minimum operate current (IN> *IMin) of the earth-fault overcurrent
protection higher than the maximum false earth-fault current. If the directional function is cho-
sen, set the start level of the directional function (IN> Dir) higher than the maximum false
earth-fault current.

The imbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents is caused mainly by untrans-
posed or not fully transposed parallel lines with strong zero-sequence mutual coupling. There
might also be high imbalance currents for non-transposed single circuit lines if the zero sequence
source impedance is low at both line ends. This false earth-fault current is directly proportional
to the load current.

In a well-transposed system, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line
current.

In case of not fully transposed parallel lines, measure or calculate the false earth-fault current at
maximum load.

The choice of time delay characteristics - definite time, normal inverse, very inverse, extremely
inverse or logarithmic inverse - depends on the network. To achieve optimum selectivity, use
the same type of characteristic for all earth-fault overcurrent protections in the network. This
means that in networks already equipped with earth-fault overcurrent relays, the best selectivity
is normally achieved by using the same type of characteristic as in the existing relays.

The following formulas for the operate time (in seconds) apply to the characteristic used within
the REx 5xx terminal with line protection, see table 11.

Table 11: Operate time formulas

Characteristics Operate time (s)
Normal inverse 0.14
-⋅k
t = -------------------
0.02 (Equation 160)
I –1
Very inverse 13.5
t = ----------- ⋅ k
I–1 (Equation 161)

Extremely inverse
80
t = ------------- ⋅ k (Equation 162)
2
I –1
Logarithmic inverse
t = 5.8 – ( 1.35 ⋅ ln I )
(Equation 163)

Where:
I is a multiple of set current 3I0>
k is a time multiplying factor, settable in the range of 0.05 to 1.10

186
Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

All inverse time characteristic settings are a compromise between short fault clearing time and
selective operation in a large current range. The main determining factors are the maximum al-
lowed fault-clearing time at the maximum fault resistance to be covered and the selectivity at
maximum fault current.

Set the minimum operate current (IMin) of the earth-fault overcurrent protection to one to four
times the set characteristic quantity (IN>) of the inverse time delay. So an inverse characteristic
with a low set IN> set to get a short operate time at minimum fault current can be combined with
a higher set IMin minimum operate current, to avoid unwanted operation due to false earth-fault
currents.

Set the minimum operate time independent of the inverse time characteristic. Normally, set this
time longer than the time delay of distance zone 2 in REx 5xx to avoid interference with the im-
pedance measuring system in case of earth-faults with moderate fault resistance within zone 2.

When a solidly earthed, power transformer is energized, an inrush current normally flows in the
neutral-to-earth connection of the transformer. This current is divided among other earthed
transformers and lines connected to the same bus, inversely proportional to their zero-sequence
impedance. The amplitude and time duration of this current can be sufficiently large to cause the
unwanted operation of a sensitive earth-fault overcurrent protection.

The earth-fault overcurrent protection has a built-in second harmonic current stabilization,
which prevents unwanted operation if the inrush current has a second harmonic content of 20%
or more. This is normally the case. On rare occasions, it may be necessary to increase the setting
of the operate value for the residual earth-fault overcurrent protection to avoid unwanted opera-
tion due to transformer inrush current.

When single-phase auto-reclosing is used, the minimum time of the inverse time delayed resid-
ual overcurrent protection (tMin) should be set to be longer than the time from the occurrence
of the fault to the reclosing of the breaker at both line terminals. An alternative method is to
block the earth fault protection by the autorecloser during the dead time. This avoids unwanted
three-phase tripping during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle controlled by the distance pro-
tection.

The polarizing voltage for directional earth-fault overcurrent protection is normally obtained
from the broken delta windings of instrument voltage transformers or by internal calculation.
The voltage contains a certain amount of harmonics, especially when the protection is connected
to CVTs.

Due to the bandpass filtering a polarizing voltage down to 1 percent of the rated voltage will pro-
vide correct directional functionality. This is also valid when the protection is connected to
CVTs.

The minimum polarizing voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculated from the formula:

187
 Time delayed residual overcurrent protection Chapter 5
(TEF) Current

U sec
U m in = IF m in ⋅ Z0 min ⋅ --------------
U pr im
(Equation 164)

Where:
IFmin is the minimum primary operate fault current
Z0min is the minimum zero-sequence impedance seen from the relay
Usec, Uprim are the rated phase voltages of the broken delta connected CVTs (VTs)

Observe that when a blocking scheme or a permissive scheme with current reversal or
weak-end-infeed logic is used, IFmin represents the primary operate current of the reverse-look-
ing directional element which is 60% of the forward element.

To even secure operation in unfavorable cases, Umin must be equal to at least 1 volt plus the
maximum network frequency false voltage, due to measuring errors in the VT circuits.

If not blocked, the directional comparator operates during the dead time in case of a single-phase
auto-reclosure. So the TEF--BLOCK blocking input must be activated during the single-phase
auto-reclosing cycle.

188
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

6 Four step time delayed directional residual

overcurrent protection (EF4)

6.1 Application
In some solidly earthed networks the 4-step earth fault overcurrent protection is used. The func-
tion can be used in a similar way as the distance protection. Below is described one example of
the normal application of the 4-step earth fault overcurrent protection.

Step 1 has directional function and is set to give instantaneous trip in case of phase to earth faults
on the protected line, with large earth fault current. Due to selectivity requirements step 1 can
not be set to cover the whole length of the line.

Step 2 has directional function and is set to give a trip with a short delay (~ 0.4 s) for all remote
phase to earth faults on the protected line. Step 2 will also serve as main or remote back-up pro-
tection for phase to earth faults on the remote busbar.

Step 3 has directional function and is set to give a trip with a medium delay (0.8 - 1.2 s) for phase
to earth faults with some fault resistance. Step 3 can also serve as remote back-up protection for
phase to earth faults on other lines, out from the remote busbar.

Step 4 has non-directional function and is set to give a trip with a long delay of 1.2 s or more.
The current setting is chosen so that high resistive phase to earth faults will be detected and
cleared. Also most series faults will be detected and cleared after operation of step 4. To achieve
selectivity also for earth faults with small residual current, step 4 can have inverse time charac-
teristic.

The four step earth fault protection can also be used in a communication scheme together with
the communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (EFC). Blocking or permissive
overreach schemes can be used. One possibility is that step 2 or step 3 is used in an overreach
mode. If the overreaching step 2 (3) starts, an acceleration signal is sent to the remote line end.
If an acceleration signal is received step 2 (3) will give an instantaneous function.

In case of applicationt on a double circuit line or small infeed of residual current, the additional
logic for “Current reversal and weak-end-infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection” (EF-
CA) should be used in permissive overreaching scheme.

To assure dependable and secure function of the 4-step residual overcurrent protection, exten-
sive network calculations are required.

6.2 Functionality
6.2.1 Theory of operation

6.2.2 Function logic

The 4 step earth-fault overcurrent protection has three current steps with independent time delay
and a fourth current step with independent time delay or inverse time characteristics (Normal
inverse (NI), Very inverse (VI), Extremely inverse (EI) and one logarithmic inverse character-
istic (LOG)).

189
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

The formulas in table 12 are valid for the different inverse time characteristics in the four-step
earth-fault protection.

Table 12: Inverse characteristics formulas

Characteristic: Time delay (s):
Normal inverse
0 , 14
t = -------------------------------
0, 02
⋅k (Equation 165)
( I ⁄ I B) – 1

Very inverse
13 5 ,- -------- ⋅ k
-------------- (Equation 166)
t =
( I ⁄ IB) – 1

Extremely inverse
80
t = --------------------------- ⋅ k (Equation 167)
2
( l ⁄ l B) – 1

Logarithmic inverse
t = 5.8 – ( 1.35 ⋅ ln ( l ⁄ l B ) )
(Equation 168)

The simplified logic diagrams in figure 104 to 105 show the circuits for the four overcurrent
steps and the directional function. The diagrams also include the logic of the switch-onto-fault
function.

step1
Oper.mode Check of operation
mode and conditions
stfw-int
strv-int t1
& t EF4--TRIN1
e-int
trin1-int
IN1>
3I0
& EF4--STIN1
stin1-int

50 ms
EF4--BLOCK
t step 2 and 3 same as step 1.
EF4--BLKTR

99000057.vsd

Figure 104: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Step 1. Step 2 and step 3 are the
same.

190
Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

SOTF Oper. 300 ms Switch-onto-fault

e-int t 0 = Off
stin2-int t4U 1 = IN2>
stin4-int & EF4--TRSOTF
t 2 = IN4>Res
block-int trsotf-int
EF4--BC

EF4--BLKTR
99000058.vsd

Figure 105: Simlified logic diagarm of internal function Switch-onto-fault.

trsotf-int

trin1-int
trin2-int
trin3-int
50 ms
EF4--BLOCK
t
EF4--BLKTR
Step 4
Oper.mode
Check of operation EF4--TRIP
t4Min >1
mode and conditions
t t4
stfw-int & t
strv-int
e-int EF4--TRIN4

Def. &
Characteristic

Def/NI/VI/EI/LOG IN>Inv
Characteristic
3I0 EFCh
k block-int
IN4>
EF4--STIN4

IN> &
20/32%
EF4--START
>1
2fn e-int
&
±Σ

stin1-int
stin2-int
stin3-int

stfw-int
strv-int

99000059.vsd

Figure 106: Simplified logic diagram of internal function step 4.

191
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

50 m s
EF4--BLOCK
t

Directional check
EF3I0STD
3I0 & EF4--STFW
3I0x 100% FORW ARD &
3fn cos(ϕ-65) stfw-int
3U0 60% REVERSE & EF4--STRV
& strv-int
0.01 Un

99000060.vsd

Figure 107: Simplified logic diagram of internal function Directional check.

For all four current steps, one of the following operate modes can be selected, independently of
the other steps:

• Non-directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, Non-

DirNonRestr.
• Forward directional overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint,
ForwRelease.
• Non-directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, Restrained.
• Forward directional overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, For-
wRelRestr.
• Overcurrent function without second harmonic restraint, with blocking from the
reverse direction measuring element, RevBlock.
• Overcurrent function with second harmonic restraint, with blocking from the re-
verse direction measuring element, RevBlRestr.

6.2.3 The directional measuring function

The forward direction measuring element (STFW) operates when:

3I0 ⋅ cos 〈 ϕ – 65°〉 ≥ IN > Dir

(Equation 169)

Where:
IN>Dir = set operate current

ϕ = phase angel between the current and the voltage (positive if the current lags the voltage)

The operate current can be set between 5 and 40% of the base current (Ib) of the REx 5xx ter-
minal.

The operate current is very little influenced by moderate phase angle differences. A deviation of
20° from the characteristic angle 65° only increases the operate value by 6.5%.

192
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

The operate value is practically independent of the magnitude of the polarising voltage in the
interval from 0.5 to 100% of nominal value. When the voltage is less than 0.5%, the measuring
circuit is blocked.

In special cases when the polarising voltage is too low, current polarising can be used by insert-
ing an external unit which converts the zero sequence current into a voltage.

The polarising voltage is normally obtained from the broken delta winding of the VT’s. When
the voltage is low, it can have a high content of harmonics - especially third harmonic - relative
the basic frequency component. This is specially the case when capacitive VT’s are used. To se-
cure correct directional function down to a polarising voltage of 0.5% of rated voltage, the mea-
suring circuit is provided with a filter which has a damping factor of >20 for the third harmonic
component of the voltage.

The directional function has two comparators, one operates in the forward direction (STFW) and
one operates in the reverse direction (STRV). The operate current of the reverse directional com-
parator is 0.6IN>Dir, i.e. 40% lower than that of the forward directional. The increased sensitiv-
ity is used to compensate for the influence of the capacitive current generated by the faulty line,
which in case of an external fault decreases the current fed to the earth-fault protection situated
at the line end towards the fault. By increasing the sensitivity, reliable blocking from the reverse
directional measuring element is obtained for the directional comparison system.

65° U pol = -3U0

ϕ

I set 99000061.vsd

Figure 108: Operate characteristic of the direction measuring element.

6.2.4 Definite time overcurrent step 1

When the current exceeds the set operate value for IN1> and no blocking is applied to input
EF4-BLOCK, the &-gate operates and the start flag EF4-STIN1 is activated.

When the setting “ForwRelease” is selected, the forward directional element must also operate
in order to start the timer t1.

193
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

When the setting “RevBlock” is selected, the timer t1 is not activated if the reverse directional
element is activated.

When the setting “Restrained” is selected, the timer t1 is not activated if the second harmonic
content in 3I0 is higher than the set blocking value (20 or 32%).

6.2.5 Definite time overcurrent step 2 and 3

The overcurrent steps 2 and 3 have the same functionality as step 1.

6.2.6 Overcurrent step 4

With setting “Characteristic = Definite”, the function of step 4 with current detector IN4> and
timer t4 is the same as for overcurrent steps 1 – 3.

When logarithmic inverse time characteristic is selected the inverse time calculation starts when
the current exceeds the set operate value of current detector IN4> (see figure 106). For the NI,
VI and EI characteristics the inverse time calculation starts when the current exceeds the set
characteristic current (IN>Inv). The inverse time delay is determined by the selection of the
characteristic (NI,VI etc.), the setting of the time multiplier (k) and the characteristic current
(IN>Inv). The timer t4 starts when both the inverse timer and the timer t4Min operate. Hence,
the setting IN4> determines the minimum operate current and the setting t4Min determines the
minimum operate time.

The influence of the setting of minimum operate time and minimum operate time on the inverse
time function is shown in figure 109.

Observe that when inverse characteristic NI, VI or EI is selected, the second harmonic restrain
is a fixed value=20 %, independent of the setting.

t (s)
l min (IN4>)

5 Logarithmic inverse

4 Normal inverse
(k=0.4)
3

2
t4MIN
1

1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 50 x IN>Inv
99000062.vsd

Figure 109: Normal inverse and logarithmic inverse time characteristics.

Timer t4Min is normally set to zero. It can be used to add a constant time to the inverse time
delay.

194
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

The functions ForwRel, RevBlock and Restrain are applicable also when inverse time is select-
ed.

To release the switch-onto-fault function, the input EF4--BC is activated when the breaker is
closed. The function remains released 5 seconds after reset of the input signal.

When the operation mode SOTF is set to IN2>, the current stage IN2> activates the output
EF4--TRSOTF with a fixed time delay of 300 ms. With the setting SOTF = IN4>Res, the current
stage IN2> activates the output with a fixed time delay of 300 ms and the current stage IN4>Res
activates the output EF4--TRSOTF with a time delay t4U. Nevertheless, a condition is that the
second harmonic content in 3I0 is less than the set blocking value. Both time steps are blocked
when input EF4--BLOCK is activated.

When the setting BlkParTransf = On is selected and the second harmonic content in the current
3I0 is higher than the set restrain value 70 ms after the operation of current detector IN4>Res,
the &-gate after the timer seals in and gives second harmonic blocking until the current detector
resets. The function is used for parallel connected transformers, for which the second harmonic
content of the inrush current may become substantially reduced within fractions of a second after
breaker closure.

6.3 Calculations
6.3.1 Settings

6.3.2 General
The parameters for the four step time delayed directional residual overcurrent protection func-
tion (EF4) are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical ref-
erence manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

Only detailed network studies can determine the operate conditions under which the highest pos-
sible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears during single-phase
fault conditions. But to examine two-phase-to-earth conditions is also needed, since this type of
fault can give larger earth fault current than single-phase to earth fault in some cases.

Also transients, that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times, should be con-
sidered. A typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end or
at a line tap, which can cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus
also cause operation of the residual overcurrent protection.

As the reach of each step is dependent on the operation conditions, fault calculations for the set-
tings should be done with various switching states in the network.

6.3.3 Step 1
The settings for step 1 is described in the following sections. See section "Meshed network with-
out parallel line" and section below, are valid for both directional and non-directional operation.
For non-directional operation, also see section "Meshed network non-directional", must be con-
sidered.

195
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

Meshed network without parallel line

This section describes the setting calculation for Step 1 for both directional and non-directional
operation. But when non-directional operation is selected, an additional fault calculation, with a
fault applied in A, has to be done. See section. "Meshed network non-directional".

The following fault calculations have to be done for single-phase-to-earth and

two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to figure 110, apply a fault in B and then calculate the
relay through fault residual current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum
source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to
get the maximum through fault current from A to B. For most protections a network switching
state, with one of the lines out from the remote busbar taken out of service, will give the largest
residual fault current to the protection.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000474.vsd

Figure 110: Through fault currency from A to B: IfB

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ≥ MAX(I fB)

(Equation 170)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 10% is sug-
gested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers during transient conditions and in-
accuracy in the system data.

The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection, step 1, is then:

Is ≥ 1, 2 ⋅ I fB
(Equation 171)

Meshed network with parallel line

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the protect-
ed line has to be considered. One example is given in figure 111, where the two lines are con-
nected to the same busbar. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from the faulty

196
Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the through fault current IfB
mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for the relay in figure 111
will be with a fault at the C point with the breaker C open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the relay (IM) on the
healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is calculated.
The through fault current IM is the sum of the induced fault current from line 1 and the fault
current that would occur in line 2 if the mutual impedance M would be zero. Also in the case
with fault at a parallel line, the case with one of the lines out from the remote busbar taken out
of service, should be considered.

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

99000477.vsd
IM

Relay Line 2

Figure 111: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection function (Imin)
will be:

Im in ≥ MA X(I fB, I M )
(Equation 172)

Where:
IfB has been described in the previous paragraph

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the protec-
tion, step 1, is then:

Is ≥ 1, 2 ⋅ Imin
(Equation 173)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
or less than the maximum residual fault current that the relay has to clear.

197
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

Meshed network non-directional

First do the calculation according to section "Meshed network without parallel line".

Then apply a fault in A and calculate the through fault residual current IfA, figure 110. In order
to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and the maximum value
for ZA have to be considered.

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000475.vsd

Figure 112: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will then be:

Imin ≥ MAX(I fA, IfB )

(Equation 174)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5%
for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 10% is sug-
gested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers during transient conditions and in-
accuracy in the system data.

The minimum setting (Is) for the residual overcurrent protection, step 1, is then:

Is ≥ 1, 2 ⋅ Imin
(Equation 175)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is equal
or less than the maximum fault current that the relay has to clear IF in figure 113.

198
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
Relay

Fault
99000476.vsd

Figure 113: Fault current: IF

For parallel lines, the minimum theoretical current setting for the residual overcurrent protection
function (Imin) will be:

Imin ≥ MAXI 〈 I fA, I fB, I M〉

(Equation 176)

Where:
IfA, IfB have been described in the previous paragraphs

6.3.4 Step 2 and 3

The calculation of the settings for step 2 and 3 differs from step 1. However, the method to cal-
culate the values are the same for step 2 and 3. First it is necessary to apply the faults as in figure
114, one at a time, and measure the residual currents and calculate the settings for step 2. Phase
to earth faults out on each line out from the remote busbar, are calculated. In these calculations
the circuit breaker at the remote end of the faulted line is open (instantaneous trip).

199
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

C
A B 3I0B-C

D
3I0A-B 3I0B-D

Relay
xx00000714.vsd

Figure 114: Example of fault cases between stations. Calculation of 3I0min for step 2 (and step
3).

Use the values for step 1 to calculate minimum residual current setting for step 2. Similarly, use
the values from step 2 to calculate the settings for step 3.

The minimum current for step 2 is calculated from:

3I02 1 = s ⋅ a 1 ⋅ 3I01 B – C
(Equation 177)

Where:
3I01B-C is the step 1 current setting for the B-C protection

3 I0 2 2 = s ⋅ a 2 ⋅ 3I01 B – D
(Equation 178)

Where:
3I01B-D is the step 1 setting for the B-D protection

Which then gives 3I0min as:

3I02 min = max (3I02 1,3I 022)

(Equation 179)

Where:
s is the safety factor (=1.2)

3I0 A – B (Equation 180)

a 1 = -------------------
-
3I 0B – C

200
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

3I0 A – B (Equation 181)

a 2 = --------------------
3I 0B – D

The currents to be found in figure 114.

For step 2 there is normally a requirement that faults on the remote busbar shall be detected and
cleared. Calculations are done where a phase to earth fault is applied at the remote busbar. In this
calculation the zero sequence source impedance, “behind” the relay, shall be minimized. This is
normally done by taking one line out of service.The step 2 setting should be chosen according to:

(Equation 182)
3I0 m ax ≤ s2 × min ( 3I0busbar )

Note!
The safety factor, s, may be increased if there exists a mutual coupling for the lines from B to C
or D.

Step 2 or step 3 can also be used in communication schemes: Blocking or permissive overreach.

In case of a blocking scheme step 3 can be given reverse direction. This step will be used as
blocking criterion. The reverse step 3 must overreach the overreach step 2 in the remote line end.

In case of a permissive overreach scheme it must be assured that the step to be used for sending
and accelerated trip, must overreach the line. This can be done as described above for step 2 and
3.

6.3.5 Step 4, non-directional

To detect high resistive earth-faults, a low operate current is required. On the other hand, a low
setting will increase the risk for unwanted operation due to unbalance in the network and the cur-
rent transformer circuits. The minimum operate current of the earth-fault overcurrent protection
must be set higher than the maximum false earth-fault current.

The unbalance in the network that causes false earth-fault currents is caused mainly by untrans-
posed or not fully transposed single circuit or parallel lines. This false earth-fault current is di-
rectly proportional to the load current.

In well transposed systems, the false earth-fault current is normally lower than 5% of the line
current.

In case of extremely short or not fully transposed parallel lines, the false earth-fault current must
be measured or calculated when maximum sensitivity is desired. Generally, 80 A is recommend-
ed as a minimum primary operate value for the earth-fault overcurrent protection.

6.3.6 Inverse time delay

To achieve optimum selectivity, the same type of inverse characteristic should be used for all
earth-fault overcurrent protections in the network. Therefore, in networks already equipped with
earth-fault overcurrent relays, the best selectivity will normally be achieved by using the same
type of inverse characteristic as in the existing relays.

201
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

The following formulas are valid for the inverse characteristics in the four-step earth-fault pro-
tection in REx 5xx:

Table 13: Inverse characteristics formulas

Characteristic: Operate time (s):
Normal inverse
0 , 14
t = -------------------------------
0, 02
⋅k (Equation 183)
( I ⁄ I B) – 1

Very inverse
13 5 ,- -------- ⋅ k
-------------- (Equation 184)
t =
( I ⁄ IB) – 1
Extremely inverse
80
t = --------------------------- ⋅ k (Equation 185)
2
( l ⁄ l B) – 1

Logarithmic inverse
t = 5.8 – ( 1.35 ⋅ ln ( l ⁄ l B ) )
(Equation 186)

Where:
I is a multiple of set current 3I0>Inv
IB is the set base current of the terminal
k is a time multiplying factor, setting range 0.05-1.10.

The determining factors for the inverse characteristic settings are the allowed fault clearing time
at the maximum fault resistance to be covered, and the selectivity at maximum fault current.

The minimum operate current IN4> of the inverse current step can be set in the range of one to
four times the set characteristic current IN>Inv. Hence, an inverse characteristic with a low set
IN> to get short operate time at minimum fault current can be combined with a higher set min-
imum operate current in order to avoid unwanted operation due to false residual currents.

The minimum operate time t4Min is set independent of the inverse time characteristic. This time
is normally set longer than the time delay of impedance zone 2 in the line protections, in order
to avoid interference with the impedance measuring system in case of earth-faults with moderate
fault resistance within zone 2.

6.3.7 Directional current function

Polarising voltage
The polarising voltage for directional earth-fault protection is normally obtained from the bro-
ken delta connected secondary windings of instrument voltage transformers or interposing volt-
age transformers. The voltage contains a certain amount of harmonics, especially when the
protection is connected to CVT’s.

202
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

Due to the efficient band-pass filtering within REx 5xx, a polarising voltage down to 0.5% of
the rated voltage will provide correct directional functioning. This is also valid when the protec-
tion is connected to CVT’s.

The minimum voltage to the protection (Umin) is calculated from the formula:

U sec
U m in = IF m in ⋅ Z0 mi n ⋅ -------------- (Equation 187)
Upr im

Where:
IFmin is the minimum primary operate current,
Z0min is the minimum zero-sequence sources impedance at the relay site and
Usec is the rated secondary phase voltage of the broken delta connected winding of the voltage
transformers
Uprim is the rated primary voltage

Directional current settings

The operate value of the forward direction function (IN>Dir) should with some margin be set
lower than both:

• The operate current of the most sensitive directional step.

• The lowest set current step which is used as input to the directional comparison
logic.

Check according to the formula above that the necessary polarising voltage is obtained for the
directional function.

Observe that when the current reversal or weak-end-infeed logic is used, Ifmin represents the pri-
mary operate current of the reverse directional element.

To secure operation in unfavorable cases as well, Umin should be equal to at least 0.5 volts plus
the maximum network frequency false voltage, due to measuring errors in the VT circuits.

If not blocked, the directional comparator will operate during the dead time in case of a sin-
gle-phase auto-reclosure. Therefore, the blocking input EF4-BLOCK should be activated during
the single-phase auto-reclosing cycle.

6.3.8 Example of protection scheme

Due to the flexibility of the 4 step earth-fault protection, different protection schemes according
to the customers preference can be realised. One established scheme is to use Step 1-3 as direc-
tional steps and the inverse time delayed step 4 as a low set, non-directional back-up step. A se-
lectivity plan for the different current steps is presented in figure 115.

203
 Four step time delayed directional residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EF4) Current

time

I3
I2
I1

Station A Station B Station C

99000064.vsd

Figure 115: Example of selectivity plan for the directional current steps.

In systems with 3-phase tripping from the distance relays in case of earth-faults, no time delay
is normally used for step 1.

Step 2 is set to operate for all earth-faults on the entire line and at the remote end station, even
with a certain additional fault resistance. The calculated minimum earth-fault current is multi-
plied with a safety factor of 0.9 to get the current setting of step 2. The time delay of step 2 is
normally set to 0.4 s.

Step 2 shall also be selective to step 2 in the adjacent station, see figure 115. It may, therefore,
be necessary to compromise and accept a higher current setting than according to the above for
the protection in station A.

Directional current step 3 is set to operate for earth-faults with additional resistance or for the
minimum current at which sufficient polarising voltage is obtained. The time delay of step 3 is
normally set to 0.8-1.5 s.

The inverse time delayed, non-directional step 4 is in this scheme used as a back-up function
which shall trip the line in case of earth-faults with so high additional resistance that the direc-
tional steps cannot operate. Step 4 is normally given the same setting for all lines in the network
with a time/current characteristic that normally gives selectivity towards the directional steps.

Desirable values of the fault resistances for the different current steps are – ~ 15 Ω for RI2 , ~ 25
Ω for RI3 and ~ 50 Ω for RI4. If these values cannot be fulfilled, another protection function
should be considered, for example current differential protection.

204
 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

7 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent

protection (WEF1)

7.1 Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly small-
er than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty is that the magnitude of the phase to earth
fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults
in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos
ϕ, where ϕ is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with
a characteristic angle.

In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the
phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase shift compared to the re-
sidual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersén coil, with or without a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault
detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º. As the amplitude of the re-
sidual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is
achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should
the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to con-
sider:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault current

7.2 Functionality
Features

• Separate starting indicators

• Separate trip indicator
• Separate direction indicators
• Settable characteristic angle, RCA, between -90 deg. to +90 deg.
• Internal supervision
• Binary input to enable or block the operation
• Independent time delay for trip

Description of operation

205
 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1) has two analog inputs, re-
sidual current and residual voltage. The main functionality goal is to measure the residual cur-
rent component 3I0cos ϕ.

The reference for the directional check is the voltage 3U0. Depending on the earthing of the net-
work the angle of the voltage 3U0 must be adjusted with the relay characteristic angle, RCA.The
reference voltage, see figure 116.

Uref = – 3 U0 ⋅ ej ⋅ (RCA )
(Equation 188)

Where:
-3U0 is equal to 3U0 with 180 degrees adjusted

RCA is usually equal to zero in compensated network (Petersén coil) and 90 degree in isolated
network.

Precondition for the calculation is the availability of high enough residual voltage and residual
current respectively.The sum of ϕ and RCA (called ANGLE) is used in the protection algorithm,
see figure 116.

206
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

Uref

Forward Direction when

ϕ is between
RCA 0 deg. to 180 deg.
3I0
ϕ

-3U0

ANGLE = ϕ + RCA

Isolated network

Forward Direction when

RCA = 0 ϕ is between
90 deg. to -90 deg.
3I0
ϕ

-3U0 , Uref

ANGLE = ϕ + RCA

Compensated network
en01000037.vsd

Figure 116: RCA with regard to compensated or isolated network

The compensated angle is used for directional detection and for input of the calculation of the
fault current component, 3I0 cos ϕ.

Start conditions

A start signal from the function is given if both residual voltage, (UN>) and residual current
component, 3I0 cos ϕ (ΙΝcosPhi>) exceeds the setting values, see figure 117.

207
 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

Trip conditions

A trip signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The current component, 3I0 cos ϕ (ΙΝcosPhi>) exceeds the setting value.
• The residual voltage, (UN>) exceeds the setting value.
• The fault is detected in the chosen direction (FW = forward or RV = reverse).
• The time delay tTrip has elapsed.

WEF1-STU
UN>
WEF1-START
&
INcosPhi>

tTrip
WEF1-TRIP
& t
≥1

Direction=FW
WEF1-STFW
&
FW

Direction=RV
WEF1-STRV
&
RV

en01000083.vsd

Figure 117: Logic for sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1)

7.3 Calculations
The parameters for the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection function (WEF1) are
set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual
for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

In the setting of earth fault protection, in a high impedance grounded system, the neutral point
voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the earth fault current will be calculated at the desired sen-
sitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point voltage (zero sequence) can be calculated
as:

208
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

V phase
V 0 = -----------------------
3 ⋅ Rf
1 + -------------
Z0
(Equation 189)

Where:
Vphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault,
Rf is the resistance to earth in the fault point and
Z0 is the system zero sequence impedance to earth

The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

3 ⋅ V phase
I j = 3I 0 = -------------------------
-
Z0 + 3 ⋅ Rf

(Equation 190)

The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system earthing. In an isolated system (without neutral
point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling between the phase conductors
and earth:

3 ⋅ V phase
Z0 = – jX c = –j -------------------------
-
Ij
(Equation 191)

Where:
Ij is the capacitive earth fault current at a non-resistive phase to earth fault

In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance grounded system) the impedance Z0 can be
calculated as:

– jX c ⋅ 3R n
Z 0 = -----------------------------
-
– jX c + 3R n

(Equation 192)

Where:
Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor

209
 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or more
transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:

j ( 3X n – Xc ) ⋅ 3R n
Z 0 = ----------------------------------------------
j ( 3X n – Xc ) + 3R n
(Equation 193)

Where:
Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil

In the setting of the function a number of parameters shall be given.

The characteristic angle RCA of the function is chosen to 0 degree in a system with a neutral
point resistor and/or a Petersen coil. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 degrees in an iso-
lated system.

The start current Iset is chosen smaller than the smallest residual current, in the characteristic
angel, to be detected by the protection function. In a system with resistive grounding the Iset can
be chosen according to:

V0
Iset ≤ IRn ⋅ ------------------
V phase

(Equation 194)

Where:
IRn is the rated current of the neutral point resistor and
V0 is the neutral point voltage at the desired sensitivity (fault resistance)

In an isolated system Iset can be chosen according to:

V0
I set ≤ ( Icback – Ic forw ) ⋅ -----------------
-
Vphase

(Equation 195)

Where:
Icback is the capacitive earth fault current contribution “behind” the protection at a
non-resistive fault and
Icforw is the capacitive earth fault current contribution “forward” to the protection at a
non-resisitive fault

210
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent Chapter 5
protection (WEF1) Current

The Uset is set to a voltage to be sure to detect resistive earth faults at desired sensitivity.

The time delay is chosen according to the selectivity plan of the system.

211
 Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

8 Sensitive directional residual power protection

(WEF2)

8.1 Application
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly small-
er than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty is that the magnitude of the phase to earth
fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults
in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I0 3U0
cos ϕ, where ϕ is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated
with a characteristic angle.

In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the
phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has 90º phase shift compared to the re-
sidual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersén coil, with or without a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault
detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º. As the amplitude of the re-
sidual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is
achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual current protection be used and when should the
sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks,
with large capacitive earth fault current
• In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resis-
tor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a
zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power
protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power
characteristics.

8.2 Functionality
Features

• Separate starting indicators

• Separate trip indicator
• Settable characteristic angle, RCA, between -90 deg. to +90 deg.
• Internal supervision
• Binary input to enable or block the operation
• Independent time delay for trip

212
Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

• Inverse time function

Description of operation

Sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2) has two analog inputs, residual
current and residual voltage. The main functionality goal is to measure the residual power 3U0
3I0cos ϕ.

The reference for the directional check is the voltage 3U0. Depending on the earthing of the net-
work the angle of the voltage 3U0 must be adjusted with the relay characteristic angle, RCA.The
reference voltage, see figure 118.

Uref = – 3 U0 ⋅ ej ⋅ (RCA )

(Equation 196)

Where:
-3U0 is equal to 3U0 with 180 degrees adjusted

RCA is usually equal to zero in compensated network (Petersén coil) and -90 degrees in isolated
network.

Precondition for the calculation is the availability of high enough residual voltage and residual
current respectively.The sum of ϕ and RCA (called ANGLE) is used in the protection algorithm,
see figure 118.

213
 Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

Uref

Forward Direction when

ϕ is between
RCA 0 deg. to 180 deg.
3I0
ϕ

-3U0

ANGLE = ϕ + RCA

Isolated network

Forward Direction when

RCA = 0 ϕ is between
90 deg. to -90 deg.
3I0
ϕ

-3U0 , Uref

ANGLE = ϕ + RCA

Compensated network
en01000037.vsd

Figure 118: RCA with regard to compensated or isolated network

The compensated angle is used for directional detection and for input of the calculation of the
fault power component, 3U0 3I0cos ϕ.

Start conditions

214
Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

A start signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled, see figure
119.

• Residual voltage exceeds the setting value (UN>)

• Residual current exceeds the setting value (IN>)
• The measured real power 3U0 3I0cos ϕ exceeds the setting value (SN>)

The inverse function

An inverse time trip function for the Sensitive directional residual power protection is imple-
mented in the algorithm for WEF2.

The inverse time function:

Tinv = k ⋅ Sref ⁄ (3U0 3I 0 cosϕ)

(Equation 197)

Where:
k is k-factor (0.0 - 2.0),
Sref is scaling factor (5.0 - 50.0) and
3U0I0cosϕ is the measured real power

Trip conditions

A trip signal from the function is given if all the following conditions are fulfilled:

• Residual voltage exceeds the setting value (UN>)

• Residual current exceeds the setting value (IN>)
• The measured real power component 3U0 3I0cos ϕ exceeds the setting value
(SN>)
• The measured real power component 3U0 3I0cos ϕ is activated until the inverse
time Tinv has elapsed.
• The time delay tTrip has elapsed.
• The fault is detected in the chosen direction (forward or reverse).

215
 Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

UN>

WEF2-START
IN> &

SN> Inverse time

t tTrip
WEF2-TRIP
& t
SN

&

Direction=FW
&
FW
≥1

Direction=RV
&
RV

en01000084.vsd

Figure 119: Logic for sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2)

8.3 Calculations
The parameters for the sensitive directional residual power protection function (WEF2) are set
via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for
setting parameters and path in local HMI.

Consider a MV system with a medium size neutral point resistor connected to the neutral of the
transformer feeding the system. A phase to earth fault occurs on a line in the system, as shown
in figure 120.

216
Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

Source impedance
Zsc (pos. seq)

ZT,1 (pos. seq)

ZT,0 (zero seq) RN

V0A Substation A

3I0
ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq)
ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)

V0B Substation B

ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)

Phase to earth fault xx00000715.vsd

Figure 120: Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting

The residual fault current can be written:

3 ⋅ Vph
3I 0 = -----------------------------------------------
2 ⋅ Z1 + Z 0 + 3 ⋅ R f
(Equation 198)

Where:
Vph is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault

Z1 = Z sc + Z T,1 + Z lineAB,1 + ZlineBC,1

(Equation 199)

217
 Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point,

Z0 = Z T,0 + 3 ⋅ RN – jX 0tot + ZlineAB,0 + Z lineBC,0

(Equation 200)

is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point and Rf is the fault resistance.

The residual voltage in stations A and B can be written.

V0A = 3I0 ⋅ ( ZT, 0 + 3 ⋅ R N )

(Equation 201)

V0B = 3I0 ⋅ ( ZT,0 + 3 ⋅ R N + Z lineAB,0 )

(Equation 202)

The residual power will be:

S 0A = 3 ⋅ V 0A ⋅ 3I0 (Equation 203)

S 0B = 3 ⋅ V 0B ⋅ 3I0
(Equation 204)

The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum sensitivity in the
characteristic angle ϕ. The protection will use the component with the characteristic angle for
measurement and as base for the inverse time delay.

S0A,prot = 3 ⋅ V 0A ⋅ 3I 0 ⋅ cos ϕ A (Equation 205)

S0B,prot = 3 ⋅ V 0B ⋅ 3I 0 ⋅ cos ϕ A (Equation 206)

The time delay for the two protections in A and B will be:

S 0A,prot
t A = k ⋅ ------------------
-
Sref
(Equation 207)

S0B,prot
tB = k ⋅ ----------------
---
S ref
(Equation 208)

Where:
k, Sref are setting parameters

218
Sensitive directional residual power protection Chapter 5
(WEF2) Current

The network calculation should be used to find the base for setting of the parameters.

219
 Scheme communication logic for residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EFC) Current

9 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection (EFC)

9.1 Application
This communication logic is intended for residual overcurrent protections.

To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous
zone 1, the directional residual overcurrent protection function can be supported with logic, that
uses communication channels.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required.
The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel
speed and security against false or lost signals. So special channels are used for this purpose.
When power line carrier is used for communication, these special channels are strongly recom-
mended due to the communication disturbance caused by the primary fault.

In the directional comparison scheme, information of the fault current direction must be trans-
mitted to the other line end.

With directional comparison, an operate time of 50-60 ms, including a channel transmission
time of 20 ms, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid automatic reclosing func-
tion after the fault.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the auto-reclosing device must block the directional com-
parison earth-fault scheme.

The communication logic module for the REx 5xx terminal contains circuits for blocking over-
reach and permissive overreach schemes. The module also contains logic for the weak-end-in-
feed and current-reversal functions, which are used only in the permissive overreach scheme.

9.2 Functionality
9.2.1 Theory of operation

9.2.2 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive over-
reach schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and
weak-end-infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to
get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions that prevents operation
of the directional comparison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison
scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the EFC--BLOCK input of the directional
comparison module.

220
 Scheme communication logic for residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EFC) Current

9.2.3 Blocking scheme

In the blocking overreach scheme, a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects a fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips
the line after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time
delay, normally 30-40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and the chosen
safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is needed and
the channel can be shared with the impedance-measuring system, if that also works in the block-
ing mode. The communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation
will occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particularly favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no ze-
ro-sequence current outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current rever-
sals because the received carrier signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted operation
due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end-infeed logic, because the strong
end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received from the weak end. But the
fault clearing time is generally longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive one.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no blocking signal
comes from the other line end via the EFC--CR binary input (carrier receive) the EFC--TRIP
output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

EFC-CS
EFC-CSBLK &

EFC-BLOCK 0-60 s 25 ms
EFC-TRIP
& t t
EFC-CACC
t Coord
50 ms
EFC-CR t

EFC-CRL
&

99000107.vsd

Figure 121: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = blocking

9.2.4 Permissive overreach scheme

In the permissive scheme, the forward directed measuring element sends a permissive signal to
the other line end if a fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the
other line end must wait for a permissive signal before giving a trip signal. Independent channels
(frequencies) must be available for the communication in each direction.

An impedance-measuring relay which works in an underreach permissive mode with one chan-
nel in each direction can share the channels with the earth-fault overcurrent protection. If the im-
pedance measuring relay works in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be

221
 Scheme communication logic for residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EFC) Current

used in single-line applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends,
use common channels only if the ratio Z1S / Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source imped-
ance) is about equal at both line ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance measuring and the
directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions,
which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels can not be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the distance or
earth-fault protection.

In case of an internal fault, the forward directed measuring element operates and sends a permis-
sive signal to the remote end via the EFC--CS output (carrier send). Local tripping is permitted
when the forward direction measuring element operates and a permissive signal is received via
the EFC--CR binary input (carrier receive).

The total operate-time for the system is the sum of the Pick-up time (of the measuring element)
and the Transmission time (of the permissive signal)

EFC-BLOCK
EFC-CRL
EFC-CR &

25 ms
& EFC-TRIP
0-60 s t
EFC-CACC &
t
50 ms
t Coord
t
>1 EFC-CS

EFC-CSBLK
&
EFC-CSPRM &

99000108.vsd

Figure 122: Simplified logic diagram, Scheme type = permissive

9.3 Design
9.3.1 Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme, a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element in the re-
sidual overcurrent function, connected to the EFC--CSBLK input signal, detects a fault in the
reverse direction. When the forward directional element operates, it trips the line after a short
time delay if no blocking signal is received from the other line end. The time delay, normally
30-40 ms, depends on the communication transmission time and the chosen safety margin.

222
 Scheme communication logic for residual Chapter 5
overcurrent protection (EFC) Current

9.3.2 Permissive overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme, the forward direction measuring element in the residual overcurrent
function, connected to the EFC--CSPRM input, sends a permissive signal to the other line end
if a fault is detected in the forward direction. The directional element at the other line end must
wait for a permissive signal before giving a trip signal. Independent channels (frequencies) must
be available for the communication in each direction.

9.4 Calculations
9.4.1 Setting
The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection function
are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference man-
ual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

9.4.2 Blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme, set the tCoord timer to the channel transmission time during disturbance
conditions. Add a margin of 20-30 ms. Two times the nominal value of the channel transmission
time is recommended when a power line carrier is used.

9.4.3 Permissive communication scheme

In the permissive communication scheme, the security against unwanted operation caused by
spurious carrier receive signals can be increased by delaying the tripping output with the tCoord
timer. Set the timer in the range of 0.000 to 60.000 s. In most cases, a time delay of 30 ms is
sufficient.

223
 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

10 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection (EFCA)

10.1 Application
This additional communication logic is intended for the Communication logic for residual over-
current protections.

To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the instantaneous
zone 1, the earth-fault protection functions can be supported with logic, that uses communication
channels. REx 5xx terminals have for this reason available a scheme communication logic. Dif-
ferent system conditions require in many cases additional special logic circuits, like current re-
versal logic and weak-end-infeed logic. Both functions are available within the additional
communication logic for earth-fault protection.

10.1.1 Current reversal logic

If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, overreaching permissive com-
munication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This unwanted tripping
affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result
in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses.

To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current-reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be
used.

10.1.2 Weak end infeed logic

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in the re-
mote terminal can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current.
The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or low short-circuit power of the
source. To overcome these conditions, weak end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used.

The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here, the fault
current increases when the breaker opens in the strong terminal and a sequential tripping is
achieved. This requires a detection of the fault by an independent-tripping zone 1. To avoid se-
quential tripping as described and when zone 1 is not available, weak end infeed tripping logic
is used.

10.2 Functionality
10.2.1 Theory of operation

10.2.2 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and permissive over-
reach schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal and weak end
infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking overreach scheme.

224
 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection module to
get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and prevents operation
of the directional comparison logic.

Figure 125, figure 126 and figure 127 shows the logic circuits.

Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional comparison
scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the EFCA-BLOCK input of the direction-
al comparison module.

10.2.3 Fault current reversal logic

Figure 123 and figure 124 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current
reversal; note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker opening. This can
cause an unselectiv trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block the permissive
overreach scheme in the terminal at B:2.

Strong L1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B

L2

A:2 B:2
99000043.vsd

Figure 123: Initial condition

Strong L1 Weak
source source
A:1 B:1
A B

L2

A:2 B:2
99000044.vsd

Figure 124: Current distribution after the breaker at B:1 is opened

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to EFCA-IRV, which
in terminal at B:2 recognises the fault on the L1 line. See figure 126. When the reverse direction
element is activated during the tPickUp time, the EFCA-IRVL signal is activated, see figure 125.
The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. EFCA-IRVL will be con-
nected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme.

225
 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

When breaker in B:1 operate, the fault current is reversed in line L2. The terminal at B:2 recog-
nises now the fault in forward direction. Together with the remaining carrier received signal it
will trip the breaker in B:2. To ensure that this does not occur, the permissive overreach function
need to be blocked by EFCA-IRVL, until the carrier receive signal is reset.

When the fault current is reversed in line L2, EFCA-IRV is deactived and EFCA-IRVBLK is
actived. The reset of EFCA-IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see figure 125. This ensures
the reset of the carrier receive EFCA-CR signal in terminal B:2.

In terminal A:2, where the forward direction element was initially activated. This direction ele-
ment must reset before the carrier send signal is initiated from B:2. The delayed reset of EF-
CA-IRVL also ensures the carrier send signal from terminal B:2 is held back until the forward
direction element is reset in terminal A:2.

EFCA-BLOCK
0-60 s 10 ms 0-60 s 0-60 s
EFCA-IRV EFCA-IRVL
t t t & t

EFCA-IRVBLK tPickUp tPickUp tDelay

99000053.vsd

Figure 125: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

10.2.4 Weak and infeed logic

Figure 123 shows a typical system condition, which can result in a missing operation; note that
there is no fault current from node B. This cause that terminal at B cannot detect the fault and
trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak end infeed logic is provided
for the permissive overreach scheme.

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo
signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 127 and figure 128.

Strong Weak
source source
A L1 B

99000054.vsd

Figure 126: Initial condition

The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element, connected
to EFCA-WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 127. If neither the forward nor the reverse direc-
tional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes
back the received permissive signal. See figure 127.

226
 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms,
the fault current is sufficient for the terminal in B to detect the fault with the earth-fault function
that is in operation.

EFCA-BLOCK
200 ms
EFCA-WEIBLK 50 ms 200 ms EFCA-ECHO
t &
& t t
EFCA-CRL

WEI = Echo

99000055.vsd

Figure 127: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - echo.

With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the EF-
CA-TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point
voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth-fault
function that is in operation.

EFCA-BLOCK
200 ms
EFCA-WEIBLK 50 ms 200 ms EFCA-ECHO
t &
& t t
EFCA-CRL

EFCA-TRWEI
WEI = Trip &

EFCA-ST3U0
&
EFCA-CBOPEN
99000056.vsd

Figure 128: Simplified logic diagram, weak end infeed - Trip.

The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200 ms. When
this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be sent are set to zero
for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weak end echo is selected for both
line ends.

10.3 Design
The complete EFCA additional logic for the directional residual overcurrent protection is con-
sisting of two parts: Current reversal logic and weak end infeed logic. Each of them has its own
setting parameters and possibility for its own configuration.

227
 Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

Figure 129 presents a simplified logic diagram for the current reversal function. The reverse di-
rected signal from the directional residual overcurrent function should be connected to the EF-
CA-IRV functional input, to start the operation of a logic. The EFCA-IRVL signal will be
activated, if the fault has been detected in reverse direction for more than the tPickUp time set
on the corresponding timers.

EFCA-BLOCK
0-60 s 10 ms 0-60 s 0-60 s
EFCA-IRV EFCA-IRVL
t t t & t

EFCA-IRVBLK tPickUp tPickUp tDelay

99000053.vsd

Figure 129: Simplified logic diagram, current reversal

The tDelay timer delays the reset of the output signal, when the current reversal occurs and the
fault is detected in the forward direction. This prevents the residual overcurrent function to op-
erates unnecessarily during the current reversal conditions.

The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an echo
signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). The function is released with either of the WEI=Echo or
WEI=Trip settings in the menu.

The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward directional element, connected
to EFCA-WEIBLK via an OR-gate. The weak-end-infeed logic echoes back the received per-
missive signal, if neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated
during the last 200 ms.

With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates the EF-
CA-TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the residual voltage
is above the set operate value for 3U0>.

10.4 Calculations
10.4.1 Setting
The parameters for the current reversal and weak end infeed logic for residual overcurrent pro-
tection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Tech-
nical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

Current reversal
The Current-reversal function is set on and off by setting the parameter CurrRev = On/Off. Time
delays shall be set for the timers tPickUp and tDelay.

tPickUp is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20 ms.

tDelay is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the communication reset
time. A minimum tDelay setting of 40 ms is recommended.

228
Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for Chapter 5
residual overcurrent protection (EFCA) Current

Weak end infeed

The weak end infeed can either be set off or to echo or trip by setting the parameter WEI =
Off/Echo/Trip. (Echo = Echo, Trip = Echo + Trip). Operate zero sequence voltage for WEI trip
is set with Ugr = xx % of Ub.

The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault resistance is
calculated.

To avoid unwanted trip from the weak end infeed logic (if spurious carrier signals should occur),
set the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3U0) higher than the maximum
false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during normal service conditions. The
recommended minimum setting is two times the false zero-sequence voltage during normal ser-
vice conditions.

229
 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 5
Current

11 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL)

11.1 Application
When the load currents exceed the permitted continuous current there is a risk that the conductor
or the insulation will be subject to permanent damage due to overheating. Even moderate over-
loads under long time give appreciable temperature increase. For example, a current of 1.2 times
rated load current gives a temperature rise of 1.2 x 1.2 = 1.44 times rated value.

The temperature rise as a function of time for a fixed load is determined by the so called thermal
time constant τ of the element. Moderate overloads are normally not detected by current or im-
pedance measuring relays. A current thermal overload protection can prevent damage caused by
excessive temperature increase due to moderate or heavy current overloads.

Electrical cables which can be loaded up to the permissible load current should be provided with
thermal protection. For cables surrounded by air, the thermal time constant τ can vary from some
few minutes for 10 kV cables with small cross-sectional area to more than one hour for high volt-
age cables with large cross-sectional area. The shorter time constant valid for cables in air is de-
cisive if some part of the cable is surrounded by air.

For overhead lines and cables placed in the air, the ambient temperature will normally vary con-
siderably. Since the temperature of the element is the sum of the ambient temperature and the
temperature rise, the thermal protection for heavily loaded lines should be provided with com-
pensation for the ambient temperature. The heating effect of radiant power from the sun can also
be appreciable in some areas.

11.2 Functionality
The function includes a memory that is continuously updated with the heat content of the line
based on the RMS value of the line current and the ambient temperature. The current used in the
function is the phase current having the highest RMS value out of the three phase currents. The
function has two settable operating levels for temperature, one intended for alarm and one in-
tended for tripping. For the tripping function a reset hysteresis is included that can be set be-
tween 5 and 30°C while for the alarm function it is fixed at 5°C hysteresis.

For the alarm there is an output denoted ALARM which is active as long as the temperature is
above alarm level. For the tripping there are two outputs, one denoted TRIP which gives only a
50 ms pulse at operation and one denoted START which is active as long as the temperature is
above tripping level.

The function also includes a possibility for ambient temperature compensation through a mA
transducer input. The upper and lower value for the input range can be set between -25 and +25
mA and corresponding temperature between -1000 and + 1000°C. If transducer for ambient tem-
perature is not available the function uses a +20°C reference value instead. This value will also
be used if a fault is detected in the transducer circuits or mA input module.

230
 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 5
Current

11.3 Calculations
The parameters for the thermal phase overload protection function are set via the local HMI or
PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

The settings can also be made by aids of the SMS or PST setting tools.

For temperature compensation, input No. 1 on the MIM module No.1 is always used (fixed con-
figuration). Necessary settings for the MIM module are On/Off for activation, time intervals for
measuring of current, upper and lower value for the current input and temperatures correspond-
ing to max. respectively min. current. These settings can only be made via the SMS or PST set-
ting tools.

To make the correct settings, the following data are required for the protected object:

• Final temperature rise after continuos load with specified load current
• Max. permissible continuous temperature and thermal time constant τ of the ob-
ject
• Max. ambient temperature
• Max. temperature rise due to radiant power from the sun - if significant

The time constant can be found if a curve is available which shows the temperature rise as a
function of time for a given load current. At load current Iload and final temperature rise Tfin the
following is valid:

Time: 1xτ 2xτ 3xτ 4xτ 5xτ

Temperature rise in % of 63 86 95 98 99
Tfin:

If different values of τ are calculated from the curve, select the lowest value of τ to obtain the
best protection.

The time to function is calculated from the formula:

231
 Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 5
Current

I ⎞2
⎛ ---------- 2
-
⎝ Ibase⎠ – p
t = τ ⋅ In --------------------------------------------------------
I ⎞ 2 Ttrip – T amb
⎛ ------------ -----------------------------
⎝ I base⎠ – Tbase

(Equation 209)

Where:
p is Ip/Ibase
Ip is continuous load current before the current is increased to I
Tamb is ambient temperature. (Tamb is 20° C as a fixed value if temperature compensation is not
used)

For other parameters: see description in the setting table in the Technical Reference Manual.

Setting example
Assume the following data:

• I1b: 5 A
• Temperature increase of the conductor: 90°C at continuous load current 4.5 A.
• Max. permissible temperature of the conductor: 125°C
• Time constant τ = 20 min
• Max. ambient temperature: 30°C
• Max. temperature increase due to radiant power from the sun: 5°C

Example 1: THOL with no temperature compensation

Ibase = 4.5 A = 4.5/5 x 100 = 90% of I1b

Tbase = 90°C, τ = 20 min

The thermal function assumes 20°C ambient temperature as a fixed value instead of the actual
value 30°C. Also, the 5°C temperature increase due to the sun radiant power is not included in
the calculated temperature increase. Hence, the function calculates continuos conductor temper-
ature 20 + 90 = 110°C at 4.5 A whereas the max. value is 30 + 90 +5 = 125°C. Hence the setting
should be TTrip = 125 - (125 - 110) = 110°C.

Example 2: THOL with temperature compensation

Assume temperature measuring elements with output 4 mA at -20°C and 20 mA at 100°C. Set-
tings of Ibase, Tbase and τ same as above.

MI11-1_Max= 20.00mA MI11-MaxValue = +100°C

MI11-I_Min= 4.00mA MI11-MinValue = -20°C

232
Thermal phase overload protection (THOL) Chapter 5
Current

The influence of the ambient temperature is included in the calculated values. The 5°C temper-
ature increase due to the sun radiant power, however, is not included. Hence the setting should
be Ttrip = 125 - 5 = 120°C.

233
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

12 Breaker failure protection (BFP)

12.1 Application
This function issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case of a tripping
failure of the circuit breaker (CB), and clears the fault as requested by the object protection.

The breaker-failure function is started by a protection trip command, from the line and busbar
protection through the breaker-related trip relays. A general START input is always available
that starts the measurement in all appropriate phases. In some implementations also phase selec-
tive START signals are available. For retrip there is always a general RETRIP output available
and in applications with phase selective START signals also phase selective RETRIP output sig-
nals are available. Correct fault current clearing or failure is detected by a current check in each
phase. The current level can be set at 0,05 to 2 times the rated current.

Retrip of the faulty CB can be done with or without current check. A delay, 0-60 s, can be set
for the retrip.

The use of retrip, limits the impact on the power system if the breaker-failure protection function
(BFP) is started by mistake during testing or other maintenance work.

A second time step is used for the back-up trip command. It should be connected to trip the ad-
jacent breakers, to clear the busbar section and intertrip the remote end, if so required. The time
setting range is 0-60 s.

By using separate timers for each phase, correct operation at evolving faults is ensured.

The timer setting should be selected with a certain margin to allow variation in the normal fault
clearing time. The properties of the BFP function allow the use of a small margin.

234
Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

TEST

Block BFP=Yes
&
≥1
TEST-ACTIVE t2
t tp
≥1 BFP-TRBU
BFP-BLOCK &
t1 tp
STIL1 & t

BFP-START
≥1 ≥1 BFP-TRRET
BFP-STL1 &

t2
t
& BFP-TRRETL1
t1 tp
STIL2
& t
RETRIP=I>Check BFP-TRRETL2
BFP-START
≥1
BFP-STL2 BFP-TRRETL3
&
RETRIP=No I>Check

t2
t
&
t1 tp
STIL3
& t
BFP-START
≥1
BFP-STL3
&

en01000185.vsd

Figure 130: Breaker-failure protection, simplified logic diagram

The application functions of the protection are:

• Individual phase-current detection

• Two time steps, one for retrip of the related circuit breaker and one for the
back-up trip of the adjacent circuit breakers
• Selection of current controlled or unconditional retrip
• Phase separated timers gives correct operation at an evolving fault
• Accurate timers and current elements reset in 10 ms, allowing the use of short
back-up trip time

235
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

Retrip General trip

Normal original CB adjacent CB
Start BFP CB Opening 110 ms 150 ms

Relay
time
CB Opening time Margin
30 ms 40 ms 20 ms
BFP
Time CB Opening time
<10 ms 40 ms Marginal
20 ms BFP
time
<10 ms
99000047.vsd

Figure 131: Time sequence

12.2 Functionality
The breaker-failure protection will be started by a general signal, or in some cases phase selec-
tive signals, either from an external protection, or internally from a protection trip signal in the
terminal.

The breaker receiving the original protection trip command can be retripped from the BFP. The
retrip can be controlled by a current check, or carried out as a direct retrip without any current
check. The direct retrip can be used, because the breaker-to-trip has already received a tripping
command, and the direct retrip does not cause any unselective tripping

The use of retrip, limits the extent of unwanted power disconnection in case of an accidental start
of the BFP at work in the initiating circuits, with the primary circuit in service and the load above
the set current level.

The back-up trip is sent to the adjacent circuit breakers in order to clear the fault and disconnect
the failing circuit breaker.

236
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

12.2.1 Input and output signals

External start

Trip Logic Breaker-failure

protection
>1 STL1
TRIPL1
>1 STL2
TRIPL2
>1 STL3
TRIPL3
>1 START
TPTRIP
BLOCK TRRETL1
TRRETL2
TRRETL3
TRRET
TRBU

99000049.vsd

Figure 132: Input and output signals

The connectable inputs are connectable by configuration to the binary inputs of the terminal or
to other internal functions’ outputs. The outputs are connectable by configuration to the binary
output relays. “Connectables” and “outputs” can be connected to the free-logic functions of the
unit, OR gates, and in that way add connection links

12.2.2 Start functions

The breaker-failure protection can be started either internally or externally. The start pulse is
sealed-in as long as the current exceeds the preset current level, to prevent a restart of the BFP
timers in case of a chattering starting contact. The preset current level may be set to 5-200% of
the secondary base current, I1b.

12.2.3 Measuring principles

The current is filtered through a specially designed high-pass filter to obtain the required sup-
pression of the dc components.

High-pass filtering is performed basically for two reasons, i.e. to remove the:

• dc component caused by saturated current transformers with a decaying current

due to de-energizing of the secondary circuit. This is done to achieve a more cor-
rect representation of the real current in the line.
• dc component that is a part of the fault current. This is done to achieve a correct
base for both ASD and RMS calculations.

The frequency limit of the filter is very close to the service frequency, to obtain a maximum sup-
pression of the above dc components.

237
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

The intention of the adaptive signal detection (ASD) concept is to achieve independence from
the absolute filtering requirement, when dealing with extremely high fault currents in combina-
tion with low preset values. This is obtained by creating a new stabilizing signal to compare the
current with.

The ASD works continuously, regardless of if the BFP was started. Its result is however consid-
ered only when the BFP has started and the pre-set time has elapsed.

As the current exceeds the previously stabilized sample, it adapts the value of the current and
when it does not, it decays. This adaptive behaviour makes it possible to rapidly and securely
detect a breaker failure situation after the pre-set time has elapsed.Continuously and in parallel,
the RMS value of the post-filtered signal is calculated and compared with a preset current level.
As the RMS value decreases below the preset current level, the breaker-failure function is mo-
mentarily reset.

At normal operation of the circuit breaker, the stabilizing signal exceeds the post-filtered signal
for a consecutive period of maximum 10 ms before it is reset. Resetting occurs before the
back-up trip timer t2 has timed out.

At a breaker failure situation, the post-filtered current exceeds the stabilizing signal, resulting in
a trip from the breaker-failure function within 10 ms after the trip timer t2 has elapsed.

The breaker-failure protection works totally separated when comes to current measurement and
timers. The back-up trip is always non-segregated.

Current
Current detector
ASD Back-up trip
&
RMS
& t
Start
t t
t1

99000104.vsd

Figure 133: Breaker-failure protection

238
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

High- Creation of Decision

Current Recti-
pass stabilizing through ASD
samples fying
filtering signal comparison

Decision
RMS
through RMS
calculation
comparison

en00000011.vsd

Figure 134: Current detector, ASD and RMS measurement

Retrip functions
The retrip function of the original circuit breaker is set at one of three options:

Setting: The retrip;

Off function is not executed.
I> check occurs with a current check.
No I> check occurs without a current check.

The retrip timer t1 can be set from 0 to 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

Back-up trip
The back-up trip delay timer t2 can be set between 0 and 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

12.3 Design
The breaker failure protection is initiated by the trip commands from the protection functions,
either internal to the terminal or from external commands through binary inputs. The start can
be initiated by a general signal, or in some cases phase selective signals.

The operating values of the current measuring elements are settable within a wide setting range.
The measuring is stabilised against the dc-transient that can cause unwanted operation at satu-
rated current transformers and correct breaker operation. Time measurement is individual for
each phase. Two independent timers are available, t1 for repeated tripping of “own” breaker and
t2 which operates trip logic for adjacent breakers.

239
 Breaker failure protection (BFP) Chapter 5
Current

12.4 Calculations
12.4.1 Setting

12.4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The parameters for the breaker failure protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

The breaker-failure protection can be controlled from the human-machine interface (HMI) by an
“Operation” parameter, to be set between alternatives Off/On.

When “Operation” is set to Off, the function becomes inoperative.

The configuration of input and output signals to the function is made with the CAP configuration
tool.

The inputs and the outputs to and from the breaker-failure protection are presented in the signal
list.

Fixed values
Trip pulse, tp 150 ms, fixed

The breaker failure protection shall be set by means of a current limit for detection of a breaker
failure. The current setting shall be chosen in relation to the protection functions, initiating the
breaker failure protection. Normally the current setting should be equal to or lower than the most
sensitive setting of a residual overcurrent protection.

If the retrip function is used a time delay before retrip has to be set. In most cases this time delay
can be set to zero.

The time delay of the back-up trip function shall be chosen so that selectivity is maintained. Con-
sider the following:

t1: Set retrip time delay

tbr: Circuit breaker opening time

BFR reset time

The back-up trip delay t2 shall be set:

t2 ≥ t1 + t br + margin
(Equation 210)

At the same time it is desired that the back-up trip is done so fast that remote protections will not
trip.

240
About this chapter Chapter 6
Voltage

Chapter 6 Voltage

About this chapter

This chapter describes the voltage protection functions.

241
 Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) Chapter 6
Voltage

1 Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV)

1.1 Application
Undervoltage protection prevents the sensitive elements from running under conditions that
could cause their overheating and thus shorten their life expectancy below the economical limits.
In many cases, it is a useful tool in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power
system.

1.2 Functionality
Figure 135 shows a simplified logic diagram of the undervoltage protection function.

The trip output signal TUV--TRIP changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if at least one of the signals
TUV--STUL1N, TUV--STUL2N or TUV--STUL3N remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer
than the set value on the corresponding timer. The TUV--VTSU signal, that is normally connect-
ed to the fuse failure supervision function, can inhibit the operation of the undervoltage protec-
tion. Any external signal, connected to the TUV--BLOCK input also blocks the operation of the
undervoltage protection. Trip output signal TUV--TRIP is blocked by any signal connected to
TUV--BLKTR input.

242
 Time delayed undervoltage protection (TUV) Chapter 6
Voltage

TUV--BLKTR
TEST

TUV--TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes >1

Function enable
TUV--BLOCK

TUV--VTSU

&
TUV--STUL1N

& >1 & t TUV--TRIP

TUV--STUL2N

& TUV--START
TUV--STUL3N

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

en00000121.vsd
Figure 135: Simplified logic diagram - Undervoltage protection

1.3 Design
The voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors continuously
measure the phase-to-neutral voltages in all three phases. Recursive Fourier filter filters the in-
put voltage signals and a separate trip counter prevents high overreaching or underreaching of
the measuring elements.

1.4 Calculations
The parameters for the time delayed undervoltage protection function are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

All the voltage conditions in the system where the undervoltage protection performs its func-
tions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and
time characteristic.

243
 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 6
Voltage

2 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV)

2.1 Application
The application areas of the overvoltage protection functions are different in distribution and
transmission networks.

The overvoltage protection is used to protect the equipment and its insulation against overvolt-
age. In this way it prevents damage to the equipment in the power system and shortening of their
life time.

The residual overvoltage protection function is mainly used in distribution networks, primarily
as a back-up protection for the residual overcurrent protection in the line feeders. This to secure
disconnection of earth-faults.

2.2 Functionality
The phase overvoltage protection function continuously measures the three phase voltages and
initiates the corresponding output signals if the measured phase voltages exceed the preset value
(starting) and remain high longer than the time delay setting on the timers (trip). This function
also detects the phases which caused the operation.

The residual overvoltage protection function calculates the residual voltage (3U0) from the mea-
suring three phase voltages and initiates the corresponding output signals if the residual voltage
is larger than the preset value (starting) and remains high longer than the time delay setting (trip).

2.3 Design
Figure 136 shows a simplified logic diagram of the overvoltage protection function. The time
delayed residual overvoltage protection and the time delayed overvoltage protection share some
input signals and logical elements. For this reason and for the sake of better overview both the
protections are shown in the figure.

244
 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 6
Voltage

TOV--BLKTR
TEST

TOV--TEST
&
Block TOV=Yes ≥1

TOV--BLOCK

&
TOV--STUL1N ≥1 TOV--TRIP

& ≥1 & t TOV--TRPE

TOV--STUL2N

& TOV--STPE
TOV--STUL3N

TOV--STL1

TOV--STL2

TOV--STL3

TOV--STN
TOV--ST3UO &
& t TOV--TRN

en01000187.vsd
Figure 136: Time delayed overvoltage protection - simplified logic diagram

245
 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 6
Voltage

TOV--BLKTR
TEST

TOV--TEST
&
≥1
Block TOV=Yes

TOV--BLOCK

&
TOV--STUL1N TOV--TRIP

& ≥1 & t TOV--TRPE

TOV--STUL2N

& TOV--STPE
TOV--STUL3N

TOV--STL1

TOV--STL2

TOV--STL3

en01000088.vsd
Figure 137: Logic diagram, time delayed overvoltage protection, phase wise

The TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRPE output signals changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if at least
one of the logical signals TOV--STUL1N, TOV--STUL2N, TOV--STUL3N remains equal to
logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the corresponding timer. The signal TOV--TRPE
will be high, to indicate that the overvoltage protection caused the trip

Any signal connected to the TOV--BLOCK input blocks the operation of the time delayed ov-
ervoltage protection. Similarly any signal connected to TOV--BLKTR will block the trip output
from the time delayed overvoltage protection.

246
 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 6
Voltage

TOV--STN
TOV--ST3UO
&
& t TOV--TRN

TOV--BLKTR TOV--TRIP
TEST

TOV--TEST
&
≥1
Block TOV=Yes

TOV--BLOCK

en01000089.vsd
Figure 138: Logic diagram, time delayed overvoltage protection, residual

The TOV--TRIP and TOV--TRN output signal changes from logical 0 to logical 1 if
TOV--ST3U0 remains equal to logical 1 for a time longer than the set value on the correspond-
ing timer. The signal TOV--TRN will be high, to indicate that the residual overvoltage protec-
tion caused the trip.

Any signal connected to the TOV--BLOCK input blocks the operation of the time delayed re-
sidual overvoltage protection. Similarly any signal connected to TOV--BLKTR will block the
trip output from the time delayed residual overvoltage protection.

2.4 Calculations
2.4.1 Setting
The time delayed overvoltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

All the voltage conditions in the system where the overvoltage protection performs its functions
must be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage-time charac-
teristic.

The overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expected maximum system operate
voltage that is in a particular part of a network. A safety margin of at least 10% should also be
considered due to the inaccuracies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and the
inaccuracy of the measuring elements in the terminal.

The residual overvoltage protection should be set higher than the expected maximum system op-
erate voltage that is in a particular part of a network. A safety margin of at least 10% should also
be considered due to the inaccuracies in the instrument transformers, calculation methods, and
the inaccuracy of the measuring elements in the terminal.

247
 Time delayed overvoltage protection (TOV) Chapter 6
Voltage

248
About this chapter Chapter 7
Power system supervision

Chapter 7 Power system

supervision

About this chapter

This chapter describes the power system supervision functions.

249
 Broken conductor check (BRC) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

1 Broken conductor check (BRC)

1.1 Application
Conventional protections can not detect the broken conductor condition. In REx 5xx terminals
this detection is achieved through the broken conductor check function (BRC), consisting of
continuous current unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected. The detection
might also concern possible interruptions in the connecting circuits between the instrument cur-
rent transformers and the terminal.

1.2 Functionality
The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents. The current un-
symmetry signal STI is set to 1 if :

• Any phase current is lower than 80% of the highest current in the remaining two
phases
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>

If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time t, a three phase trip sig-
nal BRC--TRIP is issued.

1.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 139.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockBRC=Yes)
• The input signal BRC--BLOCK is high

The BRC--BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the broken conductor check function. It can be
connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external
devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to
receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both
binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The output trip signal BRC--TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the
circuit breaker or for a signallization.

250
 Broken conductor check (BRC) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

BRC - BROKEN CONDUCTOR CHECK FUNCTION

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockBRC = Yes

Function Enable
BRC--BLOCK >1 t
BRC--TRIP
& t

Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

99000494.vsd

Figure 139: Simplified logic diagram of broken conductor check function

1.4 Calculations
1.4.1 Setting instructions
The operating values for the broken conductor check function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and
path in local HMI.

The minimum operating current is usually set to about 15% of the rated protected line current.

The time delay must comply with the selectivity planning of the protection in the whole network
if the function is used for tripping the circuit breaker. The time delay might be longer if the func-
tion is intended for alarming purposes.

For the parameter list and their setting ranges, please see “Setting parameters” in the “Technical
reference manual”.

1.4.2 Setting of the minimum operating current IP>

If the rated current of the protected line is IL, then the primary set value IsPRIMwill be:
(Equation 211)

The secondary setting value IsSEC is:

(Equation 212)

251
 Broken conductor check (BRC) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

Where:
ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and
IPRIM is the primary rated current of the main CT.

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. The value for IP> is given from this formula:

Is SE C
IP> = --------------- ⋅ 100
I1b
(Equation 213)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal.

Set this value under the setting menu:

Settings
Functions
Group n
BrokenConduct

on the value IP>.

Note!
Usually IPRIM is chosen to be 1.4 times the rated line current (IPRIM = 1.4 . IL) and is set to the
relay rated current, equal to the secondary rated current of the main CT (I1b = ISEC).

So it is obtained:

I SE C
-------------- ⋅ Is PRIM
IP RIM
IP> = ------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
I 1b
(Equation 214)

I SE C
⎛ ----------------- ⋅ 0, 15 ⋅ IL ⎞
⎜ 1.4 ⋅ I L ⎟
IP> = ⎜ -------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100⎟ = 10.7 %
⎜ I SEC ⎟
⎝ ⎠
(Equation 215)

252
 Broken conductor check (BRC) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

This is why the default setting for IP> is 10%.

1.4.3 Setting of time delay t

Set the time delay of the function, t, under the setting menu:

Settings
Functions
Group n
BrokenConduct

on the value t.

253
 Loss of voltage check (LOV) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

2 Loss of voltage check (LOV)

2.1 Application
The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is normally
used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after a major blackout.
The loss of voltage check function gives a trip signal only if the voltage in all the three phases
is low for more then 7 seconds. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required, then the function
can be used for signallization through an output contact or through the event recording function.

2.2 Functionality
The voltage-measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages, and
compare them with the set values. Fourier recursive filter filters the voltage signals.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the related phase measured volt-
age decrease under the pre-set value:

• STUL1N for UL1N voltage

• STUL2N for UL2N voltage
• STUL3N for UL3N voltage

The 150 ms output trip pulse is issued if all the three phase voltages are below the setting value
for more than 7s. The function can be blocked from the fuse failure supervision function inter-
vention and when the main circuit breaker is open.

2.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the loss of voltage check function is shown in figure 140.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockLOV=Yes)
• The input signal LOV--BLOCK is high

The LOV--BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the loss of voltage check func-
tion. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command
from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal
itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through an OR gate it can
be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The function has a particular internal latched enable logic that:

• enables the function (signal latched enable in figure 140 is set to 1) when the line
is restored; i.e. at least one of the three voltages is high for more then 3 seconds
(signal set enable in figure 140).
• disables the function (signal latched enable in figure is set to 0) if the signal reset
enable in figure 140 is set to 1 (reset of latced enable signal).

254
Loss of voltage check (LOV) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

The latched enable signal is reset (i.e. the function is blocked) if:

• the main circuit breaker is opened. This is achieved by connecting a N.C. contact
of the main circuit breaker to a terminal binary input connected to the function
input LOV--BC
• the fuse failure supervision function has tripped. This is achieved by connecting
the output signal of the fuse failure supervision, FUSE-VTSU, to the function in-
put LOV--VTSU
• not all the three phase voltages are low for more then 10 s (only one or two phase
voltages are low).

The output trip signal of the voltage check function is LOV--TRIP.

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes

LOV--
BLOCK >1
Function Enable 7s 150 ms
LOV--TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

10 s
>1 t

LOV--
CBOPE
N Reset Enable
>1
&
LOV--
VTSU
3s
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

99000488.vsd

Figure 140: Simplified logic diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

255
 Loss of voltage check (LOV) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

2.4 Calculations
2.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the loss of voltage check function are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in
local HMI.

The low voltage primary setting should be lower than the minimum system operating voltage.
A reasonable setting will probably be 20-50% of system nominal voltage.

For a primary set value UsPRIM the secondary setting value UsSEC is:

US EC
Us SE C = ----------------- ⋅ Us PRIM
U PRIM
(Equation 216)

Where:
USEC is the secondary rated voltage of the main VT and
UPRIM is the primary rated voltage of the main VT

The relay setting value UPE< is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b,
associated to the voltage transformer input. The value for UPE< is given from this formula:

UsS EC
- ⋅ 100
UPE< = -----------------
U1b
(Equation 217)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal.

256
 Overload supervision (OVLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

3 Overload supervision (OVLD)

3.1 Application
The overload supervision function sends an alarm signal when the current exceeds the set level
for longer than a pre-set time. The operating level of the current measuring element can be set
to the maximum, accepted, continuous current. So operators are alerted if the primary system
operates in a dangerous overload mode. A typical application is the signalling of the overload of
the current transformers connected to the terminal, as they usually can withstand a small current
beyond their rated current.

3.2 Functionality
The current-measuring elements continuously measure the three phase currents, and compare
them with the set values. Fourier's recursive filter filters the current signals.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the measured current in any
phase exceeds the pre-set value:

• STIL1
• STIL2
• STIL3

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value IP> for a period longer than the delay
time t, then the trip signal OVLD-TRIP is emitted.

3.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overload function is shown in figure 141.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockOVLD=Yes)
• The input signal OVLD-BLOCK is high

The OVLD-BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overload supervision function. It can be
connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external
devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to
receive a block command from internal functions. Through an OR gate it can be connected to
both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The output trip signal OVLD-TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the
circuit breaker or for a signallization.

257
 Overload supervision (OVLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockOVLD = Yes

Function Enable
OVLD-BLOCK >1

STIL1
t
OVLD-TRIP
& t
STIL2 >1

STIL3

99000491.vsd

Figure 141: Simplified logic diagram of overload supervision function

3.4 Calculations
3.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the overload supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in
local HMI.

The current level set should be above the maximum permissible load current. Consider the ac-
curacy class of the used instrument current transformers and the specified accuracy of the current
measuring elements in the REx 5xx terminals.

The corresponding time delay must comply with the selectivity planning of the protection in the
whole network, and with the permissible overloading of the conductors, if the function is used
for tripping the circuit breaker. The above settings might change to a lower current value and
longer time delay if the function serves only for alarming and not for tripping purposes.

3.4.2 Setting of operating current IP>

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b , as-
sociated to the current transformer.

If IsSEC is the secondary current operating value of the function, then the relay setting value IP>
is given from this formula:

258
Overload supervision (OVLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

Is SE C
IP> = --------------- ⋅ 100
I1b
(Equation 218)

and this is the value that has to be set in the terminal.

259
 Dead line detection (DLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

4 Dead line detection (DLD)

4.1 Application
The dead-line detection function (DLD) detects the disconnected phase(s) of a protected object.
The output information serves as an input condition for some other measuring functions within
the REx 5xx terminals. Typical examples of such functions are:

• Fuse failure supervision function (FUSE)

• Switch-onto-fault function (SOTF)

For this reason, always configure the DLD--START output signal to the corresponding inputs
of the above functions.

4.2 Design
Figure 142 presents a simplified logic diagram of the function. Phase L1, L2 and L3 currents and
voltages are measured by one of the built-in digital signal processors. Logical signals STMILn
become logical one, if the measured current in the corresponding phase (n = 1..3) decreases un-
der the set operating level.

Logical signals STULnN become logical one, if the measured voltage in the corresponding
phase (n = 1..3) decreases under the set operating level.

260
 Dead line detection (DLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

DLD--BLOCK

STMIL1 DLD--STIL1
&

STMIL2 DLD--STIL2
&

STMIL3 DLD--STIL3
&

STUL1N DLD--STUL1
&

STUL2N DLD--STUL2
&

STUL3N DLD--STUL3
&

>1 DLD--STPH
& &

&
& DLD--START
&
&
en00000493.vsd

Figure 142: DLD - simplified logic diagram of the dead line detection function

Corresponding phase starting output signals DLD--STILn and DLD--STULn become in this
case logical one, if the function is not blocked by the logical one on DLD--BLOCK functional
input.

Simultaneous operation of current and voltage measuring elements in one phase is a necessary
condition for the determination of a “dead-phase” condition. This condition is presented by the
activation of a DLD--STPH output signal.

A complete line is determined as a “dead-line”, when the voltages and the currents in all three
phases decrease under the set operate values. A DLD--START output informs about this oper-
ating condition.

4.3 Calculations
4.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the dead line detection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

261
 Dead line detection (DLD) Chapter 7
Power system supervision

Set the minimum operate voltage UP< (phase value) with a sufficient margin (at least 15%) un-
der the minimum expected system operate voltage.

Set the minimum operate current with sufficient margin (15 - 20%) under the minimum expected
load current. In many cases the minimum load current of a line is close to 0 or even 0. In such
cases a setting must be chosen so that signals DLD-STILn are given during normal operation.
The operate value must however acceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line,
when only one phase is disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases).

262
About this chapter Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

Chapter 8 Secondary system

supervision

About this chapter

This chapter describes the secondary system supervision functions.

263
 Current circuit supervision, current based Chapter 8
(CTSU) Secondary system supervision

1 Current circuit supervision, current based (CTSU)

1.1 Application
The correct operation of a protection depends on correct information about the primary value of
currents and voltages. When currents from two independent 3-phase sets of CT’s, or CT cores,
measuring the same primary currents are available, a reliable current circuit supervision can be
arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in any CT circuit is detected,
the protection functions concerned are to be blocked and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different remanence or
different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT
sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient period must be avoided.

The supervision function must be sensitive and have short operate time to prevent unwanted trip-
ping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of errors in the current circuits.

Note that the same current input transformer (I5) in REx 5xx is used for the reference current Iref
of the CT supervision, the residual current from the parallel line for the fault locator and, depen-
dent on setting I4 or I5, maybe for the earth-fault protection function. Hence, when the CT su-
pervision function is used, the other functions mentioned can not be used. Also the settings
Xm0 = 0 and Rm0 = 0 must be used for the fault locator.

1.2 Functionality
The supervision function compares the numerical value of the sum of the three phase currents
|ΣIphase| (current inputs I1, I2 and I3) and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| (current
input I5) from another current transformer set, see figure 143.

The CTSU-FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp (5 - 100% of I1b).
• No phase current has exceeded 1.5 times rated relay current I1b during the last
10 ms
• The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The CTSU-FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being acti-
vated for more than 20 ms. If the CTSU-FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a CTSU-ALARM will
be issued. In this case the CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the
AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current
supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

264
Current circuit supervision, current based Chapter 8
(CTSU) Secondary system supervision

CTSU-BLOCK
I>
+
I L1 ∑
I L2 -
∑
I L3
+ +
∑ ∑
Iref + x 0,8 -

1,5 x Ir
&
10 ms >1 CTSU-FAIL
>1

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s
CTSU-ALARM

OPERATION

99000067.vsd

Figure 143: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 144.

| ∑I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| ∑I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 144: Operate characteristics

Note that due to the formulas for the axis compared, |ΣIphase| - |Iref| and |ΣIphase| + |Iref| respec-
tively, the slope can not be above 1.

265
 Current circuit supervision, current based Chapter 8
(CTSU) Secondary system supervision

1.3 Calculations
1.3.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the current circuit supervision function (CTSU) are set via the local HMI or
PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters
and path in local HMI.

The function is activated by setting Operation = On.

The minimum operate current (IMinOp) should as a minimum be set to twice the residual current
in the supervised CT circuits under normal service conditions and rated primary current. The set-
ting range is 5 – 100% of I1b

The CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM outputs are connected to the blocking input of the actual
protection function and output alarm relay respectively via the internal logic programming of
the REx 5xx relay.

266
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

2 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)

2.1 Application
Different protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals
operate on the basis of the measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are: distance protection
function, undervoltage measuring function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between the
voltage instrument transformers and the terminal.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature circuit
breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, located as close as possible to the voltage instrument
transformers, are one of them. Separate fuse-failure monitoring relays or elements within the
protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are combined to get
the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function (FUSE) of REx 5xx terminals.

The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminals can operate on the basis
of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The
first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does
not affect the impedance measuring functions.

The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring quanti-
ties, a high value of voltage 3·U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3·I2, is
recommended for terminals used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks.

The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high
value of voltage 3·U0 without the presence of the residual current 3·I0, is recommended for ter-
minals used in directly or low impedance earthed networks.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the FUSE
function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with
voltage transformer switching during station operations.

2.2 Functionality
2.2.1 Negative sequence
The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors
continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate:

• The negative-sequence current 3I2

• The negative-sequence voltage 3U2

comparing them with their respective set values 3I2< and 3U2> .

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a separate trip counter pre-
vents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The signal STNEG is set to 1, if the negative
sequence measured voltage exceeds its set value 3U2> and if the negative sequence measured
current does not exceed its pre-set value 3I2<.

267
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

20 ms Store in non volatile

STORE3PH memory
1:All voltages (FUSE-STORE3PH)
From non volatile
memory are low
≥1
&
&

FUSE-VTF3PH

0: All voltages ≥1
are high
STUL1N (Reset Latch)
1:Fuse failure for
STUL2N ≥1
more than 5 s
STUL3N
1:Fuse Failure
5s
Detection
& t
STNEG ≥1

& FUSE-VTSU
(Set Latch) ≥1
150 ms
1:Function t
Enable
Dead-Line
Block
FUSE-DLCND 200 ms FUSE-VTSZ
t & ≥1
FUSE-MCB &

FUSE-DISC &

FUSE-BLOCK
TEST ≥1

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockFUSE= Yes

99000497.vsd

Figure 145: Simplified logic diagram for the fuse failure supervision function, negative se-
quence based.

2.2.2 Zero sequence

The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors
continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate:

268
Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

• The zero-sequence current 3·I0

• The zero-sequence voltage 3·U0

comparing them with their respective set values 3I0< and 3U0>.

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a separate trip counter pre-
vents high overreaching of the measuring elements. The signal STZERO is set to 1, if the zero
sequence measured voltage exceeds its set value 3U0> and if the zero sequence measured cur-
rent does not exceed its pre-set value 3I0<.

269
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

20 ms
STORE3PH Store in non volatile
1:All voltages (FUSE-STORE3PH)
From non volatile
memory are low
≥1
&
&

FUSE-VTF3PH

0: All voltages ≥1
are high
STUL1N (Reset Latch)
1:Fuse failure for
STUL2N ≥1
more than 5 s
STUL3N
1:Fuse Failure
5s
Detection
& t
STZERO ≥1

& FUSE-VTSU
(Set Latch) ≥1
150 ms
t
1:Function Enable
Dead-Line
Block
FUSE-DLCND 200 ms FUSE-VTSZ
t & ≥1
FUSE-MCB &

FUSE-DISC &

FUSE-BLOCK
TEST ≥1

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockFUSE= Yes

99000500.vsd

Figure 146: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervisione function, zero sequence
based

270
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

2.2.3 du/dt, di/dt

The current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-in digital signal processors
continuously measure the currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate:

• The change of current ΔI/Δt

• The change of voltage ΔU/Δt

comparing them with their respective set values ΔI< and ΔU>.

The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative
change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each
phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the
circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of
the terminal.

The signal STDUDI is set to 1, if the measured voltage change exceeds its set value DU> and if
the measured current change does not exceed its pre-set value DI<. If the voltage is low in any
phase (STUL1N, STUL2N or STUL3N=1), the STDUDI signal is sealed in.

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

20 ms
STORE3PH Store in non volatile
(FUSE-STORE3PH)
From non volatile 1:All voltages
memory are low
>1
&
&

FUSE-VTF3PH

>1
0: All voltages
are high (Reset
STUL1N
Latch)
>1 1:Fuse failure for
STUL2N more than 5 s
STDUDIL1
& STUL3N
IL1>

STDUDIL2 1:Fuse Failure

& Detection 5s
IL2> &
& STDUDI >1 t
STDUDIL3
& ≥1
IL3> & FUSE-VTSU
(Set Latch) >1
150 ms
& 1:Function t
Enable
FUSE-CBCLOSED Dead-Line
Block
200 ms
FUSE-DLCND & FUSE-VTSZ
t >1
FUSE-MCB &

FUSE-DISC &

FUSE-BLOCK
TEST
>1

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockFUSE= Yes

en01000097.vsd

Figure 147: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, du/dt based.

2.2.4 Logic
Signals STUL1N, STUL2N and STUL3N are related to phase to earth voltages and become 1
when the respective phase voltage is lower than the set value. The set value (U<) is chosen in
the dead line detection function, that is always present in the terminal when the fuse failure su-
pervision is present.

271
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

The fuse failure supervision function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
• The input signal FUSE-BLOCK is high

The FUSE-BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block com-
mand from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the ter-
minal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it
can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

Function input signal FUSE-MCB is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. aux-
iliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.

Function input signal FUSE-DISC is to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. aux-
iliary contact of the line disconnector.

The function output FUSE-VTSU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring func-
tions (undervoltage protection, synchrocheck etc.) except for the impedance protection.

Function output FUSE-VTSZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

The FUSE-MCB signal sets the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of FUSE-MCB signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage de-
pendent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit
breaker.

The FUSE-DISC signal sets the output signal FUSE-VTSU in order to block the voltage related
functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected
by the position of the line disconnector.

The function input signal FUSE-DLCND is related to the dead line condition detection. It has to
be connected to the output signal of the dead line condition function DLD-STPH (dead phase
condition detected). This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the volt-
age and the current in at least one phase are below their respective setting values. It prevents the
blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that
occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line
condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection
for unequal pole closing.

If a fuse failure condition is detected, the signal FUSE-VTSU is turned high, and if there is no
dead line condition also FUSE-VTSZ is high. If the fuse failure condition remains for more then
five seconds and at least one of the phases has a low phase to earth voltage, then the fuse failure
condition is latched.

The output signal FUSE-VTF3PH is high if the fuse failure condition is detected for 5 seconds
and all the three measured voltages are low (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 1).

Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored (STUL1N
= STUL2N = STUL3N = 0).

272
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory of the terminal. In the new start-up
procedure the terminal checks the VTF3PH (STORE3PH) value in its non volatile memory and
establishes the corresponding starting conditions.

2.3 Calculations
The operating value for the voltage check functionare set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

2.3.1 Negative sequence function

The negative sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the
primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The mini-
mum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set
with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used
on longer untransposed lines, on multi circuit lines and so on.

2.3.2 Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2>

The relay setting value 3U2> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b,
associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the
relay, then the value for 3U2> is given from equation 219.

USSEC
------- ⋅ 100
3U2> = -----------
U 1b
(Equation 219)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

2.3.3 Setting of negative sequence current 3I2<

The relay setting value 3I2< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay,
then the value for 3I2< is given from equation 220.

IS SEC
- ⋅ 100
3I2< = --------------
I1b

(Equation 220)

273
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

2.3.4 Zero sequence function

The zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-symmetries in the pri-
mary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum
value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always be set with a
safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is used
on longer untransposed lines, on multi circuit lines and so on.

2.3.5 Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0>

The relay setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b,
associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the
relay, then the value for 3U0> is given from equation 221.

Us SE C
3U0> = ------------------ ⋅ 100
U1b
(Equation 221)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

2.3.6 Setting of zero sequence current 3I0<

The relay setting value 3I0< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay,
then the value for 3I0< is given from equation 222.

Is SE C
- ⋅ 100
3I0< = --------------
I1b
(Equation 222)

2.3.7 Setting of voltage change DU>

The relay setting value DU> is given in percentage of the secondary base voltage value, U1b,
associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If UsSEC is the secondary setting value of the
relay, the value for DU> is given from equation 223.

US SEC
DU> = ------------------ ⋅ 100
U1b
(Equation 223)

The parameters for the fuse failure supervision function are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path
in local HMI.

274
 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

2.3.8 Setting of current change DI<

The relay setting value DI< is given in percentage of the secondary base current value, I1b, as-
sociated to the current transformer input I1. If IsSEC is the secondary setting value of the relay,
the value for DI< is given from equation 224.

ISSEC
- ⋅ 100
DI< = --------------
I1b
(Equation 224)

275
 Voltage transformer supervision (TCT) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

3 Voltage transformer supervision (TCT)

3.1 Application
If a capacitor element in a capacitive voltage transformer breaks down, that is the element is
short circuited or interrupted an unbalance appears. This unbalance occurs as a “false” residual
voltage on the capacitive voltage transformer terminals. If the capacitor element is interrupted
the corresponding phase voltage will be undefined, and if the capacitor element is short circuited
the corresponding phase voltage is increased. This “false” voltage change might affect different
functions, such as distance protection, under voltage, overvoltage and voltage check for weak
infeed logic.

After a settable time delay, the voltage transformer supervision function activates the
TCT_START signal, if the residual voltage exceeds the set value. This signal can be used as an
alarm to the operator that the capacitive voltage transformer is not in a good condition and/or as
a blocking signal for certain relays that rely on any phase voltage or the residual voltage.

To ensure that the function is not activated while the protected object is out of operation, it is
required that at least one of the phase to phase voltages exceeds 80% of nominal voltage.

Fuse failure supervision is a related function, but is activated only when a secondary voltage to-
tally disappears, i.e. goes to approximately zero. The TCT function can act on smaller residual
voltages.

3.2 Functionality
3.2.1 Abbreviations and definitions
Table 14: Abbreviations and definitions
TCT Voltage transformer supervision
UL1 Phase L1
UPP Phase-to-phase voltage
STUPP Start phase-to-phase voltage
UR Residual voltage
STUR Start residual voltage

3.2.2 Description of operation

Algorithm
The algorithm of the Voltage transformer supervision function is rather straightforward. The
phase voltages pass a fourier filter. The magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage, UPP is measured.
An indicator signal STUPP will be issued when the magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage passes
the set value of nominal phase-to-phase voltage. See figure 148.

Residual voltage pass a frequency adjusted fourier filter. The magnitude of residual voltage, UR
is measured. An indicator signal STUR will be issued when the magnitude of residual voltage
passes the set value of residual voltage.

276
Voltage transformer supervision (TCT) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

TCT_UL1
Σ
+ UPP STUPP1
U
-
TCT_UL2
Fourier
Hysteresis1
filter

U UR STUR
TCT_UR

Fourier
Hysteresis2
filter
en01000002.vsd

Figure 148: Phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage measurement

Logic
Following modules for the TCT are described:

• Start logic
• Block and VTSU logic

The logic consists of two different functions, one for detection of lower limit phase-to-phase
voltage and one for detection of over limit residual voltage.

STUPP1

STUPP2 >1

STUPP3 tDelay
& t START
&

STUR

BLOCK
>1
VTSU 1

en01000001.vsd

Figure 149: TCT logic

277
 Voltage transformer supervision (TCT) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

Start logic
The START signal shall be issued when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• Residual voltage 3U0 passing the set value for residual voltage limit UN>. At
least one of the phase-to-phase voltage is higher than 80% of the rated voltage
phase-to-phase, see figure 149.
• Time delay tDelay has elapsed.

The START signal shall be reset when at least one of the conditions below is fulfilled:

• Residual voltage is lower than the set value for residual voltage limit UN>.
• All of the phase-to-phase voltages are lower than 40% of the rated voltage phase
to phase.

Block logic
All binary outputs shall be reset when the input BLOCK or VTSU is set.

Note that the BLOCK or VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executing.
Disabling the input BLOCK or VTSU can trip the TCT instantaneously.

3.3 Calculations
There are only two parameters to set for the TCT function: the residual overvoltage limit, and
the time delay.

The capacitive voltage transformer is schematically shown in figure 150, the voltage increase in
a phase voltage, after the insulation break-down in one capacitor element, is shown i figure 151
and can be calculated as:

1 1 1 1
Δ V a = V ′ a – V a = --------------------------- V A – ------------- V A = ---------------------V A = --- V a
(n – 1 ) + 1 n+1 n(n + 1 ) n
(Equation 225)

278
Voltage transformer supervision (TCT) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

VA VB VC

Va Vb Vc

en01000030.vsd

Figure 150: Capacitive voltage transformer

The corresponding vector diagram is shown in figure 151, where also the residual voltage is
shown. The residual voltage will be equal to the voltage increase in the phase with the broken
capacitor element.

V'A
VA

Vresidual

VC VB

Figure 151: The residual voltage will be equal to the voltage increase in the phase with the bro-
ken capacitor element.

With a security margin of about 15% the suitable setting for the residual overvoltage limit should
be:

279
 Voltage transformer supervision (TCT) Chapter 8
Secondary system supervision

UN> = 0.85 ⋅ 1 ⁄ n
(Equation 226)

Where:
(n+1) is the total number of capacitor elements in one phase of the capacitive voltage trans-
former, having one element feeding the magnetic voltage transformer.

The time delay is set in such a way that high speed protective functions, not sensitive to the re-
sidual voltage caused by the insulation break-down of one capacitor element, are not affected.
Sensitive delayed protective functions, that are sensitive to this change in residual voltage could
be blocked by this voltage transformer supervision function.

280
About this chapter Chapter 9
Control

Chapter 9 Control

About this chapter

This chapter describes the control functions.

281
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN)

1.1 Application
1.1.1 Synchrocheck, general
The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in an interconnected net-
work. When used, the function gives an enable signal at satisfied voltage conditions across the
breaker to be closed. When there is a parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the
same at the two sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillating
difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phase angle and a voltage ampli-
tude difference due to voltage drop across the parallel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check
function measures the difference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff),
phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of the circuit
breaker when the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base
voltage U1b.
• The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller than the set values of
UDiff and PhaseDiff.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff. The bus fre-
quency must also be within a range of +/-5 Hz from the rated frequency.

Note!
Phase-phase voltage (110 V or 220 V) can not be connected directly to an individual input volt-
age transformer. The individual transformer is designed for phase-neutral voltage (Ur = 63.5 V
or Ur = 127 V).

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker is closed at manual
closing and/or together with the auto-recloser function.

282
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

U-Line U-Bus

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% Ur Fuse fail

UDiff<5-60% Ur
PhaseDiff<5-75° Line
FreqDiff<50-300mHz U-Line
reference
Fuse fail voltage

99000069.vsd

Figure 152: Synchrocheck.

1.1.2 Synchrocheck, single circuit breaker

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number of synchrocheck func-
tions that are included in the terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase is selected on the hu-
man-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or
phase-phase voltage L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the
same phase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 153 shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phase circuits. The voltage
can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phase measurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs
must be connected to the same phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are
fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

283
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

HMI
Setting
L1,L2,L3 U1 UL1
ΔU L12,L23 U2
L31 UL2
SYN1 U-Line
U3 UL3
AUTOOK
Δf AD UN
SYN1
U5 U
MANOK
U-Bus
Δϕ UN

99000070.vsd

Figure 153: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

1.1.3 Energizing check, general

The energizing check is made when a disconnected line is to be connected to an energized sec-
tion of a network, see figure 154. The check can also be set to allow energization of the busbar
or in both directions.

U-Bus U-Line
UHigh>70-100%Ub
ULow<10-80%Ub
99000071.vsd

Figure 154: Principle for energizing check.

An energizing can occur, depending on:

• the set direction of the energizing function

• the set limit for energized (live - UHigh) condition
• the set limit for non-energized (dead - Ulow) condition

284
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

The equipment is considered energized if the voltage is above the set value UHigh (e.g. 80% of
the base voltage), and non-energized if it is below the set value, ULow (e.g. 30% of the base
voltage). The user can set the UHigh condition between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition
between 10-80% U1b.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance, induction from a line
running in parallel, or by being fed via the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This
voltage can be as high as 30% or more of the rated voltage of the line.

The energizing operation can be set to operate in either direction over the circuit breaker, or it
can be permitted to operate in both directions. Use the AutoEnerg and ManEnerg HMI setting
to select the energizing operation in:

• Both directions (Both)

• Dead line live bus (DLLB)
• Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse can be issued to the circuit breaker if
one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the other is Low, that is, when only one side is
energized. The user can set AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to enable different conditions during au-
tomatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

In the manual mode it is also possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead.
This is done by setting the parameter ManDBDL = “On” and ManEnerg to “DLLB”, “DBLL”
or “Both”.

1.1.4 Voltage selection, single circuit breaker

The voltage selection function is used for the synchrocheck and energizing check functions.
When the terminal is used in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on the
status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of the disconnectors and/or
breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the right voltage for the synchrocheck and
energizing check functions. Select the type of voltage selection from the synchrocheck, Uselec-
tion, SingleBus or DoubleBus on the HMI. When using voltage selection, some extra binary in-
puts are required.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be different for different busbar sys-
tems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the ter-
minal.

285
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.1.5 Voltage connection for a single bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1
U-Bus 1
U-Bus U5 U5

U-Line 1
U-Line ULx ULx

FUSEUB1 FUSEUB1
SYN1-UB1OK/FF
FUSEF1 FUSEF1 F1
SYN1-VTSU

en01000106.vsd

Figure 155: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement.

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 155 shows the principle for the connection arrange-
ment. One terminal unit is used for one bay. For the synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check
function, there is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage trans-
former circuit connections are straight forward, no special voltage selection is needed.

For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-Bus 1) is connected to
the single phase analogue input (U5) on the terminal unit.

The line voltage (U-line 1) is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1, UL2,
UL3 (ULx).

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, single bus and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs that are configured to inputs of the synchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are
two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit
is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them
to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The
SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage.

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional fuse-failure function as an
alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the inputs
(SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

286
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.1.6 Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1
Bus 2

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1
U-Bus U5 U-Bus 1
U5
U4
U-Bus 2
U-Line ULx U4
1CB1 1CB1
SYN1-CB1OPEN/CLD
1CB2
SYN1-CB2OPEN/CLD
FUSEUB1 1CB2
SYN1-UB1OK/FF
FUSEUB2
SYN1-UB2OK/FF
FUSEF1 FUSEUB1
SYN1-VTSU
FUSEUB2

FUSEF1

U-Line 1
ULx

en01000105.vsd

Figure 156: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement.

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 156 shows the principle for the connection arrangement.
One terminal is used for one bay. For the synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function,
the voltages on the two busbars are selected by the voltage selection in the terminal unit. The
bus voltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analog single-phase input, and the bus voltage from Bus
2 is fed to the U4 analog single-phase input. The line voltage transformers are connected as a
three-phase voltage UL1, UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line 1.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of the disconnectors' auxiliary
contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltage selection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN
(Disconnector section 1 open), SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and
SYN1-CB2OPEN (Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2
closed).

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double bus and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is
healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to each busbar voltage. The
SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indi-
cate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the
fuse failure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energizing check unit.

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure func-
tion as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line-check) is blocked via the inputs
(SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

287
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.1.7 Synchrocheck, double circuit breaker

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number of synchrocheck func-
tions that are included in the terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase is selected on the hu-
man-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or
phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase
or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 157 shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phase circuits. The voltage
can be selected for phase-neutral or phase-to-phase measurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs
must be connected to the same phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are
fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

HMI
Setting
SYN1
L1,L2,L3 UL1
ΔU L12,L23
U1
L31 UL2
SYN1 U2 U-Line
UL3
AUTOOK Δf U3 UN
SYN1
MANOK U
Δϕ U-Bus 1
U5 UN
HMI
Setting AD U
SYN2
L1,L2,L3 U-Bus 2
U4 UN
ΔU L12,L23
L31
SYN2 99000079.vsd
AUTOOK Δf
SYN2
MANOK
Δϕ

Figure 157: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

288
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.1.8 Voltage connection, double circuitbreaker and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1
Bus 2

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1

U-Bus U5 U5 U-Bus 1
U-Bus 2
U-Line ULx U4
SYN1-UB1OK/FF FUSEUB1 FUSEUB1
SYN1-VTSU FUSEF1
FUSEUB2

SYN2

U-Bus U4
U-Line 1
U-Line ULx ULx
SYN2-UB1OK/FF FUSEUB2
FUSEF1 FUSEF1 F1
SYN2-VTSU

en01000116.vsd

Figure 158: Voltage connection in a double breaker arrangement.

The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in figure 158. One terminal is used for
the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit
breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward, without any special
voltage selection.

For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-bus 1) is connected to
the single-phase analog input (U5) on the terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (U-bus 2) is con-
nected to the single-phase analog input (U4).

The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1,
UL2, UL3 (ULx).

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal, and the voltage is taken from Bus
1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line 1). This means that the two synchrocheck units
are operating without any special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line 1) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be different for different busbar
systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the
terminal.

289
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double circuit breaker and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is
healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1(2)-UB1OK and SYN1(2)-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure
them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage.
The SYN1(2)-VTSU input is related to the line voltage from each line.

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure func-
tion as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs
(SYN1(2)-UB1OK/FF or SYN1(2)-VTSU).

1.1.9 Phasing, general

The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asynchronous systems are going
to be connected. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when conditions
across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus and line
is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than this threshold value
the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used.

The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and the U-bus. It operates and
enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing angle is equal to
the measured phase angle and the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base
voltage U1b.
• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffSynch and larger
than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the syn-
chro-check is used. The bus and line frequencies must also be within a range of
± 5 Hz from the rated frequency.
• The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line.
• The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well as the circuit breaker
closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continuously by the following formula:

(Equation 227)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing operate time.

290
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

U-Line U-Bus

SYN 1
UHigh>70-100% Ur
UDiff<5-60% Ur Fuse fail
FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz
|dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21Hz/s Line
Fbus,Fline=Fr U-Line
reference
PhaseDiff<60° Fuse fail voltage

99000084.vsd

Figure 159: Phasing.

1.1.10 Phasing, single circuit breaker

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1.
The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the
HMI. Figure 160 shows the voltage connection.

HMI
Setting
L1,L2,L3 U1 UL1
ΔU L12,L23 U2
L31 UL2
SYN1 U3 U-Line
UL3
AUTOOK Δϕ AD UN
SYN1
U5 U
MANOK
U-Bus
Δf UN

SYN1 99000085.vsd
CLOSECB dF/dt

Figure 160: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

1.1.11 Voltage selection, single circuit breaker

The voltage selection function is used for the phasing and synchronism (SYN1) and energizing
check functions. When the terminal is used in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected
depends on the positions of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the position of the

291
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

disconnectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the right voltage for the
synchronism and energizing function. Select the type of voltage selection from the Syn-
chro-check, Uselection, SingleBus or DbleBus on the HMI.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be different for different busbar sys-
tems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the ter-
minal.

1.1.12 Voltage selection for a single bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1
U-Bus 1
U-Bus U5 U5

U-Line 1
U-Line ULx ULx

FUSEUB1 FUSEUB1
SYN1-UB1OK/FF
FUSEF1 FUSEF1 F1
SYN1-VTSU

en01000106.vsd

Figure 161: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement.

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 161 shows the principle for the connection arrange-
ment. For the phasing, synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, there is one voltage
transformer at each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are
straight forward, no special voltage selection is needed.

For the phasing, synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1 (U-Bus 1) is con-
nected to the single phase analog input (U5) on the terminal.

The line voltage (U-line 1) is connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1, UL2,
UL3 (ULx).

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, single bus and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs configured to inputs of the synchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is
healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure them
to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The
SYN1-VTSU input is related to the line voltage.

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional fuse-failure function as an
alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

292
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs
(SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

1.1.13 Voltage selection for a double bus and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1
Bus 2

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1
U-Bus U5 U-Bus 1
U5
U4
U-Bus 2
U-Line ULx U4
1CB1 1CB1
SYN1-CB1OPEN/CLD
1CB2
SYN1-CB2OPEN/CLD
FUSEUB1 1CB2
SYN1-UB1OK/FF
FUSEUB2
SYN1-UB2OK/FF
FUSEF1 FUSEUB1
SYN1-VTSU
FUSEUB2

FUSEF1

U-Line 1
ULx

en01000105.vsd

Figure 162: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement.

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 162 shows the principle for the connection arrangement. For
the phasing and synchrocheck (SYN1) and energizing check function, the voltages on the two
busbars are selected by the voltage selection in the terminal unit. The bus voltage from Bus 1 is
fed to the U5 analog single-phase input, and the bus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analog
single-phase input. The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1,
UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line 1.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of the disconnectors' auxiliary
contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltage selection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN
(Disconnector section 1 open), SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and
SYN1-CB2OPEN (Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2
closed).

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double bus and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is
healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to each busbar voltage. The
SYN1-VTSU input is related to each line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indi-
cate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the
fuse failure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energizing check unit.

293
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure func-
tion as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line check) is blocked via the inputs
(SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

1.1.14 Phasing, double circuit breaker

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1.
The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as are chosen on the
HMI. Figure 163 shows the voltage connection.

HMI
Setting
SYN1 U1
L1,L2,L3 UL1
ΔU L12,L23
U2 UL2
L31
SYN1 U3 U-Line
UL3
AUTOOK Δϕ
UN
SYN1
MANOK U
Δf U-Bus 1
U5 UN
SYN1
AD U
CLOSECB dF/dt U-Bus 2
HMI U4 UN
SYN2 Setting
L1,L2,L3
ΔU
L12,L23 99000092.vsd

SYN2 L31
AUTOOK Δϕ
SYN2
MANOK
Δf

SYN2
CLOSECB dF/dt

Figure 163: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

294
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.1.15 Voltage connection, double circuit breaker and single bay

Bus 1 Bay 1
Bus 2

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AI

SYN1

U-Bus U5 U5 U-Bus 1
U-Bus 2
U-Line ULX U4
SYN1_UB1OK/FF FUSEUB1 FUSEUB1
SYN1_VTSU FUSEF1
FUSEUB2

SYN2

U-Bus U4
U-Line 1
U-Line ULX ULX
SYN2_UB1OK/FF FUSEUB2
FUSEF1 FUSEF1 F1
SYN2_VTSU

99000093.vsd

Figure 164: Voltage connection in a double breaker arrangement.

The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in figure 164. One terminal unit is used
for the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the circuit
breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straight forward, without any spe-
cial voltage selection. For the synchrocheck and energizing check, the voltage from Bus 1
(U-bus 1) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U5) on the terminal and the voltage
from Bus 2 (U-bus 2) is connected to the single-phase analog input (U4).

The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage to the analog inputs UL1,
UL2, UL3 (ULx).

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal unit, and the voltage is taken from
Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line 1). This means that the two synchrocheck
units are operating without any special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line 1) volt-
age.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be different for different busbar
systems, and the actual configuration for the substation must be done during engineering of the
terminal.

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals, double circuit breaker and single bay
The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to bi-
nary inputs configured to inputs of the synchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuit is
healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit is faulty.

295
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

The SYN1(2)-UB1OK and SYN1(2)-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage. Configure
them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar voltage.
The SYN1(2)-VTSU input is related to the line voltage from each line.

The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure func-
tion as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check (dead line- check) is blocked via the input
(SYN1(2)-UB1OK/FF or SYN1(2)-VTSU).

1.2 Functionality
1.2.1 Single circuit breaker

Connectable inputs
SYNx x=1, 2 or 3

General Block SYNx-BLOCK

From fuse failure
detection, line side SYNx-VTSU
(external or internal)
SYNx-UB1/2FF
From fuse failure
detection bus side
SYNx-UB1/2OK

FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz

PhaseDiff< 5-75 deg
UDiff <5-60 %
UHigh>70-100 %
ULow < 10-80 %
Connectable
outputs
SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

SYNx-UDIFF

SYNx-FRDIFF

SYNx-PHDIFF

99000074.vsd

Figure 165: Input and output signals.

1.2.2 Synchrocheck
Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.

296
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchro-
check.
SYNx-VTSU The synchrocheck function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal,
which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to
external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing
function.
SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.
SYNx-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB2OK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal.

Output signals Description

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck
conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condi-
tion, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before clos-
ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.
SYNx-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be
used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.
SYNx-UDIFF Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-FRDIFF Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-PHDIFF Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

297
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYNCHROCHECK

SYN1
OPERATION OFF
RELEASE
ON

SYN1-BLOCK
UDiff
50 ms
UBusHigh & t 0.00-60.0s
ULineHigh & t & ≥1 SYN1-AUTOOK
FreqDiff t Sync

PhaseDiff ≥1 SYN1-MANOK

&

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1 UDIFF

FRDIFF

PHDIFF

ENERGIZING CHECK

AutoEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL 50 ms 0.00-60.0s
≥1 AUTOENERG1
≥1 t & t

UL High &
UL Low
UB High
UB Low

UENERG1OK

ManEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL
≥1 50 ms 0.00-60.0s MANENERG1
t & t
& ≥1

≥1
ManDBDL &
OFF
ON

xx06000056.vsd

Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check. The internal signal
UENERG1OK refers to the voltage selection logic.

298
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.2.3 Voltage selection

SYN1-CB1OPEN
& ≥1 SYN1-VSUB1
SYN1-CB1CLD
U5
SYN1-U-BUS

SYN1-CB2OPEN
& 1 SYN1-VSUB2
SYN1-CB2CLD U4

SYN1-UB1OK &
>1
SYN1-UB1FF
UENERG1OK
>1

SYN1-UB2OK &
>1
SYN1-UB2FF

SYN1-VTSU

99000112.vs

Figure 167: Voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. In case of
three bay arrangement the 1 in SYN1 and UENERG1OK are replaced by 2 and 3
in the logic.

Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplified logic diagrams for
voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYNx-CB1OPEN Disconnector section of Bay x open. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a
disconnector section in a double-bus, single- breaker arrangement, to inform
the voltage selection about the positions.
SYNx-CB1CLD Disconnector section of Bay x closed. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a
disconnector section in a double-bus, single-breaker arrangement to inform the
voltage selection about the positions.
SYNx-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.
SYNx-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

299
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Input signal Description

SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.
SYNx-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB2OK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal.
SYNx-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to a binary input indicating external
fuse failure of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocks the energizing func-
tion.

Output signals Description

SYNx-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.
SYNx-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.

300
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.2.4 Double circuit breaker

Connectable inputs
SYNx x=1, 2, 3 or 4

General Block SYNx-BLOCK

From fuse failure
detection, line side SYNx-VTSU
(external or internal)
SYNx-UB1FF
From fuse failure
detection bus side
SYNx-UB1OK

FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz

PhaseDiff< 5-75 deg
UDiff <5-60 %
UHigh>70-100 %
ULow < 10-80 %
Connectable
outputs
SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

SYNx-UDIFF

SYNx-FRDIFF

SYNx-PHDIFF

en01000117.vsd

Figure 168: Input and output signals.

1.2.5 Synchrocheck
Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.

Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the synchro-
check.
SYNx-VTSU The synchrocheck function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal,
which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to
external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing
function.
SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.

301
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Output signals Description

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck
conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condition,
if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before closing
attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.
SYNx-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be
used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.
SYNx-UDIFF Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-FRDIFF Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-PHDIFF Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

302
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYNCHROCHECK

SYN1
OPERATION OFF
RELEASE
ON

SYN1-BLOCK
UDiff
50 ms
UBusHigh & t 0.00-60.0s
ULineHigh & t & ≥1 SYN1-AUTOOK
FreqDiff t Sync

PhaseDiff ≥1 SYN1-MANOK

&

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1 UDIFF

FRDIFF

PHDIFF

ENERGIZING CHECK

AutoEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL 50 ms 0.00-60.0s
≥1 AUTOENERG1
≥1 t & t

UL High &
UL Low
UB High
UB Low

UENERG1OK

ManEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL
≥1 50 ms 0.00-60.0s MANENERG1
t & t
& ≥1

≥1
ManDBDL &
OFF
ON

xx06000056.vsd

Figure 169: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check for one circuit
breaker. The internal signal UENERG1OK derives from the external or internal

303
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

fuse failure inputs SYN1-UB1OK/FF and SYN1-VTSU.

1.2.6 Phasing and synchrocheck, single circuit breaker

Connectable SYN1
inputs
Phasing
Initiate Phasing
operation
SYN1-START

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz
FreqDiffSynch < 50-500 mHz
|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s
UHigh > 70-100 %
UDiff < 5-60 %
PhaseDiff < 60 deg Connectable
outputs
SYN1-CLOSECB
SYN1-INPROGR
Phasing and synchrocheck

General Block SYN1-BLOCK SYN1-TESTCB

Synchrocheck

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz
FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz
PhaseDiff < 5-75 deg
UDiff < 5-60 %
UHigh > 70-100 %
ULow < 10-80 %

From fuse failure

SYN1-AUTOOK
detection, lineside SYN1-VTSU
(external or internal)
SYN1-MANOK

SYN1-UDIFF

SYN1-FRDIFF

SYN1-PHDIFF

en01000120.vsd

Figure 170: Input and output signals.

1.2.7 Phasing and synchrocheck

Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheck function.

304
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Input signals Description

SYN1-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and
the synchrocheck.
SYN1-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is
the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external con-
dition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function
SYN1-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. When initiated the function continues
until the SYN1-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped by the SYN1-BLOCK
signal. In test mode (SYN1-TESTCB) ends the phasing operation.

Output signals Description

SYN1-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing
sequence is performed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal
SYN1-TESTCB indicates when the SYN1-CLOSECB signal would have been
submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are
fulfilled, from the synchro-check function
SYN1-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to the circuit breaker or to be con-
nected to the auto-reclosing function.
SYN1-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment
a SYN1-START is received until the operation is terminated. The operation is
teminated when SYN1-CLOSECB or SYN1-TESTCB has been submitted or if a
SYN1-BLOCK is received.
SYN1-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchro-check
conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condi-
tion, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before clos-
ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.
SYN1-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be
used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.
SYN1-UDIFF Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit.
SYN1-FRDIFF Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit.
SYN1-PHDIFF Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

305
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON

SYN1-START & SYN1-INPROGR

& S ≥1
SYN1-BLOCK R
≥1

UDiff
50 ms & SYN1-CLOSECB
UBusHigh & t

ULineHigh ≥1

FreqDiffSynch
&
FreqDiffBlock ≥1 SYN1-TESTCB
&
FreqDiff
tPulse
dF/dt Bus
&
&
dF/dt Line

Fbus ± 5 Hz

Fline ± 5 Hz

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

&
PhaseDiff=closing angle

SYN1-AUTOOK &

SYN1-MANOK

en02000469.vsd
Figure 171: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing. The input signals SYN1-AUTOOK and
SYN1-MANOK derive from the synchrocheck and energizing logic.

306
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYNCHROCHECK

SYN1
OPERATION OFF
RELEASE
ON

SYN1-BLOCK
UDiff
50 ms
UBusHigh & t 0.00-60.0s
ULineHigh & t & ≥1 SYN1-AUTOOK
FreqDiff t Sync

PhaseDiff ≥1 SYN1-MANOK

&

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1 UDIFF

FRDIFF

PHDIFF

ENERGIZING CHECK

AutoEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL 50 ms 0.00-60.0s
≥1 AUTOENERG1
≥1 t & t

UL High &
UL Low
UB High
UB Low

UENERG1OK

ManEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL
≥1 50 ms 0.00-60.0s MANENERG1
t & t
& ≥1

≥1
ManDBDL &
OFF
ON

xx06000056.vsd

Figure 172: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check. The internal signal
UENERG1OK refers to the voltage selection logic.

307
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.2.8 Voltage selection

S Y N 1 -C B 1 O P E N
&
S Y N 1 -C B 1 C L D ≥1 S Y N 1 -V S U B 1
U5 S Y N 1 -U -B U S
S Y N 1 -C B 2 O P E N
& 1 S Y N 1 -V S U B 2
S Y N 1 -C B 2 C L D U4

S Y N 1 -U B 1 O K
≥1 &
UENERG 1O K
S Y N 1 -U B 1 F F ≥1

S Y N 1 -U B 2 O K
≥1 &
S Y N 1 -U B 2 F F

S Y N 1 -V T S U

99 00008 9.vs d

Figure 173: Simplified voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement.

Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplified logic diagrams for
voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYN1-CB1OPEN Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 open. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of a
disconnector section in a double-bus, single breaker arrangement, to inform
the voltage selection about the positions.
SYN1-CB1CLD Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 closed. Connected to the auxiliary contacts of
a disconnector section in a double-bus, single breaker arrangement to inform
the voltage selection about the positions.
SYN1-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.
SYN1-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.
SYN1-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can
come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage
transformer. In case of a fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked.
SYN1-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.
SYN1-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 2 (U4). This signal can
come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage
transformer. In case of fuse failure, the energizing check is blocked.
SYN1-UB2OK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal.
SYN1-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to a binary input indicating external
fuse failure of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocks the energizing func-
tion.

308
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Output signals Description

SYN1-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.
SYN1-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection from Bus 1 voltage.

1.2.9 Phasing and synchrocheck, double circuit breaker

Connectable SYNx x = 1 or 2
inputs
Phasing
Initiate Phasing
operation
SYNx-START

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz
FreqDiffSynch < 50-500 mHz
|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s
UHigh > 70-100 %
UDiff < 5-60 %
PhaseDiff < 60 deg Connectable
outputs
SYNx-CLOSECB
SYNx-INPROGR
Phasing and synchrocheck

General Block SYNx-BLOCK SYNx-TESTCB

Synchrocheck

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz
FreqDiff < 50-300 mHz
PhaseDiff < 5-75 deg
UDiff < 5-60 %
UHigh > 70-100 %
ULow < 10-80 %

From fuse failure SYNx-AUTOOK

detection, lineside SYNx-VTSU
(external or internal) SYNx-MANOK

SYNx-UDIFF

SYNx-FRDIFF

SYNx-PHDIFF

en01000119.vsd

Figure 174: Input and output signals.

1.2.10 Phasing and synchrocheck

Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheck function.

309
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing
and the synchrocheck.
SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is
the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external
condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energizing function.
SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come
from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage trans-
former. In case of a fuse failure the energizing check is blocked.
SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.
SYNx-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. When initiated the function continues
until the SYNx-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped by the
SYNx-BLOCK signal. In test mode SYNx-TESTCB ends the phasing operation.

Output signals Description

SYNx-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing
sequence is performed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal
SYNx-TESTCB indicates when the SYNx-CLOSECB signal would have been
submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are
fulfilled, from the synchro-check function.
SYNx-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to control the circuit breaker or to
be connected to the auto-reclosing function.
SYNx-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment
a SYNx-START is received until the operation is terminated. The operation is
teminated when SYNx-CLOSECB or SYNx-TESTCB has been submitted or if a
SYNx-BLOCK is received.
SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energizing OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck
conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energizing condi-
tion, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before clos-
ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.
SYNx-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energizing to be
used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.
SYNx-UDIFF Difference in voltage is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-FRDIFF Difference in frequency is less than the set difference limit.
SYNx-PHDIFF Difference in phase angle is less than the set difference limit.

310
Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON

SYN1-START & SYN1-INPROGR

& S
SYN1-BLOCK R
>1

UDiff
50 ms
& SYN1-CLOSECB
UBusHigh & t

ULineHigh >1
FreqDiffSynch
&
FreqDiff >1 SYN1-TESTCB

dF/dt Bus
tPulse
dF/dt Line
&
&
Fbus ± 5 Hz

Fline ± 5 Hz

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

PhaseDiff=closing angle
&
SYN1-AUTOOK

&
SYN1-MANOK

99000090.vsd

Figure 175: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing. The input signals SYN1-AUTOOK and
SYN1-MANOK derive from the synchrocheck and energizing logic.

311
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

SYNCHROCHECK

SYN1
OPERATION OFF
RELEASE
ON

SYN1-BLOCK
UDiff
50 ms
UBusHigh & t 0.00-60.0s
ULineHigh & t & ≥1 SYN1-AUTOOK
FreqDiff t Sync

PhaseDiff ≥1 SYN1-MANOK

&

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1 UDIFF

FRDIFF

PHDIFF

ENERGIZING CHECK

AutoEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL 50 ms 0.00-60.0s
≥1 AUTOENERG1
≥1 t & t

UL High &
UL Low
UB High
UB Low

UENERG1OK

ManEnerg.
OFF
Both
≥1
DLLB &
DBLL
≥1 50 ms 0.00-60.0s MANENERG1
t & t
& ≥1

≥1
ManDBDL &
OFF
ON

xx06000056.vsd

Figure 176: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck and energizing check for one circuit
breaker. The internal signal UENERG1OK derives from the external or internal

312
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

fuse failure inputs SYN1-UB1OK/FF and SYN1-VTSU.

1.3 Calculations
1.3.1 Settings for single circuit breaker
The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

(The number of Synchro Check functions is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

1.3.2 Operation
Off/Release/On

Off The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYNx-AUTOOK = 1 and SYNx-MANOK = 1.
On The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

1.3.3 Input phase

The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase
(phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only available in terminals intended for one bay).

1.3.4 UMeasure
Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase) measurement.(Only avail-
able in terminals intended for several bays).

1.3.5 PhaseShift
This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two
measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase differ-
ence. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

1.3.6 URatio
The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for
the voltage difference caused if one wishes to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine
phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URa-
tio”-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus volt-
age.

1.3.7 USelection
Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.

1.3.8 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

313
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

Off The energizing function is disabled

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-AUTOOK.
tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.9 ManDBDL
If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow
and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3.10 UHigh and ULow

Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condi-
tion, ULow, for the line or bus.

1.3.11 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff

Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle
and voltage respectively.

1.3.12 VTConnection
This setting defines which side, line or bus, that leave three-phase connection of the VT. This
setting is available only for single breaker arrangement for one bay.

1.3.13 tSync
Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information.

1.3.14 Settings for double circuit breaker

The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

(The number of SynchroCheck settings is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

1.3.15 Operation
Off/Release/On

Off The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.
On The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

314
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.3.16 Input phase

The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase
(phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only available in terminals intended for one bay).

1.3.17 UMeasure
Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase) measurement. (Only avail-
able in terminals intended for several bays).

1.3.18 PhaseShift
This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two
measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase differ-
ence. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

1.3.19 URatio
The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for
the voltage difference caused if one wishes to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine
phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URa-
tio”-setting to sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus volt-
age.

1.3.20 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

Off The energizing function is disabled.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is
high, above (70-100% U1b).
DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is
high, above (70-100% U1b).
Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-AUTOOK.
tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-MANOK.

1.3.21 ManDBDL
If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow
and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3.22 UHigh and ULow

Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condi-
tion, ULow, for the line or bus.

1.3.23 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff

Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle
and voltage respectively.

315
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.3.24 tSync
Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information.

1.3.25 Settings for single circuit breaker with phasing

The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

1.3.26 Operation

Off The synchrocheck function is disabled and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.
On The synchro-check function is in service and the output signal depends on the input
conditions.

1.3.27 Input phase

The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase
(phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).

1.3.28 PhaseShift
This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line transformer between the two
measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase differ-
ence. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

1.3.29 URatio
The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for
the voltage difference caused if wished to connect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neu-
tral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting to
sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage.

1.3.30 USelection
Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.

1.3.31 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

Off The energizing condition is not used, only the synchro-check.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-AUTOOK.
tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-MANOK.

316
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.3.32 ManDBDL
If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow
and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3.33 UHigh and ULow

Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condi-
tion, ULow, for the line or bus.

1.3.34 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff

Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle
and voltage respectively.

1.3.35 OperationSync

Off The phasing function is disabled and all outputs are low.
On The phasing function is in service and the output signals depends on the input condi-
tions.

1.3.36 ShortPulse

Off The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=tPulse.
On The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=one cycle time in the
internal logic.

1.3.37 FreqDiffSynch
Setting for frequency difference between line and bus for the phasing function.

1.3.38 tPulse
The length of the breaker closing pulse. See also the setting ShortPulse, which sets the length to
one cycle timer of the internal logic.

1.3.39 tBreaker
Closing time of the breaker.

1.3.40 VTConnection
This setting defines which side, line or bus, that have three-phase connection of the VT. This
setting is available only for single breaker arrangement for one bay.

1.3.41 tSync
Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information.

1.3.42 FreqDiffBlock
The setting can be set ON or OFF. Setting ON enables the phasing function even if the frequency
difference is lower then set value of the setting FreqDiff for the synchrocheck function. Both the
phasing function and synchrocheck function will operate in parallel. When the setting is OFF

317
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

the phasig function will be blocked if the frequency difference is lower than the set value of the
setting FreqDiff. The synchrocheck function operates when the value is below the set value and
the phasing function starts to operate when the value is above the set value.

1.3.43 Settings for double circuit breaker with phasing

The parameters for the synchrocheck function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

1.3.44 Operation

Off The function is disabled and the output is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.
On The function is in service and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

1.3.45 Input phase

The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be of a single-phase
(phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).

1.3.46 PhaseShift
This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a power transformer between the
two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The set value is added to the measured phase dif-
ference. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

1.3.47 URatio
The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the setting is to compensate for
the voltage difference if UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral is used. The “Input
phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting to sqr3=1.732. This
setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with the bus voltage.

1.3.48 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

Off The energizing condition is not used only the synchro-check.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) and the line voltage U-line is high,
above (70-100% U1b).
Both Energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.
tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-AUTOOK.
tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the energizing condition to achieve
SYN1-MANOK.

318
 Synchrocheck and energizing check (SYN) Chapter 9
Control

1.3.49 ManDBDL
If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow
and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3.50 UHigh and ULow

Two different settings, which define an energize condition, UHigh, and a non-energized condi-
tion, ULow, for the line or bus.

1.3.51 FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff

Three different settings for differences between line and bus regarding frequency, phase angle
and voltage respectively.

1.3.52 FreqDiffSynch
Setting for frequency difference between line and bus for the phasing function.

1.3.53 OperationSynch

Off The phasing function is disabled and all outputs are low.
On The phasing function is in service and the output signals depends on the input condi-
tions.

1.3.54 ShortPulse

Off The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=tPulse.
On The closing pulse issued to the circuit breaker will be of length=one cycle time in the
internal logic.

1.3.55 tPulse
The length of the breaker closing pulse. See also the setting ShortPulse, which sets the length to
one cycle timer of the internal logic

1.3.56 tBreaker
Closing time of the breaker.

1.3.57 tSync
Operation delay time of the synchrocheck information.

1.3.58 FreqDiffBlock
The setting can be set ON or OFF. Setting ON enables the phasing function even if the frequency
difference is lower then set value of the setting FreqDiff for the synchrocheck function. Both the
phasing function and synchrocheck function will operate in parallel. When the setting is OFF
the phasig function will be blocked if the frequency difference is lower than the set value of the
setting FreqDiff. The synchrocheck function operates when the value is below the set value and
the phasing function starts to operate when the value is above the set value.

319
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

2 Autorecloser (AR)

2.1 Application
Automatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the service of a power line af-
ter a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashover arcs, which are transient by na-
ture. When the power line is switched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the
arc de-ionises and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So a certain line dead
time is needed. But then line service can resume by the auto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select
the length of the dead time to enable good probability of fault arc de-ionisation and successful
reclosing.

For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR
open time) expression is used. At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Au-
to-reclose open time equals approximaltely the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times
may differ.

In case of a permanent fault, the line protection trips again at reclosing to clear the fault.

320
Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

Instat of fault

Operates
Operates

Resets

Resets
Line

Fault
protection

Operate time Operate time

Closed
Circuit
breaker

Open

Break time Closing time Break time

Contacts separated

Contact closed
Close command
Are extinguishers
Trip command

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Set AR open time Reclaim time

Auto-reclosing
Reclosing
command
Start AR

function

AR reset
99000118.vsd

Figure 177: Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault

In a bay with one circuit breaker only, a terminal is normally provided with one AR function.

Single-phase tripping and single-phase reclosing is a way to limit the effect of a single-phase
line fault to system operation. Especially at higher voltages, the majority of line faults are of the
single-phase type. The method is of particular value to maintain system stability in systems with
limited meshing or parallel routing. It requires individual operation of each phase of the break-
ers, which is common at the higher transmission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required at single-phase reclosing compared to high-speed
three-phase reclosing, due to influence on the fault arc from voltage and current of the
non-tripped phases.

There is also a possibility to trip and reclose two of the circuit breaker poles, in case of faults
when two out of the three phases are involved and parallel lines are in service. This type of faults
is less common compared to single phase to earth faults, but more common than three phase
faults.

321
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

In order to maximize the availability of the power system there is a possibility to chose single
pole tripping and auto-reclosing at single phase faults, two pole tripping and auto-reclosing at
faults involving two phases and three pole tripping and auto-reclosing at three phase faults.

During the single pole open time there will be an equivalent “series”-fault in the system. As a
consequence there will be a flow of zero sequence current. Therefor the residual current protec-
tions must be co-ordinated with the single pole tripping and auto-reclosing.

The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase, two-phase and/or three-phase
reclosing from six single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing programs. The three-phase auto-reclose
open time can be set to give either high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) or delayed auto-reclosing
(DAR). In the reclosing programs the delayed auto-reclosing (DAR) is always a three pole trip
and reclosing, even if the first high-speed reclosing is a single pole action.

2.2 Functionality
The AR function is a logical function built up from logical elements. It operates in conjunction
with the trip output signals from the line protection functions, the OK to close output signals
from the synchrocheck and energizing check function, and binary input signals (for circuit
breaker position/status, or from other external protection functions).

In the AR logic a number of parameters can be set to adjust the auto-reclosing function to the
desired requirements. Examples are:

• Number of AR attempts
• AR programs
• Open times for different AR attempts

2.2.1 AR operation
The mode of operation can be selected by setting the parameter Operation to ON, OFF or
Stand-by. ON activates automatic reclosing. OFF deactivates the auto-recloser. Stand-by en-
ables On and Off operation via input signal pulses.

2.2.2 Start and control of the auto-reclosing

The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled by the parameter Operation
and the input signals as described above. When it is on, the AR01-SETON output is high (ac-
tive). See Function block diagrams.

The auto-reclosing function is activated at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal.
At repeated trips, this signal is activated again to make the reclosing program continue.

There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a new cycle started. After these
checks, the start signal is latched in and the Started state signal is activated. It can be interrupted
by certain events.

2.2.3 Extended AR open time, shot 1

The purpose of this function is to adapt the length of the AR Open time to the possibility of
non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. If a permissive communication scheme is used
and the permissive communication channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of ser-
vice at the fault, there is a risk of sequential non-simultaneous tripping. To ensure a sufficient

322
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

line dead time, the AR open time is extended by 0.4 s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is
checked at tripping. See Function block diagrams. Select this function (or not) by setting the Ex-
tended t1 parameter to On (or Off).

2.2.4 Long trip signal

During normal circumstances, the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user
can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. At a longer trip signal, the AR open dead time
is extended by Extend_t1. If the Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing se-
quence in the same way as AR01-INHIBIT.

2.2.5 Reclosing programs

The reclosing programs can be performed with up to maximum four reclosing attempts (shots),
selectable with the NoOfReclosing parameter. The first program is used at pure 3-phase trips of
breakers and the other programs are used at 1-, 2- or 3-phase trips of breakers.

3ph
3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts (NoOfReclosing parameter). The output AR01-P3P is
always high (=1).

A trip operation is made as a three-phase trip at all types of fault. The reclosing is as a
three-phase reclosing in program 1/2/3ph, described below.

1/2/3ph
1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

For the example, one-shot reclosing for 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase, see Figures in Function
block diagrams. Here, the AR function is assumed to be On and Ready. The breaker is closed
and the operation gear ready (manoeuvre spring charged etc.). Only the 1-phase and 3-phase cas-
es are described.

AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protection. The AR01-READY
output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle).

If AR01-TR2P (2-phase trip) is low and AR01-TR3P (3-phase trip) is:

low, the timer for 1-phase reclosing open time t1 1Ph is started and the AR01-1PT1 output
(auto-reclosing 1-phase, shot 1, in progress) is activated. It can be used to suppress Pole dis-
agreement and Earth-fault protection during the 1-phase open interval.
high, the timer for 3-phase AR open time, t1, is started (instead of t1 1Ph) and AR01-T1 is set
(auto-reclosing 3-phase, shot 1, in progress). While either t1 1Ph or t1 is running, the output
AR01-INPROGR is activated.

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of the breaker, the input (see Func-
tion block diagrams) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly also AR01-CBREADY at type OCO).
The AR Open-time timer, t1 1Ph or t1, keeps on running.

At the end of the set AR open time, t1 1Ph or t1, the respective SPTO or TPTO (single-phase or
three-phase AR time-out, see Function block diagrams) is activated and goes on to the output
module for further checks and to give a closing command to the circuit breaker.

323
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

At any kind of trip, the operation is as already described, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing
attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maxi-
mum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

1/2ph
1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as in above described example, program 1/2/3ph. If
the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow,
if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing
parameter).

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and no reclosing takes place.

1ph + 1*2ph
1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P low), the operation is as in above described example, pro-
gram 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclos-
ings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the
NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P low), the operation is similar as above. But, if the first
reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more at-
tempts take place!

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and no reclosing takes place.

1/2ph + 1*3ph
1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing attempt fails,
a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three ad-
ditional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a
3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place!

1ph + 1*2/3ph
1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase
trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional at-
tempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 2-phase or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosing attempt
fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place!

324
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

Table 15: Type of reclosing for different programs

Program 1st attempt 2-4th attempt
3ph 3ph 3ph
1/2/3ph 1ph 3ph
2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph
1/2ph 1ph 3ph
2ph 3ph
No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing
1ph + 1*2ph 1ph 3ph
2ph No
No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing
1/2ph + 1*3ph 1ph 3ph
2ph 3ph
3ph No
1ph + 1*2/3ph 1ph 3ph
2ph No
3ph No

2.2.6 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle

A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after the selected number of re-
closing attempts are performed.

2.2.7 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer

An AR open-time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing,
a synchro-check and/or energising check or voltage check can be used. It is possible to use an
internal or an external synchro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC. If a reclosing with-
out check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNC to FIXD-ON (set to 1).

Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-check function to a permanent-
ly active signal. Set Operation = Release in the synchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is
configured to SYNx-AUTOOK.

At confirmation from the synchro-check or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal
passes on.

At AR01-CBREADY signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checked that this signal is present
to allow a reclosing.

The synchrocheck and energizing check must be fulfilled within a certain period of time, tSync.
If it does not, or if the other conditions are not fulfilled, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The Reclaim-timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing command, after which the re-
closing function is reset. Should a new trip occur within this time, it is treated as a continuation
of the first fault. When a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaim timer is started.

325
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

There is an AR State Control, see Function block diagrams, to track the actual state in the reclos-
ing sequence.

2.2.8 Pulsing of CB closing command

The circuit breaker closing command, AR01-CLOSECB, is made as a pulse with a duration, set
by the tPulse parameter. For circuit breakers without an anti-pumping function, the clos-
ing-pulse-cutting described below can be used. It is selected by means of the CutPulse parameter
(set to On). In case of a new trip pulse, the closing pulse will be cut (interrupted). But the mini-
mum length of the closing pulse is always 50 ms.

At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing operation counter is also incre-
mented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of reclosings.
See Function block diagrams.

2.2.9 Transient fault

After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for the set time. If no tripping oc-
curs within this time, tReclaim, the auto-reclosing function will be reset. The circuit breaker re-
mains closed and the operating gear ready (manoeuvre spring is recharged). AR01-CBCLOSED
= 1 and AR01-CBREADY = 1.

After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to original rest state, with AR01-SETON = 1,
AR01-READY = 1 and AR01-P1P = 1 (depending on the selected program). The other AR01
outputs = 0.

2.2.10 Unsuccessful signal

Normally the signal AR01-UNSUC appears when a new start is received after the last reclosing
attempt has been made. See Function block diagrams. It can be programmed to appear at any
stage of a reclosing sequence by setting the parameter UnsucMode = On. The UNSUC signal is
attained after the time tUnsuc.

2.2.11 Permanent fault

If a new trip takes place after a reclosing attempt and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF
signal appears, the AR01-UNSUC (Reclosing unsuccessful) is activated. The timers for the first
reclosing attempt (t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph and t1) cannot be started.

Depending on the PulseCut parameter setting, the closing command may be shortened at the sec-
ond trip command.

After time-out of the reclaim timer, the auto reclosing function resets, but the circuit breaker re-
mains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1). Thus the reclosing function is not
ready for a new reclosing cycle. See Function block diagrams and Sequence examples.

2.2.12 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts

The auto-recloser can be programmed to continue with reclosing attempts two to four (if select-
ed) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the breaker is still
not closed. See figure in Function block diagrams. This is done by setting the parameter Auto-
Cont = On and the wait time tAutoWait to desired length.

326
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

2.3 Calculations
2.3.1 Configuration and setting
The signals are configured in the CAP configuration tool.

The parameters for the automatic reclosing function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

2.3.2 Recommendations for input signals

See figure 178, figure 179 and the default configuration for examples.

AR01-START
Should be connected to the protection function trip output which shall start the auto-recloser. It
can also be connected to a binary input for start from an external contact. A logical OR gate can
be used to multiply the number of start sources.

AR01-ON and AR01-OFF

May be connected to binary inputs for external control.

AR01-INHIBIT
Can be connected to binary inputs, to block the AR from a certain protection, such as a line con-
nected shunt reactor, transfer trip receive or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADY

Must be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals. If the external signals are
of Breaker-not-ready type, uncharged etc., an inverter can be configured before CBREADY.

AR01-SYNC
Is connected to the internal synchro-check function if required. It can also be connected to a bi-
nary input. If neither internal nor external synchronizing or energizing check (dead line check)
is required, it can be connected to a permanent 1 (high), by connection to FIXD-ON.

AR01-PLCLOST
Can be connected to a binary input, when required.

AR01-TRSOTF
Can be connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, trip switch-onto-fault.

AR01-STTHOL
Start of thermal overload protection signal. Can be connected to OVLD-TRIP to block the AR
at overload.

AR01-TR2P and AR01-TR3P

Are connected to the function block TRIP or to binary inputs. The protection functions that give
two-phase or three-phase trips are supposed to be routed via that function.

Other
The other input signals can be connected as required.

327
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

2.3.3 Recommendations for output signals

See figure 178, figure 179 and the default configuration for examples.

AR01-READY
Can be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also be used for indication,
if required.

AR01-1PT1 and 2PT1

1-phase and 2-phase reclosing in progress is used to temporarily block an Earth-fault protection
and/or a Pole disagreement function during the 1-phase or 2-phase open intervals.

AR01-CLOSECB
Connect to a binary output relay for circuit breaker closing command.

AR01-P3P
Prepare 3-phase trip: Connect to TRIP-P3PTR.

AR01-P1P
Permit 1-phase trip: Can be connected to a binary output for connection to external protection
or trip relays. In case of total loss of auxiliary voltage, the output relay drops and does not allow
1-phase trip. If needed to invert the signal, it can be made by a breaking contact of the output
relay.

Other
The other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbance recording etc., as required.

328
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

IOM IOM
INPUT AR01- OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLOCKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUC xx
xx xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx CBCLOSED xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx xx
RESET

PROTECTION READY
xxxx-TRIP >1 START
OVLD-TRIP STTHOL
SOTF-TRIP
ZM1--TRIP >1 TRSOTF
T1
T2
T3
SYRW-AUTO T4
SYNC
WAIT WFMASTER

en02000573.vsd

Figure 178: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections

329
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

IOM IOM
INPUT AR01- OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLOCKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUC xx
xx xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx CBCLOSED xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx P1P xx
RESET TRIP-P3PTR
P3P
PROTECTION START 1PT1 EF4--BLOCK
xxxx-TRIP >1 >1
2PT1
OVLD-TRIP STTHOL READY
SOTF-TRIP TRSOTF
ZM1--TRIP >1
T1
TRIP-TR2P T2
TR2P
TRIP-TR3P TR3P T3
FIXD-ON T4
SYNC
WAIT WFMASTER

99000097.vsd

Figure 179: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections

2.3.4 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement

Sequential reclosing at multi-breaker arrangement is achieved by giving the two line breakers
different priorities. Refer to figure 180. At single breaker application, Priority is set to No, and
this has no influence on the function. The signal Started is sent to the next function module. At
double breaker and similar applications, Priority is set High for the Master terminal and Priority
= Low for the Slave.

While reclosing is in progress in the master, it issues the signal -WFMASTER. A reset delay
ensures that the -WAIT signal is kept high for the breaker closing time. After an unsuccessful
reclosing, it is also maintained by the signal -UNSUC. For the slave terminal, the input signal
-WAIT holds back a reclosing operation. A time tWait sets a maximum waiting time for the reset
of the Wait signal. At time-out, it interrupts the reclosing cycle by a WM-INH, wait for master
inhibit, signal.

330
Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

Terminal ‘‘ Master ”
Priority = High
AR01
ON BLOCKED
OFF
BLKON SETON
BLOCKOFF INPROGR
INHIBIT ACTIVE
RESET UNSUC
READY
START
SITHOL
TRSOTF CLOSECB CB1
CBREADY
CBCLOSED
PLCLOST T1
SYNC T2
T3
WAIT T4
WFMASTER

Terminal ‘‘ Slave ”
Priority = Low
AR01
ON
OFF BLOCKED
BLKON SETON
BLOCKOFF INPROGR
INHIBIT ACTIVE
RESET UNSUC
READY
START
TRSOTF CB2
STTHOL CLOSECB

CBREADY T1
CBCLOSED
PLCLOST T2
SYNC T3
T4
WAIT
WFMASTER
*) Other input/output signals as in previous
singel breaker arrangements
99000120.vsd

Figure 180: Additional input and output signals at multi breaker arrangement

331
 Autorecloser (AR) Chapter 9
Control

2.3.5 Settings
Number of reclosing attempts: 1 to 4 attempts can be chosen. In most cases 1 attempt is sufficient
as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first reclosing shot. In power systems with
many faults caused by other phenomena than lightning, for example wind, it can be motivated
with more than one reclosing attempt.

There are six different possibilities in the selection of reclosing programs. What type of first shot
reclosing shall be made, and for which types of faults? In completely meshed power systems it
is often acceptable to use three pole auto-reclosing for all fault types, as first shot. In power sys-
tems with few parallel paths single pole auto-reclosing should be considered, in order to avoid
reclosing in a phase opposition situation. In such systems auto-reclosing should be allowed for
single phase faults only. It must be remembered that there will be zero sequence current flow in
the power system during the single pole reclosing open time.

If a permissive channel is used between the line ends, and the availability of the communication
channel is considered to be low, extended dead time in case of loss of the channel should be used.

Due to the secondary arc at single pole trip and auto-reclosing, the extinguishing time for the arc
will be longer than for three pole trip and auto-reclosing. Typical required dead time for single
pole trip and reclosing is 800 ms. Typical required dead time for trip and reclosing is 400 ms.
Different local phenomena, such as moisture, salt, pollution, etc. can influence the required dead
time. The open time for the first auto-reclosing shot can be set for single pole (t1 1Ph), two pole
(t1 2PH) and (t1).

The open time for the delayed auto-reclosing shots can be set individually (t2, t3 and t4). This
setting can in some cases be restricted by national regulations.

In case of reclosing based on synchrocheck a maximum wait time (tSync) can be set. If the syn-
chrocheck does not allow reclosing within this set time there will be no autoreclosing. This set-
ting must be matched against the setting of the synchrocheck function. The operate time of the
synchrocheck is mainly dependent on the setting angle difference. A typical operation time is
about 200 ms. If the system will start to oscillate during the dead time, there can be some time
before the synchronizing quantities can be accepted for reclosing. This can be checked by means
of dynamic simulations. As a base recommendation tSync can be set to 2.0 s.

The breaker closing pulse length (tPulse) can be chosen with some margin longer that the short-
est allowed pulse for the breaker (see breaker data).

The tReclaim setting must be chosen so that all autoreclosing shots can be completed.

The setting tTrip is used for blocking of autoreclosing in case of long trip duration. This can be
the consequence of an unwanted permanent trip signal or a breaker failure.

In case of two or more autoreclosing modules only one shall be chosen as master (priority high).
The others should have priority low. In case of one breaker only priority none is chosen.

332
 Single command, 16 signals (CD) Chapter 9
Control

3 Single command, 16 signals (CD)

3.1 Application
The terminals may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation auto-
mation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block
has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards.
For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with the configuration log-
ic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the
terminal or via binary outputs.

Figure 181 shows an application example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect the com-
mand function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type
of command control is normally performed by a pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal. Fig-
ure 181 shows a close operation, but an open operation is performed in a corresponding way
without the synchro-check condition.

Single
command
function
CDxx Configuration logic circuits
SingleCmdFunc

Close CB1 CmdOuty

OUTy 200 ms
User- &
defined
conditions
2 MODE
Synchro-
check
99000422.vsd

Figure 181: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via
configuration logic circuits

Figure 182 and figure 183 show other ways to control functions, which require steady On/Off
signals. The output can be used to control built-in functions or external equipment.

333
 Single command, 16 signals (CD) Chapter 9
Control

Single
command
function
CDxx Function n
SingleCmdFunc

Function n CmdOuty

OUTy

1 MODE

99000423.vsd

Figure 182: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

Single
command
function
CDxx Configuration logic circuits
SingleCmdFunc

Device 1 CmdOuty

OUTy
User- &
defined
conditions
1 MODE

99000424.vsd

Figure 183: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external equipment
via configuration logic circuits

3.2 Design
The single command function consists of one function block, CD01 for 16 binary output signals.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE
input, common for the whole block, from the CAP tool configuration.

334
 Single command, 16 signals (CD) Chapter 9
Control

• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the
station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic con-
nected to the command function block may not have a cycle time longer than the
execution cycle time for the command function block.

The outputs can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters
from the CAP configuration tool.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in func-
tions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

3.3 Calculations
3.3.1 Setting
The setting parameters for the single command function are set from the CAP configuration tool.

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CmdOuty - including the
name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady,
or Pulse.

335
 Multiple command (CM) Chapter 9
Control

4 Multiple command (CM)

4.1 Application
The terminals may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation auto-
mation system or from other terminals via the interbay bus. That receiving function block has
16 outputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes
within the terminal or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other terminals,
these terminals have a corresponding event function block to send the information.

4.2 Design
4.2.1 General
One multiple command function block CM01 with fast execution time also named Binary signal
interbay communication, high speed and/or 79 multiple command function blocks CM02-CM80
with slower execution time are available in the REx 5xx terminals as options.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE
input, common for the whole block, from the CAP configuration tool.

• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the
station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic con-
nected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the
execution cycle time for the command function block.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be con-
trolled from the operator station or from other terminals. One common name for the block, with
a maximum of 19 characters, is set from the configuration tool CAP.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in func-
tions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

4.2.2 Binary signal interbay communication

The multiple command function block can also be used to receive information over the LON bus
from other REx 5xx terminals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking information be-
tween different bays. That can be performed by an Event function block as the send block and
with a multiple command function block as the receive block. The configuration for the commu-
nication between terminals is made by the LON Network Tool.

The MODE input is set to Steady at communication between terminals and then the data are
mapped between the terminals.

336
 Multiple command (CM) Chapter 9
Control

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the
block did not receive data within an INTERVAL time, that could be set. This function is appli-
cable only during communication between terminals over the LON bus. The INTERVAL input
time is set a little bit longer than the interval time set on the Event function block (see the doc-
ument Event function). If INTERVAL=0, then VALID will be 1, that is, not applicable.

4.3 Calculations
4.3.1 Settings
The setting parameters for the multiple command function are set from the CAP configuration
tool.

The multiple command function has a common name setting (CmdOut) for the block. The
MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. INTERVAL is used
for the supervision of the cyclical receiving of data.

337
 Multiple command (CM) Chapter 9
Control

338
About this chapter Chapter 10
Logic

Chapter 10 Logic

About this chapter

This chapter describes the logic functions.

339
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

1 Tripping logic (TR)

1.1 Application
All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip logic. In
its most simple alternative the logic will only link the trip signal and assure a sufficient duration
of the trip signal.

The tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring terminals offers three different
operating modes:

• Three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults (3ph operating mode)

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for
multi-phase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues
a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating pro-
tection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request three-phase
tripping.
• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults, two-phase tripping for ph-ph and
ph-ph-E faults and three-phase tripping for three-phase faults (1ph/2ph/3ph op-
erating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase
selection within the operating protection functions is not possible or at evolving
multi-phase faults.

The three phase trip for all faults gives a simple solution and is often sufficient in well meshed
transmission systems and in sub-transmission systems.

As most faults, especially on the highest voltage levels, are single phase to earth faults, single
phase tripping can be of great value. If the faulted phase is tripped only, power can be transferred
on the line also during the dead time before reclosing. The single phase tripping at single phase
faults must be combined with single pole reclosing.

Two phase tripping can be valuable on lines running parallel to each other.

To meet the different single, double, 1 and 1/2 or other multiple circuit breaker arrangements,
one or more identical TR function blocks may be provided within a single terminal. The actual
number of these TR function blocks that may be included within any given terminal depends on
the type of terminal. Therefore, the specific circuit breaker arrangements that can be catered for,
or the number of bays of a specific arrangement that can be catered for, depends on the type of
terminal.

One TR function block should be used for each breaker, if the line is connected to the substation
via more than one breaker. Assume that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used for the
line. The breaker chosen as master must in that case have single pole tripping, while the slave
breaker could have three pole tripping and auto-reclosing. In case of a permanent fault only one
of the breakers has to be operated at the second energising of the fault. In case of a transient fault
the slave breaker reclosing is made as a three pole reclosing onto the non-faulted line.

The same philosophy can be used for two-pole tripping and auto-reclosing.

340
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

1.2 Functionality
The minimum duration of a trip output signal from the TR function is 150ms. This is to secure
the fault clearance.

The three-pole TR function has a single input through which all trip output signals from the pro-
tection functions within the terminal, or from external protection functions via one or more of
the terminal’s binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output for connection to one or more
of the terminal’s binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the terminal requiring this
signal.

TRIP-BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP-TRIP
TRIP-TRIN ≥1
& t

Operation = On
xx00000577.vsd

Figure 184: Simplified logic diagram for trip logic

The expanded TR function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated in-
puts for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and
two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and
therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing
through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TR function. Examples of such protec-
tion functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TR function has two inputs
for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the
scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a resid-
ual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these
protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.

The expanded TR function has three trip outputs, one per phase, for connection to one or more
of the terminal’s binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the terminal requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip.
These signals are important for the cooperation with the auto-reclosing function.

The expanded TR function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving
faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which dis-
ables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole.

In case of multi-breaker arrangement, one TR function block can be used for each breaker, if the
breaker functions differ. This can be the case if single pole trip and auto-reclosing is used.

1.3 Design
The function consists of the following basic logic parts:

341
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

• A three-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is set into exclusive
three-phase operating mode.
• A phase segregated front logic that is activated when the terminal is in 1ph/3ph
or 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.
• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the func-
tion operates in 1ph/3ph operating mode.
• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the func-
tion operates in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.
• The final tripping circuits.

1.3.1 Three-phase front logic

Figure 185 shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase front logic. Descriptions of dif-
ferent signals are available in signal list.

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-TRINL2
>1
TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-1PTRZ >1
TRIP-1PTREF
>1
TRIP-TRIN RSTTRIP - cont.
&
Program = 3ph

99000456.vsd

Figure 185: Three-phase front logic - simplified logic diagram

Any of active functional input signals activates the RSTTRIP internal signal, which influences
the operation of the final tripping circuits.

1.3.2 Phase segregated front logic

The following input signals to the single-phase front logic influence the single-phase tripping of
the terminal see figure 186:

• Phase related tripping signals from different built-in protection functions that can
operate on a phase segregated basis and are used in the terminal. The output sig-
nals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-TRINLn (n = 1...3)
functional inputs.
• Internal phase-selective tripping signals from different phase selection functions
within the terminal, like PHS (phase selection for distance protection) or GFC
(general fault criteria). The output signals of these functions should be configured
to the TRIP-PSLn (n = 1...3) functional inputs. It is also possible to connect to
these functional inputs different external phase selection signals.
• Single-phase tripping commands from line distance protection or carrier aided
tripping commands from scheme communication logic for distance protection,
which initiate single-phase tripping. These signals should be configured to the

342
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

TRIP-1PTRZ functional input. It is also possible to configure a tripping output

from an earth-fault overcurrent protection, to initiate the single-pole trip in con-
nection with some external phase selection function. This signal should be con-
figured to the TRIP-1PTREF functional input.

TRIP-TRIN

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-PSL1 L1TRIP - cont.

>1
&

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-PSL2 L2TRIP - cont.

>1
&

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-PSL3 L3TRIP - cont.

>1
&

>1

>1 >1

-loop
-loop
>1
& &
&
TRIP-1PTREF & 50 ms
TRIP-1PTRZ >1 t

99000457.vsd

Figure 186: Phase segregated front logic

The TRIP-1PTRZ signal enables tripping corresponding to phase selection signals without any
restriction while any phase selective external tripping signals prevent such tripping from the
TRIP-1PTREF signal.

If any of these signals continues for more than 50 ms without the presence of any phase selection
signals, three-phase tripping command is issued.

It is possible to configure the TRIP-1PTREF signal to the output signal of the EF---TRIP over-
current, earth-fault, protection function (directional and nondirectional). This enables sin-
gle-phase tripping when the faulty phase is detected by some other phase-selection element such
as the phase selection in distance protection.

1.3.3 Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 187 presents the additional logic when the trip function is in 1ph/3ph operating mode. A
TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within
the front logic initiates a trip command.

343
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP - cont. >1
t RTRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t
>1
&

150 ms
L2TRIP - cont. >1
t STRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t
>1
&

150 ms
L3TRIP - cont. >1
t TTRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t
>1
&
>1

>1 &
TRIP-P3PTR
>1

-loop
99000458.vsd

Figure 187: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

If only one of internal signals LnTRIP is present without the presence of a TRIP-P3PTR signal,
a single pole tripping information is send to the final tripping circuits. A three-phase tripping
command is initiated in all other cases.

Built-in drop-off delayed (two second) timers secure a three-phase tripping for evolving faults
if the second fault occurs in different phase than the first one within a two second interval after
initiation of a first tripping command.

1.3.4 Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

Figur 188 presents the additional logic, when the trip function is in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.
A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within
the front logic initiates a trip command.

344
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP - cont.
t >1 RTRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t

&

150 ms
L2TRIP - cont.
t >1 STRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t &
&

150 ms
L3TRIP - cont.
t >1 TTRIP - cont.
>1
2000 ms
t

&
>1

&
TRIP-P3PTR >1
>1

-loop

99000459.vsd

Figure 188: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

The logic initiates a single-phase tripping information to the final logic circuits, if only one of
internal input signals (LnTRIP) is active. A two phase tripping information is send in case, when
two out of three input signals LnTRIP are active. A three phase tripping information requires all
three LnTRIP input signals to be active.

The built in drop-off delayed (two seconds) timers secure correct three-phase tripping informa-
tion, when the faults are detected within two seconds in all three phases.

1.3.5 Final tripping circuits

Figur 189 present the final tripping circuits for a tripping function within the REx 5xx terminals.
The TRIP-BLOCK functional input signal can block the operation of a function, so that no func-
tional output signals become logical one. Detailed explanation of functional output signals is
available in signal list.

345
 Tripping logic (TR) Chapter 10
Logic

TRIP-BLOCK

RTRIP -cont. TRIP-TRL1

&
>1

STRIP - cont. TRIP-TRL2

&
>1

TTRIP -cont. TRIP-TRL3

&
>1
RSTTRIP -cont.
TRIP-TRIP
>1

TRIP-TR3P
& &
>1

-loop

& 10 ms
TRIP-TR1P
& t

& 5 ms
TRIP-TR2P
& t
>1
&

-loop

99000555.vsd

Figure 189: Final tripping circuits

1.4 Calculations
The parameters for the trip logic function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameters Setting
Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

346
 Pole discordance logic (PDc) Chapter 10
Logic

2 Pole discordance logic (PDc)

2.1 Application
Circuit breaker pole position discordance can occur on the operation of a breaker with indepen-
dent operating gears for the three poles. The reason may be an interruption in the trip coil cir-
cuits, or a mechanical failure resulting in a stuck breaker pole. A pole discordance can be
tolerated for a limited time, for instance during a single-phase trip-auto-reclose cycle.

The pole discordance logic (PDc) detects a breaker pole position discrepancy not generated by
a single pole reclosing and generates a three phase command trip to the circuit breaker itself.

2.2 Functionality
2.2.1 Functionality for contact based pole discordance
The operation of the contact based pole discordance logic is based on checking the position of
the circuit breaker through six of its auxiliary contacts: three parallel connected normally open
contacts are connected in series with three parallel connected normally closed contacts. This
hard-wired logic is very often integrated in the circuit breaker control cabinets and gives a closed
signal in case of pole discordance in the circuit breaker. This signal is connected to the
PD---POLDISC input of the pole discordance function. If the function is enabled, after a short
delay, the activation of this input causes a trip command (PD---TRIP).

Figure 190 shows the typical application connection for the contact based pole discordance func-
tion.

347
 Pole discordance logic (PDc) Chapter 10
Logic

C.B.

REx 5xx Terminal

+
POLE DISCORDANCE

Pole Discordance Signal from C.B.

PD---BLOCK
PD---1POPEN PD---TRIP Circuit Breaker Trip
PD---POLDISC

99000467.vsd

+ +
External Blocking

1-Phase Auto Reclose Running

visf_115.vsd

Figure 190: Typical connection diagram for pole discordance function - contact based

2.3 Design
The simplified logic diagram of the contact based pole discordance logic is shown in figure 191.

348
Pole discordance logic (PDc) Chapter 10
Logic

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE LOGIC

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockPD = Yes

Logic Blocked form Test

PD---BLOCK
>1
PD---1POPEN

Logic Enable t 150 ms

PD---TRIP
PD---POLDISC & t

99000468.vsd

Figure 191: Simplified logic digram of pole discordance logic - contact based

The pole discordance logic is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)
• The input signal PD---BLOCK is high
• The input signal PD---1POPEN is high

The PD---BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance logic. It
can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from
external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in
order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected
to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The PD---1POPEN signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase auto-re-
closing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autore-
closing function is integrated in the terminal; if the auto-reclosing function is an external device,
then PD---1POPEN has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is
connected to a signallisation “1phase auto-reclosing in progress” from the external auto-reclos-
ing device.

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discordance status),
then the function input PD---POLDISC is activated from the pole discordance signal derived
from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel,
and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel). If the pole discordance
function is enabled, a 150 ms trip pulse command (PD---TRIP) is generated, after a settable time
interval t (0-60 s).

349
 Pole discordance logic (PDc) Chapter 10
Logic

2.4 Calculations
2.4.1 Setting Instruction
The parameters for the pole discordance protection function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and
path in local HMI.

Comments regarding settings:

Operation: Pole discordance protection On/Off. Activation or de-activation of the

logic.
Time delay , t: The time delay is not critical because the pole discordance logic operates
mainly with load conditions. The time delay should be chosen between 0.5
and 1 s.

350
 High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 10
Logic

3 High speed binary output logic (HSBO)

3.1 Application
The high-speed binary out logic (HSBO--) is included as basic and is used as a supplement to
the high-speed protection function (HS--) and the distance protection zone 1 function (ZM1--)
in the REx 5xx terminals.

Depending on the terminal type (actually the set of included functions) the following description
will be valid entirely or partly.

Together with the high-speed binary out logic, the high-speed (distance) protection and the
(main) distance protection zone 1 obtain even shorter operate times since the critical connections
to/from binary output/input are established in a more straightforward way than in the case of us-
ing the regular I/O-modules.

The high-speed binary out logic also includes trip scheme logic employing the same ‘fast’ con-
nections. The HSBO trip scheme logic will run in parallel with the regular trip scheme logic con-
figured within the terminal (ZC1P and ZCOM). In fact, information from these two functions
will be used in the HSBO function.

3.2 Functionality
The operation of the high-speed binary out logic overruns all other logical circuits within the ter-
minal and activates, with minimum time delay, the binary outputs (output relays). The same re-
lays should also be activated by the normal functional outputs of corresponding built-in
functions (TRIP function, for example). The reason for this is that the ‘fast’ (phase segregated)
outputs of the HSBO function should bring forward an earlier activation of trip and carrier send
signals that are supposed to be continued by the regular functions (TRIP, ZC1P and ZCOM func-
tion). For example, the trip signals that are issued by the high-speed protection function through
the HSBO function are presented as short pulses (20ms) and therefore they need to be extended
(continued). In the general case, this would be provided for by the intervention of the TRIP func-
tion.

The operation is dependent upon other functions within the terminal. To achieve correct func-
tionality, it is absolutely necessary that all depending functions are configured correctly, set on
and not blocked. With respect to the employed distance protection transfer trip scheme the
HSBO function will retrieve the necessary information from the regular communication func-
tions (ZC1P or ZCOM) in order to determine the mode of operation. The HSBO function will
support intertrip, permissive under-reach and permissive overreach scheme. There is, however,
one exception to the possible use of these schemes. A delayed operation within the communica-
tion functions (ZCOM or ZC1P) (i.e. tCoord > 0) is not allowed. In this case the trip scheme
logic within the HSBO function should be blocked through activating input HSBO-BLKZCTR.
Do not use the default value for tCoord of 50ms.

The main configuration for the function is shown in figure 192 below.

This configuration is made internally and cannot be altered.

351
 High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 10
Logic

IOxx

BIx ZC1P-CRLn
HSBO
....
HSBO-
BLKZCTR HSBO-ERROR Regular function
block in/out
BIy ZC1P-CRMPH
HSBO-
BIz ZCOM-CR BLKHSTR
.... HSBO-
BLKHSCS

Binary inputs 'Internal' in/out

BIx HSBO-CRLn HSBO-TRLn
BIy
Binary output contacts
HSBO-CSLn BOx
BIz HSBO-
CRMPH BOy
ZC1P HSBO-CSMPH
ZC1P-CACCLn BOz
& HSBO-CR
TEST/BLOCK
Fast Trip/CS outputs
configured through IOxx
ZCOM
HSBO- settings:
ZCOM-CACC IOMOD BOx
& ZC1PCACCLn
TEST/BLOCK TRmLnOUT
CSLnOUT BOy
TRIP HSBO- CSMPHOUT
ZCOMCACC BOz
TRIP-PSLn
& ....
TEST/BLOCK HSBO-
TRIPPSLn

HS
HSBO-HSTRLn
HS-TRLn
HSBO-HSCSLn
HS-CSLn
HS-CSMPH HSBO-
HSCSMPH
ZM1 HSBO-
ZM1TRLn
ZM1-TRLn

en01000181.vsd
Figure 192: Simplified diagram of the high-speed binary out logic function together with de-
pending functions

352
 High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 10
Logic

According to the presented ‘internal’ configuration input will be brought in from the HS, ZM1,
ZC1P, ZCOM and TRIP functions.

In the case of carrier receive signals, the input will be attained directly from binary input over-
riding the binary I/O-modules. This is obtained by means of looking up and connecting to the
input contacts used for the carrier receive inputs of the ZC1P and/or the ZCOM function. This
calls for that the carrier receive inputs of the latter functions must be connected directly to a bi-
nary I/O-module, with nothing in between. In figure 192 this is illustrated with ZC1P-CRLn and
ZCOM-CR connected to arbitrary binary in (BIx, BIy,...).

The input signals (HSBO-ZC1PCACCLn, HSBO-ZCOMCACC and HSBO-TRIPPSLn) are

connected to the inputs on respective function block. This means that the high-speed binary out
logic runs in parallel with those functions. But it is important that the functions are set on so the
signals are received with true values. Otherwise, the logic can malfunction. Note that these sig-
nals can be blocked in the function from where they originate.

Similarly, input signals HSBO-HSTRLn, HSBO-CSLn and HSBO-HSCSMPH are connected to

the output of the HS function. Input signals HSBO-ZM1TRLn are connected to the output of the
ZM1 function.

Shown connections to in and outputs of the other function blocks (ZC1P-, ZCOM-, TRIP-, HS-
and ZM1-) can not be re configured. They are so called hard connections in the software and
done during manufacturing.

The output signals (trip and carrier send) must be configured to appropriate binary output con-
tacts during engineering. This is done through configuring the corresponding parameters of the
HSBO-function in CAP tool (IOMOD, TRmLnOUT, CSLnOUT and CSMPHOUT).

It should be noted that trip output from the HSBO-function can be issued either from the
HS-function or the ZM1-function, or both in parallel, depending on terminal type and setting.
As specified above the common trip outputs are configured through parameters TRmLnOUT.

It is possible to configure the output of all three phases to one binary output contact in order to
obtain direct three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults.

The blocking input signals (HSBO-BLKZCTR, -BLKHSTR and -BLK-HSCS) are normal func-
tion input signals. The configuration is done with the configuration tool CAP tool as usual.

The error output signal (HSBO-ERROR) indicates if the present configuration of ‘fast’ trip and
carrier send output does not correspond to actual hardware (binary output cards). The signal can
be used for indication or as wanted.

3.3 Design
The internal design of the functional block is shown in figure 193 below.

353
 High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 10
Logic

HSBO-BLKZCTR

HSBO-CRLn
>1 IO-card
HSBO-CRMPH configuration error HSBO-ERROR
&
HSBO-ZC1CACCLn

>1 &
HSBO-CR
≥1 15ms
HSBO-TRLn
&
HSBO-ZCOMCACC
&
HSBO-TRIPPSLn
Regular function block in
and ouput
HSBO-BLKHSTR
>1 'Internal' in and output
HSBO-Test
>1
HSBO-BLKHSCS
&
HSBO-HSTRLn 15ms
& HSBO-CSLn
HSBO-HSCSLn 15ms
& HSBO-CSMPH
HSBO-HSCSMPH
&
HSBO-ZM1TRLn

en01000182.vsd
Figure 193: Simplified logic diagram of the function block

Below is a description of the internal input/output signals.

354
High speed binary output logic (HSBO) Chapter 10
Logic

Input signals:
HSBO-CRLn Carrier receive signal, for phase n (n=1..3), connected to the binary input. These
inputs use the same signals as the inputs to the communication logic ZC1P-.
HSBO-CRMPH A carrier receive signal, multi-phase, connected to a binary input. It uses the same
signal as the input to the communication logic ZC1P-.
HSBO-ZC1PCACCL Carrier acceleration signals, for phase n (n=1..3). They are connected internally to
n the input of the communication logic ZC1P- and cannot be redirected.
HSBO-CR A carrier receive signal connected to a binary input, already connected to the cor-
responding input of the communication logic ZCOM-.
HSBO-ZCOMCACC A carrier acceleration signal. Is a hard connection to the input of the communica-
tion logic ZCOM-.
HSBO-TRIPPSLn Phase selection signal, selected phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the input
of the trip function block TRIP-.
HSBO-ZM1TRLn Trip signal, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the distance
protection zone 1 function block ZM1-.
HSBO-HSTRLn Trip signal, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the
high-speed function block HS---.
HSBO-HSCSLn Carrier send signals, of phase n (n=1..3). Is a hard connection to the output of the
high-speed function block HS---.
HSBO-HSCSMPH A carrier send signal, multi-phase. Is a hard connection to the output of the
high-speed function block HS---.

Configuration parameters

Output signals:
IOMOD Parameter for selecting the binary out card supposed to transfer the ‘fast’ outputs
of the HSBO function.
TRmLnOUT Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for trip signal m
of phase n. m is either 1 or 2. Both the ‘TR1LnOUT-output’ and ‘TR2LnOUT-output’
carry the same signal, for a possible double-breaker arrangement. It is recom-
mended that these trip outputs are configured to the same contacts as the corre-
sponding regular trip outputs (of the TRIP function). If three-pole trip is required all
three trip outputs should be configured to the same contact (i.e.
TRxL1OUT=TRxL2OUT=TRxL3OUT). Consider that the trip signals can be issued
from the HS function and/or the ZM1 function.
CSLnOUT Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for carrier send
signal of phase n. Like in the trip output case above, it is recommended that these
carrier send outputs are configured to the same contacts as the corresponding reg-
ular carrier send outputs (of the ZC1P or ZCOM function).
CSMPHOUT Parameter for selecting the specific binary output contact intended for the
multi-phase carrier send signal. If it is applicable, connect it to the same contact as
the regular multi-phase carrier send signal (of the ZC1P function).

355
 Communication channel test logic (CCHT) Chapter 10
Logic

4 Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

4.1 Application
Many applications in secondary systems require testing of different functions with confirmed in-
formation on successfully completed test. Carrier channel test (CCHT) function serves primarily
testing of communication (power line carrier) channels in applications, where continuous mon-
itoring by some other means is not possible due to technical or economical reasons.

The logic initiates sending of some impulse (carrier send signal), which starts the operation of
different functions outside the logic, and checks the feedback from the external function. It re-
ports the successful or non-successful response on initiated test. It is also possible to abort the
test with some external signal, which overrules all internal process.

It is possible to initiate the logic manually or automatically. Manual starts are possible by means
of external push-button, connected to the binary input of a terminal. Automatic starts are possi-
ble in long time intervals with their duration dependent on setting of the corresponding timer.

4.2 Design
Figure 194 presents a simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function. Logical one on
CCHT-BLOCK functional input disables completely the operation of the logic.

CCHT-BLOCK

Operation=Man

CCHT-START & tWait 15 ms

&
>1 t t tCS CCHT-CS
tStart &
>1 t
Operation=Aut & t tCh
t
&
-loop
tWait
t

15 ms &
CCHT-CR & t

&
CCHT-ALARM
CCHT-RESET
>1
&

tChOK
t

&
CCHT-CHOK
>1

99000187.vsd

Figure 194: Simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function

356
 Communication channel test logic (CCHT) Chapter 10
Logic

4.2.1 Selection of an operating mode

Selection of an operating mode, which determines the automatic (internal) or manual (external)
start is possible by setting the “Operation = Aut” and “Operation = Man” respectively, see figure
194. The automatic starting requires continuous presence of logical one on CCHT-START func-
tional input. Setting of the tStart timer determines the time intervals for the automatic starts log-
ic.

Any presence of the logical one signal on the CCHT-START functional input starts the function,
when in manual operating mode.

4.2.2 Operation at sending end

Manual or automatic start initiates the pulse, which is 15 ms longer than the time set on a tWait
timer. This pulse initiates the CCHT-CS functional output signal in duration as set on a tCS pulse
timer.The same pulse starts also the time measurement by the tWait timer. The CCHT-ALARM
output signal appears, if the CCHT-CR input does not become logical one within the time inter-
val, as set on the tWait timer. The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal is safeguarded by a 15 ms
timer, to prevent influence of the disturbances on a communication link.

The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal within the tWait time interval activates the
CCHT-CHOK output signal. It remains active for the period as set on the timer tChOK or until
the CCHT-ALARM appears at new start of a CCHT function.

The tCh timer, which is delayed on drop-off, prevents ringing of a complete system. It is possible
to reset the CCHT-ALARM output signal by activating the CCHT-RESET functional input.

4.2.3 Operation at receiving end

Activation of a CCHT-CR functional input activates instantaneously the CCHT-CS functional
output, if the timer tCh has not been activated or the function has not been blocked by the active
CCHT-BLOCK functional input. Duration of the CCHT-CR input signal must be longer than 15
ms to avoid operation at different disturbances on communication link.

357
 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) Chapter 10
Logic

5 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12)

5.1 Application
The binary signal transfer function is preferably used for sending communication scheme related
signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals required at the remote end. Up to 32 selectable
binary send signals, internal or external, and 32 selectable binary receive signals can be trans-
mitted.

Together with the binary signals internal to the terminal, the function is utilising binary inputs
and outputs. The function can be provided with various 56/64 kbit/s communication modules for
optical fibre or galvanic connection.

The communication can be done via direct galvanic communication line for shorter distances,
via dedicated optical fibres up to around 30 km and via a communication network for longer dis-
tances.

5.2 Design
The function Binary signal transfer to remote end consists of two function blocks, RTC1 and
RTC2, each handling 16 inputs (SEND01-16) and 16 outputs (REC01-16). Figure 195 shows
the signal diagram for RTC1. This diagram is also valid for RTC2 since the signal inputs and
outputs are the same.

A signal applied to an input of one function block, e.g. RTC1-SEND01, in one terminal will be
transmitted, via a data communication link, to a remote terminal and there appear at the corre-
sponding output of the corresponding function block, that is in the example RTC1-REC01. The
transmission takes 10 - 25 ms plus communication link delay. No additional security actions to
that included in the communication handling, that is CRC-check, checking length of telegram
and addressing, are incorporated.

Both function blocks have an input BLOCK, which is available to block the operation. When
the input is energized, all 16 binary input signals of that function block will be sent as zeroes.
Incoming signals from remote end are not affected.

An output COMFAIL is also available to announce an alarm when there is a failure in the com-
munication with the remote terminal. The COMFAIL for both function blocks works in parallel
so information will appear simultaneously on both function blocks. At COMFAIL all 16 output
signal on both function blocks will be set to zero.

358
Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) Chapter 10
Logic

RTCn-
RTC
BLOCK REC01
SEND01 REC02
SEND02 REC03
SEND03 REC04
SEND04 REC05
SEND05 REC06
SEND06 REC07
SEND07 REC08
SEND08 REC09
SEND09 REC10
SEND10 REC11
SEND11 REC12
SEND12 REC13
SEND13 REC14
SEND14 REC15
SEND15 REC16
SEND16 COMFAIL
RC01NAME
RC02NAME
RC03NAME
RC04NAME
RC05NAME
RC06NAME
RC07NAME
RC08NAME
RC09NAME
RC10NAME
RC11NAME
RC12NAME
RC13NAME
RC14NAME
RC15NAME
RC16NAME
SD01NAME
SD02NAME
SD03NAME
SD04NAME
SD05NAME
SD06NAME
SD07NAME
SD08NAME
SD09NAME
SD10NAME
SD11NAME
SD12NAME
SD13NAME
SD14NAME
SD15NAME
SD16NAME

xx00000224.vsd

Figure 195: Binary signal transfer to remote end RTC1, signal inputs and outputs

User defined names can be applied to the inputs and outputs.These identities are set from the
CAP configuration tool.

A service report provides information of the status of all function block outputs as well as inputs.
The status can be viewed on the local HMI. Refer to Technical reference manual for outputs and
path in local HMI.

359
 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC12) Chapter 10
Logic

5.2.1 Remote end data communication

The “Binary signal transfer to remote end” function uses the same communication functionality
and hardware for communication with remote end as used for the line differential function.
These items are described in the chapter “Data communication” in the application manual. The
settings that has to be made for these items are also described in each chapter respectively.

Status information of the Remote end data communication is available on the local HMI.

360
 Event function (EV) Chapter 10
Logic

6 Event function (EV)

6.1 Application
When using a Substation Automation system, events can be spontaneously sent or polled from
the terminal to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the termi-
nal that is connected to the event function block. The event function block can also handle dou-
ble indication, that is normally used to indicate positions of high-voltage apparatuses. With this
event function block, data also can be sent to other terminals over the interbay bus.

6.2 Functionality
The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The in-
ternal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels
are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event
masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new
events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an
overflow alarm appears.

The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status and events by the
station HMI on either every single input or double input. The user-defined name for each input
is intended to be used by the station HMI.

Twelve of the event function blocks are executed with fast cyclicity. That means that the
time-tagging resolution on the events that are emerging from internal logical signals, created
from configurable logic, is the same as the cyclicity of this logic. The time tagging resolution on
the events that are emerging from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal re-
started and Event buffer overflow.

6.3 Design
6.3.1 General
As basic, 12 event function blocks EV01-EV12 running with a fast cyclicity, are available in
REx 5xx. When the function Apparatus control is included in the terminal, additional 32 event
function blocks EV13-EV44, running with a slower cyclicity, are available.

Each event function block has 16 connectables corresponding to 16 inputs INPUT1 to

INPUT16. Every input can be given a name with up to 19 characters from the CAP configuration
tool.

The inputs can be used as individual events or can be defined as double indication events.

The inputs can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under the Mask-Event
function as:

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal

361
 Event function (EV) Chapter 10
Logic

• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal

• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal

Also an input PrColxx (xx=01-44) is available on the function block to define on which protocol
the events shall be sent.

The event function blocks EV01-EV06 have inputs for information numbers and function type,
which are used to define the events according to the communication standard IEC 60870-5-103.

6.3.2 Double indication

Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, for example, one
input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker or disconnector. The double
indication consists of an odd and an even input number. When the odd input is defined as a dou-
ble indication, the next even input is considered to be the other input. The odd inputs has a sup-
pression timer to suppress events at 00 states.

To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from the SMS under the
Mask-Event function as:

• Double indication
• Double indication with midposition suppression

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning.

These states of the inputs generate events. The status is read by the station HMI on the status
indication for the odd input:

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates a close event with the read status 1
• 10 generates an open event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

6.3.3 Communication between terminals

The BOUND and INTERVAL inputs are available on the event function block.

The BOUND input set to 1 means that the output value of the event block is bound to another
control terminal on the LON bus. The event function block is then used to send data over the
LON bus to other REx 5xx terminals. The most common use is to transfer interlocking informa-
tion between different bays. That can be performed by an event function block used as a send
block and with a Multiple Command function block used as a receive block. The document, see
section describes how to transfer the interlocking information. The configuration of the commu-
nication between control terminals is made by the LON Network Tool.

The INTERVAL input is applicable only when the BOUND input is set to 1. The INTERVAL
is intended to be used for cyclic sending of data to other control terminals via the LON bus with
the interval time as set. This cyclic sending of data is used as a backup of the event-driven send-
ing, which always is performed. With cyclic sending of data, the communication can be super-
vised by a corresponding INTERVAL input on the Multiple Command function block in another
control terminal connected to the LON bus. This INTERVAL input time is set a little bit longer
than the interval time set on the event function block. With INTERVAL=0, only event-driven
sending is performed.

362
 Event function (EV) Chapter 10
Logic

6.4 Calculations
The event reporting can be set from the PST as:

• Use event masks

• Report no events
• Report all events

Use of event masks is the normal reporting of events, that is, the events are reported as defined
in the database.

An event mask can be set individually for each available signal in the terminal. The setting of
the event mask can only be performed from the PST.

All event mask settings are treated commonly for all communication channels of the terminal.

Report no events means blocking of all events in the terminal.

Report all events means that all events, that are set to OnSet/OnReset/OnChange are reported as
OnChange, that is, both at set and reset of the signal. For double indications when the suppres-
sion time is set, the event ignores the timer and is reported directly. Masked events are still
masked.

Parameters to be set for the event function block are:

• T_SUPRyy including the suppression time for double indications.

• NAMEyy including the name for each input.
• PrColxx including the type of protocol for sending the events.
• INTERVAL used for the cyclic sending of data.
• BOUND telling that the block has connections to other terminals over the LON
bus.
• FuncTEVx (for EV01-EV06) including the function type for sending events via
IEC 60870-5-103.
• InfoNoyy (for EV01-EV06) including the information number for the events
sending via IEC 60870-5-103.

These parameters are set from the CAP configuration tool. When the BOUND parameter is set,
the settings of the event masks have no meaning.

363
 Event counter (CN) Chapter 10
Logic

7 Event counter (CN)

7.1 Application
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter
has been activated. It is also provided with a common blocking function for all six counters, to
be used for example at testing. Every counter can separately be set on or off by a parameter set-
ting.

7.2 Functionality
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters
respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input
respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter val-
ue is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take
place. At power interrupt the counter values are stored.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are
blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing.

All inputs are configured via configuration tool CAP.

7.2.1 Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for proce-
dure.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.

Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, for example
via SPA-communication.

7.3 Calculations
The parameters for the event counter function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

364
About this chapter Chapter 11
Monitoring

Chapter 11 Monitoring

About this chapter

This chapter describes the monitoring functions.

365
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

1 Disturbance report

1.1 Application
Use the disturbance report to provide the network operator with proper information about dis-
turbances in the primary network. Continuous collection of system data and, at occurrence of a
fault, storing of a certain amount of pre-fault, fault and post-fault data, contributes to the highest
possible quality of electrical supply. The stored data can be used for analysis and decision mak-
ing to find and eliminate possible system and equipment weaknesses.

The function comprises several sub functions enabling different users to access relevant infor-
mation in a structured way.

1.1.1 Requirement of trig condition for disturbance report

Disturbance reports, setting and internal events in REx 5xx are stored in a non volatile flash
memory. Flash memories are used in many embedded solutions for storing information due to
high reliability, high storage capacity, short storage time and small size.

In REx 5xx there is a potential failure problem, caused by too many write operations to the flash
memory.

Our experience shows that after storing more than fifty thousand disturbances, settings or inter-
nal events the flash memory exceeds its storing capacity and the component is finally defected.

When the failure occurs there is no risk of unwanted operation of the protection terminal due to
the self-supervision function that detects the failure. The terminal will give a signal for internal
fail and go into blocking mode.

The above limitation on the storage capacity of the flash memory gives the following recom-
mendation for the disturbance report trig condition:

• Cyclic trig condition more often then once/day not recommended.

• Minute pulse input is not used as a trig condition.
• Total number of stored disturbance reports shall not exceed fifty thousand.

1.2 Functionality
The disturbance report is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator with more
information about the disturbances in the system. Some of the facilities are basic and some are
optional in the different products. For some products not all facilities are available.

The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information

• Indications
• Event recorder
• Fault locator
• Trip values (phase values)
• Disturbance recorder

366
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

The whole disturbance report can contain information for up to 10 disturbances, each with the
data coming from all the parts mentioned above, depending on the options installed. All infor-
mation in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no
information is lost in case of loss-of-power supply

D is tu rb a n c e re p o rt

D is tu rb a n c e n o .1 D is tu rb a n c e n o .2 D is tu rb a n c e n o .1 0

G e n e ra l d is t. T rip E vent D is tu rb a n c e
In d ic a tio n
in fo rm a tio n v a lu e s re c o rd e r re c o rd e r
9 9 0 0 0 3 1 1 .v s d

Figure 196: Disturbance report structure

Up to 10 disturbances can always be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the

memory is full, the oldest disturbance is over-written by the new one. The nominal memory ca-
pacity for the disturbance recorder is measured with 10 analog and 48 binary signals recorded,
which means that in the case of long recording times, fewer than 10 disturbances are stored. If
fewer analog signals are recorded, a longer total recording time is available. This memory limit
does not affect the rest of the disturbance report.

1.2.1 Disturbance information

The indications, the fault locator result (when applicable), and the trip values are available on
the local HMI. For a complete disturbance report, front communication with a PC or remote
communication with SMS is required.

Disturbance overview is a summary of all the stored disturbances. The overview is available
only on a front-connected PC or via the Station Monitoring System (SMS). The overview con-
tains:

• Disturbance index
• Date and time
• Trip signals
• Trigger signal that activated the recording
• Distance to fault (requires Fault locator)
• Fault loop selected by the Fault locator (requires Fault locator)

Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the local human-machine interface (HMI).

Here the two latest disturbances (DisturbSummary 1, which is the latest and DisturbSummary 2
which is the second latest) are presented with:

367
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

• Date and time

• Selected indications (set with the Indication mask)
• Distance to fault and fault loop selected by the Fault locator

The date and time of the disturbance, the trigger signal, the indications, the fault locator result
and the trip values are available, provided that the corresponding functions are installed.

1.2.2 Indications
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the fault time of the disturbance. A part
(or all) of these signals are automatically scrolled on the local HMI after a disturbance.

1.2.3 Event recorder

The event recorder contains an event list with time-tagged events. In the Station Monitoring
System, this list is directly connected to a disturbance.

1.2.4 Fault locator

The fault locator contains information about the distance to the fault and about the measuring
loop that was selected for the calculation. After changing the system parameters in the terminal,
a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be made in the protection

1.2.5 Trip values

Trip values includes phasors of currents and voltages before the fault and during the fault

1.2.6 Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault.

1.2.7 Recording times

The disturbance report records information about a disturbance during a settable timeframe. The
recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder and the
event recorder register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
Indications are only registered during the fault time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost or tPre + tLim, depending on which criterion stops the current dis-
turbance recording

368
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

tLim

tPre tPost

1 2 3

xx00000316.vsd

Table 16: Definitions

1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting tPre to set this time.
2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by tLim the limit time).
3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all acti-
vated triggers are reset. Use the setting tPost to set this time.
tLim Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use
the setting tLim to set this time.

Figure 197: The recording times definition

1.2.8 Analog signals

Up to 10 analog signals (five voltages and five currents from the transformer module) can be
selected for recording and triggering if the disturbance recorder function is installed. If fewer
than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in the flash memories, regarding total
recording time are increased.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal.

For each of the 10 analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance
recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation
is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger condition. The same ap-
plies for the current signals.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the ab-
solute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the
threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater
than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately per-
formed for each channel.

369
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC
offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms
for a 50 Hz network.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire dis-
turbance report when being used as triggers.

1.2.9 Binary signals

Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where all available signals are
grouped under each function. The 48 signals can be selected from internal logical signals and
binary input signals. Each of the 48 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report.
It is also possible to set if the trigger should be activated on a logic 1 or a logic 0. A binary signal
can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal.

The selected 48 signals are presented in the event list and the disturbance recording. But they
affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.

The indications, that are to be automatically scrolled on the HMI when a disturbance has been
recorded are also selected from these 48 signals with the HMI Indication Mask.

1.2.10 Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report. As soon as a trigger condition is ful-
filled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is ful-
filled, there is no disturbance report, no calculation of distance to fault, no indications, and so
on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or
SMS. When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is espe-
cially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.

Binary trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger. The bi-
nary signal must remain in a steady state for at least 15 ms to be valid.

When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will
not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the distur-
bance recorder or not. But the disturbance recorder function must be installed in the terminal.

370
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

Retrigger
Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the postfault recording, for
instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty network. In order to capture the new fault it is
possible to allow retriggering during the PostFault recording.

1.3 Calculations
The parameters for the disturbance report function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

The settings include:

Operation Disturbance Report (On/Off)

ReTrig Re-trigger during post-fault state (On/Off)
SequenceNo Sequence number (0-255) (normally not necessary to set)
RecordingTimes Recording times for the Disturbance Report and the event/indication logging,
including pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time for the entire disturbance
BinarySignals Selection of binary signals, trigger conditions, HMI indication mask and HMI
red LED option
AnalogSignals Recording mask and trigger conditions
FaultLocator Distance measurement unit (km/miles/%)
km or miles selected under line reference

User-defined names of analog input signals can be set.

The user-defined names of binary signals can be set with the CAP configuration tool.

The analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names.

1.3.1 Settings during normal conditions

Table 17: How the settings affect different functions in the disturbance report
HMI Function Distur- Distur- Indica-ti Event Trip val- Fault
bance sum- bance ons list ues locator
Setting
mary (on recorder (SMS)
menu HMI)
Operation Operation (On/Off) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recording Recording times No Yes No Yes No No
times (tPre, tPost, tLim)

371
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

HMI Function Distur- Distur- Indica-ti Event Trip val- Fault

bance sum- bance ons list ues locator
Setting
mary (on recorder (SMS)
menu HMI)
Binary sig- Trigger operation and Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
nals trigger level
Indication mask (for Yes No No No No No
automatic scrolling)
Analog sig- Operation (On/Off) No Yes No No Yes Yes
nals
Trigger over/under Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
function
Fault Loca- Fault locator settings No No No No No Yes
tor (Distance Unit)

1.3.2 Operation
Operation can be set to On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered,
including indications, fault locator, event recorder, and disturbance recorder.

Operation = Off:

• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.
• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the local HMI.

Operation = On:

• Disturbances are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI and
from a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS).
• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.
• The disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two
latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

Post re-trigger can be set to On or Off

Postretrig = On:

Re-trigger during the set post-fault time is enabled.

Postretrig = Off:

Re-trigger during the set post fault time is not accepted.

1.3.3 Sequence number

Normally, this setting option is seldom used. Each disturbance is assigned a number in the dis-
turbance report. The first disturbance each day normally receives SequenceNo = 0. The value of
SequenceNo that can be read in the service report is the number that will be assigned to the next
disturbance registered during that day.

372
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

In normal use, the sequence number is increased by one for each new disturbance until it is reset
to zero each midnight.

1.3.4 Recording times

The different recording times for the disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault
time, and limit time). These recording times affect the disturbance recorder and event recorder
functions. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on which criterion stops the current
disturbance recording.

1.3.5 Binary signals

Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where all available signals are
grouped function by function. The 48 signals can be selected among internal logical signals and
binary input signals. Each selected signal is registered by the disturbance recorder, event record-
er, and indication functions during a recording. The CAP configuration tool is used to configure
the signals.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. This name can comprise up to 13
characters and is set with the CAP configuration tool.

For each of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a trigger for
the start of the disturbance report (TrigOperation), and if the trigger should be activated at a log-
ical 1 or 0 level (TrigLevel).

The indications in the disturbance summary, that are automatically scrolled on the HMI when a
disturbance is registered, are also selected from these 48 signals using the indication mask.

1.3.6 Analog signals

For each of the 10 analog signals (five voltages and five currents), Operation = On means that it
is recorded by the disturbance recorder. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum stor-
ing capacity in the flash memories for total recording time becomes longer.

Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger condition. The same applies for the
current signals. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation and triggers even if Op-
eration = Off.

A user-defined name for each of the analog input signals can be entered. It can consist of up to
13 characters and is a general setting valid for all relevant functions within the terminal.

1.3.7 Behavior during test mode

When the terminal is set to test mode, the behavior of the disturbance report can be controlled
by the test mode disturbance report settings Operation and DisturbSummary available on the lo-
cal HMI.

The impact of the settings are according to the following table:

373
 Disturbance report Chapter 11
Monitoring

Table 18: Disturbance report settings

Operation DisturbSum- Then the results are...
mary
Off Off • Disturbances are not stored.
• LED information is not displayed on the HMI and not stored.
• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the HMI.
Off On • Disturbances are not stored.
• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are displayed on the local
HMI but not stored in the terminal.
• Disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the
two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.
• The information is not stored in the terminal.
On On or Off • The disturbance report works as in normal mode.
• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a
front-connected PC, or SMS.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip)
is stored.
• The disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for
the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.
• All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the ter-
minal when changing back to normal mode.

374
 Indications Chapter 11
Monitoring

2 Indications

2.1 Application
The indications from all the 48 selected binary signals are shown on the local human-machine
interface (HMI) and on the Station Monitoring System (SMS) for each recorded disturbance in
the disturbance report. The LEDs on the front of the terminal display start and trip indications.

2.2 Functionality
The indications shown on the HMI and SMS give an overview of the status of the 48 event sig-
nals during the fault. The indications for each recorded disturbance are presented on the HMI.

All selected signals can be internally produced signals or emerge from binary input channels.

The indications are registered only during the fault time of a recorded disturbance, as long as
any trigger condition is activated. A part or all of these indications can be automatically scrolled
on the local HMI after a disturbance is recorded, until acknowledged with the C button on the
HMI. They are selected with the indication mask.

The signal name for internal logical signals presented on the screen follows the signal name,
which can be found in the signal list in each function description of the “Technical reference
manual”. Binary input signals are displayed with their user-defined names.

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:
• Steady light In Service
• Flashing light Internal fail, the INT--FAIL internal signal is high
• Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:
• Steady light A disturbance report is triggered
• Flashing light The terminal is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:
• Steady light Trig on binary signal with HMI red LED option set
• Flashing light The terminal is in configuration mode

375
 Indications Chapter 11
Monitoring

2.3 Calculations
The parameters for the disturbance report function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

376
 Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

3 Disturbance recorder (DR)

3.1 Application
Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power net-
work and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis
of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equip-
ment. This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.

The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is characterized by great flexibility
as far as starting conditions and recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus,
the disturbance recorders are not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and they
can record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or an-
other.

The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is fully adequate for the recording
of disturbances for the protected object.

Use available software tools to retrieve the recordings and the evaluation software REVAL to
analyze, evaluate and print recordings.

3.2 Functionality
Disturbance recording is based on the continuous collection of network data, analog values and
binary signals, in a cyclic buffer. The buffer operates according to the FIFO principle, old data
will be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is deter-
mined by the set pre-fault recording time.

(Store recording,active triggers must reset)

tLim
Pre-fault Fault
trig-on
(New recording started)
tPost or
tLim trig-off
(Store recording) (All triggers)
trig-on
(New recording started,
Store previous recording)

Post-fault
99000313.vsd

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the data storage continues in another part of the
memory. The storing goes on as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional
time. The length of this additional part is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the dis-
turbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole mem-
ory acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten.

377
 Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the terminal.

3.2.1 Recording Capacity

The recording function can record all analog inputs in the transformer module and up to 48 bi-
nary signals. To maximise the use of the memory, the number of analog channels to be recorded
is user-selectable by programming and can be set individually for each analog input. The record-
ed binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals created by the
functions.

3.2.2 Memory capacity

The maximum number of recordings stored in the memory is 10. So depending on the set record-
ing times and the recording of the enabled number of channels, the memory can contain a min-
imum of six and a maximum of 10 disturbance recordings comprising of both header part and
data part. But the header part for the last 10 recordings is always available.

3.2.3 Time tagging

The terminal has a built-in, real-time clock and calendar. This function is used for time tagging
of the recorded disturbances. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts
the disturbance recording.

3.2.4 Signal processing

The processing of analog signals is handled by a dedicated DSP (digital signal processor). Other
functions are implemented in the main CPU. The memory is shared with other functions.

The numerical signals coming from the A/D conversion module in serial form are converted to
parallel form in a dedicated DSP. The analog trigger conditions are also checked in the DSP.

A check of the start conditions is performed by searching for a maximum value. This is a positive
peak. The function also seeks a minimum value, which is the negative peak.

When this is found, the absolute average value is calculated. If this value is above the set thresh-
old level for the overfunction on the channel in question, an overfunction start on that channel
is indicated. The overfunction is indicated with a greater than (>) sign.

Similarly, if the average value is below the set threshold level for underfunction on the channel
in question, an underfunction start on that channel is indicated. The underfunction is indicated
with a less than (<) sign.

The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog
start conditions gives a function that is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operating time
for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms in a 50 Hz network.

The numerical data, along with the result of the trigger condition evaluation, are transmitted to
the main CPU. The main CPU handles these functions:

• Evaluation of the manual start condition

• Evaluation of the binary start condition, both for true binary input signals and for
internally created logical signals
• Storage of the numerical values for the analog channels

378
 Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The numerical data for the analog channels are stored in a cyclic pre-fault buffer in a RAM.
When a trigger is activated, the data storage is moved to another area in the RAM, where the
data for the fault and the subsequent post-fault period are stored. Thus, a complete disturbance
recording comprises the stored data for the pre-fault, fault, and post-fault period.

The RAM area for temporary storage of recorded data is divided into sub-areas, one for each
recording. The size of a subarea is governed by the sum of the set pre-fault (tPre) and maximum
post-trigger (tLim) time. There is a sufficient memory capacity for at least four consecutive re-
cordings with a maximum number of analog channels recorded and with maximum time set-
tings. Should no such area be free at the time of a new trigger, the oldest recording stored in the
RAM is overwritten.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Merging the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
stored in an event buffer
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording comprises the
stored and time-tagged disturbance data along with relevant data from the database for configu-
ration and parameter set-up.

Some parameters in the header of a recording are stored with the recording, and some are re-
trieved from the parameter database in connection with a disturbance. This means that if a pa-
rameter that is retrieved from the parameter database was changed between the time of recording
and retrieval, the collected information is not correct in all parts. For this reason, all recordings
should be transferred to the Station Monitoring System (SMS) workstation and then deleted in
the terminal before any such parameters are changed.

3.3 Design
The recordings can be divided into two parts, the header and the data part. The data part contains
the numerical values of recorded analog and binary channels. The header contains clearly writ-
ten basic information about the disturbance. A part of this information is also used by REVAL
to reproduce the analog and binary signals in a correct and user-friendly way. Such information
is primary and secondary instrument transformer ratings.

Table 19: Disturbance header

Parameter Parameter database Stored with distur-
ance
General
Station, object and ID x
Date and time x
Sequence number x
CT earthing x
Time synchronization source x

379
 Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Parameter Parameter database Stored with distur-

ance
Collection window parameters tPre, x
tPost, tLim
Prefault phase-to-phase voltage and x
current RMS values
Trig signal and test flag x
Analog signals
Signal name x
Primary and secondary instrument x
transformer rating
Undertrig: level and operation x
Overtrig: level and operation x
Undertrig status at time of trig x
Overtrig status at time of trig x
Instantaneous phase voltage at time of x
trig
Instantaneous phase current at time of x
trig
Phase voltage and phase current before x
trig (prefault)
Phase voltage and phase current after x
trig (fault)
Binary signals
Signal name x
Type of contact (trig level) x
Trig operation x
Signal status at time of trig x
Trig status at time of trig x

3.4 Calculations
The parameters specific for the disturbance recording function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and
path in local HMI.

The list of parameters in the “Technical reference manual”, explains the meaning of the abbre-
viations used in connection with setting ranges.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere in the menu tree are linked to the information
on a recording. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and PT ra-
tios.

380
Disturbance recorder (DR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The sequence number of the recordings is a specific parameter for the disturbance recorder and
is used to identify the different recordings. By combining the date and the sequence number for
a recording, the recording can be uniquely identified.

The read value on the local human-machine interface (HMI) display is the sequence number that
the next recorded disturbance receives. The number is automatically increased by one for each
new recording and is reset to zero at each midnight. The sequence number can also be set man-
ually.

381
 Event recorder (ER) Chapter 11
Monitoring

4 Event recorder (ER)

4.1 Application
When using a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS), an event list can be
available for each of the recorded disturbances in the disturbance report. Each list can contain
up to 150 time-tagged events. These events are logged during the total recording time, which de-
pends on the set recording times (pre-fault, post-fault and limit time) and the actual fault time.
During this time, the first 150 events for all the 48 selected binary signals are logged and time
tagged. This list is a useful instrument for evaluating a fault and is a complement to the distur-
bance recorder.

To obtain this event list, the event recorder function (basic in some terminals and optional in oth-
ers) must be installed.

4.2 Functionality
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the events are collected
by the main processing unit, from the 48 selected binary signals. The events can come from both
internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the
main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O
module. The events are collected during the total recording time, tRecording, and they are stored
in the disturbance report memory at the end of each recording.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event list is the user-defined name that
can be programmed in the terminal.

The time tagging of events emerging from internal logical signals and binary input channels has
a resolution of 1 ms.

4.3 Calculations
The parameters for the event recorder function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

The settings of the event recorder consist of the signal selection and the recording times. It is
possible to select up to 48 binary signals, either internal signals or signals coming from binary
input channels. These signals coincide with the binary signals recorded by the disturbance re-
corder. The disturbance summary indications that are to scroll automatically on the local hu-
man-machine interface (HMI), can only be selected from these 48 event channels.

Each of the up to 48 event channels can be selected from the signal list, consisting of all available
internal logical signals and all binary input channels.

For each of the binary input and output signals, a user-defined name can be programmed.

382
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

5 Fault locator (FLOC)

5.1 Application
The main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast, selective and reliable op-
eration for faults on a protected line section. Besides this, information on distance to fault is very
important for those involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the fault lo-
cation greatly decreases the downtime of the protected lines and increases the total availability
of a power system.

The distance to the fault, which is calculated with a high accuracy, is stored for the last ten re-
corded disturbances. This information can be read on the HMI or transferred via serial commu-
nication within the Station Monitoring System (SMS) or Station Control System (SCS).

The distance to fault can be recalculated for the latest 10 disturbances by using the measuring
algorithm for different fault loops or for changed system parameters.

5.2 Functionality
5.2.1 Distance-to-fault locator
The distance-to-fault locator (FLOC-) in the REx 5xx terminals is an essential complement to
different line protection functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
great accuracy. Thus, the fault can be quickly located for repairs.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and additional
fault resistance.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers
or miles as selected on the HMI.

The accuracy of measurement depends somewhat on the accuracy of the system parameters as
entered into REx 5xx (for example source impedances at both ends of the protected line). If some
parameters have actually changed in a significant manner relative to the set values, new values
can be entered locally or remotely and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be ordered.
In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.

In order to compensate for the influence of the zero-sequence mutual impedance Zm0 on the dis-
tance-to-fault calculation in case of faults on double circuit lines, the terminal has a special cur-
rent transformer input for the residual current from the parallel line.

Any start of the disturbance reporting unit also starts the operation of the FLOC- function. The
distance to the fault automatically appears on the local HMI, if the fault is also detected by the
phase selection elements within the terminal. The currents and voltages before and during the
fault are available via SCS/SMS. The terminal saves, in any other case, the pre-fault and fault
values of currents and voltages for a particular disturbance. At any time a calculation of the dis-
tance to fault for a selected fault loop can be initiated manually.

383
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The information on distance to fault automatically appears on the local HMI for the first fault
only, if more than one fault appears within a time shorter than 10 seconds. Automatic reclosing
on persistent faults enables this. In such a case the first set of data is more accurate than the sec-
ond set. The unit also stores the phasors of currents and voltages for the last faults. A calculation
can be initiated locally or remotely.

The percentage value is also binary coded, thus the distance to fault value can also be read on
binary outputs of the terminal.

Additional information is specified in symbols before the distance-to-fault figure:

* A non-compensated model was used for calculation

E Error, the fault was found outside the measuring range
> The fault is located beyond the line, in forward direction

Two signs can be combined, for example, *>

5.3 Measuring principle

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the
currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the calculated figure
will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the distance-to-fault locator in REx 5xx line-protection termi-
nals compensates for the effect of double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

5.4 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 198 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends
with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a distance F from terminal
A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A sin-
gle-line model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.

384
Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd

Figure 198: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends.

From figure 198 it is evident that:

U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + IF ⋅ R F
(Equation 228)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to
the fault,
IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
(Equation 229)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and
DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line
end A and the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

385
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

( 1 – p ) ⋅ Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 230)

In case of phase short circuits, the change in the line currents is used directly. For earth faults,
the better defined positive-sequence quantities, which eliminate the influence of the zero se-
quence currents of the network are used.

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + -------
- ⋅ RF
DA
(Equation 231)

Table 20: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
Fault type: UA IA IFA
L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- × Δ ( I L 1 A – I 0A )
2
L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA
3
--- × Δ ( I L2A – I 0A )
2

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA

3
--- × Δ ( I L3A – I0A )
2
L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2-N UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A
ΔIL 1L 2A

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A ΔIL2L3A

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

ΔIL3L1A

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 ⋅ Z1L
(Equation 232)

ΔI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the equa-
tions, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

386
Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

For double lines, the fault equation is:

I FA
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z 1L + -------- ⋅ RF + I 0P ⋅ Z 0M
DA
(Equation 233)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and
DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 – p ) ⋅ ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Equation 234)
2 ⋅ ZA + Z L + 2 ⋅ Z B

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ------------------------ + ----------------- ⋅ -------
3 ⋅ Z1L 3 ⋅ Z1L I 0A
(Equation 235)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation for
a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 231 or 234 is a function of p, the gen-
eral equation 233 can be written in the form:

2
p – p ⋅ K1 + K2 – K3 ⋅ RF = 0
(Equation 236)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------- + --------------------------- + 1
I A ⋅ ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 237)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- ⋅ ⎛⎝ --------------------------- + 1⎞⎠
IA ⋅ Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 238)

387
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

IFA ⎛ ZA + ZB
- ⋅ --------------------------- + 1⎞
K 3 = ---------------
I A ⋅ Z L ⎝ Z 1 + ZA DD ⎠
(Equation 239)

and:

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 235.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 236 applies to both single and parallel
lines.

Equation 236 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p – p ⋅ Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F ⋅ Re ( K 3 ) = 0
(Equation 240)

– p ⋅ Im ⋅ ( K1 ) + Im ⋅ ( K 2 ) – R F ⋅ Im ⋅ ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 241)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 241, and then
inserted to equation 240. According to equation 240, the relative distance to the fault is solved
as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 240 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A sim-
plified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure for the relative distance to
the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a less
accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to the
fault.

5.5 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:

U A = p ⋅ Z 1 L ⋅ IA + R F ⋅ IA
(Equation 242)

Where:
IA is according to table 20.

388
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance model,
is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load compensated
models do not function and the display indicates whether the non-compensated model was used
when calculating the distance to the fault.

5.6 Design
When calculating the distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are
filtered from disturbance data stored in digital sample buffers.

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the fault locator function starts to calculate
the frequency of the analog channel U1. If the calculation fails, a default frequency is read from
the database to ensure further execution of the function.

Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking the non-periodic changes.
The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and U5.

If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation
of the complex values of currents and voltages. The estimation uses samples during one period
before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault val-
ues.

If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values starts 1.5 period before
the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are cal-
culated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples
after the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on the shape of the sig-
nals.

The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of
pre-fault trip values.

The phase selectors from the distance protection function provide the necessary information for
the selection of the loop to be used for the calculation. The following loops are used for different
types of faults:

• for 3 phase faults: loop L1 - L2.

• for 2 phase faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for 2 phase to earth faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for phase to earth faults: the phase to earth loop.

5.7 Calculations
The parameters for the fault locator function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting
Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

The list of parameters (see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual) explains
the meaning of the abbreviations. Figure 199 also presents these system parameters graphically.
Note, that all impedance values relate to their secondary values and to the total length of the pro-
tected line. The conversion procedure follows the same rules as for the distance-protection func-
tion.

389
 Fault locator (FLOC) Chapter 11
Monitoring

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L en01000131.vsd

Figure 199: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of the
fault location-measuring function.

For a single-circuit line, the figures for mutual zero-sequence impedance (X0M, R0M) are set at
zero.

The source impedance is not constant in the network. However, this has a negligible influence
on the accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, because only the phase angle of the distri-
bution factor has an influence on the accuracy. The phase angle of the distribution factor is nor-
mally very low and practically constant, because it is dominated by the positive-sequence line
impedance, which has an angle close to 90°. Always set the source impedance resistance to val-
ues other than zero. If the actual values are not known, the values that correspond to the source
impedance characteristic angle of 85° give satisfactory results.

390
 Trip value recorder (TVR) Chapter 11
Monitoring

6 Trip value recorder (TVR)

6.1 Application
The main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast, selective and reliable op-
eration for faults on a protected object. Besides this, information on the values of the currents
and voltages before and during the fault is valuable to understand the severity of the fault.

The trip value recorder in the REx 5xx series of terminals provides this information on the HMI
and via SCS/SMS. The function is an optional software module in the terminal.

The function calculates the pre-fault and fault values of currents and voltages and presents them
as phasors with amplitude and argument.

6.2 Design
Pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are filtered from disturbance data stored in
digital sample buffers.

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the trip value recorder function starts to cal-
culate the frequency of the analog channel U1. If the calculation fails, a default frequency is read
from database to ensure further execution of the function.

Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking the non-periodic changes.
The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and U5.

If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation
of the complex values of currents and voltages. The estimation uses samples during one period
before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault val-
ues.

If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the prefault values starts 1.5 period before
the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The postfault values are calcu-
lated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples af-
ter the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on the shape of the
signals.

The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation of
pre-fault trip values.

6.3 Calculations
The parameters for the trip value recorder function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter
Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local
HMI.

Customer specific names for all the ten analog inputs (five currents and five voltages) can be
entered. Each name can have up to 13 alphanumeric characters. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

391
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

7 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA)

7.1 Application
Fast, reliable supervision of different analog quantities is of vital importance during the normal
operation of a power system.

Operators in the control centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltage and frequency

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Current and voltage instru-
ment transformers provide the basic information on measured phase currents and voltages in dif-
ferent points within the power system. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input
measuring quantities to power and energy meters, protective devices and so on.

Further processing of this information occurs within different control, protection, and monitor-
ing terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in the secondary power system.

7.2 Functionality
The REx 5xx protection, control, and monitoring terminals have as basic the functionality to
measure and further process information about up to five input currents and five input voltages.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of terminal and
built-in options. Additional information is also available:

• Mean values of measured currents I in the first three current measuring channels
(I1, I2, I3).
• Mean values of measured voltages U in the first three voltage measuring channels
(U1, U2, U3).
• Three-phase active power P as measured by the first three current measuring
channels (I1, I2, I3) and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3).
• Three-phase reactive power Q as measured by the first three current measuring
channels (I1, I2, I3) and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3).
• Three-phase apparent power S as measured by the first three current (I1, I2, I3)
and the first three voltage measuring channels (U1, U2, U3).
• Frequency f.

The accuracy of measurement depends on the requirements. Basic accuracy satisfies the operat-
ing (information) needs. An additional calibration of measuring channels is necessary and must
be ordered separately when the requirements on accuracy of the measurement are higher. Refer
to the technical data and ordering particulars for the particular terminal.

The information on measured quantities is then available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI) unit.

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC).
• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)

392
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS).

7.2.1 User-defined measuring ranges

Each measuring channel has an independent measuring range from the others. This allows the
users to select the most suitable measuring range for each measuring quantity on each monitored
object of the power system. This gives a possibility to optimize the functionality of the power
system.

7.2.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel by means of four built-in
operating thresholds, figure 200. The monitoring has two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm

pre-set values.
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the LowWarn or
LowAlarm pre-set values.

HIALARM = 1
HiAlarm
HIALARM = 0

HIWARN = 1 Hysteresis
HiWarn
HIWARN = 0

t
LOWWARN = 0
LowWarn
LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 0
LowAlarm
LOWALARM = 1

99000507.vsd

Figure 200: Presentation of the operating limits.

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• HIWARN
• HIALARM
• LOWWARN
• LOWALARM

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 200.

393
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference between the operating and reset
value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hyster-
esis is common for all operating values within one channel.

7.2.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each channel separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels de-
pends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting.
• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel.
• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series.
• Dead-band reporting.

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS).

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS).

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger
than the ± ΔY predefined limits that are set by user, then the measuring channel reports the new
value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measuring sample. This limits the information
flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 201 shows an example of periodic reporting with the am-
plitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one second from each others.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 ΔY
ΔY
Y2 ΔY
ΔY
ΔY
ΔY
Y1

99000529.vsd

Figure 201: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

394
Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

After the new value is reported, the ± ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.
The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ± ΔY
set limits.

Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit, figure
202, where an example of reporting with integrating dead-band supervision is shown. The pic-
ture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval
of one second from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 202 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A dif-
ference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value during new sample
and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products
are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and
set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

Figure 202: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision.

Periodic reporting
The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervals between 1 and
3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value even if it has not changed for more than the set
limits of amplitude or integrating dead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the
reporting time interval to 0 s, figure 203.

395
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Y
Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
(*)Set value for t: RepInt 99000528.vsd

Figure 203: Periodic reporting.

Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired or

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision function.

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting
can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

396
Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Value
Y Value Reported Value Reported Value
Reported
Reported
Value Reported Value Reported Value
(1st) Reported
ΔY
ΔY Value Reported
ΔY ΔY
ΔY ΔY
ΔY
Y1 ΔY

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
99000531.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 204: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel.

Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision. This means that the new
value is reported only if the set time period expired and if the dead-band limit was exceeded dur-
ing the observed time, figure 205 and figure 206. The amplitude dead-band and the integrating
dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and
3600 seconds.

397
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Y Value not Value not

Value Reported Reported Reported
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported
ΔY
Y2
ΔY

ΔY
ΔY
Y1
Y3

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
99000508.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 205: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series.

A1 + A2 >= pre-
A1 < set value
pre-set value
Value not
Y Reported Value
Value Reported Reported
(1st)

A1 A2
Y1
Y2

t (*) t (*)
Value 1

t
Value 2

Value 3

99000509.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 206: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

398
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for the dead-band and for the pe-
riodic reporting. Table 21 presents the dependence between different settings and the type of re-
porting for the new value of a measured quantity.

Table 21: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnDeadB* EnIDeadB* EnDeadBP* RepInt* Reporting of the new value
Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported.
Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the
time t period expired and if, during this time, the
integrating dead-band limits were exceeded
(periodic reporting with integrating dead-band
supervision in series).
On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the
time t period has expired and if, during this
time, the amplitude dead-band limits were
exceeded (periodic reporting with amplitude
dead-band supervision in series).
On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the
time t period expired and if at least one of the
dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic
reporting with dead-band supervision in series).
Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when
the integrated dead-band limits are exceeded.
On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when
the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded.
On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one
of the dead-band limits was exceeded.
x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least
after the time t period expired. If the dead-band
supervision is additionally selected, the updat-
ing also occurs when the corresponding
dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic report-
ing with parallel dead-band supervision).
* Please see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual for further explanation

7.3 Design
The design of the alternating quantities measuring function follows the design of all REx 5xx-se-
ries protection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributed functionality, where the
decision levels are placed as closely as possible to the process.

The measuring function uses the same input current and voltage signals as other protection and
monitoring functions within the terminals. The number of input current and voltage transformers
depends on the type of terminal and options included. The maximum possible configuration
comprises five current and five voltage input channels.

Measured input currents and voltages are first filtered in analog filters and then converted to nu-
merical information by an A/D converter, which operates with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

399
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The numerical information on measured currents and voltages continues over a serial link to one
of the built-in digital signal processors (DSP). An additional Fourier filter numerically filters the
received information, and the DSP calculates the corresponding values for the following quan-
tities:

SCS
5I
HMI
A DSP PROCESSING
D SMS
5U LOGIC
CALIBRATION

99000510.vsd

Figure 207: Simplified diagram for the function

This information is available to the user for operational purposes.

7.4 Calculations
The parameters for the monitoring of AC analog measurements function are set via the local
HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting pa-
rameters and path in local HMI.

The user can determine the rated parameters for the terminal.

• Rated frequency fr
• Position of the earthing point of the main CTs (CTEarth), which determines
whether the CT earthing point is towards the protected object or the busbar

The other basic terminal parameters, related to any single analog input, can be set under the con-
figuration menu.

The user can determine the base values, the primary CTs and VTs ratios, and the user-defined
names for the analog inputs of the terminal.

U1:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U1: U1b

• voltage transformer input U1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U1Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U1: Name

U2:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U2: U2b

400
Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

• voltage transformer input U2 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U2Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U2: Name

U3:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U3: U3b

• voltage transformer input U3 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U3Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U3: Name

U4:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U4: U4b

• voltage transformer input U4 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U4Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U4: Name

U5:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U5: U5b

• voltage transformer input U5 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U5Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U5: Name

I1:

• ac current base value for analog input I1: I1b

• current transformer input I1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I1Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I1: Name

I2:

• ac current base value for analog input I2: I2b

• current transformer input I2 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I2Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I2: Name

I3:

• ac current base value for analog input I3: I3b

• current transformer input I3 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I3Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I3: Name

I4:

• ac current base value for analog input I4: I4b

• current transformer input I4 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I4Scale
• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I4: Name

I5:

• ac current base value for analog input I5: I5b

401
 Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

• current transformer input I5 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I5Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I5: Name

U:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the average voltage U: Name

I:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the average current I: Name

P:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the active power P: Name

Q:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the reactive power Q: Name

S:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the apparent power S: Name

f:

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the frequency value f: Name

The names of the first 10 quantities automatically appears in the REVAL evaluation program
for each reported disturbance.

The PST Parameter Setting Tool has to be used in order to set all remaining parameters that are
related to different alternating measuring quantities.

In the settings menu it is possible to set all monitoring operating values and the hysteresis direct-
ly in the basic units of the measured quantities for each channel and for each quantity.

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the corresponding units of the observed quantity for
the:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS)

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

The IDBS area is defined by the following formula:

IDeadB
IDBS = ----------------------------- = IDe adB ⋅ ts
ReadFreq
(Equation 243)

Where:

402
Supervision of AC input quantities (DA) Chapter 11
Monitoring

IDeadB is a set operating value for IDBS in corresponding unit.

ReadFreq is the reading frequency. It has a constant value of 1Hz.
ts = 1/ReadFreq is the time between two samples (fixed to 1s).

The setting value for IDBS is IDeadB, and is expressed in the measuring unit of the monitored
quantity (kV, A, MW, Mvar, MVA or Hz). The value is reported if the time integral area is great-
er than the value IDBS.

If a 0.1 Hz variation in the frequency for 10 minutes (600 s) is the event that should cause the
reporting of the frequency monitored value, than the set value for IDeadB is 60 Hz.

The hysteresis can be set under the setting Hysteres.

Alarm and warning thresholds have to be set respectively under the settings HiAlarm (Low-
Alarm) and HiWarn (LowWarn).

Note!
It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband in an optimized way to min-
imize the load on the station bus.

403
 Increased accuray of AC input quantities Chapter 11
(IMA) Monitoring

8 Increased accuray of AC input quantities (IMA)

8.1 Application
Select the increased accuracy option to increase the measuring accuracy of analog input chan-
nels, thus also increasing the accuracy of calculated quantities such as frequency, active and re-
active power.

8.2 Functionality
The increased accuracy is reached by a factory calibration of the hardware. Calibration factors
are stored in the terminal. If the transformer input module, A/D conversion module or the main
processing module is replaced, the terminal must be factory calibrated again to retain the in-
creased accuracy.

404
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

9 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI)

9.1 Application
Fast, reliable supervision of different analog quantities is of vital importance during the normal
operation of a power system. Operators in the control centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltages
• Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors
• Monitor the gas pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Current and voltage instru-
ment transformers provide the basic information on measured phase currents and voltages in dif-
ferent points within the power system. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input
measuring quantities to power and energy meters.

Different measuring transducers provide information on electrical and non-electrical measuring

quantities such as voltage, current, temperature, and pressure. In most cases, the measuring
transducers change the values of the measured quantities into the direct current. The current val-
ue usually changes within the specified mA range in proportion to the value of the measured
quantity.

Further processing of the direct currents obtained on the outputs of different measuring convert-
ers occurs within different control, protection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher
hierarchical systems in the secondary power system.

9.2 Functionality
The REx 5xx control, protection and monitoring terminal have a built-in option to measure and
further process information from 6 up to 36 different direct current information from different
measuring transducers. Six independent measuring channels are located on each independent
mA input module and the REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to six independent mA in-
put modules, depending on the case size. Refer to the technical data and ordering particulars for
the particular terminal.

Information about the measured quantities is then available to the user on different locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine-interface (HMI)

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)
• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)
• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

9.2.1 User-defined measuring ranges

The measuring range of different direct current measuring channels is settable by the user inde-
pendent on each other within the range between -25 mA and +25 mA in steps of 0.01 mA. It is
only necessary to select the upper operating limit I_Max higher than the lower one I_Min.

405
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

The measuring channel can have a value of 2 of the whole range I_Max - I_Min above the upper
limit I_Max or below the lower limit I_Min, before an out-of-range error occurs. This means that
with a nominal range of 0-10 mA, no out-of-range event will occur with a value between -0.2
mA and 10.2 mA.

User can this way select for each measuring quantity on each monitored object of a power sys-
tem the most suitable measuring range and this way optimize a complete functionality together
with the characteristics of the used measuring transducer.

9.2.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

The user can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel by means of six
built-in operating limits, figure 208. Two of them are defined by the operating range selection:
I_Max as the upper and I_Min as the lower operating limit. The other four operating limits op-
erate in two different modes:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm

pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the LowWarn or
LowAlarm pre-set values

RMAXAL = 1
I_Max

HIALARM = 1 RMAXAL = 0
HiAlarm
HIALARM = 0

HIWARN = 1 Hysteresis
HiWarn
HIWARN = 0

t
LOWWARN = 0
LowWarn
LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 0
LowAlarm
LOWALARM = 1

RMINAL = 1
I_Min
RMINAL = 0 99000532.vsd

Figure 208: Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• RMAXAL
• HIWARN
• HIALARM

406
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

• LOWWARN
• LOWALARM
• RMINAL

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 208.

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference between the operating and reset
value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hyster-
esis is common for all operating values within one channel.

9.2.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each channel separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels (con-
trol processor in the unit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting
• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel
• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series
• Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS).

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS).

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value —compared to the last reported value— is larger than the ± ΔY predefined
limits that are set by users, and if this is detected by a new measuring sample, then the measuring
channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 209 shows an example of periodic reporting with the amplitude dead-band su-
pervision.

The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated at time in-
tervals depending on the sampling frequency chosen by the user (SampRate setting).

After the new value is reported, the new ± ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the
new ± ΔY set limits.

407
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 ΔY
ΔY
Y2 ΔY
ΔY
ΔY
ΔY
Y1

99000529.vsd

Figure 209: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit figure
210, where an example of reporting with integrating dead-band supervision is shown. The pic-
ture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated at time intervals de-
pending on the sampling frequency chosen by the user (SampRate setting).

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 210 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A dif-
ference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value during new sample
and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products
are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and
set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with low
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

408
Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

Figure 210: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting
The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time intervals between 1 and
3600 s (setting RepInt). The measuring channel reports the value even if it has not changed for
more than the set limits of amplitude or integrating dead-band supervision, figure 211. To dis-
able periodic reporting, set the reporting time interval to 0 s.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: RepInt 99000528.vsd

Figure 211: Periodic reporting

409
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR;
• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision function.

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting
can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

Value
Y Value Reported Value Reported Value
Reported
Reported
Value Reported Value Reported Value
(1st) Reported
ΔY
ΔY Value Reported
ΔY ΔY
ΔY ΔY
ΔY
Y1 ΔY

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
99000531.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 212: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel.

Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision. This means that the new
value is reported only if the set time period expired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded
during the observed time figure 213 and figure 214. The amplitude dead-band and the integrat-
ing dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and
3600 seconds.

410
Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Y Value not Value not

Value Reported Reported Reported
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported
ΔY
Y2
ΔY

ΔY
ΔY
Y1
Y3

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
99000508.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 213: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

A1 + A2 >= pre-
A1 < set value
pre-set value
Value not
Y Reported Value
Value Reported Reported
(1st)

A1 A2
Y1
Y2

t (*) t (*)
Value 1

t
Value 2

Value 3

99000509.vsd

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

Figure 214: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

411
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for the dead-band and for the pe-
riodic reporting. Table 22 presents the dependence between different settings and the type of re-
porting for the new value of a measured quantity.

Table 22: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnDeadB * EnIDeadB * EnDeadBP * RepInt * Reporting of the new value
Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported
Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if
the time t period expired and if, during this
time, the integrating dead-band limits were
exceeded (periodic reporting with integrat-
ing dead-band supervision in series)
On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if
the time t period has expired and if, during
this time, the amplitude dead-band limits
were exceeded (periodic reporting with
amplitude dead-band supervision in series)
On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if
the time t period expired and if at least one of
the dead-band limits were exceeded (peri-
odic reporting with dead-band supervision in
series)
Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only
when the integrated dead-band limits are
exceeded
On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only
when the amplitude dead-band limits were
exceeded
On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if
one of the dead-band limits was exceeded
x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least
after the time t period expired. If the
dead-band supervision is additionally
selected, the updating also occurs when the
corresponding dead-band limit was
exceeded (periodic reporting with parallel
dead-band supervision)
* Please see the setting parameters in the Technical reference manual for further explanation

9.3 Design
The design of the mA input modules follows the design of all REx 5xx-series protection, control,
and monitoring terminals that have distributed functionality, where the decision levels are
placed as closely as possible to the process.

Each independent measuring module contains all necessary circuitry and functionality for mea-
surement of six independent measuring quantities related to the corresponding measured direct
currents.

412
Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

On the accurate input shunt resistor (R), the direct input current (from the measuring converter)
is converted into a proportional voltage signal (the voltage drop across the shunt resistor is in
proportion to the measured current). Later, the voltage signal is processed within one differential
type of measuring channel figure 215.

REx 5xx Terminal

Measuring A
Converter I R U D

DC
Udc
DC

99000533.vsd

Figure 215: Simplified diagram for the function

The measured voltage is filtered by the low-pass analog filter before entering the analog to dig-
ital converter (A/D). Users can set the sampling frequency of the A/D converter between 5 Hz
and 255 Hz to adapt to different application requirements as best as possible.

The digital information is filtered by the digital low-pass filter with the (sinx/x)3 response. The
filter notch frequency automatically follows the selected sampling frequency. The relation be-
tween the frequency corresponding to the suppression of -3 dB and the filter notch frequency
corresponds to the equation:

f –3dB = 0, 262 ⋅ fnotch

(Equation 244)

Using optocouplers and DC/DC conversion elements that are used separately for each measur-
ing channel, the input circuitry of each measuring channel is galvanically separated from:

• The internal measuring circuits

• The control microprocessor on the board

A microprocessor collects the digitized information from each measuring channel. The micro-
processor serves as a communication interface to the main processing module (MPM).

All processing of the measured signal is performed on the module so that only the minimum
amount of information is necessary to be transmitted to and from the MPM. The measuring mod-
ule receives information from the MPM on setting and the command parameters; it reports the
measured values and additional information—according to needs and values of different param-
eters.

413
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Each measuring channel is calibrated very accurately during the production process. The con-
tinuous internal zero offset and full-scale calibration during the normal operation is performed
by the A/D converter. The calibration covers almost all analog parts of the A/D conversion, but
neglects the shunt resistance.

Each measuring channel has built in a zero-value supervision, which greatly rejects the noise
generated by the measuring transducers and other external equipment. The value of the mea-
sured input current is reported equal to zero (0) if the measured primary quantity does not exceed
± 0.5% of the maximum measuring range.

The complete measuring module is equipped with advanced self-supervision. Only the outer-
most analog circuits cannot be monitored. The A/D converter, optocouplers, digital circuitry,
and DC/DC converters, are all supervised on the module. Over the CAN bus, the measuring
module sends a message to the MPM for any detected errors on the supervised circuitry.

9.4 Calculations
The PST Parameter Setting Tool has to be used in order to set all the parameters that are related
to different DC analog quantities.

Users can set the 13 character name for each measuring channel.

All the monitoring operating values and the hysteresis can be set directly in the mA of the mea-
sured input currents from the measuring transducers.

The measured quantities can be displayed locally and/or remotely according to the correspond-
ing modules that are separately set for each measuring channel by the users (five characters).

The relation between the measured quantity in the power system and the setting range of the di-
rect current measuring channel corresponds to this equation:

ValueMax – ValueMin
Valu e = ValueMin + ( I – IMin ) ⋅ --------------------------------------------------------------
IMax – IMin
(Equation 245)

Where:

I_Min is the set value for the minimum operating current of a channel in mA.
I_Max is the set value for the maximum operating current of a channel in mA.
ValueMin is the value of the primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of minimum
operating current of a channel, I_Min.
ValueMax is the value of the primary measuring quantity corresponding to the set value of maximum
operating current of a channel, I_Max.
Value is the actual value of the primary measured quantity.

Figure 216 shows the relationship between the direct mA current I and the actual value of the
primary measured quantity, Value.

414
Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

Value

ValueMax

ValueMin IMax - ValueMax IMin

IMax - IMin

IMin

IMax I

ValueMin

99000534.vsd

Figure 216: Relationship between the direct current (I) and the measured quantity primary val-
ue (Value)

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the mA of the input direct current for:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision ADBS

• Integrating dead-band supervision IDBS

The IDBS area [mAs] is defined by the following equation:

I DeadB
IDBS = ------------------------------ = IDeadB ⋅ t s
SampRate

(Equation 246)

415
 Supervision of mA input quantities (MI) Chapter 11
Monitoring

where:
IDeadB is the set value of the current level for IDBS in mA.
SampRate is the sampling rate (frequency) set value, in Hz.
ts = 1/SampRate is the time between two samples in s.

If a 0.1 mA variation in the monitored quantity for 10 minutes (600 s) is the event that should
cause the trigger of the IDBS monitoring (reporting of the value because of IDBS threshold op-
eration) and the sampling frequency (SampRate) of the monitored quantity is 5 Hz, than the set
value for IDBS (IDeadB) will be 300 mA:

IDBS = 0.1 ⋅ 600 = 60 [ mA s ]

(Equation 247)

IDeadB = IDBS ⋅ SampRate = 60 ⋅ 5 = 300 [ mA ]

(Equation 248)

The polarity of connected direct current input signal can be changed by setting the ChSign to On
or Off. This way it is possible to compensate by setting the possible wrong connection of the
direct current leads between the measuring converter and the input terminals of the REx 5xx se-
ries unit.

The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanation.

Note!
It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband in an optimized way to min-
imize the load on the station bus.

416
About this chapter Chapter 12
Metering

Chapter 12 Metering

About this chapter

This chapter describes the metering functions.

417
 Pulse counter logic for metering (PC) Chapter 12
Metering

1 Pulse counter logic for metering (PC)

1.1 Application
The pulse counter function provides the Substation Automation system with the number of puls-
es, which have been accumulated in the REx 5xx terminal during a defined period of time, for
calculation of, for example, energy values. The pulses are captured on the Binary Input Module
(BIM) that is read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in the counter is then re-
ported via LON to the station HMI or read via SPA as a service value.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWh and kvarh in both di-
rections from external energy meters. Up to 12 binary inputs in a REx 5xx can be used for this
purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz.

1.2 Functionality
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input
channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are read from the sta-
tion HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset, and an event is created.

The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is syn-
chronised with absolute system time. That means, a cycle time of one minute will generate a
pulse counter reading every full minute. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be
done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also
be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI).

The pulse counter in REx 5xx supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only
positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a
32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialisation of the
terminal or by turning the pulse counter operation parameter Off/On.

The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse
Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse
counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and ac-
tivates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event
function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the
time when the value was frozen by the function.

418
 Pulse counter logic for metering (PC) Chapter 12
Metering

1.3 Design
The function can be regarded as a function block with a few inputs and outputs. The inputs are
divided into two groups: settings and connectables (configuration). The outputs are divided into
three groups: signals (binary), service value for SPA, and an event for LON.

Figure 217 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT TIMIT_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BIx BIM_CONN
"PCxx-name" NAME

Database
SMS settings Pulse counter value:
1.Operation = Off/On 0...2147483647
2.Cycle time = 30s...60min
3.Analog Event Mask = No/Report
LON analog event data msg
( M_PC_T)
*Identity
*Value
*Time
*Pulse Counter Quality

xx00000543.vsd

Figure 217: Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and TMIT_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are
intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to TMIT_VAL per-
forms one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 sec-
ond.

The BIM_CONN input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input
Module (BIM). If BIM_CONN is connected to another function block, the INVALID signal is
activated to indicate the configuration error.

The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 19 characters.

Each pulse counter function block has four output signals: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED,
and NEW_VAL. These signals can be connected to an Event function block for event recording.

419
 Pulse counter logic for metering (PC) Chapter 12
Metering

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse
counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after terminal start-up, in the first mes-
sage after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since
last report.

1.4 Calculations
1.4.1 Setting
From the PST Parameter Setting Tool under SETTINGS/PC01-12 (Pulse Counter) in the termi-
nal tree, these parameters can be set individually for each pulse counter:

• Operation = Off/On
• Cycle Time = 30s / 1min / 1min30s / 2min / 2min30s / 3min / 4min / 5min / 6min
/ 7min30s / 10min / 12min / 15min / 20min / 30min / 60min.

Under EVENT MASKS/Analogue events/Pulse Counter in PST, the reporting of the analogue
events can be masked:

• Event Mask = No Events/Report Events

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter function block is made with the
CAP configuration tool.

On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms, that is, the counter
suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms. The input oscillation blocking frequency is
preset to 40 Hz. That means that the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is
greater than 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. From the PST under CON-
FIGURATION/Binary I/O-modules/Oscillation in the terminal tree and from the local HMI, the
values for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed.

Note!
The setting is common for all channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, if changes of the limits
are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the setting also influences the inputs on
the same board used for pulse counting.

420
About this chapter Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Chapter 13 System protection

and control
functions

About this chapter

This chapter describes the system protection and control functions.

421
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

1 Pole Slip Protection (PSP)

1.1 Application
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large jumps in load, fault occurrence or fault
clearance, which disturb the balance of energy in the system, can cause oscillations of mechan-
ical masses referred to as power swings. In a recoverable situation the oscillations will decay and
stable operation will be resumed; in a non-recoverable situation the power swings become so se-
vere that the synchronism is lost between the generators of the system, a condition referred to as
pole slipping. In the case of pole slipping, the excitation of the machines is generally intact, but
there are strong oscillations of real and reactive power.

Even though the modern power systems are designed and operate with high degree of security
against power swings and even more against pole slipping, these two phenomena may occur es-
pecially during abnormal system conditions.

If the pole slipping condition is allowed to persists in smaller parts of a power system than other
machines may follow and the stability of a system as a whole is in danger. Apart from the elec-
trical phenomena, oscillations of mechanical masses also expose the generators and other equip-
ment to considerable pulsating mechanical stresses.

Available technology and the costs of the corresponding protection devices dictated in the past
the use of the pole slip protection relays only close to the power generators. They were for this
reason treated as a part of a generator protection scheme. Their use deeper in the network was
not so common. Such approach resulted often in unselective splits of already troubled power
systems, which have lost some valuable generating capacities.

Modern, functional library oriented approach within the microprocessor based protection termi-
nals makes it possible to utilize the pole slip protection function more often and deeper in the
power network. This way it enables better selectivity of the pole slip protection and intact power
generation in different islands. A separate pole slip protection function still remains as a dedi-
cated generator protection in the vicinity of synchronous machines, to protect them against the
oscillations which could harm in great extent their functionality

The Pole Slip Protection (PSP) function as built in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring
terminals, and described in this document comprises all functionality necessary for the detec-
tion, evaluation and corresponding reaction on the pole slipping phenomena in power systems.
It is applicable together with different line protection functions (distance protection, line differ-
ential protection) deeper in the power network as well as a part of a generator protection system
in power plants.

1.1.1 Oscillations of mechanical masses in power system

Figure 218 presents a two machine system with a power line between busbars A and B. The elec-
tromotive forces EA and EB can differ in their magnitude. It is important, that their relative phase
angle

δ = δA – δB
(Equation 249)

422
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

changes with time. The voltage difference

UD = E A – EB
(Equation 250)

changes in its magnitude and direction and causes this way the current between both generators
to change accordingly.

EA EB

δA= const δB= f(t)

A B
ZSA ZSB
ZL
~ ~
R
99001019.vsd

Figure 218: Two machine system.

Figure 219 presents an example of the voltage and current measured in one phase of a line be-
tween two generators during the oscillations caused by the changing of the relative angle δ. The
minimum value of current corresponds to the minimum angle between the electromotive forces.
The maximum value of the current corresponds to the condition when the voltages

EA
(Equation 251)

and

EB
(Equation 252)

have the opposite direction.

423
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

100
100

50

30 .iL1

e AL1 ( t ) 0.9 0.95 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.45 1.5 1.55 1.6 1.65 1.7

50

100 100
99001020.vsd
0.9 t 1.75

Figure 219: Current (solid line) and voltage (dashed line) in relay point during the pole slip
condition.

Oscillations in measured voltage and current reflect naturally also in impedance, measured by
the impedance (distance) relays.

Figure 220 a) and 220 b) present two examples of the impedance trajectories in impedance plane
during the system oscillations. Both figures include also the example of an operating character-
istics of a modern distance protection. The measured impedance can enter the operating area of
the distance protection and causes its unwanted operation. It is for this reason necessary to detect
the oscillations and prevent such unwanted operations before the measured impedance enters the
distance protection operating characteristics.

jX jX
EA > EB

EA = EB

R R

EA < EB 99001021.vsd

a) b)

Figure 220: Impedance trajectories in relay point during the pole slip (figure a) and power
swing (figure b) phenomena.

424
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

The recoverable oscillations are understood under the expression "power-swing". The genera-
tors in a two-machine system remain during the disturbance in synchronism. They only change
their relative angle δ from one to another value over a transient period. The impedance locus
might enter the operating characteristic of the distance relay (see Figure 220 b), but generally
does not cross the complete R-X plain.

In a non-recoverable situation the oscillations are so severe, that the synchronism is lost between
the generators of a system. The condition is referred to as a pole-slip. At least one generator
starts to change its frequency and the resulting slip frequency may increase up to 10 Hz (in 50
Hz system).

The measured impedance usually enters the distance relay"s operating characteristic and crosses
the complete impedance plain, as presented schematically on Figure 220 a.

Oscillations during abnormal system conditions

Modern power systems operate very close to their technical limits but are also built with higher
security against the mechanical oscillations than ever before. Today it is nearly impossible to
start the oscillations only by very big difference in produced and consumed power. At the same
time some short oscillations are much more frequent than before. They are initiated by some big-
ger events (faults) in power systems and disappear relatively fast after the normal operating con-
ditions have been restored (e.g. single-pole autoreclosing).

Figure 221 presents an impedance trajectory as seen on protected power line by a distance pro-
tection function in phase L2 during the dead time of a single pole autoreclosing, after the single
phase-to-earth fault L1-N has been cleared. The circuit breaker has been successfully closed af-
ter the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing has expired.

425
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

90 3 112.829
120 60

2
150 30

4 1
ZPS L2 25.451
t 180 0
0 50 100

210 330

240 300

270 99001022.vsd
arg ZPS L2
t

Figure 221: Impedance trajectory as seen by a L2-N impedance measuring element.

The remarks on Figure 221 have the following meaning:

1. Load impedance in phase L2 during normal operating conditions.

2. Impedance measured during the L1-N fault.
3. Impedance trajectory and its direction during the dead time of a single pole au-
toreclosing in phase L1.
4. Operating characteristic of the line distance protection.

The impedance as measured by a healthy phase measuring elements (phase L2 in case on Figure
221 might enter the operating area of the distance protection in impedance plain and initiate an
unwanted trip. Modern distance protection devices must incorporate a corresponding function-
ality, which detects the oscillations in each phase separately and prevents the unnecessary oper-
ation of the main protection function.

426
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

The oscillation in power system should be recognized preferably by the measuring elements, if
detected simultaneously in more than one phase. The operating logic, which requires the detec-
tion in two out of three phases increases in great extent the security and dependability of an ap-
plied protection scheme in special operating conditions, like:

• Oscillations during dead time of single pole auto-reclosing.

• Slow increase of initial fault currents at different kinds of high resistive earth
faults.

A special logic circuit, as applied in the pole slip protection used by the REx 5xx terminals
makes possible an adaptive use of the so called "one out of three" or "two out of three" phase
detection criteria. This possibility becomes important for the correct detection of the oscillations
in power systems with multipole tripping and reclosing function applied on double-circuit par-
allel operating EHV transmission lines.

Speed of oscillations
Figure 222 presents informatively the phase currents as recorded at one end of the protected 500
kV transmission line during the pole-slip situation in a power system. The oscillations have been
initiated by a single-phase-to-earth fault in phase L1 (increased magnitude of the phase current).

8
7.116

i L1s
t

i L2s
t 2

i L3s
t

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

99001023.vsd
3.238 4

10 t 940

Figure 222: Phase currents in relay point during the pole slip conditions caused by a L1-N
fault.

The pole-slip frequency is in most cases not constant. The initial oscillation speed is generally
low and increases with time if the system starts the non recoverable oscillation.

The described dependency might influence the dependability of the distance protection scheme
at slowly developing single-phase-to-earth faults. It can at the same time jeopardize the security
of the same protection scheme when the oscillations obtain higher speed. The pole slip protec-
tion in REx 5xx terminals uses the adaptive criteria for the impedance speed to distinguish be-
tween the slow initial faults and increased speed of the measured impedance at consecutive
oscillations.

427
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

1.1.2 Requirements on protection systems during pole slip conditions in network

Two, generally contradictory requirements apply today on the protection systems when mechan-
ical masses in power systems start to oscillate. The requirements depend on the general role,
which the protected element plays within the power system.

Figure 223 presents a transmission line connecting a big production (power plants) with the rest
of the power system, which depends very much on the delivered electric energy from the exter-
nal resources.

The goal in such case is to keep the protected element (power line) of a power system in opera-
tion under all system conditions as long as possible. This requirement is extended even to emer-
gency conditions, i.e. two phase operation of power line during dead time of a single-pole
autoreclosing. It is at the same time expected from the line protection system to operate selec-
tively for all line faults, which may occur during the oscillations. In such case it is recommended
to use within the REx 5xx terminals the so called Power Swing Detection (PSD) function togeth-
er with Power Swing Logic (PSL).

~
GENERATION

TRANSMISSION LINES POWER

~ SYSTEM

~
99001024.vsd

Figure 223: Power line delivering the electrical power to the consuming area.

Generator protection must prevent damages to the generators in the power plant independent of
all other system conditions. The pole slip protection is in such case used closed to the generators.

The second typical network configuration is presented in Figure 224. Inter-connection transmis-
sion lines connect two big and generally independent power systems. Mechanical oscillations
appear in this case between two different systems and are dangerous for the stability of each sys-
tem separately.

428
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM A SYSTEM B
LINE

99001025.vsd

Figure 224: Transmission lines interconnecting two big power systems.

The goal in this particular case of a pole slip situation is to trip selectively (from the power sys-
tem point-of-view) the connecting element(s) between two different systems. The disconnection
of a healthy power line is not selective in a classical way of understanding, but prevents the total
collapse of at least one independent system. The pole slip protection is in such case installed on
the interconnection lines and sometimes even deeper in each power system.

Oscillations and faults in power system

It has been already mentioned that the oscillations in modern power systems appear as the con-
sequences of sudden changes, caused either by big changes of a load or by different faults. Faults
on different elements may appear also during the mechanical oscillations. Very high demands
are put today in such cases on modern protection equipment. The modern power utilities permit
no more any decrease of either dependability or security of the protection systems for the faults
in primary system when their mechanical masses oscillate due to one or another reason. The pro-
tection system must remain stable for all kinds of external faults and must operate reliably for
all internal faults. Some longer operating times are acceptable but should not jeopardize the
complete system selectivity.

Integration of different protection functions within the same modern numerical protection ter-
minals makes it possible to combine their operation and program their interdependence under
different system operating conditions. Fast development of modern digital communication sys-
tems increases additionally the application of such adaptive functionality.

1.2 Functionality
1.2.1 Theory of operation
Measured impedance in relay point on a protected power line, see figure 218, may follow dif-
ferent trajectories when the generators of a two machine system start to oscillate. Some of the
most characteristic trajectories are presented on figure 225.

429
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

jX ZSB
5 2
4

ZL 3

7
9

10
R

8
12

11

6
99001026.vsd

ZSA

Figure 225: Impedance trajectories during oscillations in power system and basic operating
characteristics of the pole slip protection.

The impedance measuring device is located in the origin of the R-X plane. The ZSA source im-
pedance is located behind the relay. The ZSB source impedance presents the continuation of the
line impedance ZL. The complete impedance between the ends of vectors ZSA and ZSB is called
a system impedance ZS. The magnitude and the position of the system impedance within the im-
pedance plain determines the electrical centre of the possible oscillation. The electrical center
ZCO is located in the middle of the system impedance, when both EMFs have the same magni-
tude.

Z S = ZS A + Z L + ZS B = R S + jX S
(Equation 253)

430
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

1
Z CO = --- ⋅ Z S – Z SA = RC O + jXCO
2
(Equation 254)

The following equation apply in general conditions, when the EMFs at both generators are not
equal:

ZS
ZCO = -------------------- – ZA
EB
1 + --------- -
EA
(Equation 255)

The oscillation detection characteristics 1 and 2 in figure 225 are in their resistive part parallel
to the system impedance as long as its characteristic angle ϕ S exceeds 75 degrees. The same
applies also to the resistive tripping characteristics 3 and 4.

X
ϕS = atan ⎛ ------S-⎞
⎝R ⎠
S
(Equation 256)

The reactive tripping characteristics 5 and 6, see figure 225 are rectangular on the system im-
pedance characteristic and form with the R axis an angle of

O
ϕS – 90
(Equation 257)

as long as

O
ϕ S ≥ 75
(Equation 258)

Impedance trajectory 7 on figure 225 presents a typical trajectory during a (probably) recover-
able power swing, when the load current flows from A towards B (see figure in “Application”).
Similarly presents the impedance trajectory 8 a power swing, which started from the reverse load
condition. Characteristic for both trajectories is that they do not pass the complete system im-
pedance, which means that there is no pole slip condition in power system. The second trajectory
passes the left tripping characteristic, 4 on figure 225, which could be a necessary condition for
the non-recoverable oscillation and might require a tripping action.

431
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Impedance trajectories 9, 10, 11, and 12 on figure 225 are characteristic for the pole slip condi-
tions. They pass the system impedance line and complete impedance plain. Their shapes depend
on particular system conditions. The measured impedance would follow the 12 trajectory only
in case, when EA and EB voltages have exactly the same magnitude. Trajectory 9 is characteris-
tic for the case when

EA > E B
(Equation 259)

and trajectory 11 for the opposite case.

The results of system studies should determine the necessary operating conditions for the pole
slip protection in different situations.

1.2.2 Detection of the oscillations and transitions

The operating principle used for the detection of the oscillations over the protected primary el-
ement is based on a well proven

( ΔZ ) ⁄ ( Δt )
(Equation 260)

method as presented schematically in figure 226.

An oscillation is recognized by the measuring element if the measured impedance needs to

change from a ZEXT external impedance boundary to a ZINT internal impedance boundary (se
also boundaries 1 and 2 on figure 225) a time, which is longer than the time Δt set on the corre-
sponding timer. Faster changes of the measured impedance are recognized as faults.

Power swing and pole slip are not only a three-phase phenomena. It is for this reason necessary
to monitor the impedance in each phase separately. The pole slip protection in REx 5xx termi-
nals has built-in oscillation detectors in each phase separately.

Impedance may change relatively slow also at developing high resistive faults, which might in-
fluence the unwanted operation of the oscillation detectors, when set to detect the oscillations
with the highest possible speed (slip frequency up to 10Hz). The pole slip protection in REx 5xx
terminals has a built in adaptive criterion. The operation of this criterion is based on the fact that
the initial oscillations are usually slow. They increase their speed after a certain number of slips.
First oscillations are this way detected by a timer, see figure 226, with longer set time delay. The
consecutive oscillations are detected by an additional timer, which has its operating time set
shorter to be able to detect also the high speed oscillations

432
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

jX

ZEXT
Δt
t OSCILLATION
&
ZINT

Impedance trajectory

ΔΖ
R

99001027.vsd

Figure 226: Detection of the oscillation by the (DZ)/(Dt) method.

The oscillation is recognized as a transition only, if the transition impedance enters the imped-
ance operating characteristic, see figure 225, at one side of the impedance plane and leaves it on
the other side. Two different transitions are recognized by the PSP:

• Transition from forward to reverse (FwRv), when the measured impedance first
enters the right side (R) or upper part (X) and leaves at the left (-R) or bottom (-X)
part of the oscillation detection characteristic.
• Transition from reverse to forward (RvFw), when the measured impedance first
enters the left (-R) or bottom (-X) part and leaves at the right (R) or upper (X)
part of the oscillation detection characteristic.

It is not always necessary to trip the circuit breaker after that the first pole slip has been detected.
This especially applies to recoverable slips, which occur during the abnormal system conditions.
If one slip occurs during the dead time of a single pole autoreclosing on a power line it is still
possible that the system will recover after the circuit breaker reconnects the third phase see fig-
ure 218. However, if more consecutive slips occur, than it is better to disconnect the line and
prevent this way the collapse of a complete system as well as big electrical and mechanical
stresses of the primary equipment. The PSP in REx 5xx terminals has built in counters, which
count the number of the consecutive slips in the system. Separate counters count:

• The slips which enter the impedance area between the reactive tripping charac-
teristics 5 and 6, see figure 225.
• The slips with remote electrical centers, which enter the inner boundary of the os-
cillation detection characteristic, boundary 2 on figure 225, but remain outside
the first operating area.

Settings of the resistive reach for the external and for the internal boundary of the oscillation de-
tection element depend on the minimum load impedance ZLmin of the protected element, which
is calculated according to the equation:

433
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

2
( U m in )
Z Lm in = --------------------
S max
(Equation 261)

Where:
Umin[kV] Minimum possible system phase to phase voltage (real value).
Smax[MVA] Maximum possible loading of a protected element.

The resistive reach of the external boundary depends on the line length as follows.

R1EXT = Z L m in ⋅ K L
(Equation 262)

The KL factor depends on the line length and has the following values:

• KL=0.9 for lines longer than 150 km

• KL=0.85 for lines longer than 80 km and shorter than 150 km
• KL=0.8 for lines shorter than 80 km

The corresponding load angle is this way equal to:

ZS A + Z L + ZS B
δ ext = 2 ⋅ atan -------------------------------------------
2 ⋅ R 1EXT
(Equation 263)

Maximum frequency fsi of the initial slips is mostly between 2Hz and 3Hz. It should be known
from the system stability studies. The suggested setting value for the initial timer tP1 is 45ms.
The corresponding value of the internal load angle is this way equal to:

°
δ int = 360 ⋅ fsi ⋅ tP1 + δ e xt
(Equation 264)

This determines the required setting of the internal resistive boundary:

434
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Z SA + ZL + Z SB
R1INT = ------------------------------------------
-
δ int⎞
2 ⋅ tan ⎛ ------- -
⎝ 2 ⎠
(Equation 265)

Setting for the tP2 timer, determining the maximum slip frequency for the consecutive slips, fol-
lows the equation:

δi nt – δ ext
tP2 = --------------------------
°
360 ⋅ f sm
(Equation 266)

fsm is a maximum slip frequency of the consecutive slips, which are still supposed to be detected
by the pole slip protection.

The PSP issues a tripping command after any of counters reaches the set number of consecutive
slips and the measured impedance passes one of the resistive tripping characteristics, 3 and 4 on
figure 225.

1.2.3 Tripping on way in and on way out

The PSP protection in REx 5xx terminals has built-in two resistive tripping characteristics, see
figure 227:

• Right tripping characteristic, which passes in the impedance plain the first and
the fourth quadrant.
• Left tripping characteristic, which passes in the impedance plain the second and
the third quadrant.

435
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

jX
4 ZS
ZSB

|EA| = |EB|

δL 3
ZL ZL

Z1
LT
R ZC0
ZR
δR

Z1RTR
R

R1LTR R1RTR

ZSA
99001028.vsd

Figure 227: Left (4) and right (3) tripping characteristics and setting of their resistive reach
R1LTR and L1RTR respectively.

Both tripping characteristics are parallel with the system impedance Zs as long as the system
characteristic angle

°
ϕ S ≥ 75
(Equation 267)

In other cases the declination angle is automatically set equal to 75°.

The resistive tripping characteristics make possible to control the tripping angle between the
EMFs of both generators and this way prevent extremely high electrical and mechanical stresses
of circuit breakers. Two operating modes are available, dependent on which characteristic is se-
lected for tripping at particular type of the impedance transition. If we simplify the expressions
and equalize the characteristics with their resistive reach settings R1LTR and R1RTR respec-
tively, than the following operating modes are possible:

• Operation “on way in” for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The
PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transi-
tions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the
R1RTR operating characteristic, 3 in figure 225 and figure 227.

436
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

• Operation “on way out” for the transition from forward to reverse (FwRv). The
PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of FwRv transi-
tions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area left of the
R1LTR operating characteristic, 4 in figure 225 and figure 227.
• Operation “on way in” for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The
PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transi-
tions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the
R1LTR operating characteristic, 4 in figure 225 and figure 227.
• Operation “on way out” for the transition from reverse to forward (RvFw). The
PSP will issue the tripping command, if the necessary number of RvFw transi-
tions has been detected and the measured impedance enters the area right of the
R1RTR operating characteristic, 3 in figure 225 and figure 227.

It is possible to activate each operating mode separately, to suit the operation the best to the par-
ticular system conditions.

Setting of the resistive reach for the left resistive tripping characteristic follows the equations:

o
R1LTR = Re ( Z1LTR ) + Im ( Z1LTR ) ⋅ tan ( 90 – ϕ S )
(Equation 268)

1 j
Z1LTR = --- ⋅ ZS ⋅ 1 + ---------------------------------------- – ZS A
2 ° δL
tan 〈 180 – -----〉
2
(Equation 269)

See in figure 225 and figure 227 for the explanation of different parameters.

Setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping characteristic follows the equations:

°
R 1RTR = Re 〈 Z1RTR〉 – Im ( Z1RTR ) ⋅ tan ( 90 – ϕS )

(Equation 270)

1 j
Z 1RTR = --- ⋅ Z S ⋅ 1 – --------------------- – Z SA
2 δ
tan ⎛⎝ -----R-⎞⎠
2
(Equation 271)

Equations 13 to 16 are derived according to in figure 227, which means when

437
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

E A = EB
(Equation 272)

This calculation satisfies also in great extent the system requirements, when both EMFs differ
in their magnitude.

1.2.4 Close-in and remote end tripping areas

The number of slips usually permitted by the pole slip protection is lower for the slips with elec-
trical center closer to the relay point (within the protected element) and higher for the slips with
electrical center deeper in the network (external to the protected element). The PSP in REx 5xx
terminals has for this reason built-in a possibility to distinguish between the slips with close-in
and remote electrical centers as well as to distinguish the number of slips required for the trip-
ping command in one or another region. Two reactance characteristics, 5 and 6 in figure 225,
divide the complete operating area into two different parts.

The first area is a so called close-in operating area. This area is limited in the impedance plain
by four operating characteristics 3, 4, 5, and 6 in figure 225. The number of required slips for
tripping within this area is usually lower than the number of slips required for tripping in the re-
mote tripping area.

The second area is a so called remote tripping area. This area is limited in the impedance plain
by the operating characteristics 2, 3, 4, and 5 in forward direction as well as 2, 3, 4, and 6 in
reverse direction, see figure 225.

PSP also provides a delayed back-up trip (TRIPSUM) for oscillation in close-in operating area
or remote tripping area. This trip will work when the center of the oscillation is detected either
on the protected line or on the neighbor line or next zone. In both cases PSP compares the num-
ber of slips to nDel, therefore, to enable this functionality TRFast and TRDel should be set to
ON.

1.3 Design
The pole slip protection in REx 5xx terminals measures the phase impedance separately in each
phase according to the following equation:

U Ln
ZmLn = ----------
ILn
(Equation 273)

Where:
ULn are measured phase voltages (n = 1, 2,3)
ILn are measured phase currents (n = 1, 2, 3)

438
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Figure 228 presents the operating characteristic for the pole slip protection in impedance plane
with all the corresponding setting parameters. For detailed information on setting parameters see
the setting parameters in the “Technical reference manual”.

jX ZSB
X1FINT X1FEXT

X1PSLFW
ZL R1PSLFW

SCA
R
R1LEXT R1REXT

R1LINT R1RINT

R1LTR R1RTR

X1PSLRV 99001029.vsd
R1PSLRV
ZSA

Figure 228: Operating characteristic of the pole slip protection with corresponding settings in
the impedance plane.

The phase impedances are calculated in a digital signal processor and the following binary sig-
nals are used later on within the functional logic:

• ZOUTPSLn when the measured impedance enters the external impedance detec-
tion boundary in phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3). See figure in “Application”.
• ZINPSLn when the measured impedance enters the internal impedance detection
boundary in phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3). See figure in “Application”.

439
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

• FwRvLn when transition from forward to reverse direction has been detected in
phase Ln.
• RvFwLn when transition from reverse to forward direction has been detected in
phase Ln.
• Additional signals, which determine the position of the measured impedance re-
garding all specified operating characteristics. The positioning is performed in
each phase separately.

1.3.1 Detection of oscillations

The oscillations are recognized, if detected in one or two out of all three phases. The user can
select by the configuration, which of the operating modes is active during different system con-
ditions. It is possible to have the “one out of three” mode active during normal three-phase op-
erating conditions and switch to “two out of three” mode during the dead time of the single pole
autoreclosing on a protected line

>1
tP2
tW
& t
t

ZOUTPSL1 tP1
& t
ZINPSL1 &
ZOUTPSL2 tP1
DET1of3 - int.
& t >1 >1
ZINPSL2 &
ZOUTPSL3 tP1
& t
ZINPSL3 &

>1
&
xx01000252.vsd

Figure 229: Simplified logic diagram for a one-out-of-three oscillation detection logic

The oscillation is detected in “one out of three” operating mode (see figure 229 and 230) if in at
least one phase the time difference, when the measured impedance enters the external
(ZOUTPSLn) and the internal (ZINPSLn) impedance boundary, is longer than the time set on
the tP1 timer. The output signal DET1of3 remains logical one as long as the measured imped-
ance in at least one phase remains within the external boundary.

The oscillation is recognized as the consecutive one, if the measured impedance re-enters in at
least one phase the external boundary within the time interval set on tW waiting timer. In such
case the tP2 timer becomes the relevant one for the determination of a consecutive oscillation.
This makes it possible to detect the consecutive slips with higher speed than the initial one.

440
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Figure 230 presents a simplified logic diagram for the “two out of three” operating mode of the
oscillation detection logic. The basic operating principle is the same as for the “one of three”
operating mode with the difference that the initial oscillation must be detected in at least two
phases, before the DET2of3 output signal becomes logical one.

&

& >1
tP2
& tW
& t
t
ZOUTPSL1 tP1
& t
ZINPSL1
&
&
ZOUTPSL2 tP1
& t DET2of3 - int.
ZINPSL2
& >1 >1
&
ZOUTPSL3 tP1
& t
ZINPSL3
&
&

&

& >1
&
& xx01000253.vsd

Figure 230: Simplified logic diagram for a two-out-of-three oscillation detection logic.

1.3.2 Logic for cooperation with the line distance protection

It has already been mentioned that the transition impedance might enter the operating area of the
line distance protection function and cause its unwanted operation, if the necessary counter mea-
sures have not been provided. The pole slip protection detects the transient impedance and can
be used as a disabling function for the line distance protection function within the same REx 5xx
protection and control terminal.

Figure 231 presents in simplified form the logic diagram used for the cooperation with the asso-
ciated line distance protection, when necessary.

The PSP-START output logical signal can be used within the terminal configuration, to block
the operation of different distance protection zones. Its appearance depends on the selection of
the “one out of three” or “two out of three” operating mode, which is possible by the correspond-
ing connection of the following functional input signals:

• PSP--REL1P, which releases the “one out of three” operating mode.

• PSP--BLK1P, which blocks the “one out of three” operating mode.
• PSP--REL2P, which releases the “two out of three” operating mode.

441
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

• PSP--BLK2P, which blocks the “two out of three” operating mode

The following conditions block the PSP--START output signal and might this way release the
operation of the distance protection function even during the oscillation conditions.

• PSP--BLOCK - input functional signal, which blocks the operation of the com-
plete pole slip protection
• The PSP--START signal is disabled, if the measured impedance remains within
the external impedance boundary for the time, which is longer as the time interval
set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this functionality by the continuous pres-
ence of a logical one signal on functional input PSP--BLK1.

ZOUTPSL1 PSP--ZOUT
>1
ZOUTPSL2 ZINPSL1
PSP--ZIN
ZOUTPSL3 & ZINPSL2 >1

ZINPSL3
tEF
PSP--TRSP
t &
PSP--I0CHECK
10 ms
DET-int.
& t
>1
PSP--BLK2
tR1
& t INHIBIT
>1

tR2
PSP--BLK1 & t
PSP--BLOCK

DET1of3 - int.
PSP--REL1P
&
PSP--BLK1P
tHZ PSP--START
DET2of3 - int. &
>1 t
PSP--REL2P
&
PSP--BLK2P

99001032.vsd

Figure 231: Logic for cooperation with distance protection function.

• The PSP--START output signal is disabled after the time delay set on the tR1
timer, if the oscillation appears before the functional input signal
PSP--I0CHECK becomes logical one. This way it is possible to block the PSP

442
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

function and release the operation of the line distance protection, if for example,
an earth fault appears in the network during the oscillations. This functionality
can be disabled by the logical one signal on the PSP--BLK2 functional input.
• The PSP--START functional input is disabled, if the measured impedance have
been detected within the external operating boundary in all three phases and the
PSP--I0CHECK functional input signal became logical one within the time inter-
val shorter than the time delay set on timer tEF after the PSD--TRSP logical input
changed from logical one to logical zero. This function prevents the appearance
of the PSP--START output signal in cases, when one pole of the circuit breaker
closes on persistent single phase fault after the single pole autoreclosing dead
time, if the initial single phase fault and single pole opening of the circuit breaker
causes the power swinging in the remaining two phases.

1.3.3 Tripping criteria

The complete impedance operating area is divided on two detection and two trip regions as pre-
sented schematically on figure 232. Detection area is divided on forward-reverse detection re-
gion i.e transition from forward to reverse (TRANFwRv) and reverse-forward detection region
i.e transition from reverse to forward (TRANRvFw). Trip area is divided on fast trip region and
delayed trip region.

443
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

jX

2
4

R1LTR R1RTR
SCA R

5
6

7 en01000062.vsd

Where:
1 Forward - reverse detection region
2 Reverse - forward detection region
3 Fast trip region
4 Delayed trip region
5 System impedance
6 Internal operating boundary
7 External operating boundary

Figure 232: The impedance operating plain is divided on two detection regions and two trip
regions.

The flow charts on figure 233 and figure 234 present completely the operation of the PSP for the
FwRv transitions and the RvFw transitions respectively.

PSP also provides a delayed back-up trip (TRIPSUM) for oscillation in fast or delayed region.
Summation trip will work if the center of the oscillation is detected either on the protected line
(fast region) or on the adjacent line (delayed region). In both cases PSP compares number of

444
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

slips to nDel, therefore to enable this functionality TRFast and TRDel should be set to On. Sum-
mation trip operation is shown on figure 235 and figure 236 for the FwRv transitions and the
RvFw transitions respectively.

New FwRv
oscillation detected

YES
NO NO

Next FwRv oscillation YES Next FwRv oscillation

YES
detected before tW detected before tW
START
elapsed elapsed
YES

NO
TRFwRv=On

YES

Impedance NO Impedance NO
within fast within delay
region region

YES YES

NO NO
TRFastFwRv=On TRDelFwRv=On

YES YES

YES Oscillation NO NO Oscillation YES

nFast=nFast+1 FwRv nFast=nFastFwRv nDel=nDelFwRv FwRv nDel=nDel+1
Completed Completed

YES YES

NO NO NO NO
TROutFwRv=On TRIncFwRv=On TRIncFwRv=On TROutFwRv=On

YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO
Impedance passes Impedance passes Impedance passes Impedance passes
R1LTR R1RTR R1RTR R1LTR

YES YES YES YES

en00000717.vsd
TRIP

445
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Figure 233: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the forward to
reverse transition (FwRv) after the oscillation has been detected.

New RvFw
oscillation detected

YES
NO NO

Next RvFw oscillation YES Next RvFw oscillation

YES
detected before tW detected before tW
START
elapsed elapsed
YES

NO
TRRvFw =On

YES

Impedance NO Impedance NO
within fast within delay
region region

YES YES

NO NO
TRFastRvFw=On TRDelRvFw=On

YES YES

YES Oscillation NO NO Oscillation YES

nFast=nFast+1 RvFw nFast=nFastRvFw nDel=nDelRvFw RvFw nDel=nDel+1
Completed Completed

YES YES

NO NO NO NO
TROutRvFw=On TRIncRvFw=On TRIncRvFw=On TROutRvFw=On

YES YES YES YES

NO NO NO NO
Impedance passes Impedance passes Impedance passes Impedance passes
R1RTR R1LTR R1LTR R1RTR

YES YES YES YES

TRIP en00000718.vsd

446
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Figure 234: Flow-chart presenting the operation of the pole slip protection for the reverse to
forward transition (RvFw) after the oscillation has been detected.

447
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

New FwRv oscillation

detected

YES
NO

Next FwRv oscillation YES

detected before tW START
elapsed
YES

NO
TRFwRv=On

YES

Impedance NO Impedance NO
within fast within delay
region region

YES YES

NO NO
TRFastFwRv=On TRDelFwRv=On

YES YES

YES Oscillation NO
nSum=nSum+1 FwRv nSum=nDelFwRv
Compeited

YES

NO NO
TROutFwRv=On TRIncFwRv=On

YES YES

NO NO
Impedance passes Impedance passes
R1LTR R1RTR

YES YES

TRIPSUM en00000719.vsd

Figure 235: Flow-chart presenting summation trip (TRIPSUM) of the pole slip protection for
the forward to reverse transition (FwRv).

448
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

New RvFw oscillation

detected

YES
NO

Next RvFw oscillation YES

detected before tW START
elapsed
YES

NO
TRRvFw=On

YES

Impedance NO Impedance NO
within fast within delay
region region

YES YES

NO NO
TRFastRvFw=On TRDelRvFw=On

YES YES

YES Oscillation NO
nSum=nSum+1 RvFw nSum=nDelRvFw
Completed

YES

NO NO
TROutRvFw=On TRIncRvFw=On

YES YES

NO NO
Impedance passes Impedance passes
R1RTR R1LTR

YES YES

TRIPSUM en00000720.vsd

Figure 236: Flow-chart presenting summation trip (TRIPSUM) of the pole slip protection for
the reverse to forward transition (RvFw).

449
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

1.4 Calculations
1.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the pole strip protection functions are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in
local HMI.

Necessary technical data

These setting instructions are prepared as a setting example for the power network reduced to
the two machine system as presented on figure 237.

EA EB

δA= const δB= f(t)

A B
ZSA ZSB
ZL
~ ~
R
99001019.vsd

Figure 237: Power system reduced to a two machine system.

Following are the necessary technical data:

Rated system voltage:

U r = 400kV
(Equation 274)

Minimum expected system voltage:

Umin = 380kV
(Equation 275)

Rated system frequency:

f r = 50Hz
(Equation 276)

Ratio of voltage instrument transformers:

450
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

400
---------- [ kV ]
Up 3
------- = ------------------------ = 3636
Us 0.11
----------- [ kV ]
3
(Equation 277)

Ratio of current instrument transformers used:

Ip 1200 [ A ]
---- = ---------------------- = 1200
Is 1[A]
(Equation 278)

Line length:

L = 210 km
(Equation 279)

Line positive sequence impedance:

ZLp = ( 10.71 + j75.6 )ohm

(Equation 280)

Source A positive sequence impedance:

ZS Ap = ( 1.15 + j43.5 ) ohm

(Equation 281)

Source B positive sequence impedance:

Z SB p = ( 5.3 + j35.7 ) ohm

(Equation 282)

Maximum expected load in forward direction (at minimum system voltage Umin).

Smax = 1000MVA
(Equation 283)

with power factor

451
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

cos ( ϕ max ) = 0.95

(Equation 284)

Maximum expected slip frequency for consecutive slips:

f smax = 8Hz
(Equation 285)

Expected initial slip frequency:

f si = 2.5Hz
(Equation 286)

The required tripping angle at pole slip conditions must be between the following values (deter-
mined by the system studies and electrical characteristics of the used primary equipment):

°
δ trL ≤ 115
(Equation 287)

°
δ tr R ≥ 245
(Equation 288)

It is supposed that similar pole slip protection device will be used on the remote line end. In such
case it is suggested to program the operation of the pole slip protection for the slips in forward
direction only.

The result of the system studies has shown that:

• It is possible to have one slip over the remaining two phases between both sys-
tems during the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing. It is a high probability
that the system will remain stable after the successful single pole autoreclosing.
• The second slip, if detected on the protected line, should be disconnected as fast
as possible. For this reason the trip in incoming mode of operation is suggested.
• The selective operation of the pole slip protections in the complete network is ob-
tained, if the number of the remote slips is less than four, before the system is split
by the pole slip protection in the observed point.

Impedance transformation factor

System data are generally presented by their primary values. This is also the case for this setting
example. The corresponding impedance transformation factor is equal to:

452
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

I
---p- 1200 [ A -]
---------------------
Is 1 [ A ]
KIMP = ------- = ------------------------ = 0.33
Up 400
------- ---------- [ kV ]
Us 3
------------------------
0.11
----------- [ kV ]
3
(Equation 289)

The secondary values of the corresponding impedances are equal to:

ZL = KIMP ⋅ ZLp = ( 3.53 + j24.95 )ohm

(Equation 290)

ZS A = KIMP ⋅ ZS Ap = ( 0.38 + j 14.36) ohm

(Equation 291)

Z S B = KIMP ⋅ ZS Bp = ( 1.75 + j11 – 78 ) ohm

(Equation 292)

Minimum load impedance

Minimum load impedance appears in forward direction and is calculated according to equation
293:

2
( Um in )
- ⋅ KI MP = 47.63ohm
ZL m in = -------------------
S m ax
(Equation 293)

System impedance and center of oscillations

The system impedance is according to equation 289 equal to:

Z S = Z SA + ZL + Z SB = ( 5.63 + j51.08 )ohm

(Equation 294)

The system characteristic angle equation 292 is equal to:

453
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

XS
ϕ S = atan ⎛⎝ -------⎞⎠ = 83.7
°
R S
(Equation 295)

The corresponding setting of the system characteristic angle is this way:

°
SCA = 83.7
(Equation 296)

The center of the oscillation has the coordinates, equation 290:

1
Z CO = --- ⋅ Z S – Z SA = ( 2.45 + j11.19 )ohm
2
(Equation 297)

Resistive reach of the external boundary in forward direction

The external boundary for the oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction (right side
boundary) has its resistive reach equal to, equation 294.

R1REX T = Z Lmin ⋅ K L = 42.87ohm

(Equation 298)

We considered in this case

K L = 0.9
(Equation 299)

because the line is longer than 150km.

The corresponding load angle is according to equation 295 equal to:

Z SA + ZL + Z SB
--------------------- = 61.88 °
δ e xt = 2 ⋅ atan ----------------------
2 ⋅ R 1REXT
(Equation 300)

Resistive reach of the internal boundary in forward direction

We assume the setting of the first transition timer tP1 = 45ms. This brings the necessary load
angle for the right internal boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic, equation 295:

454
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

° °
δ int = 360 ⋅ f si ⋅ tP 1 + δext = 102.4
(Equation 301)

The corresponding resistive reach setting is this way equation 296218:

Z SA + ZL + Z SB
R1RINT = ------------------------------------------- = 20.69o hm
δint
2 ⋅ tan ⎛ --------⎞
⎝ 2 ⎠
(Equation 302)

It is necessary to check that this operating characteristic, see figrue covers completely the dis-
tance protection zones, which should be blocked during the power swings in system, if the pole
slip protection is used also for these purposes. In this particular case we check only the primary
fault resistance, which could be covered by the corresponding distance protection zones:

1
R Fp = --------------- ⋅ R1RI NT ⋅ 0.95 = 59.5ohm
KIM P
(Equation 303)

This resistive reach satisfies in most practical cases for the resistive covering of the distance pro-
tection zones one and two. Factor 0.95 in equation 303 is considered as a safety factor. In this
way we can keep the setting of the first transition timer to tP1 = 45ms.

Setting of the tP2 timer

The tP2 timer serves the detection of (generally faster) consecutive slips. Its setting is calculated
according to equation 298 and the specified value of the maximum expected slip frequency:

δi nt – δ ext
tP 2 = -------------------------
°
- = 14ms
360 ⋅ f s m
(Equation 304)

The required value is well over the minimum suggested value of 10ms. The maximum detectable
slip frequency with setting of the tP2 timer equal to tP2min = 10ms and with unchanged settings
of the impedance oscillation detection boundaries is equal to:

δ in t – δ ext
f smax = ------------------
------------------ = 11.25Hz
°
360 ⋅ tP2m in
(Equation 305)

This is a very high value, which usually does not appear in a real power system.

455
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Settings of the reverse oscillation detection resistive boundaries

It has been mentioned that the similar pole slip protection device is intended to be used at the
remote line end. The maximum load in reverse direction is also much smaller than in forward
direction. The system requirements require this way only the operation for the pole slips with
their electrical center in forward direction. The reverse (left side) resistive reach of the oscilla-
tion detection characteristics can be for this reason equal to the one in forward direction:

R1LEXT = R1REXT = 42.87ohm

(Equation 306)

R1L INT = R1RINT = 20.69ohm

(Equation 307)

Setting of the right and left tripping characteristics

The necessary setting of the resistive reach for the right tripping characteristic is calculated ac-
cording to equation 302 and equation 303:

1 j
Z1RTR = --- ⋅ Z S ⋅ 1 – ------------------------- – Z SA = ( 18.72 + j9.38 )ohm
2 δ trR
tan ⎝ ----------⎞⎠
⎛
2
(Equation 308)

°
R 1RTR = Re 〈 Z1RTR〉 – Im ( Z1RTR ) ⋅ tan ( 90 – ϕS )
(Equation 309)

R 1 R T R = 17.68 o h m
(Equation 310)

The condition R1RTR<R1RINT is in this way fulfilled.

Necessary setting of the resistive reach for the left tripping characteristic is calculated according
to equations.

1 j
Z1LTR = --- ⋅ Z S ⋅ 1 + -------------------------------------------- – ZS A
2 ° δtrL
tan 〈 180 – ---------〉
2
(Equation 311)

456
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Z1L TR = ( 18.72 + j9.38 )ohm

(Equation 312)

°
R1L TR = Re ( Z1LTR ) + Im ( Z1LTR ) ⋅ tan ( 90 – ϕ S )
(Equation 313)

R1LTR = 19.76ohm
(Equation 314)

The condition R1RTR<R1RINT is in this way fulfilled.

Setting of the reactive tripping characteristics

The reactive operating characteristics are presented in figure 218, and marked by 5 for the oper-
ation in forward direction and by 6 for the operation in reverse direction.

Since it is required to operate only for the pole slip situation with centers of slips in forward di-
rection, and because a similar device will be used at the remote line terminal, only the operation
for the transition from forward to reverse direction (FwRv) is required. This kind of operation
does not require any reverse reach. It is recommended for this reason to set the corresponding
setting parameters to their minimum values.

R 1 P S L R v = 0.1 o h m
(Equation 315)

X1PSLRv = 0.1oh m
(Equation 316)

The tripping characteristic in forward direction should cover the slips with their electrical center
on the protected power line. 10% of safety margin is sufficient in order not to overreach for the
slips with their centers on the adjacent power lines. The necessary settings are equal to:

R1PS LFw = 0.9 ⋅ Re ( ZL ) = 3.18oh m

(Equation 317)

X1P SLFw = 0.9 ⋅ Im ( ZL ) = 22.45oh m

(Equation 318)

457
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Setting of the reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristics

The reactive reach of the oscillation detection characteristic should cover in forward and in re-
verse direction with sufficient margin (10 to 15%) the power lines and other elements, for which
the pole slip protection should provide also the back up protection for the slips with remote cen-
ters of the oscillations. System studies should determine the necessary reach as well as the num-
ber of permitted remote slips more in details.

We assume in this example that the pole slip protection should also block the operation of the
distance protection zones one and two. Zone two must be set to at least 120% of the protected
line. The necessary reactive reach of the internal boundary in the forward direction is this way
equal to:

X 1 F IN T = 1.15 ⋅ 1.2 ⋅ Im ( Z L ) = 34.43 o h m

(Equation 319)

Reactive reach of the external oscillation detection boundary should permit the same speed of
detected slips as the one determined in the resistive direction. We can even provide some addi-
tional margin (5%).

X1FEXT = 1.05 ⋅ ( R1REXT – R1RINT ) + X1FINT

(Equation 320)

X1FEXT = 57.73ohm
(Equation 321)

Setting of the reactive reach in the reverse direction depends on the system conditions. In our
case we do not need to cover any special distance protection zone. It is also not necessary to op-
erate for the slips with their center in the reverse direction, since the remote end pole slip pro-
tection takes care of such cases.

It is anyway suggested to set the reactive reach in reverse direction to at least 10% of the one in
forward direction. The impedance difference between the internal and the internal boundary
should also in this case permit detection of the same slip frequency as in the forward direction.
The necessary values are:

X 1 R IN T = 0.1 ⋅ X 1 F IN T = 3.44 o h m
(Equation 322)

X1REXT = 1.05 ⋅ ( R1REXT – R1RINT ) + X1RINT

(Equation 323)

458
Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

X1REXT = 26.75ohm
(Equation 324)

Setting of the tW waiting timer

Setting of the waiting timer influences the detection of the consecutive slips. The tW timer must
be set higher than the time the measured impedance needs after leaving the impedance detection
area and entering it again on the other side of the impedance plain. It is necessary to consider the
minimum possible speed of the oscillations, which might occur in the system. The time neces-
sary for the impedance to move from the internal left impedance boundary (after the FwRv tran-
sition has been completed) to the external right impedance boundary (to start the detection of the
new oscillation) is calculated according to the equation:

°
δ Rext + ( 360 – δL int )
tW = 1.3 ⋅ ---------------------------------------------------------- = 1.79 s
360° ⋅ fsmin
(Equation 325)

Where:
δRext Corresponding load angle at the right external resistive boundary (in our case they
equal to 61.9 deg)
δLint Corresponding load angle at the left internal resistive boundary (in our case equal to
298.1 deg)
fsmin Minimum expected slip frequency in a system (should not be considered less than 0.2
Hz)

Factor 1.3 is a safety factor, which could be considered also in most other cases, when the exact
technical characteristics of the system are not known.

Setting of the tripping modes and the transition counters

The pole slip protection should according to the system requirements operate only for the slips
with their electrical center on the protected power line and for the transitions from the forward
to the reverse direction. It is for this reason necessary to set the parameters related to the reverse
to forward (RvFw) transition to the following values:

• TrRvFw = Off
• TrIncRvFw = Off
• TrOutRvFw = Off
• TrFastRvFw = Off
• TrDelRvFw = Off
• nFastRvFw = 10
• nDelRvFw = 10

459
 Pole Slip Protection (PSP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

According to the results of the system studies the following settings are applicable for the tran-
sitions detected from forward to the reverse direction:

• TrFwRv = On
• TrIncFwRv = On
• TrOutFwRv = Off
• TrFastFwRv = On
• TrDelFwRv = On
• nFastFwRv = 1
• nDelFwRv = 3

Additional timers in the oscillation detection circuits

Timers tR1, tR2, tEF, and tHZ are used in the oscillation detection logic (see figure in “Design”)
to suit the oscillation detection to different system conditions. Their settings must be co-ordinat-
ed with the time delays set on different protection devices, like distance protection, directional
or non directional residual overcurrent protection, dead time of the single pole autoreclosing,
etc.

tHz hold timer

The tHz hold timer prolongs the duration of the PSP--START signal, which can be used for
blocking the distance protection zones. Its setting should be with a certain margin (10 to 15%)
longer than the time required for the detection of the consecutive slips with fastest slip frequency
in a system. In our case the required value is equal to:

1
tHZ = 1.15 ⋅ -------- = 144ms
f sm
(Equation 326)

tR1 inhibit timer

The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current 3·I0 on the inhibit cri-
teria for the PSP function. It prevents the operation of the function for short transients in the re-
sidual current as measured by the terminal. The time delay of 50 ms is suggested as default,
when the residual current criteria is used.

tR2 inhibit timer

The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output PSP--START signal, if the measured impedance re-
mains within the impedance detection area for more than the set time. This time delay is gener-
ally set to 2 seconds, when used in the protection.

tEF timer
The setting of the tEF timer must cover with sufficient margin the opening time of the associated
circuit breaker and the dead time of the single pole autoreclosing together with the circuit break-
er closing time.

460
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

2 Low active power protection (LAPP)

2.1 Application
2.1.1 General
The low active power protection function (LAPP) can be used wherever a low active power sig-
nal is needed. The main purpose of the function is to provide a local criterion, which is added to
a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall tripping function-
ality.

Three different application examples for the low active power protection function (LAPP) are
given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line
connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another
substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local low active power criterion
is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

2.1.2 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line

A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a power transform-
er directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in figure 238.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

Figure 238: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line.

Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of
the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the
fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of
the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in
order to open also the line circuit breaker.

The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so
called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due
to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line.
Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the
same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the
end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

461
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

The active power, in at least two of the phases at the feeding end of the line, decreases, when the
differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the
breaker contacts open. This means, that a low active power function, properly set, could provide
a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with
basically unchanged dependability. The LAPP function could preferably be integrated in the line
protection in the sending end.

2.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor

A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a line connected
shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 239. Shunt
reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines.
Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will oc-
cur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR
TRIP
LDD

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2

Source Load
Line connected TRIP
shunt reactor
IDIFF>
CS
CT3

en03000121.vsd
Figure 239: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor.

2.1.4 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip

A typical application for the low active power protection (LAPP) function is a breaker failure
protection with transfer trip.

Figure 240 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two trans-
mission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker
arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates cor-
rectly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single
pole tripping capabilities.

462
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

A B C

FAULT B1 B4
L1
CS CR
BFP LDD TRIP
B2 B5
L2

B3 B6
TRIP TRIP

en03000122.vsd
Figure 240: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third cir-
cuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line
end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C.

A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation
C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR
signal. Depending on the rest of the network the low active power criterion, in at least two phas-
es, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false
CR signals.

2.2 Functionality
2.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the low active power protection
function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the low active power protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, based on measured
voltage and current.
• The direction of P is compared to settings.
• The directionality is conditioned by undervoltage and undercurrent elements, and
the complete function is conditioned by a fuse failure function.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the active power, P,
are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

2.2.2 Active power calculation

The active power is calculated for each phase separately as

463
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

P ph = Uph ⋅ I ph ⋅ cos ( ϕ )

(Equation 327)

where
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component
Uph

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component

I ph

cos ( ϕ ) is the power factor

ϕ is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according to

figure 241.

Im Uph

Re
ϕ

Iph

en03000123.vsd

Figure 241: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active power calculation.

2.2.3 Direction of active power

According to equation 327 the direction of active power is defined as:

• forward, if Pph > 0, i.e. if -90°< ϕ <90°, and

• reverse, if Pph < 0, i.e. if 90°< ϕ <270°

The direction of active power is illustrated in figure 242. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off,
the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of
the active power, Pph, goes below the setting, irrespective of the direction of the power.

464
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Q Q

High-set High-set
Operating Operating
area area
for for
Forward Reverse
direction direction

PHigh<
P PHigh<
P

en03000124.vsd

Figure 242: Direction of active power.

2.2.4 Conditioning elements

The status of the fuse failure function is received as a binary input, LAPP-VTSU, to the function
block.The undervoltage element is included in the LAPP function. If the magnitude of any phase
voltage is below the limit value, which is 10% of the terminal rated voltage, the directional mea-
surement is blocked, and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless
the setting.

Unon-directional = 10% of Urated

The undercurrent element is included in the LAPP function. If the magnitude of any phase cur-
rent is below the limit value, which equals to 3% of terminal rated current, the directional mea-
surement is blocked and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless
the setting.

Inon-directional = 3% of Irated

2.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic
• trip logic
• block and fuse failure logic

When the active power in any phase decreases to a value below the low-set limit, PLow<, the
LAPP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the active power in any phase decreases to a
value below the high-set limit, PHigh<, the LAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The LAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases is lower than PLow<,

465
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

• carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and

• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The LAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases is lower than PHigh<,

• carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary output signals are deactivated when the input LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU is ac-
tivated.

Note!
The LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still exe-
cuted. Therefore, deactivating the input LAPP-BLOCK or LAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from
the LAPP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the LAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 243. There are five output signals from the LAPP function:

LAPP-STLOW: Low-set start

LAPP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
LAPP-STHIGH: High-set start
LAPP-TRHIGH: High-set trip
LAPP-NODIR Non-directional indication

The blocking signals LAPP-BLOCK and LAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any
output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has
been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after
the set time delay, if the active power is lower than the set value in two of the three phases and
the carrier receive signal LAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction
of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the
parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

The amplitude of U and I are computed for each phase and compared with predefined limits
(blocking limits). If the amplitude is considered to be under the limit, the signal LAPP-NODIR
is set. Blocking limits corresponds to 10% resp. 2.5% of nominal values of I and U.

466
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

LAPP_L1FW

LAPP_L2FW ≥1

LAPP_L3FW LAPP_STLOW
&
LAPP_U_BLOCK1

LAPP_U_BLOCK2 ≥1

LAPP_U_BLOCK3
RV
&
LAPP_L1L & LAPP_tLow

≥1 t
LAPP_L2L ≥1 & &
≥1
& LAPP_TRLOW
LAPP_L3L &
FW
LAPP_I_BLOCK1 &
≥1
LAPP_I_BLOCK2 ≥1
LAPP_NODIR
LAPP_I_BLOCK3 ≥1

LAPP_Dir Low
& RV
LAPP_L1H & LAPP_tHigh

≥1 t
LAPP_L2H ≥1 & &
≥1
LAPP_TRHIGH
& &
LAPP_L3H
&
LAPP_Dir High FW

LAPP_ Dir Oper

LAPP_L1RV LAPP_STHIGH
&
LAPP_L2RV ≥1

LAPP_L3RV

LAPP_CR
LAPP_BLOCK
LAPP_VTSU

LAPP_TEST ≥1
&
LAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000358.vsd
Figure 243: Simplified logic diagram for the low active power protection function.

467
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

2.4 Calculation
2.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the low active power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as
setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the LAPP function there are in total eight settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire LAPP function has to be set to either On or Off.

DirOper: The directionality of the entire LAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this
parameter is set to Off the LAPP function operates irrespective of the direction of the active
power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the active power has to coincide with
the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip.

DirLow: The direction of low-set LAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this pa-
rameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with the
direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

DirHigh: The direction of high-set LAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

PLow<: This is the low-set limit of the active power. If the active power decreases below this
limit the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the prod-
uct of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/√3V) and the base current of
the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g 110/√3V*1A=63.5W. To find the corre-
sponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important
to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase active power divided
by 3.

PHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the active power. If the active power decreases below this
limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the
low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LAPP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power recovers to a value over the
set-limit, PLow<, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is ac-
tivated.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LAPP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power recovers to a value over the
set-limit, PHigh<, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is ac-
tivated.

The pick-up level for PLow< and PHigh<, should be set, with some margin, to the lowest active
power level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

For any application where the active power direction, in the power system element under con-
sideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the LAPP function is recommended, i.e.
DirOper should be set to On. If the active power flow can be in one direction only, non-direc-
tional operation of the LAPP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

468
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direc-
tion, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application.

The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier re-
ceived signals, should normally be set to zero.

2.4.2 Setting example

Figure 244 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The LAPP function is
going to be implemented in the feeding end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd
Figure 244: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line.

Relevant data for the LAPP function setting are shown in table 23.

Table 23: Relevant data for the LAPP function setting

CT1 ratio 200/1
VT1 ratio 55000/√3 / 110/√3
CT2 ratio 150/1
CT3 ratio 600/5
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Minimum active power to the load 1.5 MW

Since this is a step-down transformer, with no downstream generation, non-directionality is

used. For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes
from the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional
time delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the LAPP function to be zero. The fol-
lowing procedure shows how to calculate the LAPP function pick-up value.

Minimum active power to the load is 1.5 MW. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value.
Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

469
 Low active power protection (LAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

1
P < primary = --- ⋅ 0.80 ⋅ 1.5MW = 0.4MW
3
(Equation 328)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

110
---------
1 3 110
Psecondary = P primary ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ---------------- = 400000 ⋅ ------------------------------- W = 4W
200 55000 200 ⋅ 55000
----------------
3
(Equation 329)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base
current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V ⋅ 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 330)

The setting of the parameter PLow< will therefore be:

4W
PLow< = ------------------- = 0.063 = 6.3%
63.5VA
(Equation 331)

470
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

3 Low active and reactive power protection (LARP)

3.1 Application
3.1.1 General
The combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP) can be used wherever
a low reactive power signal is needed. The trip criterion is a function of the set value and the
actual active power according to:

Q trip = Q set + α ⋅ P
(Equation 332)

where:
0≤α≤1

This design gives the user a possibility to increase the sensitivity for high levels of active power.

The main purpose of the combined low active and reactive power protection function (LARP)
is to provide a local criterion, that is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase
the security of the overall tripping functionality.

Three different application examples for the combined low active and reactive power protection
function (LARP) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to
the feeding line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a
circuit breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local
combined low active and reactive power criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by
false transfer trip signals.

3.1.2 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line

A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function
(LARP) is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line,
as shown in figure 245.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

471
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

Figure 245: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line.

Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of
the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the
fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of
the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in
order to open also the line circuit breaker.

The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so
called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due
to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line.
Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the
same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the
end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

The active power, in at least two of the phases at the sending end of the line, decreases, when
the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and
the breaker contacts open. This means, that a combined low active and reactive power function,
properly set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line
and the transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The LARP function could prefer-
ably be integrated in the line protection in the sending end.

3.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor

A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function
(LARP) is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as
shown in figure 246. Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging
currents on high voltage lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no
dangerous overvoltage will occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR
TRIP
LDD

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2

Source Load
Line connected TRIP
shunt reactor
IDIFF>
CS
CT3

en03000121.vsd
Figure 246: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor.

Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line
circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in
the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for

472
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the
remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end. Low
active and reactive power in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker
pole get stuck in the reactor end), is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase se-
curity.

3.1.4 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip

A typical application for the combined low active and reactive power protection function
(LARP) is a breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

Figure 247 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two trans-
mission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker
arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates cor-
rectly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single
pole tripping capabilities.

A B C

FAULT B1 B4
L1
CS CR
BFP LDD TRIP
B2 B5
L2

B3 B6
TRIP TRIP

en03000122.vsd
Figure 247: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third cir-
cuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line
end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C.

A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation
C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR
signal. Depending on the rest of the network the combined low active and reactive power crite-
rion, in at least two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid un-
wanted trips due to false CR signals.

3.2 Functionality
3.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the combined low active and re-
active power protection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

473
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

The algorithm of the combined low active and reactive power protection facility is rather
straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, and the reactive
power, Q, based on measured voltage and current.
• The direction of Q is compared to settings.
• The directionality is conditioned by undervoltage and undercurrent elements, and
the complete function is conditioned by a fuse failure function.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the active power, P,
and the reactive power, Q, are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

3.2.2 Active and reactive power calculation

The active and reactive power are calculated for each phase separately as:

P ph = U ph ⋅ Iph ⋅ cos ( ϕ ) Q ph = Uph ⋅ I ph ⋅ sin ( ϕ ) (Equation 333)

where:
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,
U ph

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

I ph

cos(ϕ) is the power factor, and

ϕ is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according
to figure 248.

Im Uph

Re
ϕ

Iph

en03000123.vsd

Figure 248: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active and reactive power calcu-
lation.

474
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

3.2.3 Direction of reactive power

According to equation 333, the direction of reactive power is defined as:

• forward, if Qph>0, i.e. if 0°<ϕ<180°, and

• reverse, if Qph<0, i.e. if 180°<ϕ<360°

The direction of reactive power is illustrated in figure 249. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off,
the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of
the reactive power, Qph, goes below the setting, irrespective of the direction of the reactive pow-
er. Since only the absolute value of the active power is used, the direction of the active power
does not affect the functionality.

Q Q

QHigh<
High-set operating area for Forward direction
P High-set operating area for Reverse direction P
QHigh<

en03000119.vsd

where:
k is declination angle of operating characteristic

Figure 249: Direction of reactive power.

3.2.4 Conditioning elements

The status of the fuse failure function is received as a binary input, LARP-VTSU, to the function
block.

The undervoltage element is included in the LARP function. If the magnitude of any phase volt-
age is below the limit value, which is 10% of the terminal rated voltage, the directional measure-
ment is blocked, and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless the
setting.

Unon-directional = 10% of Urated

475
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

The undercurrent element is included in the LARP function. If the magnitude of any phase cur-
rent is below the limit value, which equals to 3% of terminal rated current, the directional mea-
surement is blocked and the operation of the function is changed to non-directional, regardless
the setting.

Inon-directional = 3% of Irated

3.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic,
• block and fuse failure logic.

When the active/reactive power in any phase decreases to a point within the operating area, ac-
cording to figure 249, for the low-set limit, QLow<, the LARP-STLOW output signal is activat-
ed. When the active/reactive power in any phase decreases to a point within the operating area
for the high-set limit, QHigh<, the LARP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The LARP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the operating area,
• carrier received signal, LARP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The LARP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases is within the operating area,
• carrier received signal, LAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still exe-
cuted. Therefore, deactivating the input LARP-BLOCK or LARP-VTSU can cause a trip from
the LARP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the LARP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 250. There are five output signals from the LARP function:

476
Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

LARP-STLOW: Low-set start

LARP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
LARP-STHIGH: High-set start
LARP-TRHIGH: High-set trip
LARP-NODIR Non-directional indication

The blocking signals LARP-BLOCK and LARP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any
output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the active/reactive
power enters the operating area, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal
is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active/reactive power remains in the operating area
for two of the three phases, and the carrier receive signal LARP-CR is true. If the parameter
DirOper is set to On, also direction of the reactive power, in at least one of the phases, has to be
in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

The amplitude of U and I are computed for each phase and compared with predefined limits
(blocking limits). If the amplitude is considererd to be under the limit, the signal LARP-NODIR
is set. Blocking limits corresponds to 10% resp. 2.5% of nominal values of I and U.

477
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

LARP_L1FW

LARP_L2FW ≥1

LARP_L3FW LARP_STLOW
&
LARP_U_BLOCK1

LARP_U_BLOCK2 ≥1

LARP_U_BLOCK3
RV
&
LARP_L1L & LARP_tLow

≥1 t
LARP_L2L ≥1 & &
≥1
& LARP_TRLOW
LARP_L3L &
FW
LARP_I_BLOCK1 &
≥1
LARP_I_BLOCK2 ≥1
LARP_NODIR
LARP_I_BLOCK3 ≥1

LARP_Dir Low
& RV
LARP_L1H & LARP_tHigh
≥1 t
LARP_L2H ≥1 & &
≥1
LARP_TRHIGH
& &
LARP_L3H
&
LARP_Dir High FW

LARP_ Dir Oper

LARP_L1RV LARP_STHIGH
&
LARP_L2RV ≥1

LARP_L3RV

LARP_CR
LARP_BLOCK
LARP_VTSU

LARP_TEST ≥1
&
LARP_ TEST BLK
en01000356.vsd
Figure 250: Simplified logic diagram for the low active and reactive power protection function.

478
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

3.4 Calculation
3.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the combined low active and reactive power protection function are set via
the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for pa-
rameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the LARP function there are in total nine settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire LARP function has to be set to either On or Off.

DirOper: The directionality of the entire LARP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this
parameter is set to Off the LARP function operates irrespective of the direction of the reactive
power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the reactive power has to coincide with
the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip.

DirLow: The direction of low-set LARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

DirHigh: The direction of high-set LARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

QLow<: This is the low-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power decreases below
this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent,
where 100% corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input
(e.g. 110/√3V) and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g.
110/√3*1A=63.5VAr. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have
to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the
total three-phase reactive power divided by 3.

QHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power decreases below
this limit, when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made according to
the same procedure as for the low-set limit.

k: This is the declination angle of the operating characteristic, shown in figure 249. The setting
is made in degrees, within [0.0-45.0].

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LARP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point
outside the operating characteristic, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no
trip output is activated.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the LARP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point
outside the operating characteristic, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and
no trip output is activated.

The pick-up level for the operating characteristic, i.e. QLow< and QHigh< in combination with
k, must be set with some margin, to the lowest active/reactive power level that can appear during
normal operation conditions.

479
 Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

For any application where the reactive power direction, in the power system element under con-
sideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the LARP function is recommended, i.e.
DirOper should be set to On. If the reactive power flow can be in one direction only, non-direc-
tional operation of the LARP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direc-
tion, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application.

The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier re-
ceived signals, should normally be set to zero.

3.4.2 Setting example

Figure 251 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The LARP function is
going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd
Figure 251: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line.

Relevant data for the LARP function setting are shown in table 24.

Table 24: Relevant data for the LARP function setting

CT1 ratio 200/1
VT1 ratio 55000/√3 / 110/√3
CT2 ratio 150/1
CT3 ratio 600/5
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Minimum reactive power to the load 1.5 Mvar
Maximum cos(ϕ) 0.95

480
Low active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(LARP) System protection and control
functions

Since this is a step-down transformer, with no downstream generation, non-directionality is

used. For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes
from the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional
time delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the LARP function to be zero. The fol-
lowing procedure shows how to calculate the LARP function pick-up value.

Minimum reactive power to the load is 1.5 Mvar. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up
value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

1
Q < primary = --- ⋅ 0.80 ⋅ 1.5MVAr = 0.4MVAr
3
(Equation 334)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

110
----------
1 3 110
Qsecondary = Qprimary ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ---------------- = 400000 ⋅ ------------------------------- VAr = 4VAr
200 55000 ---------------- 200 ⋅ 55000
3
(Equation 335)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base
current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V ⋅ 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 336)

The setting of the parameter QLow< will therefore be:

4VAr
QLow< = ------------------- = 0.063 = 6.3%
63.5VA
(Equation 337)

Since the maximum power factor is 0.95, the minimum phase angle between the voltage and the
current is arccos (0.95)=18 degrees. To have some margin to this value, k is chosen to 15 de-
grees.

481
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

4 High active power protection (HAPP)

4.1 Application
The high active power protection function (HAPP) can be used wherever a high active power
signal is needed.

There are a number of applications for the high active power protection, wherever active power
flow has to be limited or certain actions have to be taken when the active power exceeds specific
values.

One example is to arm system protection schemes based on high active power transfer. Suppose
that the transmission corridor, in figure 252, can transfer 500 MW on each line. With all four
lines in operation, the generation shedding system, triggered by line trip, has to be armed at a
transfer of 1500 MW. If one line is tripped, or out of service, and the transmission exceeds 1000
MW, the generation shedding has to be armed.

Arming
HAPP function

Sum(I1-I4)
VT1
Generator rejection CT1 Line 1
scheme

CT2
Line 2

~ CT3
Line 3

Source Load &

CT4 Generation
Line 4

en03000130.vsd

Figure 252: Generation shedding system armed by high active power.

4.2 Functionality
4.2.1 General
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic,
• block and fuse failure logic.

482
High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

When the active power in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, PLow>, the HAPP-STLOW out-
put signal is activated. When the active power in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, PHigh>,
the HAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The HAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PLow>,

• carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PHigh>,

• carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the HAPP function,
is based on local criteria only.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still exe-
cuted. Therefore, deactivating the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from
the HAPP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the HAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 253. There are four output signals from the HAPP function:

HAPP-STLOW: Low-set start

HAPP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
HAPP-STHIGH High-set start
HAPP-TRHIGH: High-set trip

The blocking signals HAPP-BLOCK and HAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any
output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has
been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after
the set time delay, if the active power is higher than the set value in two of the three phases and
the carrier receive signal HAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction
of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the
parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

483
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

HAPP_L1FW

HAPP_L2FW ≥1

HAPP_L3FW HAPP_STLOW
&

RV
&
HAPP_L1L & HAPP_tLow

≥1 t
HAPP_L2L ≥1 & &
≥1
& HAPP_TRLOW
HAPP_L3L &

FW
&

HAPP_Dir Low
& RV
HAPP_L1H & HAPP_tHigh

≥1 t
HAPP_L2H ≥1 & &
≥1
HAPP_TRHIGH
& &
HAPP_L3H
&
HAPP_Dir High FW

HAPP_ Dir Oper

HAPP_L1RV HAPP_STHIGH
&
HAPP_L2RV ≥1

HAPP_L3RV

HAPP_CR
HAPP_BLOCK
HAPP_VTSU

HAPP_TEST ≥1
&
HAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000359.vsd
Figure 253: Simplified logic diagram for the high active power protection function.

4.2.2 Active power calculation

The active power is calculated for each phase separately as:

484
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

P ph = U ph ⋅ Iph ⋅ cos ( ϕ )
(Equation 338)

where:
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,
U ph

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

I ph

cos (ϕ) is the power factor, and

ϕ is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according
to figure 254.

Im Uph

Re
ϕ

Iph

en03000123.vsd

Figure 254: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active power calculation.

4.2.3 Direction of active power

According to equation 338, the direction of active power is defined as:

• forward, if Pph > 0, i.e. if -90°< ϕ <90°, and

• reverse, if Pph <0, i.e. if 90°< ϕ <270°

The direction of active power is illustrated in figure 255. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off,
the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of
the active power, Pph, exceeds the setting, irrespective of the direction of the power.

485
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Q Q

High-set High-set
Operating Operating
area area
for for
Forward Reverse
direction direction
PHigh> P PHigh> P

en03000131.vsd

Figure 255: Direction of active power.

4.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic,
• block and fuse failure logic.

When the active power in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, PLow>, the HAPP-STLOW out-
put signal is activated. When the active power in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, PHigh>,
the HAPP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The HAPP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PLow>,

• carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HAPP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active power in at least 2 phases exceeds PHigh>,

• carrier received signal, HAPP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the HAPP function,
is based on local criteria only.

486
High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still exe-
cuted. Therefore, deactivating the input HAPP-BLOCK or HAPP-VTSU can cause a trip from
the HAPP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the HAPP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 256. There are four output signals from the HAPP function:

HAPP-STLOW: Low-set start

HAPP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
HAPP-STHIGH High-set start
HAPP-TRHIGH: High-set trip

The blocking signals HAPP-BLOCK and HAPP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any
output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the set value has
been reached, in any phase. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off, a trip signal is achieved, after
the set time delay, if the active power is higher than the set value in two of the three phases and
the carrier receive signal HAPP-CR is true. If the parameter DirOper is set to On, also direction
of the active power, in at least one of the phases, has to be in accordance with the setting of the
parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

487
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

HAPP_L1FW

HAPP_L2FW ≥1

HAPP_L3FW HAPP_STLOW
&

RV
&
HAPP_L1L & HAPP_tLow

≥1 t
HAPP_L2L ≥1 & &
≥1
& HAPP_TRLOW
HAPP_L3L &

FW
&

HAPP_Dir Low
& RV
HAPP_L1H & HAPP_tHigh

≥1 t
HAPP_L2H ≥1 & &
≥1
HAPP_TRHIGH
& &
HAPP_L3H
&
HAPP_Dir High FW

HAPP_ Dir Oper

HAPP_L1RV HAPP_STHIGH
&
HAPP_L2RV ≥1

HAPP_L3RV

HAPP_CR
HAPP_BLOCK
HAPP_VTSU

HAPP_TEST ≥1
&
HAPP_ TEST BLK
en01000359.vsd
Figure 256: Simplified logic diagram for the high active power protection function.

488
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

4.4 Calculation
4.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the high active power protection function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as
setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the HAPP function there are in total eight settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire HAPP function has to be set to either On or Off.

DirOper: The directionality of the entire HAPP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this
parameter is set to Off the HAPP function operates irrespective of the direction of the active
power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the active power has to coincide with
the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip.

DirLow: The direction of low-set HAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

DirHigh: The direction of high-set HAPP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the active power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

PLow>: This is the low-set limit of the active power. If the active power exceeds this limit the
function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the product of the
base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/√3V) and the base current of the cor-
responding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g. 110/√3V*1A=63.5W. To find the corresponding
primary value, also the CT and VT ratios have to be taken into account. It is important to em-
phasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e. the total three-phase active power divided by 3.

PHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the active power. If the active power exceeds this limit the
function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HAPP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power returns to a value below the
set-limit, PLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is is-
sued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HAPP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active power returns to a value below the
set-limit, PHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is is-
sued.

The pick-up level for PLow> and PHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest active
power level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

For any application where the active power direction, in the power system element under con-
sideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the HAPP function is recommended, i.e.
DirOper should be set to On. If the active power flow can be in one direction only, non-direc-
tional operation of the HAPP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

489
 High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direc-
tion, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application.

4.4.2 Setting example

Figure 257 shows a transmission corridor comprising four lines. The HAPP function is going to
be implemented in the sending end to arm the generation shedding system. Each transmission
line can carry 500 MW. Two arming levels will be used: one for 4 lines in operation at 1500
MW, and another one for 3 lines in operation at 1000 MW.

Arming
HAPP function

Sum(I1-I4)
VT1
Generator rejection CT1 Line 1
scheme

CT2
Line 2

~ CT3
Line 3

Source Load &

CT4 Generation
Line 4

en03000130.vsd
Figure 257: Transmission corridor with generation rejection scheme.

Relevant data for the HAPP function setting are shown in table 25.

Table 25: Relevant data for the HAPP function setting

CT1-CT4 ratio 1000/1
VT1 ratio 400000/√3 / 110/√3
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in a HMI tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Maximum active power per line 500 MW

Since high levels of active power flow can be in one direction only, non-directionality is used.
For this simple example we show the setting procedure for the low-setting only. The carrier re-
ceive signal, CR, should be set to fixed true signal in the configuration. Since the protection is
installed to avoid transient instability after another line trip - the arming of the generation pro-

490
High active power protection (HAPP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

tection scheme can be instantaneous. Therefore we choose the time delay of the HAPP function
to be zero. A complementary low active power function can be used to disarm the generation
shedding system. The following procedure shows how to calculate the HAPP function pick-up
value.

Maximum active power for the low-set level is chosen to 1000 MW corresponding to the capac-
ity of two lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is
phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

P< 1
primary = --- ⋅ 0.95 ⋅ 1000MW = 317MW
3
(Equation 339)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

110
----------
1 3 6 110
Psecondary = Pprimary ⋅ ------------- ⋅ ---------------- = 317 ⋅ 10 ⋅ ---------------------------------------6- W = 87.2W
1000 400000 ---------------- 1000 ⋅ 0.4 ⋅ 10
3
(Equation 340)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base
current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V ⋅ 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 341)

The setting of the parameter PLow> will therefore be:

87.2W
PLow> = ------------------- = 1.37 = 137%
63.5VA
(Equation 342)

491
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

5 High active and reactive power protection (HARP)

5.1 Application
The combined high active and reactive power protection function (HARP) can be used wherever
a high reactive power signal is needed. The trip criterion is a function of the set value and the
actual active power according to:

Q trip = Q set + α ⋅ P
(Equation 343)

where:
0≤α≤1

This design gives the user a possibility to stabilize the function for high levels of active power.

The function can be used wherever a high reactive power criterion is needed. Typically, high
reactive power output from generators, connected to transmission grids, is used as an important
signal in system protection schemes to counteract voltage instability. The bus voltage, in substa-
tions with substantial nearby generation, is not a good indicator of the system health, since the
voltage is kept high by the generators. The reactive power output from the generators is however
very useful, since it is a measure of the effort required to keep up the voltage. To increase secu-
rity the carrier received signal, CR, can be used to arm the HARP function, either manually or
automatically, based on suitable criteria. The example is illustrated in figure 258.

High
CR for reactive
arming power System
HARP function Protection
Scheme

VT1
Line 1

~
CT1

Line 2
Generator

en03000126.vsd

Figure 258: High reactive power detection for generator output.

492
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

5.2 Functionality
5.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the combined high active and re-
active power protection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the combined high active and reactive power protection facility is rather
straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated active power, P, and the reactive
power, Q, based on measured voltage and current.
• The direction of Q is compared to settings.

This section describes the method used when the value and the direction of the activepower, P,
and the reactive power, Q, are calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

5.2.2 Active and reactive power calculation

The active and reactive power are calculated for each phase separately as:

P ph = U ph ⋅ Iph ⋅ cos ( ϕ ) Q ph = Uph ⋅ I ph ⋅ sin ( ϕ )

(Equation 344)

where:
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component,
U ph

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component,

I ph

cos (ϕ) is the power factor, and

ϕ is the phase-angle between the phase-voltage and the phase-current, according
to figure 259.

493
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

Im Uph

Re
ϕ

Iph

en03000123.vsd

Figure 259: Phasor diagram showing voltage and current for active and reactive power calcu-
lation.

5.2.3 Direction of reactive power

According to equation 344, the direction of reactive power is defined as

• forward, if Qph >0, i.e. if 0° < ϕ <180°, and

• reverse, if Qph <0, i.e. if 180° < ϕ < 360°.

The direction of reactive power is illustrated in figure 260. If the parameter DirOper is set to Off,
the function operates non-directional, i.e. appropriate outputs are activated if the magnitude of
the reactive power, Qph, exceeds the setting, irrespective of the direction of the reactive power.
Since only the absolute value of the active power is used, the direction of the active power does
not affect the functionality.

Q Q
High-set operating
area for Forward
direction

QHigh>

P P
QHigh>

k
High-set
operating area
for Reverse
direction

en03000127.vsd

Figure 260: Direction and operation area for high reactive power.

494
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

5.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic,
• block and fuse failure logic.

When the active/reactive power in any phase enters the operating area, according to figure 260
, for the low-set limit, QLow>, the HARP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the ac-
tive/reactive power in any phase enters the operating area for the high-set limit, QHigh>, the
LARP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The HARP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the low-set operating
area,
• carrier received signal, HARP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The HARP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the active and reactive power in at least 2 phases are within the high-set operating
area,
• carrier received signal, HARP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

Note!
The HARP-BLOCK or HARP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still exe-
cuted. Therefore, deactivating the input HARP-BLOCK or HARP-VTSU can cause a trip from
the HARP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the HARP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 261. There are four output signals from the HARP function:

HARP-STLOW: Low-set start

HARP-TRLOW Low-set trip
HARP-STHIGH High-set start
HARP-TRHIGH High-set trip

The blocking signals HARP-BLOCK and HARP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any
output. The start signals are non-directional, and a start signal appears when the active/reactive
power enters the operating area, in any phase. If the parameter HARP-DirOper is set to Off, a
trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the active/reactive power remains in the oper-

495
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

ating area for two of the three phases, and the carrier receive signal HARP-CR is true. If the pa-
rameter DirOper is set to On, also direction of the reactive power, in at least one of the phases,
has to be in accordance with the setting of the parameters DirLow and DirHigh, respectively.

HARP_L1FW

HARP_L2FW ≥1

HARP_L3FW HARP_STLOW
&

≥2
RV
&
HARP_L1L HARP_tLow

≥1 t
&
HARP_L2L
≥1
HARP_TRLOW
HARP_L3L &
FW
&

HARP_Dir Low
HARP_L1H & RV
≥1 HARP_tHigh

HARP_L2H t &
≥1
HARP_L3H HARP_TRHIGH
&
≥2
&
HARP_Dir High FW

HARP_ Dir Oper

HARP_L1RV HARP_STHIGH
&
HARP_L2RV ≥1

HARP_L3RV

HARP_CR
HARP_BLOCK
HARP_VTSU

HARP_TEST ≥1
&
HARP_ TEST BLK
en06000052.vsd

Figure 261: Simplified logic diagram for the combined high active and reactive power protec-
tion function.

496
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

5.4 Calculation
5.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the combined high active and reactive power protection function are set via
the local HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for pa-
rameter details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the HARP function there are in total nine settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire HARP function has to be set to either On or Off.

DirOper: The directionality of the entire HARP function has to be set to either On or Off. If this
parameter is set to Off the HARP function operates irrespective of the direction of the reactive
power. If this parameter is set to On the directionality of the reactive power has to coincide with
the direction set value (Forward or Reverse), for the low-set and the high-set, to initiate a trip.

DirLow: The direction of low-set HARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

DirHigh: The direction of high-set HARP function is set to either Forward or Reverse, by this
parameter. That means that, only when the direction of the reactive power is in accordance with
the direction of the setting, a trip is initiated.

QLow>: This is the low-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power exceeds this limit,
when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100%
corresponds to the product of the base voltage of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/√3V)
and the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A), e.g.
110/√3V*1A=63.5VAr. To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT and VT ratios
have to be taken into account. It is important to emphasize that the setting is made per phase, i.e.
the total three-phase reactive power divided by 3.

QHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the reactive power. If the reactive power exceeds this limit,
when the active power is zero, the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same
procedure as for the low-set limit.

k: This is the declination angle of the operating characteristic, shown in figure 260. The setting
is made in degrees, within [0.0-45.0].

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HARP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point
outside the operating characteristic, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no
trip output is issued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the HARP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the active/reactive power recovers to a point
outside the operating characteristic, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and
no trip output is issued.

The pick-up level for the operating characteristic, i.e. QLow> and QHigh> in combination with
k, must be set with some margin, to the highest active/reactive power level that can appear dur-
ing normal operation conditions.

497
 High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

For any application where the reactive power direction, in the power system element under con-
sideration, can be of both directions, directionality of the HARP function is recommended, i.e.
DirOper should be set to On. If the reactive power flow can be in one direction only, non-direc-
tional operation of the HARP function is sufficient, i.e. DirOper can be set to Off.

The directionality can be independently set for the low- and high-set pick-up levels. The direc-
tion, Forward or Reverse, is chosen with respect to the application.

5.4.2 Setting example

Figure 262 shows a generator connected to a transmission grid. The HARP function is going to
be implemented to give a "high reactive power output from the generator"-signal to the system
protection scheme against voltage collapse. The HARP function should be in continuous oper-
ation, so the CR signal is set to fixed true in the configuration. In this case a pure reactive power
function is desired, so k is chosen to be 0.

High
CR for reactive
arming power System
HARP function Protection
Scheme

VT1
Line 1

~
CT1

Line 2
Generator

en03000126.vsd

Figure 262: HARP function for a system protection scheme.

Relevant data for the HARP function setting are shown in table 26.

Table 26: Relevant data for the HARP function setting

CT1 ratio 1000/1
VT1 ratio 420000/√3 / 110/√3
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Maximum acceptable reactive power output 280 Mvar

498
High active and reactive power protection Chapter 13
(HARP) System protection and control
functions

Since this is a generator, with power flow in one direction only, non-directionality is used. For
this simple example we use the low-setting only. To avoid triggering of the system protection
scheme due to transient conditions during faults, a time delay with some margin to back-up
clearance of transmission system faults is chosen. In this case tLow is chosen to 1.00 s, which
gives enough time to counteract a long term voltage instability. The following procedure shows
how to calculate the HARP function pick-up value.

Maximum acceptable reactive power from the generator is 280 Mvar. Let us use this value for
the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we get the following primary setting:

1
Q< primary = --- ⋅ 280MVAr = 93.3MVAr
3
(Equation 345)

The power ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the VT and CT ratios:

110
----------
1 3 6 110
Q secondary = Q primary ⋅ ------------- ⋅ -------------------- = 93.3 ⋅ 10 ⋅ ------------------------------------------6- VAr = 24.4VAr
1000 420000 -------------------- 1000 ⋅ 0.42 ⋅ 10
3
(Equation 346)

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base power, calculated from the settings of the base
current and the base voltage of the corresponding inputs on the terminal as:

S base = 63.5V ⋅ 1A = 63.5VA

(Equation 347)

The setting of the parameter QLow> will therefore be:

24.4VAr
QLow> = --------------------- = 0.384 = 38.4%
63.5VA
(Equation 348)

499
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

6 Sudden change in phase current protection

function (SCC1)

6.1 Application
6.1.1 General
The sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) can be used wherever a sudden change
in current can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection system. The main
application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used.

Three different application examples for the sudden change in current protection function
(SCC1) are given below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feed-
ing line, a line connected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit
breaker in another substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local sudden
change in current criterion is added, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

6.1.2 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line

The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to provide a
local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security
of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for this function is a power transform-
er directly connected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in Figure 263.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

Figure 263: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line.

Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of
the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the
fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of
the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in
order to open also the line circuit breaker.

The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so
called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due
to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line.

500
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the
same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the
end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

A sudden change in current occurs, in at least one of the phases at the sending end of the line,
when the differential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side,
and the breaker contacts open. This means, that a sudden change in current function, properly
set, could provide a good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the
transformer, with basically unchanged dependability. The SCC1 function could preferably be in-
tegrated in the line protection in the sending end.

6.1.3 Line connected shunt reactor

The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to, provide a
local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security
of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the SCC1 function is a line con-
nected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 264.
Shunt reactors are used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage
lines. Solid connection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will
occur, irrespective of the switching state.

CR
TRIP
LDD

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2

Source Load
Line connected TRIP
shunt reactor
IDIFF>
CS
CT3

en03000121.vsd

Figure 264: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor.

Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line
circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in
the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for
low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the
remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end.
Sudden change in current in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker
pole get stuck in the reactor end) is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase se-
curity.

501
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

6.1.4 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip

The main purpose of the sudden change in current protection function (SCC1) is to provide a
local criterion, which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security
of the overall tripping functionality. A typical application for the SCC1 function is a breaker fail-
ure protection with transfer trip.

Figure 265 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two trans-
mission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker
arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates cor-
rectly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single
pole tripping capabilities.

A B C

FAULT B1 B4
L1
CS CR
BFP LDD TRIP
B2 B5
L2

B3 B6
TRIP TRIP

en03000122.vsd
Figure 265: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third cir-
cuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line
end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C.

A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation
C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR
signal. Depending on the rest of the network the sudden change in current criterion, in at least
two phases, could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due
to false CR signals.

6.2 Functionality
6.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in current pro-
tection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the sudden change in current protection facility is rather straightforward: Set-
ting limits are compared to the calculated change in current, based on measurement of the cur-
rent magnitude for two consecutive cycles.This section describes the method used when the
value of the change in current is calculated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

502
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

6.2.2 Sudden change in current calculation

The sudden change in current is calculated for each phase separately as

Idiff ph = AB S I ph ( k ) – I ph ( k – 1 )

(Equation 349)

where:
is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) current component for power system cy-
I ph ( k ) cle number k

Normally Idiffph is very close to zero. At a sudden change in current, increase or decrease, Id-
iffph will reach a substantial level.

6.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic
• trip logic
• block logic

When the sudden change in current in any phase exceeds the set limit, DIL>, the SCC1-START
output signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed.

The SCC1-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• SCC1 function has picked up in at least 2 phases, and

• the carrier received signal SCC1-CR, is true.

The SCC1-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHTrip has elapsed.

Note!
The SCC1-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore,
deactivating the input SCC1-BLOCK can cause a trip from the SCC1 function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the SCC1 function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 266. There are two output signals from the SCC1 function:

SCC1-START: Start signal

SCC1-TRIP: Trip signal

The blocking signal SCC1-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

503
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

SCC1_tHstart

t SCC1_START
&
SCC1_L1

SCC1_L2 ≥1
SCC1_tHTrip

SCC1_L3 t
SCC1_TRIP
&
&
& ≥1
&

SCC1_BLOCK

≥1
SCC1_TEST
&
SCC1_TEST BLK

SCC1_CR

en01000362.vsd
Figure 266: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in residual current protection
function.

6.4 Calculation
6.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the sudden change in current protection function are set via the local HMI or
PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details,
such as setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the SCC1 function there are in total four settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire SCC1 function has to be set to either On or Off.

DIL> This is the change in current limit of the sudden change in current. If the RMS value of
the current changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power system cycles, the
function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current
of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also
the CT ratio has to be taken into account.

504
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least one phase of the SCC1 function, to the
reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually the duration of the true output on the SCC1-START
signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds.

tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least two phases of the SCC1 function, to the
reset of the trip signal. tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCC1-TRIP sig-
nal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds.

The pick-up level for DIL>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in
current caused by normal switching and load changes.

There is no intentional time delay in the SCC1 function.

6.4.2 Setting example

Figure 267 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The SCC1 function is
going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

Figure 267: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line.

Table 27: Relevant data for the SCC1 function setting

CT1 ratio 200/1
VT1 ratio 55000/√3 / 110/√3
CT2 ratio 150/1
CT3 ratio 600/5
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/Analog Inputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configuration/Ana-
log Inputs/I1-I5
Minimum load current 55 A
Maximum sudden change in current, due to switch- 12 A
ing and load change

505
 Sudden change in phase current protection Chapter 13
function (SCC1) System protection and control
functions

To be able to achieve selectivity, for a fault at minimum load, the minimum load current must
be higher than the maximum sudden change in current, due to other events than a fault, such as
switching and load change. On the other hand a false SCC1-START or SCC1-TRIP can in most
cases be accepted since, it must coincide with a SCC1-CR signal to take any action. The follow-
ing procedure shows how to calculate the SCC1 function pick-up value.

Minimum load current is 55 A. Let us use 80% of this value for the pick-up value. We get the
following primary setting:

Iprimary = 0.80 x 55A = 44A

The current ratio from the primary to the secondary, is calculated based on the CT ratio:

1 1
I secondary = Iprimary × ---------- = 44 × ---------- A = 0.22A
200 200

The pick-up value is set in percent of the base current of the corresponding current inputs on the
terminal as:

Ibase = 1A

The setting of the parameter DIL> will therefore be:

0.22A
DIL> = ---------------- = 0.22 = 22%
1A

The hold time for the outputs, tHStart and tHTrip, are both set to 2s, to give long enough time
to get the CR signal from the remote end.

If pick-up by one of three phases is sufficient, the SCC1-START signal is used. If pick-up by
two out of three phases is desired, the SCC1-TRIP signal is used.

506
 Sudden change in residual current protection Chapter 13
function (SCRC) System protection and control
functions

7 Sudden change in residual current protection

function (SCRC)

7.1 Application
The sudden change in residual current protection function (SCRC) can be used wherever a sud-
den change in residual current can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection
system. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are
used.

The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used.
Whenever an earth-fault occurs, or a circuit-breaker get stuck in one phase, a residual current
appears, that can be used to increase the security of transfer trip arrangements.

7.2 Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in residual
current protection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the sudden change in residual current protection facility is rather straightfor-
ward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated change in residual current, based on
measurement of the current magnitude for two consecutive cycles.

This section describes the method used when the value of the change in residual current is cal-
culated and how the conditioning elements are checked.

7.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic, and
• block logic.

When the sudden change in residual current exceeds the set limit, DIN>, the SCRC-START out-
put signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed.

The SCRC-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• SCRC function has picked up, and

• the carrier received signal, SCRC-CR, is true.

507
 Sudden change in residual current protection Chapter 13
function (SCRC) System protection and control
functions

The SCRC-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed.

Note!
The SCRC-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore,
deactivating the input SCRC-BLOCK can cause a trip from the SCRC function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the SCRC function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 268. There are two output signals from the SCRC function:

SCRC-START: Start signal

SCRC-TRIP: Trip signal

The blocking signal SCRC-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

SCRC_tHStart

t SCRC_START
&

SCRC_tHTrip

SCRC_R t
SCRC_TRIP
&

SCRC_CR

SCRC_BLOCK

≥1

SCRC_TEST
&
SCRC_TEST BLK

en01000363.vsd
Figure 268: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in residual current protection
function.

508
 Sudden change in residual current protection Chapter 13
function (SCRC) System protection and control
functions

7.4 Calculation
7.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the sudden change in residual current protection function are set via the local
HMI or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter
details, such as setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the SCRC function there are in total five settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire SCRC function has to be set to either On or Off.

DIN>:This is the change in residual current limit of the sudden change in residual current. If the
RMS value of the residual current changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power
system cycles, the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds
to the base current of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding
primary value, also the CT ratio has to be taken into account.

tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, to the reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually
the duration of the true output on the SCRC-START signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made
in seconds.

tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, of the SCRC function, to the reset of the trip signal.
tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCRC-TRIP signal, after a pick-up. The
setting is made in seconds.

IMeasured: This parameter has to be set to I4 or I5, depending on, from which input the current
signal used in the function is taken.

The pick-up level for DIN>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in
residual current caused by normal switching and load changes.

There is no intentional time delay in the SCRC function.

509
 Sudden change in voltage protection function Chapter 13
(SCV) System protection and control
functions

8 Sudden change in voltage protection function

(SCV)

8.1 Application
The sudden change in voltage protection function (SCV) can be used wherever a sudden change
in voltage can be used to improve the overall functionality of the protection system.

One application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are used. Another
application is to recognize network topology changes that cause sudden changes in the voltage.
Also faults, tap-changer operations, shunt device switching, etc., cause sudden changes in volt-
age that can be captured by the SCV function.

8.2 Functionality
8.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the sudden change in voltage pro-
tection function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the sudden change in voltage protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated change in voltage, based on mea-
surement of the voltage magnitude for two consecutive cycles.

This section describes the method used when the value of the change in voltage is calculated and
how the conditioning elements are checked.

8.2.2 Sudden change in voltage calculation

The sudden change in voltage is calculated for each phase separately as

Udiff ph = ABS U ph ( k ) – Uph ( k – 1 )

(Equation 350)

where

is the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) voltage component for power sys-
tem cycle number k.
U ph ( k )

Normally Udiffph is very close to zero. At a sudden change in voltage, increase or decrease, Udif-
fph will reach a substantial level.

510
 Sudden change in voltage protection function Chapter 13
(SCV) System protection and control
functions

8.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic, and
• block and fuse failure logic

When the sudden change in voltage in any phase exceeds the set limit, DUL>, the SCV-START
output signal is activated, and kept activated until the hold time tHStart has elapsed.

The SCV-TRIP signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• SCV function has picked up in at least 2 phases, and

• the carrier received signal, SCV-CR, is true.
• The SCV-TRIP signal is kept activated until the hold time tHTrip has elapsed.

Note!
The SCV-BLOCK or SCV-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed.
Therefore, deactivating the input SCV-BLOCK or SCV-VTSU can cause a trip from the SCV
function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the SCC1 function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 269. There are two output signals from the SCV function:

SCV-START: Start signal

SCV-TRIP: Trip signal

The blocking signal SCV-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

511
 Sudden change in voltage protection function Chapter 13
(SCV) System protection and control
functions

SCV_tLow

t SCV_START
&
SCV_L1

SCV_L2 ≥1
SCV_tHigh

SCV_L3 t
SCV_TRIP
&
&
& ≥1
&

SCV_VTSU

SCV_BLOCK

≥1
SCV_TEST
&
SCV_TEST BLK

SCV_CR

en01000364.vsd

Figure 269: Simplified logic diagram for the sudden change in voltage protection function.

8.4 Calculation
8.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the sudden change in voltage protection function are set via the local HMI
or PST (Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details,
such as setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the SCV function there are in total four settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire SCV function has to be set to either On or Off.

DUL>: This is the change in voltage limit of the sudden change in voltage. If the RMS value of
the voltage changes more than this limit, between two consecutive power system cycles, the
function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base voltage
of the corresponding voltage input (e.g. 110/√3=63.5 V). To find the corresponding primary val-
ue, also the VT ratio has to be taken into account.

512
Sudden change in voltage protection function Chapter 13
(SCV) System protection and control
functions

tHStart: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least one phase of the SCV function, to the
reset of the start signal. tHStart is actually the duration of the true output on the SCV-START
signal, after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds.

tHTrip: This is hold time from the pick-up, by at least two phases of the SCV function, to the
reset of the trip signal. tHTrip is actually the duration of the true output on the SCV-TRIP signal,
after a pick-up. The setting is made in seconds.

The pick-up level for DUL>, should be set, with some margin, to the largest sudden changes in
voltage caused by events that is not of interest for the present SCV function.

There is no intentional time delay in the SCV function.

513
 Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

9 Overvoltage protection (OVP)

9.1 Application
The overvoltage protection function (OVP) can be used wherever a "high voltage" signal is
needed.

There are a number of applications for the high voltage protection. It can be used wherever a
high voltage is the result of an event that has to be indicated or actions to reduce the time with
high voltage levels are required.

One example is to take actions to quickly reduce high voltage levels by switching out shunt ca-
pacitors or switching in shunt reactors in case of a long transmission line connected in one end
only. An example is shown in figure 270. If line 1 for some reason is disconnected in the far end,
the voltage will increase in the substation. The overvoltage protection will then switch out shunt
capacitors connected to the bus at the low-set level and switch in shunt reactors at the high-set
level.

OVP-TRHIGH
OVP function

OVP-TRLOW
XC VT1

Line 1
XL

Load &
Generation

en03000129.vsd
Figure 270: Overvoltage protection to switch shunt devices.

9.2 Functionality
9.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the overvoltage protection func-
tion, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the overvoltage protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS voltage of the fundamental,
based on voltage measurements.

514
 Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

This section describes the method used when the value of the voltage, is calculated and how the
conditioning elements are checked.

9.2.2 Votage calculation

The voltage is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS value of the fundamental (50 or
60 Hz) voltage component.

9.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic
• trip logic
• block and fuse failure logic

When the voltage in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, ULLow>, the OVP-STLOW output
signal is activated. When the voltage in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, ULHigh>, the
OVP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The OVP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the voltage in at least 2 phases exceeds the setting ULLow>,

• carrier received signal, OVP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The OVP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the voltage in at least 2 phases exceeds the setting ULHigh>,

• carrier received signal, OVP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the OVP function,
is based on local criteria only.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU is activated.

Note!
The OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed.
Therefore, deactivating the input OVP-BLOCK or OVP-VTSU can cause a trip from the OVP
function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the OVP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 271. There are four output signals from the OVP function:

515
 Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

OVP-STLOW: Low-set start

OVP-TRLOW Low-set trip
OVP-STHIGH High-set start
OVP-TRHIGH High-set trip

The blocking signals OVP-BLOCK and OVP-VTSU must be zero to be able to activate any out-
put. A trip signal is achieved, after the set time delay, if the voltage is higher than the set value
in two of the three phases and the carrier receive signal OVP-CR is true.

OVP_STLOW
&
OVP_L1L

OVP_L2L ≥1 OVP_tLow

OVP_L3L t
OVP_TRLOW
&

≥2

OVP_tHigh
t
OVP_TRHIGH
&
OVP_L1H

OVP_L2H ≥1

OVP_L3H OVP_STHIGH
&

≥2

OVP_CR

OVP_BLOCK
OVP_VTSU
≥1

OVP_TEST
&
OVP_TEST BLK

en06000053.vsd
Figure 271: Simplified logic diagram for the overvoltage protection function.

516
 Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

9.4 Calculation
9.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the overvoltage protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting
range, and path in local HMI.

For the OVP function there are in total seven settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire OVP function has to be set to either On or Off.

ULLow>: This is the low-set limit of the voltage. If the voltage exceeds this limit the function
picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base voltage of the cor-
responding voltage input (e.g. 110/√3). To find the corresponding primary value, also the VT
ratio has to be taken into account.

ULHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the voltage. If the voltage exceeds this limit the function
picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OVP low-set function to the
issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the voltage returns to a value below
the set-limit, ULLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output
is issued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OVP high-set function to the
issue of the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the voltage returns to a value below
the set-limit, ULHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output
is issued.

Hysteresis: Reset ratio of the OVP function. The reset ratio can be set in the range of
94.0-99.0%.

Accuracy: The accuracy has to be set to either normal or high. If high accuracy is required, a
longer measuring time has to be accepted.

The pick-up level for ULLow> and ULHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest
voltage level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

9.4.2 Setting example

Figure 272 shows a busbar in a transmission network. The OVP function is going to be imple-
mented in the sending end to switch the shunt devices at high voltage levels.

517
 Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

OVP-TRHIGH
OVP function

OVP-TRLOW
XC VT1

Line 1
XL

Load &
Generation

en03000129.vsd
Figure 272: Busbar with overvoltage protection.

Relevant data for the OVP function setting are shown in table 28.

Table 28: Relevant data for the OVP function setting

VT1 ratio 400000/√3 / 110/√3
Ubx - Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx - Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Normal operating voltage interval 410-420 kV
Maximum operating voltage 425 kV

Both the shunt capacitor (XC) and the shunt reactor (XL) give a voltage change of about 5 kV.
Therefore the capacitor is switched out at 415 kV, and the reactor is switched in at 420 kV. The
time delay is not critical, so to avoid unwanted switching due to transients, one second is chosen.
The high accuracy level is chosen and the hysteresis is chosen to 99.0%, since we are dealing
with quite small relative changes in voltage. The calculation of the settings for the low-set and
the high-set of the voltage level is then straightforward.

110
----------
3 1 415 110 1
ULLow> = Uprimary ⋅ -------------------- ⋅ ----------- = ---------- ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ----------- = 1.0376 = 103.8%
400000 63.5 3 400 63.5
--------------------
3
(Equation 351)

518
Overvoltage protection (OVP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

110
----------
3 1 420 110 1
ULHigh> = Uprimary ⋅ -------------------- ⋅ ----------- = ---------- ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ----------- = 1.0501 = 105.0%
400000
-------------------- 63.5 3 400 63.5
3
(Equation 352)

519
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

10 Accurate undercurrent protection function (UCP)

10.1 Application
The undercurrent protection function (UCP) can be used wherever a “low current” signal is
needed. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are
used

Three different application examples for the undercurrent protection function (UCP) are given
below. The examples are a power transformer directly connected to the feeding line, a line con-
nected shunt reactor, and a breaker failure protection operating on a circuit breaker in another
substation. All the examples involve a transfer trip, to which a local low current criterion is add-
ed, to avoid unwanted trips, caused by false transfer trip signals.

10.1.1 Power transformer directly connected to the feeding line

The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to provide a local criterion,
which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall
tripping functionality. A typical application for this function is a power transformer directly con-
nected, without circuit breaker, to the feeding line, as shown in figure 273.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

Figure 273: Power transformer, directly connected to the feeding line.

Suppose that an internal non-symmetrical transformer fault appears within the protective area of
the transformer differential protection. The line protection will, in most cases, not recognize the
fault. The transformer differential protection operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of
the secondary side circuit breaker. It also sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line end in
order to open also the line circuit breaker.

The carrier receive (CR) signal could trip the line circuit breaker directly, according to a so
called direct transfer trip scheme (DTT), but in such cases security would be compromised, due
to the bad quality of the communication link. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line.
Therefore, a local detection device (LDD) is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the
same location as the line circuit breaker. The LDD must detect the abnormal conditions at the
end of the protected line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

520
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

The current in at least one of the phases at the sending end of the line decreases, when the dif-
ferential protection of the transformer trips the circuit breaker on the secondary side, and the
breaker contacts open. This means, that an undercurrent function, properly set, could provide a
good criterion to increase the security of the protection for the line and the transformer, with ba-
sically unchanged dependability. The UCP function could preferably be integrated in the line
protection in the sending end.

10.1.2 Line connected shunt reactor

The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to, provide a local criterion,
which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall
tripping functionality. A typical application for the UCP function is a line connected shunt reac-
tor, where the reactor is solidly connected to the line, as shown in figure 274. Shunt reactors are
used for compensation of the capacitive line charging currents on high voltage lines. Solid con-
nection of the shunt reactor to the line ensures that no dangerous overvoltage will occur, irre-
spective of the switching state.

CR
TRIP
LDD

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2

Source Load
Line connected TRIP
shunt reactor
IDIFF>
CS
CT3

en03000121.vsd

Figure 274: High voltage power line with solidly connected shunt reactor.

Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the local line
circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end. The line protection in
the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection, and will only operate for
low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal. To avoid line trips at the
remote end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion can be added at the remote end. Low
current in at least two of the phases (suppose that not more than one breaker pole get stuck in
the reactor end) is therefore found to be a very useful criterion to increase security.

10.1.3 Breaker failure protection with transfer trip

The main purpose of the undercurrent protection function (UCP) is to, provide a local criterion,
which is added to a received transfer trip signal, in order to increase the security of the overall
tripping functionality. A typical application for the UCP function is a breaker failure protection
with transfer trip.

521
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

Figure 275 presents a part of an EHV network with three substations (A, B and C) and two trans-
mission lines (L1 and L2). The substations are designed according to the one and a half breaker
arrangement. We suppose a fault on line L1. The upper breaker B1 in substation B operates cor-
rectly, but the middle breaker B2 fails to open in one pole, if we suppose breakers with single
pole tripping capabilities.

A B C

FAULT B1 B4
L1
CS CR
BFP LDD TRIP
B2 B5
L2

B3 B6
TRIP TRIP

en03000122.vsd

Figure 275: Breaker failure protection with transfer trip.

The breaker failure protection (BFP) detects the faulty breaker and trips the associated third cir-
cuit breaker B3 in the diameter. At the same time it sends the carrier signal CS to the remote line
end as a command to open the two circuit breakers (B5 and B6) for line L2, in substation C.

A local detection device (LDD), preferably integrated in the line protection device in substation
C, is used to increase the security of the complete scheme, by adding a local criterion to the CR
signal. Depending on the rest of the network the undercurrent criterion, in at least two phases,
could serve as a suitable criterion to increase security and avoid unwanted trips due to false CR
signals.

10.2 Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the undercurrent protection func-
tion, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the undercurrent protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental cur-
rent component, I, based on the measured current.

This section describes the method used when the value of the current, I, is calculated and how
the conditioning elements are checked.

Current calculation
The current is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or
60 Hz) current component.

522
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

Conditioning elements
There are no conditioning elements for the undercurrent function.

10.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic, and
• block logic

When the current in any phase decreases to a value below the low-set limit, ILLow<, the
UCP-STLOW output signal is activated. When the current in any phase decreases to a value be-
low the high-set limit, ILHigh<, the UCP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The UCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the current in at least two phases is below the low-set limit,

• carrier received signal, UCP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The UCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the current in at least two phases is below the high-set limit,

• carrier received signal, UCP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input UCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The UCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, de-
activating the input LAPP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the UCP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the UCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 276. There are four output signals from the UCP function:

UCP-STLOW: Low-set start

UCP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
UCP-STHIGH: High-set start
UCP-TRHIGH: High-set trip

The blocking signals UCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output. The start sig-
nals, as well as the trip signals, are non-directional.

523
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

UCP_STLOW
&
UCP_L1L

UCP_L2L ≥1
UCP_tLow

t
UCP_L3L UCP_TRLOW
&
&
& ≥1
&
UCP_tHigh

t
& UCP_TRHIGH
UCP_L1H

UCP_L2H ≥1

UCP_L3H UCP_STHIGH
&
&
& ≥1
&

UCP_CR

UCP_BLOCK

≥1

UCP_TEST
&
UCP_TEST BLK

en01000361.vsd

Figure 276: Simplified logic diagram for the accurate undercurrent protection function.

10.4 Calculation
10.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the undercurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Pa-
rameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as set-
ting range, and path in local HMI.

For the UCP function there are in total five settings:

524
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

Operation: The operation of the entire UCP function has to be set to either On or Off.

ILLow<: This is the low-set limit of the current. If the current decreases below this limit the
function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current
of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also
the CT ratio has to be taken into account.

ILHigh<: This is the high-set limit of the current. If the current decreases below this limit the
function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the UCP function to the issue of the
trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current recovers to a value over the set-limit,
ILLow<, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the UCP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current recovers to a value over the set-limit,
ILHigh<, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued.

The pick-up level for ILLow< and ILHigh<, should be set, with some margin, to the lowest cur-
rent level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier re-
ceived signals, should normally be set to zero.

10.4.2 Setting example

Figure 277 shows a step-down transformer directly fed by a power line. The UCP function is
going to be implemented in the sending end line protection to increase the security of the supply.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
LDD IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd

Figure 277: Distribution transformer directly connected to the feeding line.

Relevant data for the UCP function setting are shown in table 29.

525
 Accurate undercurrent protection function Chapter 13
(UCP) System protection and control
functions

Table 29: Relevant data for the UCP function setting

CT1 ratio 200/1
VT1 ratio 55000/√ / 110/√3
CT2 ratio 150/1
CT3 ratio 600/5
Ubx-Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection paramter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx-Base current for input Ix. This is a basic protec- 1A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Minimum current to the load 15A (as measred by CT1)

For this simple example we use the low-setting only. The carrier receive signal, CR, comes from
the transformer differential protection, which in most applications not have any intentional time
delay. Therefore we also choose the time delay of the UCP function to be zero. The following
procedure shows how to calculate the UCP function pick-up value.

Minimum current to the load is 15 A, as measured by CT1. Let us use 80% of this value for the
pick-up value and we get the following setting:

1 100%
ILLow< = 0.80 × 15 ---------- A × --------------- = 6.0%
200 1A
(Equation 353)

526
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

11 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP)

11.1 Application
The overcurrent protection function (OCP) can be used wherever a “high current” signal is need-
ed.

There are a number of applications for the high current protection, wherever current has to be
limited or certain actions have to be taken when the current exceeds specific values.

One example is to arm system protection schemes based on high line current. Suppose that the
transmission corridor, in figure 278, can transfer 1500 A on each line. With all four lines in op-
eration, the generation shedding system, triggered by line trip, has to be armed at a transfer of
4500 A. If one line is tripped, or out of service, and the transmission exceeds 3000 A, the gen-
eration shedding has to be armed.

Arming
OCP function

Sum(I1-I4)
VT1
Generator rejection CT1 Line 1
scheme

CT2
Line 2

~ CT3
Line 3

Source Load &

CT4 Generation
Line 4

en03000128.vsd

Figure 278: Generation shedding system armed by high current.

11.2 Functionality
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the overcurrent protection func-
tion, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the overcurrent protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental (50
or 60 Hz) current component, I.

This section describes the method used when the value of the current, I, is calculated and how
the conditioning elements are checked.

527
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Current calculation
The current is calculated for each phase separately as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or
60 Hz) current component, based on the CT measurements. The overcurrent protection function
is non-directional.

Conditioning elements
There are no conditioning elements for the overcurrent protection function.

11.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic, and
• block logic.

When the current in any phase exceeds the low-set limit, ILLow>, the OCP-STLOW output sig-
nal is activated. When the current in any phase exceeds the high-set limit, ILHigh>, the
OCP-STHIGH output signal is activated.

The OCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the current in at least 2 phases exceeds the low-set limit,

• carrier received signal, OCP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tLow has elapsed

The OCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the current in at least 2 phases exceeds the high-set limit,

• carrier received signal, OCP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the OCP function,
is based on local criteria only.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input OCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The OCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore, de-
activating the input OCP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the OCP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the OCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 279. There are four output signals from the OCP function:

528
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

OCP-SRLOW: Low-set start

OCP-TRLOW: Low-set trip
OCP-STHIGH: High-set start
OCP-TRHIGH: High-set trip

The blocking signal OCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

OCP_STLOW
&
OCP_L1L

OCP_L2L ≥1
OCP_tLow

t
OCP_L3L OCP_TRLOW
&
&
& ≥1
&
OCP_tHigh

t
& OCP_TRHIGH
OCP_L1H

OCP_L2H ≥1

OCP_L3H OCP_STHIGH
&
&
& ≥1
&

OCP_CR

OCP_BLOCK

≥1

OCP_TEST
&
OCP_TEST BLK

en01000366.vsd
Figure 279: Simplified logic diagram for the phase overcurrent protection.

529
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

11.4 Calculation
11.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST (Param-
eter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as setting
range, and path in local HMI.

For the OCP function there are in total five settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire OCP function has to be set to either On or Off.

ILLow>: This is the low-set limit of the current. If the current exceeds this limit the function
picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base current of the cor-
responding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value, also the CT
ratio has to be taken into account.

ILHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the current. If the current exceeds this limit the function
picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OCP function to the issue of the
trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current returns to a value below the set-limit,
ILLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the OCP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the current returns to a value below the set-lim-
it, ILHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is issued.

The pick-up level for ILLow> and ILHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest cur-
rent level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

11.4.2 Setting example

Figure 280 shows a transmission corridor comprising four lines. The OCP function is going to
be implemented in the sending end to arm the generation shedding system. Each transmission
line can carry 1500 A. Two arming levels will be used: one for 4 lines in operation at 4500 A,
and another one for 3 lines in operation at 3000 A.

530
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Arming
OCP function

Sum(I1-I4)
VT1
Generator rejection CT1 Line 1
scheme

CT2
Line 2

~ CT3
Line 3

Source Load &

CT4 Generation
Line 4

en03000128.vsd

Figure 280: Transmission corridor with generation rejection scheme.

Relevant data for the OCP function setting are shown in table 30

Table 30: Relevant data for the OCP function setting

CT1-CT4 ratio 1000/1
Ubx-Base voltage for input Ux. This is a basic pro- 63.5 V
tection parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/U1-U5
Ibx-Base current for inut Ix. This is a basic protec- 5A
tion parameter, set in HMI-tree: Configura-
tion/AnalogInputs/I1-I5
Maximum current per line 1500 A

For this simple example we show the setting procedure for both the low-setting and the high-set-
ting. The carrier receive signal, OCP-CR, should be set to fixed true signal in the configuration.
Since the protection is installed to avoid thermal overload of the lines after another line trip - the
arming of the generation protection scheme can be instantaneous. Therefore we choose the time
delay of the OCP function to be zero. A complementary low current function can be used to dis-
arm the generation shedding system. The following procedure shows how to calculate the OCP
function pick-up value.

Maximum current for the low-set level is chosen to 3000 A, corresponding to the capacity of two
lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. We get the following setting:

1A 100%
ILLow> = 0.95 × 3000A × ----------------- × ------------------ = 57.0%
1000A 5A
(Equation 354)

531
 Phase overcurrent protection (OCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

Maximum current for the high-set level is chosen to 4500 A, corresponding to the capacity of
two lines. Let us use 95% of this value for the pick-up value. Since the setting is phase-wise, we
get the following setting:

1A 100%
ILHigh> = 0.95 × 4500A x ----------------- × --------------- = 85.5%
1000A 5A
(Equation 355)

532
 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

12 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP)

12.1 Application
The residual overcurrent protection function (ROCP) can be used wherever a high residual cur-
rent signal is needed.

There are a number of applications for the high residual current protection, most of them related
to earth faults in low impedance earthed systems.

One example is to use the residual overcurrent protection as a simple earth fault protection, as
back-up for the primary earth fault protection included in the line distance protection.

12.2 Functionality
12.2.1 General
The functionality section describes the overall functionality of the residual overcurrent protec-
tion function, as well as specific algorithms used.

The algorithm of the residual overcurrent protection facility is rather straightforward:

• Setting limits are compared to the calculated RMS value of the fundamental (50
or 60 Hz) residual current component.

This section describes the method used when the value of the residual current is calculated.

12.2.2 Current calculation

The residual current is calculated as the RMS-value of the fundamental (50 or 60 Hz) measured
current component. The residual overcurrent protection function is non-directional.

12.2.3 Conditioning elements

There are no conditioning elements for the residual overcurrent protection function.

12.3 Design
In this section the implementation of the following modules is described:

• start logic,
• trip logic, and
• block logic.

When the residual current exceeds the low-set limit, INLow>, the ROCP-STLOW output signal
is activated. When the residual current exceeds the high-set limit, INHigh>, the ROCP-STHIGH
output signal is activated.

The ROCP-TRLOW trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the residual current exceeds the low-set limit,

533
 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

• carrier received signal, ROCP-CR, is true, and

• time delay tLow has elapsed.

The ROCP-TRHIGH trip signal is set when all the conditions below are fulfilled:

• the residual current exceeds the high-set limit,

• carrier received signal, ROCP-CR, is true, and
• time delay tHigh has elapsed.

The carrier received signal can be set to fixed true, if the action, ordered by the ROCP function,
is based on local criteria only.

All binary outputs are deactivated when the input ROCP-BLOCK is activated.

Note!
The ROCP-BLOCK only blocks outputs. All measuring functions are still executed. Therefore,
deactivating the input ROCP-BLOCK can cause a trip from the ROCP function instantaneously.

The design and operation of the ROCP function is best shown in the logic diagram according to
figure 281. There are four output signals from the ROCP function:

ROCP-STLOW Low-set start

ROCP-TRLOW Low-set trip
ROCP-STHIGH High-set start
ROCP-TRHIGH High-set trip

The blocking signal ROCP-BLOCK must be zero to be able to activate any output.

534
 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

ROCP_STLOW
&

ROCP_tLow

ROCP_L1L t
ROCP_TRLOW
&

& ROCP_STHIGH

ROCP_tHigh

ROCP_L1H t
ROCP_TRHIGH
&

ROCP_CR

ROCP_BLOCK
≥1

ROCP_TEST
&
ROCP_TEST BLK

en03000114.vsd
Figure 281: Simplified logic diagram for the residual overcurrent protection function.

12.4 Calculation
12.4.1 Setting instructions
The parameters for the residual overcurrent protection function are set via the local HMI or PST
(Parameter Setting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for parameter details, such as
setting range, and path in local HMI.

For the ROCP function there are in total six settings:

Operation: The operation of the entire ROCP function has to be set to either On or Off.

535
 Residual overcurrent protection (ROCP) Chapter 13
System protection and control
functions

INLow>: This is the low-set limit of the residual current. If the residual current exceeds this lim-
it the function picks up. The setting is made in percent, where 100% corresponds to the base cur-
rent of the corresponding current input (e.g. 1A or 5A). To find the corresponding primary value,
also the CT ratio has to be taken into account.

INHigh>: This is the high-set limit of the residual current. If the residual current exceeds this
limit the function picks up. The setting is made according to the same procedure as for the
low-set limit.

tLow: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the ROCP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the residual current returns to a value below the
set-limit, INLow>, before the time tLow has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is
issued.

tHigh: This is the intentional time delay from the pick-up by the ROCP function to the issue of
the trip signal. The setting is made in seconds. If the residual current returns to a value below the
set-limit, INHigh>, before the time tHigh has elapsed, the function resets and no trip output is
issued.

I Measured: This parameter has to be set to I4 or I5, dependig on the used current input.

The pick-up level for INLow> and INHigh>, should be set, with some margin, to the highest
residual current level that can appear during normal operation conditions.

The time delay, when the function is used to increase security for transfer trip and carrier re-
ceived signals, should normally be set to zero.

536
About this chapter Chapter 14
Data communication

Chapter 14 Data
communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the data communication and the associated hardware.

537
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1 Remote end data communication

1.1 Application
1.1.1 General
The hardware communication modules (or modems) for the Remote end data communication
are available in basically three different versions:

• for optical communication

• for short range pilot wire communication
• for galvanic connection to communication equipment according to ITU (CCITT)
and EIA interface standards.

All systems are designed to be able to work at 64 kbit/s. Some of them can also work at North
American standard of 56 kbit/s. This is especially pointed out in the description under each mod-
ule.

If the protection terminal is located at a long distance (>100 m for V.36, X.21 and RS530 and
>10m for G.703) from the communication equipment or multiplexer or if the cables run through
a noisy area, optical communication should be used to interconnect the protection terminal and
the communication equipment. In this case the protection terminal contains module used for op-
tical fibre communication and a suitable optical to electrical converter is installed close to the
communication equipment due to the fact that there exists no standard for optical connections to
communication equipment. The optical-to-electrical converters that can be used are FOX
512/515 from ABB and 21-15xx or 21-16xx from FIBERDATA. The FOX 512/515 together
with optical fibre modem supports the G.703 co-directional interfacing and with restrictions for
X.21 and V.36. 21-15xx supports V.35 and V.36 while 21-16xx supports X.21, G.703 and
RS530 co-directional and contra-directional. For 21-15xx and 21-16xx short range optical fibre
modem is needed.

Note!
When using galvanic connection between protection terminal and communication equipment or
point to point galvanic connection between two protection terminals it is essential that the cable
installation is carefully done. See Installation and commissioning manual for further informa-
tion.

The terminal can be connected optically to FOX 512/515, provided the protection is equipped
with the optical fibre modem , not the short range fibre optical modem, and the FOX is equipped
with an Optical Terminal Module (OTERM).

1.2 Design
The Remote end data communication consists of two parts, one software part that handles the
message structure, packing different pieces together, activate sending of the messages, unpack-
ing received messages etc, and one hardware part forming the interface against external commu-
nication equipments. The hardware part, or built-in modems, can have either galvanic or optical
connection. To ensure compatibility with a wide range of communication equipment and media,

538
Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

the terminal is designed to work within the signalling bandwidth of a standard ITU (CCITT)
PCM channel at 64 kbits/s. To enable the use in North American EIA PCM systems working at
56 kbits/s, some of the interfacing modules can be adapted to this bit rate.

The message is based on the HDLC protocol. This is a protocol for the flow management of the
information on a data communication link that is widely used. The basic information unit on an
HDLC link is a frame. A frame consists of:

• start (or opening) flag

• address and control fields (if included)
• data to be transmitted
• CRC word
• end (or closing) flag.

The start and stop flags are 8 bit each and the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 16 bits. The data
field differs if between a message sent from a slave to a master and a message sent from a master
to a slave. The principle design is according to figure 282.

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 282: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal) defined in HDLC stan-
dard. The CRC is designed according to standard CRC16 definition.

The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used, instead a separate addressing is in-
cluded in the data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct
equipment. There is always a risk of multiplexers occasionally mixing up the messages. Each
terminal is given different terminal numbers. The terminal is then programmed to accept mes-
sages only from a specific terminal number.

If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation. No data restoration or retransmission are implemented.

The hardware, consisting of a Data communication module, is placed in an applicable slot in the
terminal. To add or remove the module, a reconfiguration of the terminal is done from the graph-
ical configuration tool, CAP.

539
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1.3 Fibre optical module DCM-FOM

1.3.1 Application
This module is designed for point to point optical communication, see figure 283, but can also
be used for direct optical communication to a multiplexer of type FOX 512/515, see figure 284,
from ABB, provided it is equipped with an Optical Terminal Module of type OTERM. The FOX
512/515 can also be used as an optical to electrical converter supporting the G.703 co-directional
interfacing according to ITU (CCITT), see figure 285. FOX 512/515 can also in some cases be
used for X.21 and V.36 interface but special attention must be paid to how to connect the signal.
Used as an optical to electrical converter the FOX 512/515 only supports 64 kbit/s data trans-
mission.

Typical distances calculated from optical budget:

• 40-60 km with single mode fibre

• 15-20 km with multi mode fibre

Max losses:

• 16 dB with single mode fibre

• 21 dB with multi mode fibre

optical fibres
DCM-FOM DCM-FOM
REx 5xx singlemode or singlemode or REx 5xx
multimode multimode

en03000159.vsd

Figure 283: Dedicated link, optical fibre connection

540
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

optical fibres

FOX
REx 5xx DCM-FOM 515/512
to the
MUX other end

other
users

en03000151.vsd

Figure 284: Multiplexed link, optical fibre connection

Galvanic G.703
twisted pair cable with
double shield
optical fibres < 10 m

REx 5xx DCM-FOM FOX 512/515 MUX

to the
other end

other
users

en03000152.vsd

Figure 285: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection with FOX 515

1.3.2 Design
The optical communication module is designed to work with both 9/125 μm single-mode fibres
and 50/125 or 62,5/125 μm multimode fibres at 1300 nm wavelength. The connectors are of type
FC-PC (SM) or FC (MM) respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are used.
The level of optical power is selected with a setting. Low power is used at short fibers in order
not to saturate the receiver and thereby jeopardizing the functionality, and high power is used
for long fibers to handle the high attenuation that follow. The optical budget of the modem, at
high output power, is 16dB for single mode fiber and 21dB for multi mode fiber. This means
that the total loss has to be less than the optical budget see table 31. The losses in the connection

541
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

in the protection terminal are not to be included in the optical budget since they are already ac-
counted for. The maximum reach will depend on the properties of the used optical fiber but be
around 15 km for multi mode fibers and 40-60 km for single mode during normal conditions.

The multiplexer system can cover distances up to 200-300 km.

For calculation of optical budget see, “Installation and commissioning manual, chapter Config-
uring the 56/64 kbit data communication modules”.

r
ive
dr
to
Op
Interface
to converter
Op ever
re
ci & control
logic

Fail indicator

Backplane connector

CAN
Memory

Micro-
controller

99000224.vsd

Figure 286: Block diagram for the optical communication module.

542
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1.3.3 Calculation

Optical budget
Table 31: Sample calculation for direct connection between terminals
Single mode Multi mode
Distance 40 km 60 km 15 km
Maximum attenuation for REx 5xx - 1300 nm -16 dB -16 dB -21 dB
0.34 dB/km single mode 10/125 μm 13.6 dB - -
0.22 dB/km single mode 10/125 μm - 13.2 -
1 dB/km multimode 62.5/125 μm - - 15 dB
Margins for installation, aging, etc. 1 dB 1.3 dB 2 dB
Losses in connection box, two contacts 1 dB 1 dB 2 dB
Margin for repair splices (0.5 dB/splice) 0.4 dB 0.7 dB 2 dB
Maximum total attenuation +16 dB +16 dB +21 dB

1.4 Galvanic interface

1.4.1 Application

Interface modules for V.36, X.21 and RS530

Modules are available for the following interface recommendations, specifying the interconnec-
tion of the digital equipment to a PCM multiplexer:

• V.35/36 co-directional galvanic interface DCM - V36 co

• V.35/36 contra-directional galvanic interface DCM - V36 contra
• X.21 galvanic interface DCM - X21
• RS530/422 co-directional galvanic interface DCM - RS 530 co
• RS530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface DCM - RS 530 contra

These interface modules are intended for connection to commercially available communication
equipments or multiplexers and can be used both with 56 and 64 kbit/s data transmission.

Since the protection communicates continuously, a permanent communication circuit is re-

quired. Consequently, the call control and handshaking features specified for some interfacing
recommendations are not provided.

Even if the standard claims that the reach for these interfaces are up to 1 km at 64 kbit/s it is not
recommended to use that distance for protection purposes where the communication has to be
reliable also under primary power system faults. This is due to the low level of the communica-
tion signals which gives low margin between signal and noise. If the protection terminal is in the

543
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

same building as the multiplexing equipment and the environment is relatively free from noise,
the protection terminal may be connected directly to the multiplexer via shielded and properly
earthed cables with twisted pairs for distances less than 100 m.

Note!
Due to problems of timing co-directional operation for V.35/36 and RS530 is only recommended
to be used for direct back-to-back operation, for example during laboratory testing!

Galvanic V35/V36
twisted pair cable
with double shield
< 100 m

DCM-V36
REx 5xx contra
MUX
to the
other end

other
users

en03000153.vsd

Figure 287: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, V35/V36 contra directional

Galvanic V35/V36
twisted pair cable
with double shield
< 100 m

REx 5xx DCM-V36 co MUX

to the
other end

other
users

en03000154.vsd

Figure 288: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, V35/V36 co-directional

544
Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

Galvanic X.21
twisted pair cable
with double shield
< 100 m

REx 5xx DCM-X.21 MUX

to the
other end

other
users

en03000155.vsd

Figure 289: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, X.21

Galvanic RS530/422
twisted pair cable
with double shield
< 100 m

DCM-RS530 MUX
REx 5xx
contra
to the
other end

other
users

en03000156.vsd

Figure 290: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, RS 530/422 contra directional

545
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

Galvanic RS530/422
twisted pair cable
with double shield
< 100 m

REx 5xx DCM-RS530 co MUX

to the
other end

other
users

en03000157.vsd

Figure 291: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, RS 530/422 co-directional

1.4.2 Design
Process connector X3

CAN
Backplane connector

Memory
Opto isolation

Trans-
ceivers
Process connector X2

Micro-
controller
DC/
DC

99000519.vsd

Figure 292: Block diagram for the galvanic communication module

546
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1.5 Short range galvanic module DCM-SGM

1.5.1 Application

Short range galvanic modem

The short range galvanic modem is used for point to point synchronous data transmission at 64
kbit/s at distances up to 3 km. Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full
duplex, over four wires in a communication (pilot wire) line according to figure 293. For shield-
ing and earthing, please see the Installation and commissioning manual.

Twisted pair
cable with
double shield

REx 5xx DCM-SGM DCM-SGM REx 5xx

en03000158.vsd

Figure 293: Dedicated link, short range galvanic modem

Compared to normal data transmission standards, for example V.36, X.21 etc., the short range
modem increase the operational security and admits longer distances of transmission. This is
achieved by a careful choice of transmission technology, modified M-3 balanced current loop
and galvanic isolation between the transmission line and the internal logic of the protection ter-
minal.

The reach will depend on the used cable. Higher capacitance between conductors and higher re-
sistance will reduce the reach. The use of screened cables will increase the capacitance and
thereby shorten the reach but this will often be compensated by the reduced noise giving a better
operational security. Maximum ranges as a function of cable parameters are given in the diagram
in figure 294.

547
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

Capacitance
limit

Figure 294: Maximum reach for short range galvanic modem

Note!
The reaches in the diagram, figure 294, are given for twisted-pair and double-screened cables,
one screen for each pair and one common outer screen. For non twisted-pair cables, the reach
has to be reduced by 20%. For non pair-screened cables, the reach also has to be reduced by
20%. For non twisted and single screened cables, one common outer screen, the reach will
therefor be reduced by 40%.

1.6 Short range fibre optical module DCM-SFOM

1.6.1 Application
The short range optical fibre modem is used for point to point synchronous 64 kbit/s data trans-
mission at distances of typically 3 to 5 km. The principle is according to figure 295. It can also
be used together with optic fibre transceiver type 21-15xx/16xx from FIBERDATA in order to
get an optical link between the protection terminal and a remotely located communication equip-
ment as in figure 296.

21-15xx supports interfaces according to ITU (CCITT) standards V.35 and V.36 co- and con-
tra-directional. 21-16xx supports interfaces standards X21 and G.703 according to ITU (CCITT)
and RS.530 according to EIA co- and contra-directional.

Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex, over two optical fi-
bres. The fibres shall be of multi mode type, 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm.

The optical budget of the modem is 15dB. This means that the total loss in the fiber optic com-
munication path including splices, connectors and also ageing and other margins of the fiber has
to be less than 15dB. The losses in the connection for the protection terminal are not to be in-

548
Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

cluded in the optical budget since they are already accounted for. The maximum reach will de-
pend on the properties of the used optical fiber but is typically between 3 and 5 km during normal
conditions.

The short range optical module has ST type connectors.

optical fibres

REx 5xx DCM-SFOM DCM-SFOM REx 5xx

multimode multimode

en03000150.vsd

Figure 295: Dedicated link, short range optical fibre connection

Galvanic V35/V36
twisted pair cable with
double shield
optical fibres < 100 m

21-15X V35/V36
REx 5xx DCM-SFOM FIBERDATA
MUX to the
other end

other
users

en03000147.vsd

Figure 296: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection V35/V36 with 21-15X

549
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

Galvanic X.21
twisted pair cable with
double shield
optical fibres < 100 m

21-16X X.21
REx 5xx DCM-SFOM FIBERDATA
to the
MUX other end

other
users

en03000148.vsd

Figure 297: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection X.21 with 21-16X

Galvanic G.703
twisted pair cable with
double shield
optical fibres < 10 m

21-16X G.703
REx 5xx DCM-SFOM FIBERDATA
MUX to the
other end

other
users

en03000149.vsd

Figure 298: Multiplexed link, optical fibre - galvanic connection G.703 with 21-16X

550
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1.7 Co-directional G.703 galvanic interface DCM-G.703

1.7.1 Application

Interface modules for G.703 co-directional

This interface module is intended for connection to commercially available communication
equipments or multiplexers with G.703 interface. It can only be used with transmission rate of
64 kbit/s. Furthermore it only supports co-directional operation. Contra-directional and centra-
lised clock are not supported.

Even if the standard claims that the reach can be rather long at 64 kbit/s, it is not recommended
to use this for protection purposes where the communication has to be reliable also under prima-
ry power system faults. This is due to the low level of the communication, signals only 1 V,
which gives low margin between signal and noise. If the protection and the communication
equipment are located in the same room and the environment is free of noise, the protection ter-
minal may be connected directly to the multiplexer via shielded and properly earthed cables with
twisted pairs, same as shown in figure for V.36 etc, for distances up to 10 m.

Galvanic G.703
twisted pair cable with
double shield
< 10 m

REx 5xx DCM-G.703

MUX to the
other end

other
users

en03000146.vsd

Figure 299: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection, G.703

1.8 Carrier module

1.8.1 Application
Use the carrier module with the appropriate galvanic or optical communication submodule for
short range communication of binary signals. Use the optical communication module
(DCM-SFOM) when connecting a FIBERDATA 21-15X or FIBERDATA 21-16X opti-
cal-to-electric modem. The 21-15X model supports V.35 and V.36 standards, and the 21-16X
model X.21, RS530 or G.703 standards.

551
 Remote end data communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1.8.2 Design
The carrier module is used to connect a communication sub-module to the platform. It adds the
CAN-communication and the interface to the rest of the platform. By this the capability to trans-
fer binary signals between for example two distance protection units is added.

The following three types of sub-modules can be added to the carrier module:

• Short range galvanic communication module (DCM-SGM)

• Short range optical communication module (DCM-SFOM)
• G.703 communication module (DCM-G.703)

The carrier module senses the type of sub-module via one of the two connectors.

Micro-
Memory
controller

CAN
Backplane connector

Sub-module

99000520.vsd

Figure 300: Block diagram for the carrier module.

552
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

2 Serial communication

2.1 Serial communication, SPA

2.1.1 Application

Fibre optic loop

The SPA communication is mainly used for SMS. It can include different numerical relays/ter-
minals with remote communication possibilities. The fibre optic loop can contain < 20-30 ter-
minals depending on requirements on response time. Connection to a personal computer (PC)
can be made directly (if the PC is located in the substation) or by telephone modem through a
telephone network with ITU (CCITT) characteristics.

Table 32: Max distances between terminals/nodes

glass < 1000 m according to optical budget
plastic < 25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

REx 5xx
SPA bus CAP tool
Optical fibre
loop
REx 5xx

Telephone Telephone
REx 5xx
modem modem
Opto/electrical
1
converter
en03000113.vsd

Where:
1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain ± 1 ms accuracy for time tagging
within the substation

Figure 301: Example of SPA communication structure for a station monitoring system

RS485 multidrop
The SPA communication is mainly used for SMS. It can include different numerical relays/ter-
minals with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a personal computer (PC) can
be made directly (via a suitable RS485 interface) if the PC is located in the substation or by tele-
phone modem through a telephone network with ITU (CCITT) characteristics.

Max distance for the whole network is 100 meter.

553
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1 Substation
REx 5xx Monitoring
System
1

REx 5xx

REx 5xx

3
en03000106.vsd

Where:
1 Terminated RS485 interface
2 Unterminated RS485 interface
3 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain ± 1 ms accuracy for time tag-
ging within the substation

Figure 302: Example of SPA communication structure for a station monitoring system with
RS485 multidrop

2.1.2 Functionality
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The communica-
tion is based on a master-slave principle, where the terminal is a slave and the PC is the master.
Only one master can be applied on each optic fibre loop or RS485 network. A program is needed
in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for translation of the settings
sent to the terminal.

2.1.3 Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA
port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC

or

• A correct RS485 network installation according to EIA Standard RS-485, please

refer to the Installation and commissioning manual
• PC

554
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed
plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is CAP 540.

When communicating to a front-connected PC, the only hardware required is the special
front-connection cable.

2.1.4 Calculations
The parameters for the SPA communication are set via the local HMI. Refer to the Technical
reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

To define the protocols to be used on the two rear communication ports, a setting is done on the
local HMI. Refer to Installation and commissioning manual for setting procedure.

When the communication protocols have been selected, the terminal is automatically restarted.

The most important settings in the terminal for SPA communication are the slave number and
baud rate (communication speed). These settings are absolutely essential for all communication
contact to the terminal.

These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel communication and for front
channel communication.

The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as the slave number is unique
within the used SPA loop.

The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between 300 and 38400 baud.
See technical data to determine the rated communication speed for the selected communication
interfaces.The baud rate should be the same for the whole station, although different baud rates
in a loop are possible. If different baud rates in the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network are
used, consider this when making the communication setup in the communication master, the PC.
The maximum baud rate of the front connection is limited to 9600 baud.

For local fibre optic communication, 19200 or 38400 baud is the normal setting. If telephone
communication is used, the communication speed depends on the quality of the connection and
on the type of modem used. But remember that the terminal does not adapt its speed to the actual
communication conditions, because the speed is set on the HMI of the terminal.

2.2 Serial communication, IEC (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)

2.2.1 Application

Fibre optic loop

The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal com-
municates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have a software
that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Table 33: Max distances between terminals/nodes

glass < 1000 m according to optical budget
plastic < 25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

555
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

Station HMI
such as
Micro SCADA
with LIB 520

IEC 60870-5-103
REx 5xx

REx 5xx

REx 5xx
1
en03000140.vsd

Where:
1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain ± 1 ms accuracy within the
substation

Figure 303: Example of IEC communication structure for a station monitoring system

RS485 multidrop
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal com-
municates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have a software
that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

556
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1 Substation
REx 5xx Monitoring
System
1

REx 5xx

REx 5xx

3
en03000106.vsd

Where:
1 Terminated RS485 interface
2 Unterminated RS485 interface
3 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain ±1 ms accuracy within the
substation

Figure 304: Example of IEC communication structure for a station monitoring system with
RS485 multidrop

2.2.2 Functionality
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communica-
tion exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a
master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point to point prin-
ciple. The master must have a software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative in-
terface of protection equipment.

2.2.3 Design

General
The protocol implementation in REx 5xx consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurands)
• Fault location
• Command handling
- Autorecloser ON/OFF
- Teleprotection ON/OFF
- Protection ON/OFF

557
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

- LED reset
- Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

Hardware
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:

• Optical fibres, glass/plastic

• Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU
• PC/RTU

or

• A correct RS485 network installation according to EIA Standard RS-485, please

refer to the Installation and commissioning manual
• PC/RTU

Events
The events created in the terminal available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on the
event function blocks EV01 - EV06. These function blocks include the function type and the in-
formation number for each event input, which can be found in the IEC-document. See also the
description of the Event function.

Measurands
The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the standard.
Measurands sent on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol should be multiplied with 1706.25 in the
master system to be correctly presented.

Fault location
The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in reactive ohms,
it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and reported when the fault lo-
cator function is included in the terminal.

Commands
The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in a dedicated function
block. This block has output signals according to the protocol for all available commands.

File transfer
The file transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The analog and bi-
nary signals recorded will be reported to the master. The eight last disturbances, that are record-
ed, are available for transfer to the master. A file that has been transferred and acknowledged by
the master can not be transferred again.

The binary signals, that are reported, are those that are connected to the disturbance function
blocks DRP1 - DRP3. These function blocks include the function type and the information num-
ber for each signal. See also the description of the Disturbance report.

558
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

The analog channels, that are reported, are the first four current inputs and the first four voltage
inputs.

2.2.4 Calculation

Settings from the local HMI

The parameters for IEC communication are set via the local HMI. Refer to the Technical refer-
ence manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

To define the protocols to be used on the two rear communication ports, a setting is done on the
local HMI. Refer to Installation and commissioning manual for setting procedure.

When the communication protocol have been selected, the terminal is automatically restarded.

The settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:

• Individually blocking of commands

• Setting of measurand type
• Setting of main function type and activation of main function type
• Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed)
• Command for giving Block of information command

Each command has its own blocking setting and the state can be set to OFF or ON. The OFF
state corresponds to non-blocked state and ON corresponds to blocked state.

The type of measurands can be set to report standardised types, Type 3.1, Type 3.2, Type 3.3,
Type 3.4 or Type 9.

The use of main function type is to facilitate the engineering work of the terminal.The main
function type can be set to values according to the standard, this is, between 1 and 255. The value
zero is used as default and corresponds to not used.

The setting for activation of main function type can be set to OFF or ON. The OFF state corre-
sponds to non-activated state and ON corresponds to activated state. When activated the main
function type overrides all other settings for function type within the terminal, that is, function
type settings for event function and disturbance recorder function. When set to OFF, function
type settings for event function and disturbance recorder function use their own function type
settings made on the function blocks for the event function and disturbance recorder respective-
ly. Though for all other functions they use the main function type even when set to OFF.

The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255.

The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 Baud or 19200 Baud. See
technical data to determine the rated communication speed for the selected communication in-
terfaces.

Information command with the value one (1) blocks all information sent to the master and abort
any GI procedure or any file transfer in process. Thus issuing the command with the value set to
zero (0) will allow information to be polled by the master.

The dialogue to operate the output from the BlockOfInformation command function is per-
formed from different state as follows:

559
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.
• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow changes to the
down arrow.
• E button, and then the Yes box activates.
2. Yes box active; select the:
• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.
• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.
• Right arrow to activate the No box.
3. No box active; select the:
• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.
• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.
• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

Settings from the CAP tool

Event
For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the information number of the connect-
ed signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. In order to get
proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the event function shall be set to
ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask shall be set to ON_SET.

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description of the
Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Commands
As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with eight output
signals. The configuration of these signals are made by using the CAP tool.

To realise the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output
BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input on an
event function block. This input shall have the information number 20 (monitor direction
blocked) according to the standard.

File transfer
For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the information number
of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To
be able to correctly indicate SOF and FAN (see IEC 60870-5-103 7.2.6.24 and 7.2.6.6) all pro-
tection START signals must be combined into one signal, which is connected to an input of the
DRP function block. This input should have information number 84,General Start. Furthermore,
the combined signal should also be connected to an EV function block and have information
number 84 configured. The TRxx-TRIP signal should in the same way be connecter to DRP and
EV function blocks with information number 68, General Trip configured.

Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorder function for the function
type. Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

560
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

2.3 Serial communication, LON

2.3.1 Application
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables commu-
nication with the terminal through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the control
center and also from other terminals.

Station HMI
such as Control Center
Micro SCADA
LON-bus with LIB 520
REx 5xx

Gateway
REx 5xx

REx 5xx
1 en01000081.vsd

Where:
1 Minute pulse synchronization from station clock to obtain 1 ms accuracy within
the substation

Figure 305: Example of LON communication structure for substation automation

2.3.2 Functionality
The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon
Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a
peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with
each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer to the sections
Event function and Multiple command function.

2.3.3 Design
The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one
very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting the star coupler
to the terminals. To communicate with the terminals from MicroSCADA, the application library
LIB 520 is needed.

The HV/Control and the HV/REx 500 software modules are included in the LIB 520 high-volt-
age process package, which is a part of the Application Software Library within MicroSCADA
applications.

561
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

The HV/Control software module is intended to be used for control functions in REx 5xx termi-
nals. This module contains the process picture, dialogues and process database for the control
application in the MicroSCADA.

The HV/REx 500 software module is used for setting and monitoring of the terminal via the Mi-
croSCADA screen. At use of this function the PST Parameter Setting Tool (of v1.1 or higher) is
required.

2.3.4 Calculations
Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This is a software tool applied
as one node on the LON bus. In order to communicate via LON, the terminals need to know
which node addresses the other connected terminals have, and which network variable selectors
should be used. This is organised by the LNT.

The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter Service-
PinMsg=YES. The node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus, or the LNT can scan the
network for new nodes.

The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can be
changed by the LNT.

If the LON communication from the terminal stops, caused by setting of illegal communication
parameters (outside the setting range) or by another disturbance, it is possible to reset the LON
port of the terminal.

By setting the parameter LONDefault=YES, the LON communication is reset in the terminal,
and the addressing procedure can start from the beginning again.

There are a number of session timers which can be set via the local HMI. These settings are only
for advanced use and should only be changed after recommendation from ABB.

2.4 Serial communication modules

2.4.1 SPA/IEC
The serial communication module for SPA/IEC is placed in a slot at the rear of the main pro-
cessing module. One of the following conection options is available for serial communication:

• two plastic fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or

• two glass fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or
• galvanic RS485

The type of connection is chosen when ordering the terminal.

The fibre optic SPA/IEC port can be connected point-to-point, in a loop, or with a star coupler.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the Rx receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre
to the Tx transmitter output. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

562
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

The electrical RS485 can be connected in multidrop with maximum 4 terminals.

Note!
Pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical
fibre cables.

2.4.2 LON
The serial communication module for LON is placed in a slot at the rear of the Main processing
module. One of the following options is available for serial communication:

• two plastic fibre cables; (Rx, Tx) or

• two glass fibre cables; (Rx, Tx)

The type of connection is chosen when ordering the terminal.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the Rx receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre
to the Tx transmitter output. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

Note!
Pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical
fibre cables.

563
 Serial communication Chapter 14
Data communication

564
About this chapter Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Chapter 15 Hardware modules

About this chapter

This chapter describes the different hardware modules.

565
 Platform Chapter 15
Hardware modules

1 Platform

1.1 General
The REx 5xx platform consists of a case, hardware modules and a set of common functions.

The closed and partly welded steel case makes it possible to fulfill stringent EMC requirements.
Three different sizes of the case are available to fulfill the space requirements of different termi-
nals. The degree of protection is IP 40 according to IEC 60529 for cases with the widths 1/2x19”
and 3/4x19”. IP 54 can be obtained for the front area in flush and semiflush applications. Mount-
ing kits are available for rack, flush, semiflush or wall mounting.

All connections are made on the rear of the case. Screw compression type terminal blocks are
used for electrical connections. Serial communication connections are made by optical fibre
connectors type Hewlett Packard (HFBR) for plastic fibres or bayonet type ST for glass fibres.

A set of hardware modules are always included in a terminal. Application specific modules are
added to create a specific terminal type or family.

The common functions provide a terminal with basic functionality such as self supervision,
I/O-system configurator, real time clock and other functions to support the protection and con-
trol system of a terminal.

1.2 Platform configuration

Table 34: Basic, always included, modules
Module Description
Backplane module (BPM) Carries all internal signals between modules in a termi-
nal. The size of the module depends on the size of the
case.
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies
auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
• For case size 1/2x19” and 3/4x19” a version with
four binary inputs and four binary outputs used.
An internal fail alarm output is also available.
Main processing module (MPM) Module for overall application control. All information is
processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication. Carries up
to 12 digital signal processors, performing all measur-
ing functions.
Human machine interface (LCD-HMI) The module consist of LED:s, a LCD, push buttons
and an optical connector for a front connected PC
Signal processing module (SPM) Module for protection algorithm processing. Carries up
to 12 digital signal processors, performing all measur-
ing functions.

566
 Platform Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Table 35: Application specific modules

Module Description
Milliampere input module (MIM) Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically
separated channels.
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole com-
mand outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 out-
puts and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Data communication modules (DCMs) Modules used for digital communication to remote ter-
minal.
Transformer input module (TRM) Used for galvanic separation of voltage and/or current
process signals and the internal circuitry.
A/D conversion module (ADM) Used for analog to digital conversion of analog pro-
cess signals galvanically separated by the TRM.
Serial communication module (SCM) Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication
LED module (LED-HMI) Module with 18 user configurable LEDs for indication
purposes

1.3 3/4x19" platform

REx 5xx
S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21 S23 S25 S27 S29

C
E

99000524.vsd

Figure 306: Hardware structure of the 3/4x19” case

567
 Platform Chapter 15
Hardware modules

1.4 1/2x19" platform

REx 5xx
S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19

C
E

99000525.vsd

Figure 307: Hardware structure of the 1/2x19” case

568
 Transformer module (TRM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

2 Transformer module (TRM)

Current and voltage input transformers form an insulating barrier between the external wiring
and internal circuits of the terminal. They adapt the values of the measuring quantities to the stat-
ic circuitry and prevent the disturbances to enter the terminal. Maximum 10 analog input quan-
tities can be connected to the transformer module (TRM). A TRM with maximum number of
transformers has:

• Five voltage transformers. The rated voltage is selected at order.

• Five current transformers. The rated currents are selected at order.

The input quantities are the following:

• Three phase currents

• Residual current of the protected line
• Residual current of the parallel circuit (if any) for compensation of the effect of
the zero sequence mutual impedance on the fault locator measurement or residual
current of the protected line but from a parallell core used for CT circuit supervi-
sion function or independent earthfault function.
• Three phase voltages
• Open delta voltage for the protected line (for an optional directional earth-fault
protection)
• Phase voltage for an optional synchronism and energizing check.

The actual configuration of the TRM depends on the type of terminal and included functions.
See figure 308 and figure 309.

569
 Transformer module (TRM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

CT CT
Current Input connector

CT CT

CT

Backplane connector

99000560.vsd

Figure 308: Block diagram of the TRM for REL 551, Line differential protection

570
Transformer module (TRM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

CT CT
Current Input connector

CT CT

VT CT
Voltage Input connector

Backplane connector
VT VT

VT VT

990000511.vsd

Figure 309: Block diagram of the TRM with maximum number of transformers used in most
REx 5xx.

571
 A/D module (ADM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

3 A/D module (ADM)

The incoming signals from the intermediate current transformers are adapted to the electronic
voltage level with shunts. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A/D channels are used for each input current. By that a 16-bit dynamic range is obtained with a
12 bits A/D converter.

The next step in the signal flow is the analog filter of the first order, with a cut-off frequency of
500 Hz. This filter is used to avoid aliasing problems.

The A/D converter has a 12-bit resolution. It samples each input signal (5 voltages and 2x5 cur-
rents) with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Before the A/D-converted signals are transmitted to the signal processing module, the signals
are band-pass filtered and down-sampled to 1 kHz in a digital signal processor (DSP).

The filter in the DSP is a numerical filter with a cut-off frequency of 250 Hz.

The transmission of data between the A/D-conversion module and the signal processing module
is done on a supervised serial link of RS485 type. This transmission is performed once every
millisecond and contains information about all incoming analog signals.

572
A/D module (ADM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

PLD

DSP

converter
Control

A/D-
logic &
buffers Analog
MUX

Backplane connector
1-5 Voltage
inputs
Analog filters &
current shunts 1-5 Current
inputs

99000512.vsd

Figure 310: Block diagram for the ADM

573
 Main processing module (MPM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

4 Main processing module (MPM)

The terminal is based on a pipelined multi-processor design. The 32-bit main controller receives
the result from the Signal processing module every millisecond.

All memory management are also handled by the main controller. The module has 8MB of disc
memory and 1MB of code memory. It also has 8MB of dynamic memory.

The controller also serves four serial links: one high-speed CAN bus for Input/Output modules
and three serial links for different types of HMI communication.

The main controller makes all decisions, based on the information from the Signal processing
module and from the binary inputs. The decisions are sent to the different output modules and
to these communication ports:

• Local HMI module including a front-connected PC, if any, for local human-ma-
chine communication.
• LON communication port at the rear (option).
• SPA/IEC communication port at the rear (option)

574
Main processing module (MPM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

SCM
CAN

SPA/IEC

SPM connector
LON
8-bit Data bus

Disc Flash (8MB)

SCM

LON Code Flash (1MB)

Backplane connector
Main
controller

32-bit Data bus

Download
connector

CAN bus

DRAM (SIMM)

99000513.vsd

Figure 311: Block diagram for the MPM

575
 Main processing module (MPM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Galvanic
RS485 Optical
SCM SCM
DSP DSP DSP DSP
1 4 7 10

COM1
X50
X1
X2

DSP DSP DSP DSP

2 5 8 11

OR
DSP DSP DSP DSP
3 6 9 12
Optical
SCM

RTC
COM2

PLD
X70

CAN Code Flash (1MB)

LON
EPR
OM

Backplane connector
Main Disc Flash (8MB)
LON controller
QUICC
connector X30
Download

LON
SRAM
SRAM (8MB)

en03000100.vsd

Figure 312: Block diagram for the MPM

To allow easy upgrading of software in the field a special connector is used, the Download con-
nector.

576
 Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

5 Input/Output modules

5.1 General
The number of inputs and outputs in a REx 5xx terminal can be selected in a variety of combi-
nations depending on the size of the rack. There is no basic I/O configuration of the terminal.
The table below shows the number of available inputs or output modules for the different plat-
form sizes.

Platform size 1/1x19” 3/4x19” 1/2x19”

I/O slots available 13 8 3

A number of signals are available for signalling purposes in the terminal and all are freely pro-
grammable. The voltage level of the input/output modules is selectable at order.

Figure 313 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
18

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

RL24 RL48 RL110 RL220
xx99000517.vsd

Figure 313: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

577
 Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Table 36: Input voltage ranges explained

Guaranteed operation

Operation uncertain

No operation

The I/O modules communicate with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus on the back-
plane.

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected
to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 314.

[mA]
30

1
35 70 [ms]

en03000108.vsd

Figure 314: Approximate binary input inrush current

578
 Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

[mA]
30

1
3.5 7.0 [ms]

en05000455.vsd

Figure 315: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse
counting capabilities

5.2 Binary input module (BIM)

The binary input module contains 16 optically isolated binary inputs. The binary inputs are free-
ly programmable and can be used for the input logical signals to any of the functions. They can
also be included in the disturbance recording and event recording functions. This enables the ex-
tensive monitoring, and evaluation of operation for the terminal and for all associated electrical
circuits. The voltage level of the binary input modules is selected when the product is ordered.

579
 Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Process connector
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Micro-
Opto isolated input controller

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Memory

Backplane connector
Opto isolated input
Process connector

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

CAN

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 316: Block diagram of the binary input module

5.3 Binary output module (BOM)

The Binary output module has 24 single-output relays or 12 command-output relays. They are
grouped together as can be seen in figure 317 and 318. All the output relays have contacts with
a high switching capacity (trip and signal relays).

580
Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Backplane connector
Process connector

Relay Micro-
controller
Relay
Relay CAN
Relay
Relay Memory

Relay
Relay

99000505.vsd

Figure 317: Block diagram of the binary output module

Two single output relay contacts can be connected in series (which gives a command output) in
order to get a high security at operation of high voltage apparatuses.

581
 Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

Figure 318: One of twelve binary output groups

The output relays are provided with a supervision function to ensure a high degree of security
against unwanted operation. The status of the output circuits is continuously read back and com-
pared with the expected status. If any discrepancy occurs, an error is reported. This function cov-
ers:

• interrupt or short circuit in an output relay coil

• failure of an output relay driver.

5.4 Binary I/O module (IOM)

The binary in/out module contains eight optically isolated binary inputs and twelve binary out-
put contacts. Ten of the output relays have contacts with a high-switching capacity (trip and sig-
nal relays). The remaining two relays are of reed type and for signalling purpose only. The relays
are grouped together as can be seen in the terminal diagram.

582
Input/Output modules Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Process connector
Opto isolated input

Debug
Opto isolated input

& isp
Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Relay
Relay
PWM
Relay
Relay

Backplane connector
Process connector

Relay
Micro-
Relay controller
Relay
Relay CAN

Relay Memory

Relay
Relay

Relay

Relay Relay

99000502vsd

Figure 319: Block diagram for the binary input/output module

583
 Power supply module (PSM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

6 Power supply module (PSM)

The power supply module (PSM) contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that pro-
vides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The wide input voltage
range of the DC/DC converter converts an input voltage range from 48 to 250V, including a
+/-20% tolerance on the EL voltage. The output voltages are +5, +12 and -12 Volt.

The PSM, used in the 1/2x19” and 3/4x19” platforms, has built-in binary I/O with four optically
isolated inputs and five outputs. One of the binary outputs is dedicated for internal fail.

Opto isolated Memory

input
Opto isolated
Process connector

input
Opto isolated Micro-
input
Opto isolated controller
input
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay PWM
Relay CAN
Backplane connector

Super
vision

Power supply

en03000162.vsd

Figure 320: Block diagram for the PSM used in 1/2x19” and 3/4x19” cases.

584
 mA input module (MIM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

7 mA input module (MIM)

The mA input module (MIM) has six independent analog channels with separated protection,
filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvani-
cally isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

The analog inputs measure DC and low frequency currents in range of up to ± 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory and the module will self-calibrate
if the temperature should start to drift. This module communicates, like the other I/O- modules,
with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus.

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
Process connector

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
Backplane connector

A/D Converter Opto-

Protection isolation
& filter
Volt-ref DC/DC
CAN

Memory Micro-
controller

99000504.vsd

Figure 321: Block diagram of the mA input module

585
 Local LCD human machine interface Chapter 15
(LCD-HMI) Hardware modules

8 Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI)

8.1 Application
The local LCD HMI module consists of three LEDs (red, yellow, and green), an LCD with four
lines, each containing 16 characters, six buttons and an optical connector for PC communication.

LEDs

green yellow red

Liquid Crystal Display

Ready Start Trip four rows
REx 5xx Ver X.X 16 characters/row
C=Quit
E=Enter menu

Optical connector C
Push buttons
for local PC
E

en00000422.vsd

Figure 322: Local LCD human machine interface (LCD-HMI)

The PC is connected via a special cable, that has a built-in optical to electrical interface. Thus,
disturbance-free local serial communication with the personal computer is achieved. Software
tools are available from ABB for this communication. A PC greatly simplifies the communica-
tion with the terminal. It also gives the user additional functionality which is unavailable on the
LCD HMI because of insufficient space. The LEDs on the HMI display this information:

586
Local LCD human machine interface Chapter 15
(LCD-HMI) Hardware modules

Table 37: The local LCD-HMI LEDs

LED indication Information
Green:
Steady In service
Flashing Internal failure
Dark No power supply

Yellow:
Steady Disturbance Report triggered
Flashing Terminal in test mode

Red:
Steady Trip command issued from a protection function or disturbance recorder started
Flashing Blocked

587
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

9 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

9.1 Application
The LED indication module is an option for the feature for the REx 5xx terminals for protection
and control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The main purpose is to
present on site an immediate visual information such as protection indications or alarm signals.
It is located on the front of the protection and control terminals.

9.2 Design
The 18 LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light or flash in either red,
yellow or green color. A description text can be added for each of the LEDs.

See LED indication function (HL, HLED) for details on application and functionality.

xx00000406.vsd

1 Three-color LEDs
2 Descriptive label, user exchangeable

Figure 323: The 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI)

588
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

9.3 LED indication function (HL, HLED)

9.3.1 Application
The LED indication module is an additional feature for the REx 500 terminals for protection and
control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). It is located on the front of the
protection and control terminal. The main purpose is, to present on site an immediate visual in-
formation on:

• actual signals active (or not active) within the protected bay (terminal).
• alarm signals handled as a simplified alarm system.
• last operation of the terminal. Here we understand the presentation of the signals
appeared during the latest start(s) or trip(s) since the previous information has
been reset.

The user of this information is the technician in substation or the protection engineer during the
testing activities. The protection engineer can also be able to read the status of all LEDs over the
SMS in his office as well as to acknowledge/reset them locally or remotely.

9.3.2 Functionality
Each LED indication can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow
type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types are intended to be used as a protection in-
dication system, either in collecting or re-starting mode, with reset functionality. The other two
are intended to be used as a signaling system in collecting mode with an acknowledgment func-
tionality.

Priority
Each LED can show green, yellow or red light, each with its own activation input. If more than
one input is activated at the time a priority is used with green as lowest priority and red as the
highest.

Operating modes

Collecting mode
LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the
unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified
alarm system.

Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates
only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with
the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new distur-
bance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals
or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.

589
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Acknowledgment/reset

From local HMI

The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and man-
ual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and
LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the C-button on the Local HMI according to the sequence in figure 324.

Screen scrolling
Dark
disturbance
screen
indications

Press button: C E C

Text on HMI:
C=Clear LEDs
E=Enter menu

C E

Clear HMI-LCD LEDs Go to menu

If any HMI-LEDs active,

text on HMI:
C=HLED_ ACK_RST
E=Enter menu

C E

Acknowledge/Reset Go to menu
HMI-LEDs
en01000226.vsd

Figure 324: Acknowledgment/reset from local HMI

From function input

The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input (ACK_RST) to the func-
tion. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push
button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the
moment when the button is first pressed.

590
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

From SMS/SCS
It is also possible to perform the acknowledgment/reset remotely from SMS/SCS. To do that,
the function input (ACK_RST) has to be configured to an output of a command function block
(CD or CM). The output from these command function blocks can then be activated from the
SMS/SCS.

Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting mode with the
latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been per-
formed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input
signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until
it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.
For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Se-
quence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Se-
quence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working
according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have
the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color corresponding
to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

en01000227.vsd

Figure 325: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does
not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its oper-
ation.

591
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Activating
signal

LED

en01000228.vsd

Figure 326: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as described
above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is shown in figure
327.

Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

en01000230.vsd

Figure 327: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing
steady light.

Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent
of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flash-
ing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the
signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

592
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 328: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indica-
tion appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 329 is shown the sequence when a sig-
nal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher
priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority
signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow.
en01000232.vsd

Figure 329: Operating sequence 3, two colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of in-
dications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications which are not vis-
ible according to figure 330.

593
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
en01000233.vsd

Figure 330: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication
the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure 331.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
en01000234.vsd

Figure 331: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been
alternated.

594
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input
signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that
indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the pos-
itive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed.
Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 332: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority
still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure 333.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
en01000236.vsd

Figure 333: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically
reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6
(LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by

595
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed
a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely
independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a set-
table time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as Latche-
dReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes
active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new
disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A di-
agram of this functionality is shown in figure 334.

From
disturbance
length control ≥1 New
per LED ≥1 disturbance
set to
sequence 6
tRestart
& t

&
≥1

≥1
&

en01000237.vsd

Figure 334: Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is
provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of
that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 335.

596
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Activating signal
GREEN
Activating signal
YELLOW
To LED
Activating signal
RED

≥1 To disturbance
& length control
tMax
t
en01000238.vsd

Figure 335: Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 336 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000239.vsd

Figure 336: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

Figure 337 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

597
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Disturbance Disturbance
t Restart t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000240.vsd

Figure 337: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 338 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset
but before tRestart has elapsed.

598
18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000241.vsd

Figure 338: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 339 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

599
 18 LED indication module (LED-HMI) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

Disturbance

t Restart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
en01000242.vsd

Figure 339: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

9.3.3 Calculation
The parameters for the LED indication function are set via the local HMI or PST (Parameter Set-
ting Tool). Refer to the Technical reference manual for setting parameters and path in local HMI.

600
 Serial communication modules (SCM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

10 Serial communication modules (SCM)

10.1 Design, SPA/IEC

Refer to chapter Data communication.

10.2 Design, LON

Refer to chapter Data communication.

601
 Data communication modules (DCM) Chapter 15
Hardware modules

11 Data communication modules (DCM)

For more information about the data communication modules, refer to the previous chapter 14
"Data communication".

602
 1MRK 506 168-UEN

ABB Power Technologies AB

Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Printed on recycled and ecolabelled paper at Elanders Novum